Foreword - Subaru Technical Information System

(1,1)

北米Model "A8310BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 2/ 25

ForewordForewordSFWAA

Congratulations on choosing a SUBARU vehicle. This Owner’sManual has all the information necessary to keep your SUBARU inexcellent condition and to properly maintain the emission controlsystem forminimizing emission pollutants.We urge you to read thismanual carefully so that you may understand your vehicle and itsoperation. For information not found in this Owner’s Manual, suchas details concerning repairs or adjustments, please contact theSUBARU dealer from whom you purchased your SUBARU or thenearest SUBARU dealer.The information, specifications and illustrations found in thismanual are those in effect at the time of printing. SUBARUCORPORATION reserves the right to change specifications anddesigns at any time without prior notice and without incurring anyobligation to make the same or similar changes on vehiclespreviously sold. This Owner’s Manual applies to all models andcovers all equipment, including factory installed options. Someexplanations, therefore may be for equipment not installed in yourvehicle.

Please leave thismanual in the vehicle at the time of resale. The nextowner will need the information found herein.

SUBARU CORPORATION, TOKYO, JAPAN

“SUBARU” and the six–star cluster design are registered trademarks of SUBARU CORPORATION.*C Copyright 2021 SUBARU CORPORATION

(2,1)


(3,1)


Vehicle typeSFWAB

This manual describes the following vehicle type.

(2,1)


(3,1)


S00WarrantiesS00AA

& Warranties for U.S.A.S00AA01

SUBARU vehicles distributed by Subaru ofAmerica, Inc. and sold at retail by anauthorized SUBARU dealer in the UnitedStates come with the following warranties:. SUBARU Limited Warranties. Federal Emission Control SystemsWarranties. California Emissions Control Sys-tems Warranties

All warranty information, including applic-ability, details of coverage and exclusions,is in the “Warranty and MaintenanceBooklet”. Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties for CanadaS00AA05

SUBARU vehicles distributed by SubaruCanada, Inc. and sold at retail by anauthorized SUBARU dealer in Canadacome with the following warranties:. SUBARU Limited Warranty. Emission Control System Warranty

All warranty information, including applic-ability, details of coverage and exclusions,is in the “Warranty and Service Booklet”.Read these warranties carefully.

& Warranties except for U.S.A.and Canada

S00AA06All warranty information, including detailsof coverage and exclusions, is in the“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.Read these warranties carefully.

How to use this Owner’sManual

S00AB

& Using your Owner’s ManualS00AB01

Before you operate your vehicle, carefullyread this manual. To protect yourself andextend the service life of your vehicle,follow the instructions in this manual.Failure to observe these instructions mayresult in serious injury and damage to yourvehicle.

This manual is composed of fourteenchapters. Each chapter begins with a brieftable of contents, so you can usually tell ata glance if that chapter contains theinformation you want.

Chapter 1: Seat, seatbelt and SRS air-bagsThis chapter informs you how to use theseat and seatbelt and contains precau-tions for the SRS airbags.Chapter 2: Keys and doorsThis chapter informs you how to operatethe keys, locks and windows.Chapter 3: Instruments and controlsThis chapter informs you about the opera-tion of instrument panel indicators and howto use the instruments and other switches.

– CONTINUED –

1

0

(4,1)


Chapter 4: Climate controlThis chapter informs you how to operatethe climate control.Chapter 5: AudioThis chapter informs you about your audiosystem.Chapter 6: Interior equipmentThis chapter informs you how to operateinterior equipment.Chapter 7: Starting and operatingThis chapter informs you how to start andoperate your SUBARU.Chapter 8: Driving tipsThis chapter informs you how to drive yourSUBARU in various conditions and ex-plains some safety tips on driving.Chapter 9: In case of emergencyThis chapter informs you what to do if youhave a problem, such as a flat tire orengine overheating.Chapter 10: Appearance careThis chapter informs you how to keep yourSUBARU looking good.Chapter 11: Maintenance and serviceThis chapter informs youwhen you need totake your SUBARU to the dealer forscheduled maintenance and informs youhow to keep your SUBARU runningproperly.

Chapter 12: SpecificationsThis chapter informs you about dimen-sions and capacities of your SUBARU.Chapter 13: Consumer information andreporting safety defectsThis chapter informs you about Uniformtire quality grading standards and Report-ing safety defects.Chapter 14: IndexThis is an alphabetical listing of all that’s inthis manual. You can use it to quickly findsomething you want to read.

For models with EyeSight system:For details about the EyeSight system,refer to the Owner’s Manual supplementfor the EyeSight system.

Depending on specifications, the vehicleshown in the illustrations may differ fromyour vehicle in terms of equipment.

& Safety warningsS00AB02

You will find a number of WARNINGs,CAUTIONs and NOTEs in this manual.These safety warnings alert you to poten-tial hazards that could result in injury to youor others.Please read these safety warnings as wellas all other portions of this manual care-fully in order to gain a better understandingof how to use your SUBARU vehicle safely.

WARNING

A WARNING indicates a situation inwhich serious injury or death couldresult if the warning is ignored.

CAUTION

A CAUTION indicates a situation inwhich injury or damage to yourvehicle, or both, could result if thecaution is ignored.

NOTEA NOTE gives information or sugges-tions how to make better use of yourvehicle.

2

(5,1)


& Safety symbolS00AB03

You will find a circle with a slash through itin this manual. This symbol means “Donot”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let thishappen”, depending upon the context.

& Abbreviation listS00AB04

You may find several abbreviations in thismanual. The meanings of the abbrevia-tions are shown in the following list.Abbreviation Meaning

A/C Air conditionerABS Anti-lock brake system

AKI Anti knock indexALR Automatic locking retractor

ALR/ELR Automatic locking retractor/Emergency locking retractor

AVH Auto Vehicle Hold

AWD All-wheel drive

BSD/RCTA Blind Spot Detection/RearCross Traffic Alert

CVT Continuously variable trans-mission

DRL Daytime running light

EBD Electronic brake force distri-bution

ELR Emergency locking retractor

GAW Gross axle weightGAWR Gross axle weight rating

GPS Global positioning systemGVW Gross vehicle weight

GVWR Gross vehicle weight ratingINT Intermittent

Abbreviation Meaning

LATCH Lower anchors and tethers forchildren

LED Light emitting diodeMIL Malfunction indicator light

MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl man-ganese tricarbonyl

OBD On-board diagnostics

RAB Reverse Automatic Brakingsystem

RON Research octane number

SI-DRIVE SUBARU Intelligent Drive

SRH Steering Responsive Head-light

SRS Supplemental restraint sys-tem

TIN Tire identification number

TPMS Tire pressure monitoring sys-tem

3

0

(6,1)


Vehicle symbolsS00AC

There are some of the symbols you maysee on your vehicle.For warning and indicator lights, refer to“Warning and indicator lights” FP24.

Mark Name

WARNING

CAUTION

Read these instructions care-fully

Wear eye protection

Battery fluid contains sulfuricacid

Keep children away

Keep flames away

Prevent explosions

Safety precautions whendriving

S00AD

& Seatbelt and SRS airbagS00AD01

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle mustfasten their seatbelts BEFOREthe vehicle starts to move. Other-wise, the possibility of seriousinjury becomes greater in theevent of a sudden stop or acci-dent.

. To obtain maximum protection inthe event of an accident, thedriver and all passengers mustalways wear seatbelts when inthe vehicle. The SRS (Supple-mental Restraint System) airbagdoes not do awaywith the need tofasten seatbelts. In combinationwith the seatbelts, it offers thebest combined protection in caseof a serious accident.Not wearing a seatbelt increasesthe chance of severe injury ordeath in a crash even when thevehicle has the SRS airbag.

. The SRS airbags deploy withconsiderable speed and force.Occupants who are out of theproper position when the SRSairbag deploys could suffer veryserious injuries. Because theSRS airbag needs enough spacefor deployment, the driver shouldalways sit upright and well backin the seat as far from the steer-ing wheel as practical while stillmaintaining full vehicle controland the front passenger shouldmove the seat as far back aspossible and sit upright and wellback in the seat.

For instructions and precautions, carefullyread the following sections.. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-belts” FP50.. For the SRS airbag system, refer to“SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem airbag)” FP78.

4

(7,1)


& Child safetyS00AD02

WARNING

. Never hold a child on your lap orin your arms while the vehicle ismoving. The passenger cannotprotect the child from injury in acollision, because the child willbe caught between the passen-ger and objects inside the vehi-cle.

. While riding in the vehicle, infantsand small children should alwaysbe seated in the REAR seat in aninfant or child restraint systemwhich is appropriate for thechild’s age, height and weight. Ifa child is too big for a childrestraint system, the child shouldsit in the REAR seat and berestrained using the seatbelts.According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seatingpositions. Never allow a child tostand up or kneel on the seat.

. Place children in the REAR seatproperly restrained at all times ina child restraint system or in aseatbelt. The SRS airbag deploys

with considerable speed andforce and can injure or even killchildren, especially if they are notrestrained or improperly re-strained. Because children arelighter and weaker than adults,their risk of being injured fromdeployment is greater.

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINTSYSTEM INTHEFRONTPASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SORISKS SERIOUS INJURY ORDEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOOCLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Always turn the child safety locksto the “LOCK” position whenchildren sit in the rear seat.Serious injury could result if achild accidentally opens the doorand falls out. Refer to “Childsafety locks” FP142.

. Always lock the passenger’s win-dows using the lock switch whenchildren are riding in the vehicle.Failure to follow this procedurecould result in injury to a childoperating the power window. Re-fer to “Windows” FP142.

. Never leave unattended children,adults or animals in the vehicle.

They could accidentally injurethemselves or others throughinadvertent operation of the ve-hicle. Also, on hot or sunny days,temperature in a closed vehiclecould quickly become high en-ough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to them.

. When leaving the vehicle, closeall windows and lock all doors.

For instructions and precautions, carefullyread the following sections.. For the seatbelt system, refer to “Seat-belts” FP50.. For the child restraint system, refer to“Child restraint systems” FP62.. For the SRS airbag system, refer to“SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem airbag)” FP78.

– CONTINUED –

5

0

(8,1)


& Engine exhaust gas (carbonmonoxide)

S00AD03

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.Engine exhaust gas containscarbon monoxide, a colorlessand odorless gas which is dan-gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-gine exhaust system to preventengine exhaust gas fromenteringthe vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closedspace, such as a garage, exceptfor the brief time needed to drivethe vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-hicle for a lengthy time while theengine is running. If that is un-avoidable, then use the ventila-tion fan to force fresh air into thevehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilatorinlet grille free from snow, leavesor other obstructions to ensurethat the ventilation system al-ways works properly.

. If at any time you suspect thatexhaust fumes are entering the

vehicle, have the problemchecked and corrected as soonas possible. If you must driveunder these conditions, driveonly with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed whiledriving to prevent exhaust gasfrom entering the vehicle.

& Drinking and drivingS00AD04

WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Alcohol in the blood-stream delays your reaction timeand impairs your perception, judg-ment and attentiveness. If you driveafter drinking – even if you drink justa little – it will increase the risk ofbeing involved in a serious or fatalaccident, injuring or killing yourself,your passengers and others. Inaddition, if you are injured in theaccident, alcohol may increase theseverity of that injury.Please don’t drink and drive.

Drunken driving is one of themost frequentcauses of accidents. Since alcohol affectsall people differently, you may have con-

sumed too much alcohol to drive safelyeven if the level of alcohol in your blood isbelow the legal limit. The safest thing youcan do is never drink and drive. However ifyou have no choice but to drive, stopdrinking and sober up completely beforegetting behind the wheel.

& Drugs and drivingS00AD05

WARNING

There are some drugs (over thecounter and prescription) that candelay your reaction time and impairyour perception, judgment and at-tentiveness. If you drive after takingthem, it may increase your, yourpassengers’ and other persons’ riskof being involved in a serious or fatalaccident.

If you are taking any drugs, check withyour doctor or pharmacist or read theliterature that accompanies themedicationto determine if the drug you are taking canimpair your driving ability. Do not driveafter taking anymedications that canmakeyou drowsy or otherwise affect your abilityto safely operate a motor vehicle. If youhave a medical condition that requires youto take drugs, please consult with yourdoctor.

6

(9,1)


Never drive if you are under the influenceof any illicit mind-altering drugs. For yourown health and well-being, we urge younot to take illegal drugs in the first placeand to seek treatment if you are addictedto those drugs.

& Driving when tired or sleepyS00AD06

WARNING

When you are tired or sleepy, yourreaction time will be delayed andyour perception, judgment and at-tentiveness will be impaired. If youdrive when tired or sleepy, your,your passengers’ and other per-sons’ chances of being involved ina serious accident may increase.

Please do not continue to drive but insteadfind a safe place to rest if you are tired orsleepy. On long trips, you should makeperiodic rest stops to refresh yourselfbefore continuing on your journey. Whenpossible, you should share the driving withothers.

& Modification of your vehicleS00AD07

WARNING

. Do not remove the SUBARU gen-uine navigation and/or audio sys-tem. If the SUBARU genuinenavigation and/or audio systemis removed, the rear view cameraimage and help lines (distancemarker, dynamic guidelines andvehicle width lines) will no longerbe displayed.

. For some models with ReverseAutomatic Braking (RAB) sys-tem, even if the Reverse Auto-matic Braking (RAB) system andobject detection warning is ON,the visible alert of Reverse Auto-matic Braking (RAB) system willnot be displayed. However, theaudible alert and its function willoperate.

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be modifiedother than with genuine SUBARUparts and accessories. Other typesof modifications could affect itsperformance, safety or durability,and may even violate governmental

regulations. In addition, damage orperformance problems resultingfrom modification may not be cov-ered under warranties.

& Use of cell phones/textingand driving

S00AD16

CAUTION

Do not talk on a cell phone or textwhile driving; it may distract yourattention from driving and lead to anaccident. If you use a cell phone totalk or text, first pull off the road andpark in a safe place. In some States/Provinces, it may be lawful to talk ona phone while driving, but only if thephone is hands-free.

& Driving vehicles equippedwith navigation system

S00AD09

WARNING

Do not allow the monitor to distractyour attention from driving. Also, donot operate the controls of thenavigation system while driving.The loss of attention to driving could

– CONTINUED –

7

0

(10,1)


lead to an accident. If you wish tooperate the controls of the naviga-tion system, first take the vehicle offthe road and stop it in a safelocation.

& Driving with petsS00AD10

Unrestrained pets can interfere with yourdriving and distract your attention fromdriving. In a collision or sudden stop,unrestrained pets or cages can be thrownaround inside the vehicle and hurt you oryour passengers. Besides, the pets can behurt under these situations. It is also fortheir own safety that pets should beproperly restrained in your vehicle. Re-strain a pet with a special traveling harnesswhich can be secured to the rear seat witha seatbelt or use a pet carrier which can besecured to the rear seat by routing aseatbelt through the carrier’s handle.Never restrain pets or pet carriers in thefront passenger’s seat. For further infor-mation, consult your veterinarian, localanimal protection society or pet shop.

& Tire pressuresS00AD11

Check and, if necessary, adjust the pres-sure of each tire and the spare (ifequipped) at least once a month andbefore any long journey.

Check the tire pressure when the tires arecold. Use a pressure gauge to adjust thetire pressures to the values shown on thetire inflation pressure label. For detailedinformation, refer to “Tires and wheels”FP483.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds withexcessively low tire pressurescan cause the tires to deformseverely and to rapidly be-come hot. A sharp increase intemperature could cause treadseparation, and destruction ofthe tires. The resulting loss ofvehicle control could lead toan accident.

& Attaching accessoriesS00AD15

WARNING

. Do not attach any accessories,labels or stickers (other thanproperly placed inspection stick-ers) to the windshield. Suchitems may obstruct your view.

. If it is necessary to attach anaccessory (such as an electronictoll collection (ETC) device orsecurity pass) to the windshield,consult your SUBARU dealer fordetails on the proper location.

. Do not connect any unauthorizedaccessories or devices to thedata link connector (OBDII port).This connector should be usedonly with compatible diagnosticdevices for inspection and main-tenance by an authorized servicetechnician using authorized ser-vice tools. Connecting unauthor-ized devices, such as a driver-behavior tracking device, mayadversely affect vehicle systems,including safety systems, or al-low others to access informationstored in your vehicle. The use ofunauthorized devices may alsocause unexpected malfunctions,such as a drained battery, or maydamage vehicle systems. Themanufacturer’s warranty will notcover any part that malfunctions,fails, or is damaged due to theuse of an unauthorized devicewith the data link connector.

8

(11,1)


General informationS00AK

& California Perchlorate Advi-sory

S00AK03Certain vehicle components, such as air-bag modules, seatbelt pretensioners andkeyless entry transmitter batteries, maycontain perchlorate material. Specialhandling may apply for service or vehicleend of life disposal. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

& Noise from under the vehicleS00AK01

NOTEYou may hear a noise from under thevehicle approximately 5 to 10 hoursafter the ignition switch is turned to the“LOCK”/“OFF” position. However, thisdoes not indicate a malfunction. Thisnoise is caused by the operation of thefuel evaporation leakage checking sys-tem and the operation is normal. Thenoise will stop after approximately 15minutes.

& Event data recorderS00AK04

This vehicle is equippedwith an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of anEDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bag

deployment or hitting a road obstacle, datathat will assist in understanding how avehicle’s systems performed. The EDR isdesigned to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed torecord such data as:. How various systems in your vehiclewere operating;. Whether or not the driver and passen-ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;. How far (if at all) the driver wasdepressing the accelerator and/or brakepedal; and,. How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances inwhich crashes and injuries occur. NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicleonly if a non-trivial crash situation occurs;no data are recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, and crashlocation) are recorded. However, otherparties, such as law enforcement, couldcombine the EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinely ac-quired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In additionto the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,such as law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read the informa-tion if they have access to the vehicle orthe EDR.

9

0

(2,1)

Model "ALL_MODEL_MEMO" EDITED: 2017/ 11/ 6Left Page

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(1,1)


Table of contents

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags 1

Keys and doors 2

Instruments and controls

Climate control 4

Audio 5

Interior equipment 6

Starting and operating 7

Driving tips 8

In case of emergency 9

Appearance care 10

Maintenance and service 11

Specifications 12

Consumer information and reporting safety defects 13

Index 14

3

(14,1)


Illustrated indexS00AE

& ExteriorS00AE01 1) Engine hood (page 471)

2) Windshield wipers (page 246)3) Replacing bulbs (page 501)4) Headlights (page 236)5) Moonroof (page 154)6) Roof rails (page 421)7) Outside mirrors (page 257)8) Door locks (page 135)9) Tire pressure (page 486)10) Flat tires (page 438)11) Snow tires (page 417)12) Fog lights (page 243)13) Tie-down hooks (page 447)14) Towing hook (page 447)

12

(15,1)


1) Rear window defogger (page 259)2) Fuel filler lid and cap (page 311)3) Child safety locks (page 142)4) Tie-down hole (page 447)5) Replacing bulbs (page 501)6) Rear window wiper (page 248)7) Rear gate (page 145)8) Towing hook (page 447)

– CONTINUED –

13

0

(16,1)


& InteriorS00AE02

! Passenger compartment areaS00AE0201 1) Lower anchorages for child restraint

system (page 73)2) Seatbelts (page 50)3) Front seats (page 32)4) Rear seats (page 41)

14

(17,1)


1) Power window switches (page 142)2) Door locks (page 136)3) Select lever (page 330)4) USB power supply (page 292)5) Front accessory power outlet (page 290)6) Glove box (page 288)7) Cup holder (page 289)8) Center console (page 289)

– CONTINUED –

15

0

(18,1)


1) Button for SUBARU STARLINK2) Moonroof switch (page 154)3) Electronic parking brake switch (page

354)4) Auto Vehicle Hold switch (page 356)5) X-MODE switch (page 347)/Vehicle Dy-

namics Control OFF switch (page 345)6) Front seat heater switches (page 48)7) Front view monitor switch (page 301)8) USB power supply (page 292)9) Rear seat heater switches (page 49)

NOTE. Fo r mode l s w i t h SUBARUSTARLINK: Refer to the Owner’s Man-ua l supp l emen t f o r SUBARUSTARLINK.. For models with EyeSight system:Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-ment for the EyeSight system.

16

(19,1)


& Instrument panelS00AE03 1) Seat position memory switch (page 37)

2) Power rear gate button (page 146)3) Steering Responsive Headlight OFF

switch (page 242)4) Memory switch (page 151)5) Illumination brightness control dial (page

168)6) Combination meter (page 164)7) Type A multi-function display (black and

white) (page 202)/Type B multi-functiondisplay (color LCD) (page 208)

8) Audio*9) Hazard warning flasher switch (page

164)10) Climate control panel (page 267)11) Tilt/Telescopic steering wheel (page 261)12) Driver Monitoring System OFF switch

(page 402)13) Fuse box (page 499)14) BSD/RCTA OFF switch (page 371)15) Auto Start Stop OFF switch (page 360)16) Hood release knob (page 471)17) Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch

(page 345)*: For details about how to use the audio andnavigation system (if equipped), refer to theseparate navigation/audio Owner’s Manual.

– CONTINUED –

17

0

(20,1)


1) Audio control switches*2) INFO button for type A multi-function

display (black and white) (page 203)/INFO button for type B multi-functiondisplay (color LCD) (page 210)

3) Cruise control switches (page 367)4) Shift paddles (page 333)5) SI-DRIVE switches (page 338)6) Heated Steering Wheel switch (page

261)7) SRS airbag (page 78)8) Horn (page 262)9) Combination meter display control

switches (page 194)10) Talk switch for voice command system*/

Hands-free phone switches**: For details about how to use the switches,refer to the separate navigation/audioOwner’s Manual.

NOTEFor models with EyeSight system:Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-ment for the EyeSight system.

18

(21,1)


& Light control and wiper control levers/switchesS00AE04 1) Windshield wiper (page 245)

2) Mist (page 246)3) Windshield washer (page 247)4) Rear window wiper and washer switch

(page 248)5) Wiper intermittent time control switch

(page 247)6) Windshield wiper and washer switches

(page 246)7) Light control switch (page 235)8) Fog light switch (page 243)9) Headlight ON/OFF/AUTO (page 236)10) Headlight flasher High/Low beam change

(page 238)11) Turn signal lever (page 244)

– CONTINUED –

19

0

(22,1)


& Combination meterS00AE05

! U.S.-spec. modelsS00AE0549

The illustration above is a typical example. For some models, the combination meter may beslightly different than that shown in the illustration.

1) Tachometer (page 164)2) Select lever/gear position indicator (page

189)3) Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 194)4) Trip meter and odometer (page 165)5) Speedometer (page 164)6) Fuel gauge (page 166)

20

(23,1)


! Except U.S.-spec. models (type A)S00AE0531



189)3) Trip meter and odometer (page 165)4) Speedometer (page 164)5) Fuel gauge (page 166)

– CONTINUED –

21

0

(24,1)


! Except U.S.-spec. models (type B)S00AE0519



189)3) Combination meter display (color LCD)

(page 194)4) Trip meter and odometer (page 165)5) Speedometer (page 164)6) Fuel gauge (page 166)

22

(25,1)


– CONTINUED –

23

0

(26,1)


& Warning and indicator lightsS00AE06

Mark Name Page

Seatbelt warning light/Front passenger’sseatbelt warning light

169

Rear seatbelt warninglight 171

SRS airbag systemwarning light 172

Front passenger’sfrontal airbag ON indi-cator

172

Front passenger’sfrontal airbag OFF in-dicator

172

CHECK ENGINEwarning light/Malfunc-tion indicator light

173

Coolant temperaturelow indicator light/Coolant temperaturehigh warning light

174

Charge warning light 175

Oil pressure warninglight 175

Engine low oil levelwarning light 175

Mark Name Page

AT OIL TEMP warninglight 175

Rear differential oiltemperature warninglight (if equipped)

176

ABS warning light 177

Brake system warninglight (red) 178

/ Electronic parkingbrake indicator light 179

Door open warninglight 181

Engine hood openwarning light 181

AWD warning light 181

Power steering warn-ing light 182

Auto Vehicle Hold ONindicator light 180

Auto Vehicle Hold op-eration indicator light 181

Mark Name Page

Depress brake indica-tor light (if equipped) 181

Vehicle DynamicsControl warning light/Vehicle DynamicsControl operation indi-cator light

182

Vehicle DynamicsControl OFF indicatorlight

183

Turn signal indicatorlights 190

LED headlight warninglight 191

High beam indicatorlight 190

High beam assist indi-cator light (if equipped) 190

Automatic headlightbeam leveler warninglight

191

Steering ResponsiveHeadlight warninglight/Steering Respon-sive Headlight OFF in-dicator light

191

Front fog light indicatorlight (if equipped) 191

24

(27,1)


Mark Name Page

Access key warningindicator (if equipped) 184

Security indicator light 188

Sport (S) mode indica-tor (if equipped) 189

Intelligent (I) mode in-dicator 189

Sport Sharp (S#)mode indicator (ifequipped)

189

Headlight indicatorlight (if equipped) 191

Cruise control indica-tor light (if equipped) 190

Cruise control set indi-cator light (if equipped) 191

X-MODE indicator light(if equipped) 192

Hill descent control in-dicator light (ifequipped)

193

Low fuel warning light 181

Mark Name PageLow tire pressurewarning light(U.S.-spec. models)

176

Windshield washerfluid warning light 175

Auto Start Stop warn-ing light/Auto StartStop OFF indicatorlight (yellow)

191

Auto Start Stop indica-tor light (green) 192

Auto Start Stop NoActivity Detected indi-cator light

192

BSD/RCTA warninglight (if equipped) 193

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-cator light (if equipped) 193

RAB warning light (ifequipped) 193

RAB OFF indicatorlight (if equipped) 193

Driver Monitoring Sys-temoperation indicatorlight (green) (ifequipped)

193

Driver Monitoring Sys-tem warning light (yel-low) (if equipped)

193

Mark Name PageDriver Monitoring Sys-tem OFF indicator light(if equipped)

193

Driver Monitoring Sys-tem temporary stop in-dicator light (ifequipped)

194

Icy road surface warn-ing light (if equipped) 194

25

0

(28,1)


Function settingsS00AF

& Function settings and adjustments on the combination meter display (color LCD)S00AF01

If your vehicle is equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD), setting adjustments to the following items can be manuallychanged within the display to meet your personal requirements.

NOTE. If your vehicle is not equipped with a combination meter display (color LCD), setting changes to the following items willneed to be performed by a SUBARU dealer. Refer to “Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealer” FP29.. For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.

ItemAvailable settings Factory default setting

Page reference forthe vehicle system

operation1st menu/vehiclesystem

2nd menu/adjustable ve-hicle system setting

3rd menu/selectable ve-hicle system setting

Screen Settings

Welcome Screen — On/Off On 196

Good-bye Screen — On/Off On 196Gauge Initial Movement — On/Off On 167

Units — km, km/h, Liter/mile,MPH, Gallon

U.S.-spec. models: mile,MPH, GallonOther models: km, km/h,Liter

202 and 209

Tire Pressure Units*1 — kPa/PSi PSi 198

Languages — English/Español/Fran-çais

U.S.-spec. models: Eng-lishOther models: Français

209

26

(29,1)







Warning Volume*2 — — Max/Mid/Min Mid

376 and 389For details aboutEyeSight system,refer to the Own-er’s Manual sup-plement for theEyeSight system.

Rear Seat Remin-der*3 — — On/Off On 62

EyeSight*3

Lead Vehicle AcquisitionSound — On/Off On

Refer to the Own-er’s Manual sup-plement for theEyeSight system.

Lead Vehicle MovingMonitor Function — On/Off On

Cruise Control Accelera-tion Characteristics*2 —

Lv.4 (Dynamic)/Lv.3(Standard)/Lv.2 (Com-fort)/Lv.1 (Eco)

Lv.3 (Standard)

Lane Centering — On/Off On

Select Drive on Left/Driveon Right — Drive on Left/Drive on

Right Drive on Right

RAB*3 Sonar Audible Alarm — On/Off On 389

– CONTINUED –

27

0

(30,1)







Vehicle Setting

Keyless Entry System

Audible Signal*3 On/Off On 127Hazard Warning Flasher On/Off On 118

Driver Door Unlock*3 Driver Door Only/All Driver Door Only 121Rear Gate/Trunk Un-lock*3 Rear Gate/Trunk Only/All Rear Gate/Trunk Only 121

Defogger — 15 minutes/Continuous 15 minutes 259

Interior Light — 10 seconds/20 seconds/30 seconds/Off 30 seconds 286

Auto Door Lock and Un-lock

Auto Door Lock Vehicle Speed/Shift Intoor Out of PARK/Off Vehicle Speed 137

Auto Door UnlockShift Into or Out of PARK/Ignition OFF/Driver DoorOpen/Off

Driver Door Open 137

Auto Light Sensor — Max/Mid/Low/Min Mid 237

Welcome LightingApproaching Time Set 30 seconds/60 seconds/

90 seconds/Off 30 seconds 237

Leaving Time Set 30 seconds/60 seconds/90 seconds/Off 30 seconds 237

One-touch lane changer — On/Off On 245

Door mirror setting*3 Reverse Tilt-Down Mir-rors On/Off On 200

Default Settings — — No/Yes — 200

*1: U.S.-spec. models*2: You can also set this while driving.*3: If equipped

28

(31,1)


& Individual settings and adjustments excluding combination meter display (color LCD)S00AF02

For setting adjustments to the following items, refer to the appropriate page for details.Item Function Available settings Factory default setting Page

Alarm system Alarm system Operation/Non-operation Operation 141Remote keyless entry system Audible signal Operation/Non-operation Operation 133

& Function settings and adjustments performed by a dealerS00AF03

A SUBARU dealer can change the setting adjustments of the following items to meet your personal requirements. Contact the nearestSUBARU dealer for details.Item Function Available settings Factory default setting

Alarm system Monitoring start delay time (afterclosure of doors) 0 seconds/30 seconds 30 seconds

Alarm/panic alarm Dome light, cargo area light, andmap lights illumination ON/OFF OFF

Keyless Access (if equipped) Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5Remote keyless entry system Audible signal volume Level 1 to 7 Level 5

Key lock-in prevention Key lock-in prevention Operation/Non-operation OperationBattery drainage prevention func-tion

Battery drainage prevention func-tion Operation/Non-operation Operation

Seatbelt warning Sounds a chime while driving Operation/Non-operation OperationAuto on/off headlights Auto-on/off wiper-linked Operation/Non-operation Operation

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper Operation/Non-operation U.S.-spec. models: Non-operationOther models: Operation

Auto dimmer cancel Sensitivity of the operation of theauto dimmer cancel OFF/Min/Low/Mid/Hi/Max Mid

High beam assist function (ifequipped) High beam assist function Operation/Non-operation Operation

– CONTINUED –

29

0

(32,1)


Item Function Available settings Factory default setting

Power rear gate open and closefunction (if equipped)

Power rear gate opening and clos-ing by remote control key/accesskey

Non-operation/Pressing twice/Pressing and holding Pressing and holding

Outside mirrors reverse tilt-down (ifequipped)

Reverse interlocking outside mirrortarget customize Right and left mirrors/right mirror Right mirror

Reverse interlocking outside mirrorlast memory customize Operation/Non-operation Non-operation

30

(33,1)


S011-1. Seats.................................................................. 32

Safety tips ............................................................32Manual seat (if equipped)......................................35Power seat (if equipped) .......................................36

1-2. Rear seats ......................................................... 41Armrest (if equipped) ............................................42Folding down the rear seatback ............................42Reclining the seatback (if equipped) .....................44

1-3. Head restraints ................................................. 45Front seats ...........................................................46Rear seats ............................................................47

1-4. Seat heater (if equipped).................................. 48Safety precautions................................................48Front seat heater ..................................................49Rear seat heater (if equipped) ...............................49

1-5. Seatbelts............................................................ 50Seatbelt safety tips ...............................................50Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .....................52Automatic Locking Retractor/EmergencyLocking Retractor (ALR/ELR) ..............................52

Seatbelt warning light and chime ..........................52Fastening the seatbelt ..........................................52Seatbelt maintenance............................................58

1-6. Seatbelt pretensioners ..................................... 59Seatbelt with shoulder belt pretensioner ...............59Seatbelt with shoulder belt and lap beltpretensioners .....................................................60

System monitors ..................................................60System servicing ..................................................61Precautions against vehicle modification ..............61

1-7. Rear Seat Reminder (models withcombination meter display (color LCD)) ...... 62

1-8. Child restraint systems.................................... 62Safety precautions ...............................................62Safety tips for installing child restraint systems ...64Where to place a child restraint system................65Choosing a child restraint system ........................67Installing child restraint systems with ALR/ELRseatbelt..............................................................67

Installing a booster seat or booster cushion.........71Installation of child restraint systems by use oflower and tether anchorages (LATCH) ................73

Top tether anchorages .........................................771-9. SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint

System airbag) ............................................... 78General precautions regarding SRS airbagsystem...............................................................78

General precautions regarding SRS airbagsystem for accessories and any objects .............80

General precautions regarding SRS airbagsystem and children...........................................82

Components ........................................................85SUBARU advanced frontal airbag system .............87SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbag...............99SRS airbag system monitors .............................. 106SRS airbag system servicing.............................. 107Precautions against vehicle modification............ 108How to contact the vehicle manufacturerconcerning modifications for persons withdisabilities that may affect the advancedairbag system .................................................. 109

Seat, seatbelt and SRS airbags

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(34,1)


1-1. SeatsS01AQ

& Safety tipsS01AQ01

! Safety tips for seatS01AQ0101

WARNING

. Never adjust the seat while driv-ing, as personal injury or loss ofvehicle control may occur.

. Before adjusting the seat, ensurenothing is blocking the adjustingmechanism.

. After adjusting the seat, move itback and forth to ensure the seatis securely locked. If it is not, itmay move suddenly or the seat-belt may not operate properly.

. Do not put objects under the frontseats. They may interfere withfront seat locking mechanismand cause an accident.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-straint when the occupant sitsback and upright in the seat. Toreduce the risk of sliding underthe seatbelt in a collision, thefront seatbacks should alwaysbe used in the upright positionwhile the vehicle is running. If thefront seatbacks are not in the

upright position and a collisionoccurs, the risk of sliding underthe lap belt and of the lap beltsliding up over the abdomen willincrease, and both can result inserious injury or death.

. The SRS airbags deploy withconsiderable speed and force.Occupants who are not sittingback and upright when the SRSairbag deploys could suffer ser-ious injury. Because the SRSairbag needs enough space fordeployment, the driver shouldalways sit upright and well backin the seat as far from the steer-ing wheel as practical while stillmaintaining full vehicle control,and the front passenger shouldmove the seat as far back aspossible and sit upright and wellback in the seat.

WARNING

Place children in the rear seat prop-erly restrained at all times. The SRSairbag deploys with considerablespeed and force and can injure oreven kill children, especially if theyare not restrained or improperlyrestrained. Because children arelighter and weaker than adults, theirrisk of being injured from deploy-ment is greater. For that reason, westrongly recommend that ALL chil-dren (including those in child seatsand those that have outgrown childrestraint devices) sit in the REARseat properly restrained at all timesin a child restraint system or in aseatbelt, whichever is appropriate

Seats32

(35,1)


for the child’s age, height andweight. Secure ALL types of childrestraint devices (including forwardfacing child restraint systems) in theREAR seats at all times.NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONTSEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUSINJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILDBY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEADTOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seating posi-tions than in the front seating posi-tions. For instructions and precau-tions concerning child restraint sys-tems, refer to “Child restraint sys-tems” FP62.

WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-ing under the seatbelt in the event ofa collision, always put the seatbackin the upright position while thevehicle is in motion. Also, do notplace objects such as cushionsbetween the passenger and the seat-back. If you do so, the risk of slidingunder the lap belt and of the lap beltsliding up over the abdomen willincrease, and both can result inserious injury or death.

WARNING

Do not let rear passengers rest theirfeet between the front seatback andseat cushion. Doing somay interferewith the proper operation of thefollowing systems and could resultin serious injury.. Occupant detection system. SRS side airbag. Seat heater (if equipped). Power seat (if equipped)

– CONTINUED –

Seats 33

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(36,1)


WARNING

Do not press your feet onto theinstrument panel. Doing so mayprevent the occupant detectionfunction of the SRS airbag systemfrom functioning correctly, and mayresult in serious injury or death inthe event of an accident.

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-straint when the occupant sits wellback and upright in the seat. Do notput cushions or any other materialsbetween occupants and seatbacksor seat cushions. If you do so, therisk of sliding under the lap belt andof the lap belt sliding up over theabdomenwill increase, and both canresult in serious internal injury ordeath.

WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargohigher than the top of the seatbackbecause it could tumble forward andinjure passengers in the event of asudden stop or accident.

Seats34

(37,1)


! Safety tips for head restraintS01AQ0102

WARNING

. Never drive the vehicle with thehead restraints removed becausethey are designed to reduce therisk of serious neck injury in theevent that the vehicle is struckfrom the rear. Also, never installthe head restraints the oppositeway round. Doing so will preventthe head restraints from function-ing as intended. Therefore, whenyou remove the head restraints,you must reinstall all head re-straints correctly to protect vehi-cle occupants.

. All occupants, including the dri-ver, should not operate a vehicleor sit in a vehicle’s seat until thehead restraints are placed in theirproper positions in order to mini-mize the risk of neck injury in theevent of a crash.

& Manual seat (if equipped)S01AQ05

! Forward and backward adjustmentS01AQ0501

Pull the lever upward and slide the seat tothe desired position. Then release thelever and move the seat back and forth tomake sure that it is securely locked intoplace.

! Reclining the seatbackS01AQ0502

Pull the reclining lever up and adjust theseatback to the desired position. Thenrelease the lever and move the seatbackback and forth to confirm that it is securelyfixed in place.The seatback placed in a reclined positioncan spring back upward with force whenthe lever is pulled. When operating thelever to return the seatback, hold theseatback lightly so that it may be raisedback gradually.

– CONTINUED –

Seats 35

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(38,1)


! Seat height adjustment (driver’sseat)

S01AQ0503

1) When the lever is pushed down, the seatis lowered.

2) When the lever is pulled up, the seatrises.

The height of the seat can be adjusted bymoving the seat adjustment lever up anddown.

& Power seat (if equipped)S01AQ06

! Driver’s seatS01AQ0601

1) Seat position forward/backward con-trol switchTo adjust the seat forward or backward,move the control switch forward or

backward. During forward/backward ad-justment of the seat, the seat cushionangle or height cannot be adjusted.

2) Seat cushion angle control switchTo adjust the seat cushion angle, pull upor push down the front end of the controlswitch.

3) Seat height control switchTo adjust the seat height, pull up or pushdown the rear end of the control switch.

4) Seatback angle (reclining) controlswitchTo adjust the angle of the seatback, movethe control switch.

5) Lumbar support control switchTo increase lower back support, push thefront side of the switch. To decreaselower back support, push the rear side ofthe switch.

Seats36

(39,1)


! Front passenger’s seatS01AQ0602

1) Seat position forward/backward con-trol switchTo adjust the seat forward or backward,move the control switch forward orbackward.

2) Seat cushion angle control switchTo adjust the seat cushion angle, pull upor push down the front end of the controlswitch.

3) Seat height control switchTo adjust the seat height, pull up or pushdown the rear end of the control switch.

4) Seatback angle (reclining) controlswitchTo adjust the angle of the seatback, movethe control switch.

! Memory function (driver’s seat – ifequipped)

S01AQ0603

WARNING

. To avoid loss of vehicle control orpersonal injury, never performthe following operations whiledriving.– Adjusting the seat– Retrieving the seat position

. Before adjusting the seat, makesure that cargo or the hands andfeet of rear seat passengers areclear of the adjusting mechan-ism.

. Perform the seat position retrie-val before driving. Be sure toconfirm that the select lever is inthe “P” position, and the parkingbrake is applied, when adjustingthe seat position. Do not driveuntil the retrieval of the seatposition is complete.

. When retrieving a registered seatposition, make sure the hands,feet and possessions of rear seatpassengers are clear of the seatadjusting mechanism.

. When any unusual conditions ormalfunctions occur during the

retrieval of the seat position, stopthe retrieval of the seat positionby performing any of the follow-ing.– Operate any of the power seat

switches.– Press the “SET” button.– Press button “1” or “2”.– Operate the outside mirror

control switch.

Some seat positions can be registered.Register the seat position with button “1” or“2” or each of the key fobs and retrieve theseat position.

The following seat positions can be regis-tered.. Forward/backward position of the seat. Angle of the seatback. Angle of the seat cushion. Height of the seat. Angle of the outside mirrors. Angle of the outside mirrors when thereverse tilt-down operates.

NOTEThe seat position can also be retrievedwith the Driver Monitoring System userinformation. To do so, perform userregistration in the Driver Monitoring

– CONTINUED –

Seats 37

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(40,1)


System settings. Refer to “Driver Mon-itoring System settings” FP221.

! Registration of memory positionwith button “1” or “2”

S01AQ060301

1. Adjust the seat position under thefollowing conditions.

. The parking brake is applied.

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”position.. The select lever is in the “P” position.

2. Register the adjusted positions byeither of the following procedures.

. Press the “SET” button, then presseither “1” or “2” until a chirp soundswithin 5 seconds.. While pressing and holding the“SET” button, press either “1” or “2”

until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.

A chirp will sound once, and the seatposition and outside mirror angle on thepassenger’s side will be registered.

NOTEIf a new position is registered for thesame button, the previously registeredmemory position is deleted.

! Registration of the reverse tilt-down mirror angle with button“1” or “2”

S01AQ060306

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal when re-gistering the reverse tilt-down mir-ror angle.

1. Move the select lever to the “R”position, then the outside mirror angle willmove to the reverse tilt-down position.2. Adjust the outside mirror angle. Fordetails about the settings, refer to “Remotecontrol mirror switch” FP257.3. Move the select lever to the “P”position, then the outside mirror angle willreturn to its original position.4. Register the adjusted positions byeither of the following procedures.

. Press the “SET” button, then presseither “1” or “2” until a chirp soundswithin 5 seconds.. While pressing and holding the“SET” button, press either “1” or “2”until a chirp sounds within 5 seconds.

A chirp will sound once, and the seatposition and outside mirror angle will beregistered.

NOTEThe factory setting (default setting) forthis function is set as the front passen-ger’s side mirror. The setting of theright and left side mirror/front passen-ger’s side mirror operation can bechanged by a SUBARU dealer. Contactyour SUBARU dealer for details.

! Registration of memory positionwith a key fob

S01AQ060302

1. Adjust the seat position under thefollowing conditions.

. The parking brake is applied.

. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.. The select lever is in the “P” position.

Seats38

(41,1)


2. Hold the access key fob and press andhold the “SET” button, then press the “ ”button of the access key fob.

A chirp will sound once, and the seatposition is registered.

NOTEWhen registering the seat position,carry the access key that you want toregister with you. If you are carrying 2or more access keys, registration maynot be possible.

! Registration of the reverse tilt-down mirror angle with the keyfob

S01AQ060307

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal when re-gistering the reverse tilt-down mir-ror angle.

1. Move the select lever to the “R”position, then the outside mirror angle willmove to the reverse tilt-down position.2. Adjust the outside mirror angle. Fordetails about the settings, refer to “Remotecontrol mirror switch” FP257.3. Move the select lever to the “P”position, then the outside mirror angle willreturn to its original position.4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”/“LOCK” position.5. Hold the access key fob and press andhold the “SET” button, then press the “ ”button of the access key fob.A chirp will sound once, and the reversetilt-down mirror angle will be registered.

NOTE. The factory setting (default setting)for this function is set as the frontpassenger’s side mirror. The setting of

the right and left side mirror/frontpassenger’s side mirror operation canbe changed by a SUBARU dealer.Contact your SUBARU dealer for de-tails.. The system stores the adjustedmirror angle for approximately 45 sec-onds after the ignition switch is turnedto the “OFF” position. Register themirror angle while the memory functionis available.

! Retrieval of memory positionregistered with button “1” or “2”

S01AQ060303

WARNING

Be sure to press the correct buttonto retrieve your registered seat posi-tion. If the seat position is notoptimum for you, it may adverselyaffect your driving and may reducethe effectiveness of the seatbelt.That could result in an accidentinvolving serious injury or death.

– CONTINUED –

Seats 39

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(42,1)


1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.2. Put the select lever is in the “P” positionand apply the parking brake, then pressbutton “1” or “2”.

A chirp will sound and the seat and outsidemirror move to the registered position.When the select lever is moved to the “R”position, the outside mirror will move to theregistered reverse tilt-down position.

NOTE. If the vehicle battery is removed, theregistered memory position data willnot be deleted.. When the button “1” or “2” ispressed within 45 seconds after thedriver’s door is opened, the registered

memory position can be retrieved evenif the ignition switch is in the “LOCK” or“OFF” position.. If buttons “1” and “2” are pressed atthe same time, execution of seat posi-tion retrieval may not be possible.. When the retrieved position is thesame as the current seat position, achirp will sound twice.

! Retrieval of the memory positionregistered with access key fob

S01AQ060304

1. Hold the registered access key fob.

2. Unlock the driver’s door by pressingthe “ ” button or touching the sensorbehind the door handle.3. Open the driver’s door.

A chirp will sound and the seat and angle

of the outside mirrors moves to theregistered position.When the select lever is moved to the “R”position, the outside mirror will move to theregistered reverse tilt-down position.

NOTE. A retrieved seat position might de-viate as the function is used continu-ously over time.. A retrieved seat position might de-viate if you attempt to continue operat-ing the registered seat in the samedirection when the registered seat isalready at the farthest possible point ofadjustment in any direction.. If the registered memory positioncannot be retrieved after performingthe previous procedures, try the follow-ing procedures.

(1) Press the “SET” button on thedriver’s door.(2) Press the “ ” button on theaccess key fob or the door lockbutton to lock the doors.(3) Perform the prior proceduresagain.

. If the keyless access function isdisabled, the memory position cannotbe retrieved by touching the sensorbehind the driver’s door handle. How-ever, the memory position can still be

Seats40

(43,1)


retrieved by pressing the “ ” button onthe access key fob. For informationabout how to enable/disable the key-less access function, refer to “Dis-abling keyless access function”FP124.. If a new position is registered for thesame access key fob, the previouslyregisteredmemory position data will bedeleted.. If you are carrying 2 or more accesskeys, seat position retrieval may not bepossible.. If, while carrying an access key, 45seconds passed after you enter theoperating range of the keyless accessfunction, it may not be possible toretrieve the registered memory posi-tion even if the door is open. For theoperating range of the keyless accessfunction, refer to “Locking and unlock-ing by holding the access key fob”FP117.

! Clearing the registered seat posi-tion with access key fob

S01AQ060305

1. Close the driver’s door.2. Hold the access key fob and press andhold the “SET” button, then press the “ ”button on the access key fob.

A chirp will sound, and the registered seatposition and outside mirror angle on the

passenger’s side will be cleared.

NOTEAfter deleting the seat position, wait fora few moments before registering anew seat position.

1-2. Rear seatsS01AC

WARNING

Seatbelts provide maximum re-straint when the occupant sits backand upright in the seat. Do not placecushions or any other materialsbetween occupants and seatbacksor seat cushions. By doing so, therisk of sliding under the lap belt andof the lap belt sliding up over theabdomenwill increase, and both canresult in serious injury or death.

– CONTINUED –

Rear seats 41

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(44,1)


WARNING

Never stack luggage or other cargohigher than the top of the seatbackas it could tumble forward and injurepassengers in the event of a suddenstop or accident.

& Armrest (if equipped)S01AC01

To lower the armrest, pull down the topedge of the armrest.

WARNING

. To avoid serious injury, passen-gers must never sit on the centerarmrest.

. When using the seatbelt, do notallow it to become tangled withan arm rest. The seatbelt will notperform its original function in anemergency and it may cause aserious injury.

& Folding down the rear seat-back

S01AC02

WARNING

. When you fold down the seat-back, check that there are nopassengers or objects on the rearseat. Not doing so creates a riskof injury or property damage ifthe seatback suddenly foldsdown.

. Never allow passengers to rideon the folded rear seatback or inthe cargo area. Doing so mayresult in serious injury or death.

. Secure all objects and especiallylong items properly to preventthem from being thrown aroundinside the vehicle and causingserious injury during a suddenstop, steeringmaneuver or accel-eration.

. When you return the seatback toits original position, shake itslightly to confirm that it is se-curely in place. If it is not securelyfixed in place, it may suddenlyfold down in the event of suddenbraking, or objects maymove outfrom the cargo area. Both couldcause serious injury or death.

Rear seats42

(45,1)


1) Striker

WARNING

When the seatback is returned to itsoriginal position, observe the fol-lowing precautions. Failure to do somay lead to serious injury or anaccident because the operation effi-ciency of the seatbelt is inhibited.. The seatbelt should not be

caught in the seatback and itshould be fully visible.

. The seatbelt should not passbehind the striker for the seat-back.

CAUTION

. Do not hang luggage etc. on thestriker. The possibility exists thatthe seatback may not be able tobe fixed firmly in place. Thiscould lead to unexpected acci-dents.

. While driving, if something hitsthe release latch, it is possiblethat the seatback will fold down.Be careful that no luggage etc.hits the latch.

1. Lower the head restraint of the rearcenter seating position.

Release knob

Release latch on both sides of the cargoarea (if equipped)

2. Unlock the seatback by pulling the lockrelease knob or release latch (if equipped)and then fold the seatback down.

– CONTINUED –

Rear seats 43

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(46,1)


! Return the rear seatbackS01AC0204

WARNING

. When returning the seatback toits original position, observe thefollowing precaution.Failure to observe the precautionmay damage the seatbelt, impair-ing its effectiveness, and possi-bly result in a serious injury.

. When returning the seatback toits original position, pull theseatbelt out towards the vehicleexterior so that it will not becaught between the seatbackand the trim.

Lock release knob1) Unlocked2) LockedA) Unlocking marker in red

To return the seatback to its originalposition, raise the seatback until it locksinto place and make sure that the unlock-ing marker on the lock release knob is nolonger visible.

WARNING

When you return the seatback to itsoriginal position, check that theunlocking marker on the lock re-lease knob is not visible. Also, shakethe seatback slightly to confirm thatit is securely fixed in place. If theseatback is not securely fixed inplace, the seatback may suddenly

fold down in the event of suddenbraking, or objects may move outfrom the cargo area, which couldcause serious injury or death.

& Reclining the seatback (ifequipped)

S01AC06

Rear seats44

(47,1)


WARNING

To prevent the passenger from slid-ing under the seatbelt in the event ofa collision, observe the followingprecautions:. Keep the seatback in the upright

position while the vehicle is inmotion.

. Do not place objects such ascushions between the passengerand the seatback.

Otherwise, the risk of sliding underthe lap belt and of the lap belt slidingup over the abdomen will increase,and both can result in serious inter-nal injury or death.

CAUTION

If your vehicle is equipped with acargo area cover, observe the fol-lowing precautions.. Be careful not to pinch your hand

between the head restraint andthe cargo area cover when yourecline the rear seat.

. Move the front cover of the cargoarea cover backward so that thecover is not damaged by the

reclined seatback. Refer to “Car-go area cover” FP297.

Pull the strap and adjust the seatback tothe desired position.Then release the strap and move theseatback back and forth to confirm that itis securely fixed in place.

1-3. Head restraintsS01AS

WARNING

The front seat head restraints aredesigned to be installed into thefront seats only. The rear seat headrestraints are designed to be in-stalled into the rear seats only. Donot attempt to install the front seathead restraints into the rear seats, orthe rear seat head restraints into thefront seats.

NOTEIt is possible to adjust the angle of thefront seat head restraints only. Wheninstalling the front seat head restraints,make sure that the angle of the headrestraints can be adjusted.

– CONTINUED –

Head restraints 45

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(48,1)


& Front seatsS01AS01

Both the driver’s seat and the frontpassenger’s seat are equipped with headrestraints. Both head restraints are adjus-table in the following ways.! Height adjustment

S01AS0101

1) Head restraint2) Release button3) Remove button

To release:. Lowermost to the 1st stepPull the head restraint up to the 1st step.

To raise:. 1st step to the 3rd stepPull the head restraint up while pressingthe release button on the top of theseatback.

To lower:Push the head restraint down while press-ing the release button on the top of theseatback.To remove:Use a key or other hard, pointed object topress the remove button, then pull out thehead restraint.To install:Push the head restraint into the holes onthe top of the seatback until it locks.

Each head restraint should be adjusted sothat the center is closest to the top of theoccupant’s ears.

NOTEWhen the head restraint cannot bepulled out or installed due to insuffi-cient clearance, tilt the seat and then

perform the installation and removaltasks.

! Angle adjustmentS01AS0102

The angle of the head restraint can beadjusted in several steps. While maintain-ing a suitable driving posture, adjust thehead restraint to a position where the backof your head is as close to the headrestraint as possible.

To tilt:Tilt the head restraint by hand to thepreferred position. A click will sound whenthe head restraint is locked.To return:Tilt the head restraint as far forward as itcan go. The head restraint will automati-cally return to the fully upright position.

Head restraints46

(49,1)


Then, adjust the head restraint to thepreferred angle.

& Rear seatsS01AS02

Head restraints are installed in all second-row seats and can be adjusted as de-scribed below.! Window side seating position

S01AS0201

1) Head restraint2) Release button

To remove:Press the release button, and pull out thehead restraint.To install:Push the head restraint into the holes onthe top of the seatback until it locks. Pressand hold the release button to lower thehead restraint.

After installing the head restraint, makesure it is securely locked.! Center seating position

S01AS0202

1) When not used (retracted position)2) When used (extended position)

CAUTION

The head restraint is not intended tobe used in the retracted position.Before sitting in the seat, raise thehead restraint to the extended posi-tion.

1) Head restraint2) Release button

To raise:Pull the head restraint up.To lower:Press the release button then push thehead restraint down.To remove:Press the release button, and pull out thehead restraint.To install:Push the head restraint into the holes onthe top of the seatback until it locks. Pressand hold the release button to lower thehead restraint.

When the rear center seating position isoccupied, raise the head restraint to the

– CONTINUED –

Head restraints 47

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(50,1)


extended position.When it is not occupied,lower it to improve rearward visibility.

1-4. Seat heater (if equipped)S01AB

The seat heater is equipped in the frontseats or rear seats (window side seatingposition).

The seat heater operates when the ignitionswitch is either in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

& Safety precautionsS01AB03

CAUTION

. People with delicate skin maysuffer slight burns even at lowtemperatures if they use the seatheater for a long period of time.When using the heater, always besure to warn the persons con-cerned.

. Do not put anything on the seatwhich insulates against heat,such as a blanket, cushion, orsimilar items. This may cause theseat heater to overheat.

. When the seat is warmed enoughor before you leave the vehicle,be sure to turn off the seat heater.

NOTEUse of the seat heater for a long periodof time while the engine is not runningcan cause battery discharge.

Seat heater48

(51,1)


& Front seat heaterS01AB05

Front seats1) HI – Rapid heating2) LO – Normal heating3) OffA) Left-hand sideB) Right-hand side

To turn on the seat heater, push the “LO” or“HI” position on the switch, as desired,depending on the temperature.Selecting the “HI” position will cause theseat to heat up quicker.

To turn off the seat heater, lightly press theopposite side of the current position.

The indicator located on the switch illumi-nates when the seat heater is in operation.

& Rear seat heater (if equipped)S01AB06

CAUTION

Do not open and close the centerconsole lid while operating the rearseat heater switch. There is the riskof fingers being caught in the lid.

The seat heater operates when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

Rear seat heater switch1) HIGH mode indicators2) LOW mode indicatorsA) Left-hand sideB) Right-hand side

Press the rear seat heater switch. Eachtime you press the switch, the mode willchange as follows.

When LOW mode is selected, the LOWmode indicator on the rear seat heaterswitch illuminates. When HIGH mode isselected, both the LOW and HIGH modeindicators illuminate. When the OFF modeis selected, all the indicators turn off.

– CONTINUED –

Seat heater 49

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(52,1)


Selecting “HIGH” mode will cause the seatto heat up quicker.

NOTEOnly the front seat heater switchesretain the previous switch positioneven if the vehicle has restarted. Therear seat heater switch will reset.

1-5. SeatbeltsS01AE

& Seatbelt safety tipsS01AE01

WARNING

. All persons in the vehicle shouldfasten their seatbelts BEFOREthe vehicle starts to move. Other-wise, the possibility of seriousinjury becomes greater in theevent of a sudden stop or acci-dent.

. All belts should fit snugly in orderto provide full restraint. Loosefitting belts are not as effective inpreventing or reducing injury.

. Each seatbelt is designed to sup-port only one person. Never use asingle belt for two or more per-sons – even children. Otherwise,in an accident, serious injury ordeath could result.

. Replace all seatbelt assembliesincluding retractors and attach-ing hardware worn by occupantsof a vehicle that has been in aserious accident. The entire as-sembly should be replaced evenif damage is not obvious.

. Never use a belt that is twisted orreversed. In an accident, this canincrease the risk or severity ofinjury.

. Keep the lap belt as low aspossible on your hips. In a colli-sion, this spreads the force of thelap belt over stronger hip bonesinstead of across the weakerabdomen.

. Seatbelts provide maximum re-straint when the occupant sitswell back and upright in the seat.To reduce the risk of slidingunder the seatbelt in a collision,the front seatbacks should bealways used in the upright posi-tion while the vehicle is running.If the front seatbacks are notused in the upright position in acollision, the risk of sliding underthe lap belt and of the lap beltsliding up over the abdomen willincrease, and both can result inserious internal injury or death.

. Do not put cushions or any othermaterials between occupantsand seatbacks or seat cushions.If you do so, the risk of slidingunder the lap belt and of the lapbelt sliding up over the abdomenwill increase, and both can result

Seatbelts50

(53,1)


in serious internal injury or death.

WARNING

Never place the shoulder belt underthe arm or behind the back. If anaccident occurs, this can increasethe risk or severity of injury.

CAUTION

Metallic parts of the seatbelt canbecomevery hot in a vehicle that hasbeen closed up in sunny weather;they could burn an occupant. Do nottouch such hot parts until they cool.

Your vehicle is equipped with a crashsensing and diagnostic module, which willrecord the use of the seatbelt by the frontpassenger when any of the SRS frontal,side and curtain airbags deploy.! Infants or small children

S01AE0101Use a child restraint system that is suitablefor your vehicle. Refer to “Child restraintsystems” FP62.! Children

S01AE0102

WARNING

Place children in the rear seat prop-erly restrained at all times. The SRSairbag deploys with considerablespeed and force and can injure oreven kill children, especially if theyare not restrained or improperlyrestrained. Because children arelighter and weaker than adults, theirrisk of being injured from deploy-ment is greater. For that reason, westrongly recommend that ALL chil-dren (including those in child re-straint systems and those that haveoutgrown child restraint devices) sitin the REAR seat properly restrainedat all times in a child restraintsystem or in a seatbelt, whicheveris appropriate for the child’s heightand weight.

Secure ALL types of child restraintdevices (including forward facingchild restraint systems) in the REARseats at all times.NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONTSEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUSINJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILDBY PLACING THE CHILD’S HEADTOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seating posi-tions than in the front seating posi-tions. For instructions and precau-tions concerning the child restraintsystem, refer to “Child restraintsystems” FP62.

If a child is too big for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rear seatand be restrained using the seatbelts.According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seating positions than in the frontseating positions. Never allow a child tostand up or kneel on the seat.

If the shoulder portion of the belt crossesthe face or neck, move the child closer tothe belt buckle to help provide a goodshoulder belt fit. Care must be taken to

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts 51

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(54,1)


securely place the lap belt as low aspossible on the hips and not on the child’swaist. If the shoulder portion of the beltcannot be properly positioned, a childrestraint system should be used. Neverplace the shoulder belt under the child’sarm or behind the child’s back.! Expectant mothers

S01AE0103

Expectant mothers also need to use theseatbelts. They should consult their doctorfor specific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips, not over the waist.

& Emergency Locking Retrac-tor (ELR)

S01AE02The driver’s seatbelt has an EmergencyLocking Retractor (ELR).The emergency locking retractor allowsnormal body movement but the retractorlocks automatically during a sudden stop,impact or if you pull the belt very quicklyout of the retractor.

& Automatic LockingRetractor/Emergency Locking Retrac-tor (ALR/ELR)

S01AE03Each passenger’s seatbelt has an Auto-matic Locking Retractor/Emergency Lock-ing Retractor (ALR/ELR). The AutomaticLocking Retractor/Emergency LockingRetractor normally functions as an Emer-gency Locking Retractor (ELR). The ALR/ELR has an additional locking mode“Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode” intended to secure a child restraintsystem. When the seatbelt is once drawnout completely and is then retracted evenslightly, the retractor locks the seatbelt inthat position and the seatbelt cannot beextended. As the belt is rewinding, clickswill be heard which indicate the retractorfunctions as an ALR. When the seatbelt isretracted fully, the ALR mode is released.

When securing a child restraint system onthe rear seats by the use of the seatbelt,the seatbelt must be changed over to theAutomatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode.

When the child restraint system is re-moved, make sure that the seatbelt re-tracts fully and the retractor returned to theEmergency Locking Retractor (ELR)mode.For instructions on how to convert theretractor to the ALR mode and restore it tothe ELR mode, refer to “Installing childrestraint systems with ALR/ELR seatbelt”FP67.

& Seatbelt warning lightand chime S01AE04

Refer to “Seatbelt warning light and chime”FP169.

& Fastening the seatbeltS01AE06

! Front seatbeltsS01AE0601

1. Adjust the seat position according tothe following procedure.Driver’s seat: Adjust the seatback to theupright position. Move the seat as far fromthe steering wheel as practical while stillmaintaining full vehicle control.

Seatbelts52

(55,1)


Front passenger’s seat: Adjust the seat-back to the upright position. Move the seatas far back as possible.2. Sit well back in the seat.3. Pick up the tongue plate and pull thebelt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching thebuckle, return the belt slightly and pull itout more slowly.. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, letthe belt retract slightly after giving it astrong pull, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the tongue plate into the buckleuntil you hear a click.

5. To tighten the lap part, pull up on theshoulder belt.6. Place the lap belt as low as possible onthe hips, not on the waist.

! Adjusting the front seat shoulderbelt anchor height

S01AE060101

The shoulder belt anchor height should beadjusted to the position best suited for thedriver/front passenger. Always adjust theanchor height so that the shoulder beltpasses over the middle of the shoulderwithout touching the neck.

To raise:Slide the anchor up.To lower:Pull the release knob and slide the anchordown.

Pull down the anchor to make sure that it islocked in place.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts 53

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(56,1)


WARNING

When wearing the seatbelts, makesure the shoulder portion of thewebbing does not pass over yourneck. If it does, adjust the seatbeltanchor to a lower position. Placingthe shoulder belt over the neck mayresult in neck injury during suddenbraking or in a collision.

! Unfastening the seatbeltS01AE060102

1) Button

1. Push the button on the buckle.2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent itfrom getting tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that thebelts are retracted properly to avoidcatching the belt webbing in the door.! Rear seatbelts (except rear center

seatbelt)S01AE0602

1. Sit well back in the seat.2. Pick up the tongue plate and pull thebelt out slowly. Do not let it get twisted.

. If the belt stops before reaching thebuckle, return the belt slightly and pull itout more slowly.. If the belt still cannot be unlocked, letthe belt retract slightly after giving it astrong pull, then pull it out slowly again.



Seatbelts54

(57,1)



1) Button

1. Push the button on the buckle.2. Retract the seatbelt slowly to prevent itfrom getting tangled or twisted.

Before closing the door, make sure that thebelts are retracted properly to avoidcatching the belt webbing in the door.

! Rear center seatbeltS01AE0603

1) Center seatbelt tongue plate2) Anchor tongue plate3) Anchor buckle4) Center seatbelt buckle

WARNING

Fastening the seatbelt with the web-bing twisted can increase the risk orseverity of injury in an accident.When fastening the belt after it ispulled out from the retractor, espe-cially when inserting the anchortongue plate into the mating buckle(on right-hand side), always checkthat the webbing is not twisted.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts 55

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(58,1)


WARNING

. Be sure to fasten both tongueplates to the respective buckles.If the seatbelt is used only as ashoulder belt (with the anchortongue plate not fastened to theconnector’s buckle on the right-hand side), it cannot properlyrestrain the wearer in position inan accident, possibly resulting inserious injury or death.

. The head restraint is not intendedto be used at the lowest position.Before sitting on the seat, raisethe head restraint to the extendedposition. Otherwise, in an acci-dent, serious injury or deathcould result.

Rear center seatbelt is stowed in therecess of the ceiling.1. Retrieve the anchor tongue plate fromthe slot in the recess by pulling the anchortongue plate, then pull out the seatbeltslowly.

2. Pass the seatbelt through the beltguide.

3. After confirming that the webbing is nottwisted, insert the anchor tongue plateattached at the webbing end into thebuckle on the right-hand side until a click

Seatbelts56

(59,1)


sounds.. If the belt stops before reaching thebuckle, return the belt slightly and pull itout more slowly.. If the belt still cannot be unlocked,give it a strong pull and let it retractslightly, then pull it out slowly again.

4. Insert the center seatbelt tongue plateinto the center seatbelt buckle marked“CENTER” on the left-hand side until itclicks.



1) Button

1. Push the release button of the centerseatbelt buckle (on the left-hand side) tounfasten the seatbelt.

NOTEWhen the seatback is folded down, it isnecessary to disconnect the connector.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelts 57

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(60,1)


2. Insert a tongue plate or other hardpointed object into the slot in the anchorbuckle on the right-hand side and push itin. The anchor tongue plate will thendisconnect from the buckle.

3. With the belt held by hand, allow the

retractor to roll up the belt slowly. Youshould hold the webbing end and guide itback into the retractor while it is rolling up.Neatly store the tongue plate in the recesson the ceiling and then insert the anchortongue plate into the slot located at thefront of the recess.

CAUTION

. Do not allow the retractor to rollup the seatbelt too quickly. Other-wise, the metal tongue platesmay hit against the trim, resultingin damaged trim.

. Have the seatbelt fully rolled upso that the tongue plates areneatly stored. A hanging tongueplate can swing and hit against

the trim during driving, causingdamage to the trim.

& Seatbelt maintenanceS01AE07

To clean the seatbelts, use amild soap andlukewarm water. Never bleach or dye thebelts because this could seriously affecttheir strength.

Inspect the seatbelts and attachmentsincluding the webbing and all hardwareperiodically for cracks, cuts, gashes, tears,damage, loose bolts or worn areas. Re-place the seatbelts even if only minordamage is found.

CAUTION

. Keep the belts free of polishes,oils, chemicals and particularlybattery acid.

. Never attempt to make modifica-tions or changes that will preventthe seatbelt from operating prop-erly.

Seatbelts58

(61,1)


1-6. Seatbelt pretensionersS01AF

The following seatbelts have a seatbeltpretensioner.. Driver’s seatbelt. Front passenger’s seatbelt. Rear passenger’s seatbelt (window-side)

The seatbelt pretensioners are designedto be activated in the event of an accidentinvolving a moderate to severe frontal andside collision and rollover accident.

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection,the occupants should sit in anupright position with their seat-belts properly fastened. Refer to“Seatbelts” FP50.

. Do not modify, remove or strikethe seatbelt retractor assembliesequipped with seatbelt preten-sioners or surrounding area. Thiscould result in accidental activa-tion of the seatbelt pretensionersor could make the system inop-erative, possibly resulting in ser-ious injury. Seatbelt preten-sioners have no user-serviceableparts. For required servicing of

seatbelt retractors equipped withseatbelt pretensioners, consultyour SUBARU dealer.

. When discarding seatbelt retrac-tor assemblies equipped withseatbelt pretensioners or scrap-ping the entire vehicle due tocollision damage or for otherreasons, consult your SUBARUdealer.

NOTE. Seatbelt pretensioners are not de-signed to activate in minor impacts orin rear impacts.. Pretensioners are designed to func-tion on a one-time-only basis. In theevent that a pretensioner is activated,both the driver’s and front passenger’sseatbelt retractor assemblies shouldbe replaced only by an authorizedSUBARU dealer. When replacing seat-belt retractor assemblies, use onlygenuine SUBARU parts.. If a seatbelt that has a seatbeltpretensioner does not retract or cannotbe pulled out due to a malfunction oractivation of the pretensioner, contactyour SUBARU dealer as soon as pos-sible.. If the seatbelt retractor assembly or

surrounding area has been damaged,contact your SUBARU dealer as soonas possible.. When you sell your vehicle, we urgeyou to inform the buyer that the vehicleis equipped with seatbelt preten-sioners. Also, notify the buyer of thecontents in this section.

& Seatbelt with shoulder beltpretensioner

S01AF01NOTEThis section is applicable to the follow-ing components.. Rear passenger’s seatbelt (window-side)

The pretensioner sensor also serves asfollows.

– CONTINUED –

Seatbelt pretensioners 59

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(62,1)


. SRS frontal impact sensor

. Side impact sensor

. Rollover sensor

If the sensor detects a certain predeter-mined amount of force during frontal orside collisions or rollover accidents, anyseatbelt that has a seatbelt pretensioner isquickly drawn back in by the retractor totake up the slack so that the belt moreeffectively restrains the seat occupant.

The rear passenger’s seatbelt (window-side) pretensioner includes a tensionreducing device which limits the peakforces exerted by the seatbelt on theoccupant in the event of a collision.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,an operating noise will be heard and asmall amount of smoke will be released.These occurrences are normal and notharmful. This smoke does not indicate afire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has beenactivated, the seatbelt retractor remainslocked. Consequently, the seatbelt can notbe pulled out and retracted and thereforemust be replaced.

& Seatbelt with shoulder beltand lap belt pretensioners

S01AF02NOTEThis section is applicable to the frontseatbelt.

1) Seatbelt retractor assembly (shoulderbelt pretensioner and adaptive forcelimiter)

2) Lap belt pretensioner

The shoulder belt pretensioner is supple-mented by a lap belt pretensioner, which islocated at the base of the center pillar. Likethe shoulder belt pretensioner, the lap beltpretensioner instantaneously pulls in thebelt to eliminate slack if a certain level offrontal collision force is detected. As aresult, the seatbelt restrains the front seatoccupant more effectively.

The front seatbelt pretensioner includes atension reducing device which limits thepeak forces exerted by the seatbelt on theoccupant in the event of a collision.The adaptive force limiter will select areducing load to the suit body size ofoccupant as detected by the occupantdetection system sensors.

When a seatbelt pretensioner is activated,an operating noise will be heard and asmall amount of smoke will be released.These occurrences are normal and notharmful. This smoke does not indicate afire in the vehicle.

Once the seatbelt pretensioner has beenactivated, the seatbelt pretensioner re-mains locked. Consequently, the seatbeltcannot be pulled out and retracted andtherefore must be replaced.

& System monitorsS01AF03

A diagnostic system continually monitorsthe readiness of the seatbelt pretensionerwith the ignition switch in the “ON” position.The seatbelt pretensioners share thecontrol module with the SRS airbagsystem. Therefore, if any malfunctionoccurs in a seatbelt pretensioner, theSRS airbag system warning light willilluminate. For details, refer to “SRS airbagsystem monitors” FP106.

Seatbelt pretensioners60

(63,1)


& System servicingS01AF04

WARNING

. When discarding a seatbelt re-tractor assembly or scrappingthe entire vehicle damaged by acollision, consult your SUBARUdealer.

. Tampering with or disconnectingthe system’s wiring could resultin accidental activation of theseatbelt pretensioner and/orSRS airbag or could make thesystem inoperative, which mayresult in serious injury. Do notuse electrical test equipment onany circuit related to the seatbeltpretensioner andSRSairbag sys-tems. For required servicing ofthe seatbelt pretensioner, con-sult your nearest SUBARU deal-er.

CAUTION

For the locations of the sensors andcontrol modules, refer to “Compo-nents” FP85.If you need service or repair in thoseareas or near the front seatbelt

retractors, have the work performedby your authorized SUBARU dealer.

NOTEIf the front or side part of the vehicle isdamaged in an accident to the extentthat the seatbelt pretensioner does notoperate, contact your SUBARU dealeras soon as possible.

& Precautions against vehiclemodification

S01AF05Always consult your SUBARU dealer if youwant to install any accessory parts to yourvehicle.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the followingmodifications. Such modificationscan interfere with proper operationof the seatbelt pretensioners.. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,skid plate, etc.) other than genu-ine SUBARU accessory parts tothe front end.

. Modification of the suspensionsystem or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of differentsize and construction from thetires specified on the vehicleplacard attached to the driver’sdoor pillar or specified for indivi-dual vehicle models in this Own-er’s Manual.

Seatbelt pretensioners 61

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(64,1)


1-7. Rear Seat Reminder(models with combinationmeter display (color LCD))

S01AT

This function prompts the driver to confirmthe presence of passengers and cargo inthe rear.This function will be activated when therear doors are opened and closed.It alerts the driver by warningmessages onthe combination meter display (color LCD)and beeps when the ignition switch is inthe “OFF” position.

NOTE. This function does not directly de-tect passengers and cargo in the rearseat.

. This function detects the openingand closing of the rear doors. In thissituation, there is the possibility thatthe following phenomenon may occur.

– Itmay alert the driver even if thereare no passengers or cargo in therear seat.– It may not alert the driver even ifthere are passengers and cargo inthe rear seat.

. This function can be turned ON/OFFusing the meter customizing function.Refer to “Function settings and adjust-ments on the combination meter dis-play (color LCD)” FP26.. The ON/OFF setting will not bechanged even if the ignition switch isturned to the “OFF” position.. The ON/OFF setting will be returnedto the default setting if the battery isremoved.

1-8. Child restraint systemsS01AG

& Safety precautionsS01AG14

Infants and small children should alwaysbe placed in an infant or child restraintsystem in the rear seat while riding in thevehicle.

You should use an infant or child restraintsystem that meets Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards or Canada Motor Vehi-cle Safety Standards, is compatible withyour vehicle and is appropriate for thechild’s age and size.

All child restraint systems are designed tobe secured in vehicle seats by lap belts orthe lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt(except those described in “Installation ofchild restraint systems by use of lower and

Rear Seat Reminder (models with combination meter display (color LCD))62

(65,1)


tether anchorages (LATCH)” FP73).

Children could be endangered in anaccident if their child restraint systemsare not properly secured in the vehicle.When installing the child restraint system,carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seating positions than in the frontseating positions.

All U.S. states and Canadian provincesrequire that infants and small children berestrained in an approved child restraintsystem at all times while the vehicle ismoving.

Lock release knob1) Unlocked2) LockedA) Unlocking marker in red

WARNING

. Before installing a child restraintsystem, be sure to confirm thatthe seatback is securely lockedinto place. Otherwise, in an acci-dent, serious injury or deathcould result.

. Do not leave children in the carunattended. High interior tem-peratures may cause heat strokeand dehydration that result inserious injury or death.

WARNING

Never let a passenger hold a child onhis or her lap or in his or her armswhile the vehicle is moving. Thepassenger cannot protect the childfrom injury in a collision, becausethe child will be caught between thepassenger and objects inside thevehicle.Additionally, holding a child in yourlap or arms in the front seat exposesthat child to another serious danger.Since the SRS airbag deploys withconsiderable speed and force, thechild could be injured or even killed.

– CONTINUED –

Child restraint systems 63

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(66,1)


WARNING

Children should be properly re-strained at all times. Never allow achild to stand up, or to kneel on anyseat. Unrestrained children will bethrown forward during sudden stopor in an accident and can be injuredseriously.Additionally, children standing up orkneeling on or in front of the frontseat are exposed another seriousdanger. Since the SRS airbag de-ploys with considerable speed andforce, the child could be injured oreven killed.

& Safety tips for installing childrestraint systems

S01AG16

WARNING

. Do not use a seatbelt extender. Ifa seatbelt extender is used wheninstalling a child restraint sys-tem, the seatbelt will not securelyhold the child restraint system.Use of a seatbelt extender couldcause death or serious injury tochildren or other passengers insudden braking, swerving, oraccidents.

. Attach the child restraint systemto the anchors properly. Whenusing the LATCH anchors, besure that there are no foreignobjects around the anchors.Make sure the child restraintsystem is securely attached.Otherwise it may cause death orserious injury to children or otherpassengers in sudden braking,swerving, or accidents.

. Child restraint systems and seat-belts can become hot in a vehiclethat has been closed up in sunnyweather; they could burn a smallchild. Check the child restraintsystem before you place a child

in it.. Do not leave an unsecured child

restraint system in your vehicle.Unsecured child restraint sys-tems can be thrown around in-side of the vehicle in a suddenstop, turn or accident; they canstrike and injure vehicle occu-pants as well as result in seriousinjuries or death to the child.

CAUTION

When you install a child restraintsystem, follow the manufacturer’sinstructions supplied with it. Afterinstalling the child restraint system,check to ensure that it is heldsecurely in position. If it is not heldtight and secure, the danger of yourchild suffering personal injury in theevent of an accident may be in-creased.

Child restraint systems64

(67,1)


& Where to place a child re-straint system

S01AG01The following descriptions are SUBARU’srecommendations on where to place achild restraint system in your vehicle.

WARNING

. Several types of child restraintsystems may conceal the buckleof the neighboring seat. If theoccupant of the neighboring seatcannot correctly fasten the seat-belt, that person must move to adifferent seat. If the seatbelt can-not be correctly fastened, there isthe risk of serious injury or deathin the event of sudden braking ora collision.

. If the child restraint system can-not be correctly installed be-cause it contacts the driver’sseat, move the child restraintsystem to a different seat. If itcannot be installed in a differentseat (other than the driver’s seat),adjust the front seat so thatcontact does not occur.

A: Front passenger’s seatYou should not install a child restraintsystem (including a booster seat) due tothe hazard to children posed by thepassenger’s airbag.

B: Rear seat, window-side seatingpositionsRecommended positions for all types ofchild restraint systems.In these positions, the following equipmentis provided for installing a child restraintsystem.. Automatic Locking Retractor/Emer-gency Locking Retractor (ALR/ELR) seat-belts. Lower anchorages (bars). Upper anchorages (tether anchorages)

Some types of child restraint systemsmight not be able to be secured firmlydue to projection of the seat cushion.In this seating position, you should useonly a child restraint system that has abottom base that fits snugly against thecontours of the seat cushion and can besecurely retained using the seatbelt.

C: Rear seat, center seating positionIn this position, the following equipment isprovided for installing a child restraintsystem.. ALR/ELR seatbelts. Lower anchorages (bars). Top tether anchorages

Some types of child restraint systemsmight not be able to be secured firmlydue to projection of the seat cushion.In this seating position, you should useonly a child restraint system that has abottom base that fits snugly against thecontours of the seat cushion and can besecurely retained using the seatbelt.The rear center seat includes lower an-chorages, and the lower anchorages onthe center side of the rear right seat can beused to install a child restraint system.When a child restraint system is installed inthe rear center seat using the loweranchorages, do not sit in the rear right

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(68,1)


seat.If a child restraint system is not correctlyfixed in place (for example, if a childrestraint system can be moved more than1 inch (2.5 cm) from side to side), the childrestraint system should be moved to awindow seat position of the rear seat.

WARNING

. Evenwith advanced airbags, chil-dren can be seriously injured bythe airbag. Seat children in therear seat properly restrained atall times. The SRS airbag deployswith considerable speed andforce and can injure or even killchildren, especially if they are notrestrained or improperly re-strained. Because children arelighter and weaker than adults,their risk of being injured fromdeployment is greater.For that reason, be sure to secureALL types of child restraint sys-tems (including forward facingchild restraint systems) in theREAR seats at all times. Youshould choose a restraint systemwhich is appropriate for thechild’s age, height and weight.According to accident statistics,

children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seatingpositions.

. Do not use lower anchorages(bars) for a seat in the centerseating position unless a childrestraint system manufacturer’sinstructions permit and specifyusing anchors spaced as farapart as those in this vehicle.

. Do not connect two ormore lowerhooks onto the same anchorage(bar).

WARNING

. SINCE YOUR VEHICLE ISEQUIPPED WITH A PASSEN-GER’S SRS AIRBAG, NEVER IN-STALL A CHILD RESTRAINTSYSTEM IN THE FRONT PAS-SENGER’S SEAT. DOING SORISKS SERIOUS INJURY ORDEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOOCLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

. Do not allow children to lean theirheads or any other parts of theirbodies against the door or thearea of the seat, front and rearpillars or roof side rails. The SRSside airbags and SRS curtainairbags deploy even if childrenare seated in the child restraintsystem, and the impact couldcause death or serious injury tothe child.

. To secure the child restraint sys-tem, be sure to comply with allinstallation instructions providedby the child restraint systemmanufacturer. Not doing so couldresult in death or serious injury tochildren in a sudden stop oraccident.


(69,1)


& Choosing a child restraintsystem

S01AG02

Choose a child restraint system that isappropriate for the child’s age and size(weight and height) in order to provide thechild with proper protection. The childrestraint system should meet all applicablerequirements of Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards for the United States orof CanadaMotor Vehicle Safety Standardsfor Canada. It can be identified by lookingfor the label on the child restraint system orthe manufacturer’s statement of compli-ance in the document attached to thesystem.

Also it is important for you to make surethat the child restraint system is compa-tible with the vehicle in which it will beused.

NOTESome sizes of child restraint systemsmay not fit the vehicle seat. Beforepurchasing a child restraint system,checkwhether it fits on the vehicle seat.

& Installing child restraint sys-tems with ALR/ELR seatbelt

S01AG04

CAUTION

. When you install a child restraintsystem, follow the manufac-turer’s instructions supplied withit. After installing the child re-straint system, check to ensurethat it is held securely in position.If it is not held tight and secure,the danger of your child sufferingpersonal injury in the event of anaccident may be increased.

. When installing a child restraintsystem in the rear center seatingposition, set both seatbacks tothe original position. Otherwise,the child restraint system cannotbe securely restrained, which

may result in death or seriousinjuries in the event of suddenstop, sudden steering maneuveror an accident.

! Installing a rearward facing childrestraint system

S01AG0401

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINTSYSTEM IN THEFRONTPASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SORISKS SERIOUS INJURY ORDEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOOCLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.


1. Place the child restraint system in therear seating position.

WARNING

When you intend to install a childrestraint system in the rear centerseating position, if the child restraint

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(70,1)


system does not fit snugly againstthe contours of the rear center seatcushion, install the child restraintsystem in the window-side seatingposition to be safe. For details, referto “Where to place a child restraintsystem” FP65.

2. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the child restraint system follow-ing the instructions provided by its manu-facturer.3. Insert the tongue plate into the buckleuntil you hear a click.

4. Take up the slack in the lap belt.5. If using the seatbelt in the ALRmode isrecommended by the manufacturer’s in-structions supplied with the child restraintsystem, perform the following procedure.(1) Pull out the seatbelt fully from theretractor to change the retractor over fromthe Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) tothe Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)mode.(2) Allow the belt to rewind into theretractor. As the belt is rewinding, clickswill be heard which indicate the retractorfunctions as ALR.

6. Before having a child sit in the childrestraint system, try to move it back andforth and right and left to check if it is firmlysecured. Sometimes a child restraintsystem can be more firmly secured bypushing it down into the seat cushion andthen tightening the seatbelt. It should notbe possible to move the child restraintsystem more than 1 in (2.5 cm) in anydirection along the seatbelt path.7. If the seatbelt has been set to the ALRmode in step 5, pull at the shoulder portionof the belt to confirm that it cannot bepulled out (ALR properly functioning).


(71,1)


8. To remove the child restraint system,press the release button on the seatbeltbuckle and allow the belt to retractcompletely. The belt will return to theELR mode.

NOTEWhen the child restraint system is nolonger in use, remove it and restore theELR function of the retractor. Thatfunction is restored by allowing theseatbelt to retract fully.

! Installing a forward facing childrestraint system

S01AG0402

WARNING

. NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINTSYSTEM INTHEFRONTPASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SORISKS SERIOUS INJURY ORDEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLA-CING THE CHILD’S HEAD TOOCLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.


1. Place the child restraint system in therear seating position.2. For models with rear seat recliningmechanism, if there is a gap between thechild restraint system and the seatback,adjust the seatback angle until goodcontact is achieved.

3. Remove the head restraint of the rearseating position where the child restraintsystem is to be installed. For details, referto “Head restraints” FP45.

CAUTION

Store the head restraint that hasbeen removed in the cargo area. Donot place the head restraint in thepassenger compartment to preventit from being thrown around in thepassenger compartment in a sud-den stop or a sharp turn.

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(72,1)


WARNING

When you intend to install a childrestraint system on the rear centerseating position, if the child restraintsystem does not fit snugly againstthe contours of the rear center seatcushion, install the child restraintsystem on the window-side seatingposition to be safe. For details, referto “Where to place a child restraintsystem” FP65.

4. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the child restraint system follow-ing the instructions provided by its manu-facturer.

– When a child restraint system isinstalled on the rear center seating

position, pass the rear center seatbeltthrough the belt guide properly. Fordetails, refer to “Rear center seatbelt”FP55.


6. Take up the slack in the lap belt.7. Pull out the seatbelt fully from theretractor to change the retractor over fromthe Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) tothe Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)function. Then, allow the belt to rewind intothe retractor. As the belt is rewinding,clicks will be heard which indicate theretractor functions as ALR.

8. Before having a child sit in the childrestraint system, try to move it back andforth and right and left to check if it is firmlysecured. Sometimes a child restraintsystem can be more firmly secured bypushing it down into the seat cushion andthen tightening the seatbelt. It should notbe possible to move the child restraintsystem more than 1 in (2.5 cm) in anydirection along the seatbelt path.9. Pull at the shoulder portion of the beltto confirm that it cannot be pulled out (ALRproperly functioning).


(73,1)


10. Latch the top tether hook onto thetether anchorage that is located behind therear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.For additional instructions, refer to “Toptether anchorages” FP77.

11. To remove the child restraint system,

press the release button on the seatbeltbuckle and allow the belt to retractcompletely. The belt will return to theELR mode.

Remember that the head restraint is notintended to be used at the lowest position(retracted position). Therefore, when therear center seat is occupied (includingwhen a child restraint system is installed)next time, be sure to raise the headrestraint to the extended position.

NOTEWhen the child restraint system is nolonger in use, remove it and restore theELR function of the retractor. Thatfunction is restored by allowing theseatbelt to retract fully.

& Installing a booster seat orbooster cushion

S01AG05

Booster seat

Booster cushion

1. For models with rear seat reclining

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(74,1)


mechanism, if there is a gap between thebooster seat/cushion and the seatback,adjust the seatback angle until goodcontact is achieved.2. Adjust the head restraint as follows.

For booster seat:

(1) Remove the head restraint fromthe rear seating position where thechild restraint system is to be installed.(2) Store the removed head restraintin the cargo area.

CAUTION

Do not place the head restraint in thepassenger compartment to preventit from being thrown around in thepassenger compartment in a sud-den stop or a sharp turn.

For booster cushion:

(1) Raise the head restraint to theextended position (center seat). Donot remove the head restraint.

3. Place the booster seat/cushion in the

rear seating position and sit the child on it.The child should sit well back on thebooster seat/cushion.4. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the booster seat/cushion andthe child following the instructions pro-vided by its manufacturer. For boosterseat/cushion with a belt guide, use theseatbelt through the belt guide.5. Insert the tongue plate into the buckleuntil you hear a click. Take care not to twistthe seatbelt.Make sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the center of child’s shoulder andthat the lap belt is positioned as low aspossible on the child’s hips.

6. To remove the booster seat/cushion,press the release button on the seatbeltbuckle and allow the belt to retract.


(75,1)


WARNING

. Never use a belt that is twisted orreversed. In an accident, this canincrease the risk or severity ofinjury to the child.

. Never place the shoulder beltunder the child’s arm or behindthe child’s back. If an accidentoccurs, this can increase the riskor severity of injury to the child.

. The seatbelt should fit snugly inorder to provide full restraint.Loose fitting belts are not aseffective in preventing or redu-cing injury.

. Place the lap belt as low aspossible on the child’s hips.High-positioned lap belt will in-crease the risk of sliding underthe lap belt and of the lap beltsliding up over the abdomen, andboth can result in serious internalinjury or death.

. Make sure the shoulder belt ispositioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. Placing theshoulder belt over the neck mayresult in neck injury during sud-den braking or in a collision.

& Installation of child restraintsystems by use of lower andtether anchorages (LATCH)

S01AG07

! Lower and tether anchoragesS01AG0701

WARNING

. Attach the child restraint systemto the anchors properly. Whenusing the LATCH anchors, besure that there are no foreignobjects around the anchors.Make sure the child restraintsystem is securely attached.Otherwise it may cause death orserious injury to children or otherpassengers in sudden braking,swerving, or accidents.

. When installing a child restraintsystem using LATCH anchorswith the rear seatbelt fastened,ensure that the rear seatbelt doesnot become caught in the childrestraint system or the lowerLATCH anchorages.

NOTEThe seatbelt warning system of the rearseats detects if any of the seats areoccupied by a passenger. Installing achild restraint system in the rear seat-ing area, using the LATCH anchors,may result in the activation of thepassenger seatbelt warning light andchime. Fastening the rear seatbelt priorto installing the child restraint systemwill avoid activating the passengerseatbelt warning light and chime.For details, refer to “Rear passenger’sseats” FP171.Some types of child restraint systems canbe installed on the rear seat of your vehiclewithout use of the seatbelts. Such childrestraint systems are secured to thededicated anchorages provided on thevehicle body. The lower and tether an-chorages are sometimes referred to as theLATCH system (Lower Anchors andTethers for CHildren).

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(76,1)


Your vehicle is equipped with five loweranchorages (bars) and three upper an-chorages (tether anchorages) for accom-modating such child restraint systems.

! Lower anchoragesS01AG070101

WARNING

Do not connect two or more lowerhooks onto the same anchorage(bar).

There are a total of 5 lower anchorages atthe rear seat. The rear anchorage from theright side is used for both the right seat andcenter seat. Each lower anchorage islocated where the seat cushion meetsthe seatback.

! Tether anchoragesS01AG070102

The tether anchorages (upper an-chorages) are provided at the locationsshown in the above illustration. For details,refer to “Top tether anchorages” FP77.

! To install a child restraint systemusing lower and tether an-chorages

S01AG070103

WARNING

Before installing a child restraintsystem, be sure to confirm that theseatback is securely locked intoplace. Otherwise, in an accident,serious injury or death could result.


(77,1)


1. Move the seatback back and forth toconfirm that it is securely locked into place.

– Check the red colored unlockingmarker which is attached to the bottomof the lock release knob is not visible.For details, refer to “Folding down therear seatback” FP42.

2. You will find “ ” marks at the bottomsof the rear seatback. Thesemarks indicatethe positions of the lower anchorages(bars).

3. Peel off the anchorage cover from theselected side of the rear seatback. Fold thepeeled anchorage cover in half and affix itwith hook and loop tape to expose theanchorages (bars) to be used for installa-tion of the child restraint system.4. For models with rear seat recliningmechanism, if there is a gap between thechild restraint system and the seatback,adjust the seatback angle until goodcontact is achieved.

5. Remove the rear seat head restraint.For details, refer to “Head restraints”FP45.

CAUTION

Store the head restraint that hasbeen removed in the cargo area. Donot place the head restraint in thepassenger compartment to preventit from being thrown around in thepassenger compartment in a sud-den stop or a sharp turn.

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(78,1)


6. While following the instructions sup-plied by the child restraint system manu-facturer, connect the lower hooks onto thelower anchorages located at “ ” marks onthe bottom of the rear seatback. When thehooks are connected, make sure theadjacent seatbelts are not caught.

7. If your child restraint system is aflexible attachment type (which uses tetherbelts), push the child restraint system intothe seat cushion and pull both left and rightlower tether belts up to secure the childrestraint system by taking up the slack inthe belt.8. Latch the top tether hook onto thetether anchorage that is located behind therear seat and tighten the top tether firmly.For additional instructions, refer to “Toptether anchorages” FP77.

9. Before having a child sit in the childrestraint system, try to move it back andforth and right and left to check if it is firmlysecured. Sometimes a child restraintsystem can be more firmly secured bypushing it down into the seat cushion. Itshould not be possible to move the childrestraint system more than 1 in (2.5 cm) inany direction along the seatbelt path.10. To remove the child restraint system,follow the reverse procedures of installa-tion.

SUBARU recommends that you checkwith a certified Child Passenger SafetyTechnician to ensure the proper installa-tion of your child restraint system. Formore information, and to locate the closestinspection location in the U.S., refer to the


(79,1)


National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-tration (NHTSA) website. In Canada,check with Transport Canada.& Top tether anchorages

S01AG09Your vehicle is equipped with three toptether anchorages so that a child restraintsystem having a top tether can be installedin the rear seat. When installing a childrestraint system using top tether, proceedas follows, while observing the instructionsby the child restraint systemmanufacturer.

Since a top tether can provide additionalstability by offering another connectionbetween a child restraint system and thevehicle, we recommend that you use a toptether whenever one is required or avail-able.

! Anchorage locationS01AG0901

1) For left seat2) For center seat3) For right seat

Three upper anchorages are installed onthe back side of the rear seatback.

! To hook the top tetherS01AG0902

CAUTION

. Remove the head restraint whenmounting a child restraint sys-tem. Otherwise, the top tethercannot be fastened tightly.

. Store the head restraint that hasbeen removed in the cargo area.Do not place the head restraint inthe passenger compartment toprevent it from being thrownaround in the passenger com-partment in a sudden stop or asharp turn.

1. Remove the head restraint where thechild restraint system is to be installed. Fordetails, refer to “Head restraints” FP45.2. For models with a reclining rear seat,adjust the seatback to the upright position.

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(80,1)


3. Attach the top tether hook to theappropriate upper anchorage.4. Tighten the top tether securely.

SUBARU recommends that you checkwith a certified Child Passenger SafetyTechnician to ensure the proper installa-tion of your child restraint system. Formore information, and to locate the closestinspection location in the U.S., refer to theNational Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-tration (NHTSA) website. In Canada,check with Transport Canada.

1-9. SRS airbag (Supplemen-tal Restraint System airbag)

S01AH

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)name is used because the airbag systemsupplements the vehicle’s seatbelts.

This vehicle is equipped with a supple-mental restraint system which consists ofseven airbags.The configurations are as follows.. Driver’s and front passenger’s frontalairbags. Driver’s and front passenger’s sideairbags. Curtain airbags (for driver, front pas-senger, and window-side rear passen-gers). Knee airbag for driver

These SRS airbags are designed onlyas a supplement to the primary protec-tion provided by the seatbelt.The system also controls seatbelt preten-sioners. For operation instructions andprecautions concerning the seatbelt pre-tensioner, refer to “Seatbelt pretensioners”FP59.

& General precautions regard-ing SRS airbag system

S01AH10

WARNING

. To obtain maximum protection inthe event of an accident, thedriver and all passengers mustalways wear seatbelts when inthe vehicle. The SRS airbag isdesigned only to be a supplementto the primary protection pro-vided by the seatbelt. It does noteliminate the need to fasten seat-belts. In combination with theseatbelts, it offers the best pro-tection in case of a serious acci-dent.Not wearing a seatbelt increasesthe chance of severe injury ordeath in a crash even when thevehicle has the SRS system.For instructions and precautionsconcerning the seatbelt system,refer to “Seatbelts” FP50.

. The SRS side airbags and SRScurtain airbags are designed onlyto be a supplement to the primaryprotection provided by the seat-belt. They do not eliminate theneed to fasten seatbelts. It is alsoimportant to wear a seatbelt to

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)78

(81,1)


help avoid injuries that can resultwhen an occupant is not seatedin a proper upright position.

WARNING

The SRS airbags deploy with con-siderable speed and force. Occu-pants who are not seated in properupright position when the SRS air-bag deploys could suffer seriousinjury. Because the SRS airbagneeds enough space for deploy-ment, the driver should always situpright and back in the seat as farfrom the steering wheel as practicalwhile still maintaining full vehiclecontrol, and the front passengershould move the seat as far back

as possible and sit upright and wellback in the seat.

WARNING

. Do not sit or lean close to eitherfront door. The SRS side airbagsare stored in both front seatseatbacks next to the door, andthey provide protection by de-ploying rapidly in the event of aside impact collision. However,the force of SRS side airbagdeployment can injure an occu-pant whose body is too close toan SRS airbag.

. Since your vehicle is equippedwith SRS curtain airbags, do not

sit or lean close to the front orrear door on either side. Do notput body parts out of the window.The SRS curtain airbags on bothsides of the cabin are stored inthe roof side (between the frontpillar and a point behind the rearquarter glass), and they provideprotection by deploying rapidlyin the event of a side impact,rollover or an offset frontal colli-sion. However, the force of itsdeployment can injure an occu-pant whose body is too close toan SRS airbag.

. Do not sit or lean unnecessarilyclose to the SRS airbag. Becausethe SRS airbag deploys withconsiderable speed and force toprotect in high speed collisions,the force of an airbag can injurean occupant whose body is tooclose to SRS airbag.It is also important to wear seat-belts to help avoid injuries thatcan result when the SRS airbagcontacts an occupant not in theirproper position.Even when properly positioned,there remains a possibility thatan occupant may suffer minorinjury, such as abrasions and

– CONTINUED –

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag) 79

1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(82,1)


bruises to the face or arms,because of the SRS airbag de-ployment force.

WARNING

. Keep arms away from either frontdoor or its internal trim. Theycould be injured in the event ofSRS side airbag deployment.

. Do not place any objects over ornear the SRS airbag cover orbetween you and the SRS airbag.If the SRS airbag deploys, theseobjects could interfere with itsproper operation and could bepropelled inside the vehicle,causing injury.

CAUTION

. When the SRS airbag deploys,some smoke will be released.This smoke could cause breath-ing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breath-ing trouble. If you or your pas-sengers have breathing pro-blems after SRS airbag deploys,get fresh air promptly.

. A deploying SRS airbag releaseshot gas. Occupants could getburned if they come into directcontact with the hot gas.

NOTE. When you sell your vehicle, we urgeyou to inform the buyer that the vehicleis equipped with SRS airbags. Also,notify the buyer of the applicable sec-tion in this Owner’s Manual.. If the SRS airbag deploys, fuelsupply will be cut off to reduce the riskof fire caused by leaking fuel. Fordetails about restarting of the engine,refer to “If your vehicle is involved in anaccident” FP454.

& General precautions regard-ing SRS airbag system foraccessories and any objects

S01AH13


(83,1)


WARNING

. Do not put any objects (includingstraps or cords) over the steeringwheel pad, column cover, ordashboard.– These objects could be en-

tangled with the steeringwheel, preventing the SRSfrontal airbag, etc. from oper-ating properly.

– If the SRS frontal airbag de-ploys, these objects could bepropelled inside the vehicle,causing injury.

. Do not put any objects under thedriver’s side of the instrumentpanel. If the SRS knee airbagdeploys, those objects could in-terfere with its proper operationand could be propelled inside thevehicle, causing injury.

. The key must not be attached toheavy, sharp or hard acces-sories, or another key. If the SRSknee airbag deploys, those ob-jects could interfere with itsproper operation and could bepropelled inside the vehicle andcause injury.

WARNING

Do not attach accessories to thewindshield or fit an extra-wide mir-ror over the inside rear viewmirror. Ifthe SRS airbag deploys, those ob-jects could become projectiles thatcould seriously injure vehicle occu-pants.

WARNING

. Do not attach accessories to thedoor trim or near either SRS sideairbags and do not place objectsnear the SRS side airbags. In theevent of SRS side airbag deploy-ment, they could be propelleddangerously toward the vehicle’soccupants and cause injuries.

. Do not attach a hands-free micro-phone or any other accessory toa front pillar, a center pillar, a rearpillar, the windshield, a side win-dow, an assist grip, or any othercabin surface that would be neara deploying SRS curtain airbag. Ahands-free microphone or other

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(84,1)


accessory in such a locationcould be propelled through thecabin with great force by thecurtain airbag, or it could preventcorrect deployment of the curtainairbag. In either case, the resultcould be serious injuries.

WARNING

. Do not put any kind of clothes orother objects over either frontseatback and do not attach labelsor stickers to the front seat sur-face on or near the SRS sideairbag. They could prevent prop-er deployment of the SRS sideairbag, reducing protection avail-able to the front seat’s occupant.

. Do not install a seat cover unlessit is a genuine SUBARU seatcover exclusively designed foruse with the SRS airbag. Evenwhen using a genuine SUBARUseat cover, the SRS side airbagsystem may not function nor-mally if the seat cover is notinstalled correctly.

& General precautions regard-ing SRS airbag system andchildren

S01AH14

WARNING

Seat children in the rear seat prop-erly restrained at all times. The SRS

airbag deploys with considerablespeed and force and can injure oreven kill children, especially if theyare not restrained or improperlyrestrained. Because children arelighter and weaker than adults, theirrisk of being injured from deploy-ment is greater.For that reason, we strongly recom-mend that ALL children (includingthose in child seats and those thathave outgrown child restraint sys-tems) sit in the REAR seat properlyrestrained at all times in a childrestraint device or in a seatbelt,whichever is appropriate for thechild’s age, height and weight.Secure ALL types of child restraintsystems (including forward facingchild seats) in the REAR seats at alltimes.According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seating posi-tions than in the front seating posi-tions.For instructions and precautionsconcerning the child restraint sys-tem, refer to “Child restraint sys-tems” FP62.


(85,1)


WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONTPASSENGER’S SEAT. DOING SORISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATHTO THE CHILD BY PLACING THECHILD’S HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THESRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

Never allow a child to stand up orkneel on the front passenger’s seat.The SRS airbag deploys with con-siderable force and can injure oreven kill the child.

WARNING

Never hold a child on your lap or inyour arms. The SRS airbag deployswith considerable force and caninjure or even kill the child.

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(86,1)


WARNING

. Never allow a child to do thefollowing.– Kneel on any passenger’s seat

facing the side window.– Wrap his/her arms around the

front seat seatback.– Put his/her head, arms or

other parts of the body out ofthe window.

In the event of an accident, theforce of SRS side airbag and/orSRS curtain airbag deploymentcould injure the child seriouslybecause his/her head, arms orother parts of the body are tooclose to the SRS side airbag and/or SRS curtain airbag.

. Since your vehicle is alsoequipped with a front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag, childrenshould be placed in the rear seatanyway and should be properlyrestrained at all times.


(87,1)


& ComponentsS01AH11

1) SRS frontal airbag2) SRS side airbag3) SRS curtain airbag4) SRS knee airbag

The SRS airbags are stowed in thefollowing locations.

Driver’s SRS frontal airbag: in the centerportion of the steering wheelA “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at thepad of the airbag.

Front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag:near the top of the dashboard under the“SRS AIRBAG” mark

SRS side airbag: in the door side of eachfront seat seatback which bears an “SRSAIRBAG” label

SRS curtain airbag: in the roof side(between the front pillar and a point behindthe rear quarter glass)“SRS AIRBAG” marks are located at thetop of each center pillar.

SRS knee airbag: under the steeringcolumnA “SRS AIRBAG” mark is located at thedoor of the airbag.

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(88,1)


1) Airbag control module (including impactsensor and rollover sensor)

2) Frontal airbag module (driver’s side)3) Frontal airbag module (front passenger’s

side)4) Front impact sensor (left-hand side)5) Front impact sensor (right-hand side)6) Side airbag module (driver’s side)7) Side airbag module (front passenger’s

side)8) Side impact sensor (center pillar left-

hand side)9) Side impact sensor (center pillar right-

hand side)10) Airbag wiring11) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force

limiter (driver’s side)12) Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptive force

limiter (front passenger’s side)13) Side impact sensor (rear wheel house

right-hand side)14) Side impact sensor (rear wheel house

left-hand side)15) Curtain airbag module (right-hand side)16) Curtain airbag module (left-hand side)17) Seatbelt buckle switch (front passenger’s

side)18) Knee airbag module (driver’s side)19) Front passenger’s occupant detection

system sensor20) Front passenger’s occupant detection

control module21) Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and

OFF indicator22) SRS airbag system warning light


(89,1)


23) Side impact sensor (under the rear centerseat)

24) Side impact sensor (front door left-handside)

25) Side impact sensor (front door right-handside)

26) Lap belt pretensioner (front passenger’sside)

27) Lap belt pretensioner (driver’s side)28) Driver’s seat position sensor29) Passenger’s seat position sensor30) Rear seatbelt pretensioner (front passen-

ger’s side)31) Rear seatbelt pretensioner (driver’s side)

& SUBARU advanced frontalairbag system

S01AH02Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARUadvanced frontal airbag system that com-plies with the new advanced frontal airbagrequirements in the amended FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)No. 208.The SUBARU advanced frontal airbagsystem automatically determines the de-ployment force of the driver’s SRS frontalairbag at the time of deployment as well aswhether or not to activate the frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbag and, ifactivated, the deployment force of the SRSfrontal airbag at the time of deployment.

Your vehicle has warning labels on thedriver’s and front passenger’s sun visorsbeginning with the phrase “EVEN WITH

ADVANCED AIR BAGS” and a tag at-tached to the glove box lid beginning withthe phrase “Even with Advanced AirBags”. Make sure that you carefully readthe instructions on the warning labels andtag.Always wear your seatbelt. The SUBARUadvanced frontal airbag system is asupplemental restraint system and mustbe used in combination with a seatbelt. Alloccupants should wear a seatbelt or beseated in an appropriate child restraintsystem.For the locations of the SRS airbags, referto “Components” FP85.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision,the following components deploy.. SRS frontal airbag for driver. SRS frontal airbag for front passenger. SRS knee airbag for driver. SRS curtain airbag*1*1: When an offset frontal collision that is severe

enough to deploy the front airbag occurs.

These components supplement the seat-belts by reducing the impact to theoccupant’s head, chest and knees.

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(90,1)


! Driver’s SRS frontal airbagS01AH0201

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag uses a dualstage inflator. The inflator operates indifferent ways depending on the severityof impact.

SRS airbag system warning lightHave the system inspected by yourSUBARU dealer immediately if the SRSairbag system warning light illuminates.

NOTEThe driver’s SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag are not controlled by theSUBARU advanced frontal airbag sys-tem.

! Front passenger’s SRS frontal air-bag

S01AH0202The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbaguses a dual stage inflator. The inflatoroperates in different ways depending onthe severity of impact.

1) Occupant detection system sensors

The occupant detection system sensorsare installed between the seat and seatrails, and monitor the physique and pos-ture of the front passenger. Using thisinformation, the occupant detection sys-tem determines whether the front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de-ployed or not.

The occupant detection system may notinflate the front passenger’s SRS frontalairbag even when the driver’s SRS frontal

airbag deploys. This is normal. In thiscase, although the front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag does not operate, the frontpassenger’s seatbelt pretensioner oper-ates with the driver’s seatbelt preten-sioner. For details about the seatbeltpretensioner, refer to “Seatbelt preten-sioners” FP59.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.Failure to do so may prevent theSUBARU advanced frontal airbagsystem from functioning correctlyor cause the system to fail.. Do not apply any strong impact to

the front passenger’s seat, suchas by kicking.

. Do not let rear passengers resttheir feet between the front seat-back and seat cushion.

. Do not spill liquid on the frontpassenger’s seat. If liquid isspilled, wipe it off immediately.

. Do not remove or disassemblethe front passenger’s seat.

. Do not install any accessory(such as an audio amplifier) otherthan a genuine SUBARU acces-sory under the front passenger’s


(91,1)


seat.. Do not place anything (shoes,

umbrella, etc.) under the frontpassenger’s seat.

. Do not place any objects (books,etc.) around the front passen-ger’s seat.

. Do not use the front passenger’sseat with the head restraint re-moved.

. Do not leave any articles on thefront passenger’s seat or theseatbelt tongue and buckle en-gaged when you leave your vehi-cle.

. Do not put sharp object(s) on theseat or pierce the seat uphols-tery.

. Do not place a magnet near theseatbelt buckle and the seatbeltretractor.

. Do not use front seats with theirforward-backward position andseatback not being locked intoplace securely. If any of them arenot locked securely, adjust themagain. For adjusting procedure,refer to “Forward and backwardadjustment” FP35 and “Reclin-ing the seatback” FP35.

SRS airbag system warning lightIf the seatbelt buckle switch and/or frontpassenger’s occupant detection systemhave failed, the SRS airbag system warn-ing light will illuminate. Have the systeminspected by your SUBARU dealer imme-diately if the SRS airbag system warninglight illuminates.If your vehicle has sustained impact, thismay affect the proper function of theSUBARU advanced frontal airbag system.Have your vehicle inspected at yourSUBARU dealer. Do not use the frontpassenger’s seat while driving the vehicleto your SUBARU dealer.

NOTEThe front passenger’s SRS side airbagand SRS curtain airbag are not con-trolled by the SUBARU advanced fron-tal airbag system.

! Passenger’s frontal airbag ON andOFF indicators

S01AH0203

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ONindicator: Front passenger’s frontal airbag OFFindicator

Refer to “Front passenger’s frontal airbagON and OFF indicators” FP172.

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(92,1)


! Occupant detection systemS01AH0209

1) Occupant detection system sensors

The occupant detection system sensorsare installed between the seat and seatrails, and monitor the physique and pos-ture of the front passenger. Using thisinformation, the occupant detection sys-tem determines whether the front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag should be de-ployed or not.

WARNING

Do not kick the front passenger seator subject it to severe impact. Other-wise, the SRS airbag system warn-ing light may illuminate to indicate amalfunction of the front passengeroccupant detection system. In this

case, contact your SUBARU dealerimmediately.

CAUTION

Electrical devices, such as cellphones, laptops, portable musicplayers, or electronic games, espe-cially when connected to the acces-sory power outlet and placed on thefront passenger’s seat or used bythe person sitting in the front pas-senger’s seat, may affect the opera-tion of the occupant detection sys-tem. If either of the following situa-tions occurs when using an electro-nic device in the vehicle, at first tryto relocate that device to avoid itcreating any interference.. The SRS airbag system warning

light illuminates.. The front passenger’s frontal air-

bag ON and OFF indicators oper-ate erratically.

If the device continues to causeinterference, the use of that devicein the vehicle should be discontin-ued.

SRS airbag system warning lightIf the front passenger’s seat cushion iswet, this may adversely affect the ability ofthe system to determine deployment.Wipe off liquid from the seat, let the seatdry naturally and then check the SRSairbag system warning light.


(93,1)



If the front passenger’s frontal airbag ONand OFF indicators do not work properlyeven when the front passenger’s seat isdry, do not allow anyone to sit on the frontpassenger’s seat and have the occupantdetection system checked by yourSUBARU dealer.


Also, if luggage or electronic devices areplaced on the front passenger’s seat, thismay adversely affect the ability of thesystem to determine deployment. Thismay prevent the front passenger’s frontalairbag ON and OFF indicators from work-ing properly. Check that the indicatorswork properly.When the OFF indicator turns off and theON indicator illuminates, the front passen-ger’s frontal airbag may deploy during acollision. Remove luggage and electronicdevices from the front passenger’s seat.

! Conditions in which front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag is notactivated

S01AH0204The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagwill not be activated when any of thefollowing conditions are met regardingthe front passenger’s seat:. The seat is empty.. The seat is equipped with an appro-priate child restraint system and an infantor a child is restrained in it. (See WARN-ING that follows.). The front passenger’s occupant detec-tion system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

NEVER INSTALL A CHILD RE-STRAINT SYSTEM IN THE FRONTSEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSEN-GER’S SRS FRONTAL AIRBAG ISDEACTIVATED.Be sure to install it inthe REAR seat in a correct manner.Also, it is strongly recommendedthat any forward facing child seat orbooster seat be installed in theREAR seat, and that even childrenwho have outgrown a child restraintsystem be also seated in the REARseat. This is because children sittingin the front passenger’s seat may bekilled or severely injured should the

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(94,1)


front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagdeploy. REAR seats are the safestplace for children.

CAUTION

When the front passenger’s seat isoccupied by an infant in an appro-priate child restraint system, ob-serve the following precautions.Failure to do so may interfere withthe proper operation of the occupantdetection system, activating thefront passenger’s SRS frontal airbageven though that seat is occupied bythe infant in the child restraintsystem.. Do not place any article (includ-

ing electronic devices) on theseat other than the infant in thechild restraint system.

. Do not placemore than one infantin the child restraint system.

! If the front passenger’s frontalairbag ON indicator illuminatesand the OFF indicator turns offeven when an infant or a smallchild is in a child restraint sys-tem (including booster seat)

S01AH020401


1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.2. Remove the child restraint system fromthe seat.3. By referring to the child restraintmanufacturer’s recommendations as wellas the child restraint system installationprocedures in “Child restraint systems”FP62, correctly install the child restraint

system.4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position and make sure that the frontpassenger’s frontal airbag ON indicatorturns off and the OFF indicator illuminates.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminatedwhile the OFF indicator turns off, take thefollowing actions.. Ensure that no article is placed on theseat other than the child restraint systemand the child occupant.. Ensure that the backward-forward po-sition and seatback of the front passen-ger’s seat are locked into place securelyby moving the seat back and forth.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminatedwhile the OFF indicator turns off aftertaking the relevant corrective actionsdescribed above, relocate the child re-straint system to the rear seat and im-mediately contact your SUBARU dealerfor an inspection.

NOTEWhen a child who has outgrown a childrestraint system or a small adult isseated in the front passenger’s seat,the SUBARU advanced frontal airbagsystem may or may not activate thefront passenger’s SRS frontal airbag


(95,1)


depending on the occupant’s seatingposture. Children should always wear aseatbelt when sitting in the seat irre-spective of whether the airbag is deac-tivated or activated. If the front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated(the ON indicator remains illuminatedwhile the OFF indicator turns off), takethe following action.. Ensure that no article is placed onthe seat other than the occupant.

If the ON indicator still remains illumi-nated while the OFF indicator turns offdespite the fact that the actions notedabove have been taken, seat the child/small adult in the rear seat and imme-diately contact your SUBARU dealer foran inspection. Even if the system haspassed the dealer inspection, it isrecommended that on subsequent tripsthe child/small adult always take therear seat.Children who have outgrown a childrestraint system should always wear theseatbelt irrespective of whether the airbagis deactivated or activated.

! Conditions in which front passen-ger’s SRS frontal airbag is activated

S01AH0205The front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagwill be activated for deployment uponimpact when any of the following condi-tions are met regarding the front passen-ger’s seat.. When the seat is occupied by an adult.. When certain items (e.g. jug of water)are placed on the seat.

! If the passenger’s frontal airbagOFF indicator illuminates and theON indicator turns off even whenthe front passenger’s seat isoccupied by an adult

S01AH020501


This can be caused by the adult incorrectlysitting in the front passenger’s seat.1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.2. Ask the front passenger to set theseatback to the upright position, sit upstraight in the center of the seat cushion,correctly fasten the seatbelt, position his/her legs out forward, and adjust the seat tothe rearmost position.

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(96,1)


3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.

If the OFF indicator remains illuminatedwhile theON indicator remains off, take thefollowing actions.1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.2. Make sure that the front passengerdoes not use a blanket, seat cushion, seatcover, seat heater or massager, etc.3. If wearing excessive layers of clothing,the front passenger should remove anyunnecessary items before sitting in thefront passenger’s seat, or should sit in arear seat.4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position and wait 6 seconds to allow thesystem to complete self-checking. Follow-ing the system check, both indicators turnoff for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicatorshould illuminate while the OFF indicatorremains off.

If the OFF indicator still remains illumi-nated while the ON indicator remains off,ask the occupant to move to the rear seatand immediately contact your SUBARUdealer for an inspection.


(97,1)


! OperationS01AH0207

A) Driver’s sideB) Passenger’s side1) SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs.2) After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver’s vision is not

obstructed.

The SRS airbags can function only whenthe ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

The SUBARU advanced frontal airbagsystem is designed to determine theactivation or deactivation condition of thefront passenger’s SRS frontal airbag de-pending on the characteristic of item(s) orperson on the front passenger’s seatmonitored by the front passenger’s occu-pant detection system sensor. For thisreason, only the driver’s SRS frontalairbag may deploy in the event of acollision, but this does not mean failure ofthe system.

If the following sensors detect a predeter-mined amount of force during a frontalcollision, the control module sends signalsto the airbag module(s) (only driver’smodule or both driver’s and front passen-ger’smodules) instructing themodule(s) toinflate the SRS frontal airbag(s).. The front impact sensors. The impact sensors in the airbagcontrol module

On the driver’s side, the SRS knee airbagalso inflates with the SRS frontal airbag.

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(98,1)


The driver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbags use dual stage inflators.The two inflators of each airbag aretriggered either sequentially or simulta-neously, depending on the severity ofimpact, in the case of the driver’s SRSfrontal airbag and depending on theseverity of impact and the characteristicof item(s) or person on the seat in the caseof the front passenger’s SRS frontal air-bag.! After deployment

S01AH0210After deployment, the SRS airbag imme-diately starts to deflate so that the driver’svision is not obstructed and the driver’sability to maintain control of the vehicle isnot impaired. The time required fromdetecting impact to the deflation of theSRS airbag after deployment is shorterthan the blink of an eye.

Both when only the driver’s SRS frontalairbag deploys and the driver’s and frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbags deploy,the driver’s and front passenger’s seatbeltpretensioners operate at the same time.

When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden,fairly loud inflation noise will be heard andsome smoke will be released. Theseoccurrences are a normal result of thedeployment. This smoke does not indicatea fire in the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS airbag systemcomponents around the steeringwheel and dashboard with barehands right after deployment. Doingso can cause burns because thecomponents can be very hot as aresult of deployment.

! Example of the type of accidentS01AH0211

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbag are de-signed as follows.. To deploy in the event of an accidentinvolving a moderate to severe frontalcollision. To function on a one-time-only basis

The driver’s SRS frontal airbag and frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbag are notdesigned as follows.. To deploy in most lesser frontal im-pacts*1. To deploy in most side or rear impactsor in most rollover accidents*2*1: Because the necessary protection can be

achieved by the seatbelt alone.*2: Because deployment of only the driver’s

SRS frontal airbag or both the driver’s andfront passenger’s SRS frontal airbags

would not protect the occupant in thosesituations.

SRS airbag deployment depends on thelevel of force experienced in the passen-ger compartment during a collision. Thatlevel differs from one type of collision toanother, and it may have no bearing on thevisible damage done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of accident in which thedriver’s/driver’s and front pas-senger’s SRS frontal airbag(s)will most likely deploy

S01AH021101

A head-on collision against a thick con-crete wall at a vehicle speed of 12 to 19mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activatesonly the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or bothdriver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontalairbags. The airbag(s) will also be acti-


(99,1)


vated when the vehicle is exposed to afrontal impact similar in fashion andmagnitude to the collision describedabove.

! Examples of the types of acci-dents in which it is possible thatthe driver’s/driver’s and frontpassenger’s SRS frontalairbag(s) will deploy

S01AH021102

Only the driver’s SRS frontal airbag or bothdriver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontalairbags may be activated when the vehiclesustains a hard impact in the undercar-riage area from the road surface (such aswhen the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch,is severely impacted or knocked hardagainst an obstacle on the road such asa curb).

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(100,1)


! Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRS frontalairbag(s) is unlikely to occur

S01AH021103 1) The vehicle strikes an object, such as atelephone pole or sign pole.

2) The vehicle slides under the load bed of atruck.

3) The vehicle sustains an oblique offsetfrontal impact.

4) The vehicle sustains an offset frontalcollision.

5) The vehicle strikes an object that canmove or deform, such as a parkedvehicle.

There are many types of collisions whichmight not necessarily require deploymentof driver’s/driver’s and front passenger’sSRS frontal airbag(s). In the event ofaccidents like those illustrated, the dri-ver’s/driver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag(s) may not deploy depend-ing on the level of accident forces involved.


(101,1)


! Examples of the types of acci-dents in which the driver’s/dri-ver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag(s) are not de-signed to deploy in most cases

S01AH021104

The driver’s and front passenger’s SRS

frontal airbags are not designed to deployin most of the following cases.. If the vehicle is struck from the side orfrom behind.. If the vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.. If the vehicle is involved in a low-speedfrontal collision.

1) First impact2) Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle isimpacted more than once, the driver’sand/or front passenger’s SRS frontalairbag(s) will deploy only once on the firstimpact.

Example: In the case of a double collision,first with another vehicle, then against aconcrete wall in immediate succession,

once either or both of the driver’s and frontpassenger’s SRS frontal airbags is/areactivated on the first impact, it/they willnot be activated on the second impact.

& SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag

S01AH03

! SRS side airbagS01AH0302

The SRS side airbag is stored in the doorside of each front seat seatback, whichbears an “SRS AIRBAG” label.

In a moderate to severe side impactcollision, the SRS side airbag on theimpacted side of the vehicle deploysbetween the occupant and the door paneland supplements the seatbelt by reducingthe impact on the occupant’s chest andwaist. The SRS side airbag operates only

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(102,1)


for front seat occupants.! SRS curtain airbag

S01AH0303Your vehicle is equipped with a SUBARUSRS curtain airbag system that complieswith the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (FMVSS) No. 226.

The SRS curtain airbag on each side of thecabin is stored in the roof side (betweenthe front pillar and a point over the rearseat). An “SRS AIRBAG” mark is locatedat the top of each center pillar.

In a moderate to severe side impactcollision, the SRS curtain airbag on theimpacted side of the vehicle deploysbetween the occupant and the side win-dow and supplements the seatbelt byreducing the impact on the occupant’shead.

In a rollover, SRS curtain airbags on bothsides of the vehicle deploy between theoccupant and the side window and supple-ment the seatbelt by reducing the impact tothe occupant’s head.

In an offset frontal collision, SRS curtainairbags on both sides of the vehicle deploybetween the occupant and the side win-dow and supplement the seatbelt byreducing the impact to the occupant’shead and chest.

! OperationS01AH0301

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag can function only when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

The following airbags deploy indepen-dently of each other since each has itsown impact sensor.. Driver’s SRS side airbag. Front passenger’s SRS side airbag. SRS curtain airbag (right-hand side). SRS curtain airbag (left-hand side)

Therefore, they may not both deploy in thesame accident. Also, the SRS side airbagand SRS curtain airbag deploys indepen-dently of the driver’s and front passenger’sSRS frontal airbags in the steering wheeland instrument panel.

For the locations of the sensors andcontrol modules, refer to “Components”FP85.! After deployment

S01AH0304After the deployment, the SRS side airbagimmediately starts to deflate. The timerequired from detection of an impact todeflation of an SRS side airbag afterdeployment is shorter than the blink of aneye.

The SRS curtain airbag remains inflated

for a while following deployment thenslowly deflates.

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag deploy even when no one occupiesthe seat on the side on which an impact isapplied.

When the SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loudinflation noise will be heard and somesmoke will be released. These occur-rences are a normal result of the deploy-ment. This smoke does not indicate a firein the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not touch the SRS side airbagsystem components around thefront seat seatback with bare handsright after deployment. Doing so cancause burns because the compo-nents can be very hot as a result ofdeployment.After deployment, do not touch anypart of the SRS curtain airbag sys-tem (from the front pillar to the partof the roof side over the rear seat).Doing so can cause burns becausethe components can be very hot as aresult of deployment.


(103,1)


! Example of the type of accidentS01AH0305

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag are designed as follows:. To deploy in the event of an accidentinvolving amoderate to severe side impactcollision. To function on a one-time-only basis

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtainairbag are not designed to deploy in thefollowing cases:. In most lesser side impacts. In most frontal or most rear impacts(because the SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag deployment would not pro-tect the occupant in those situations)

The SRS curtain airbags are also de-signed to deploy when the vehicle is in anextremely inclined state such as during arollover. They are not designed to deploy inmost lesser inclined state.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain airbagdeployment depend on the level of forceexperienced in the passenger compart-ment during a side impact collision. Thatlevel differs from one type of collision toanother, and it may have no bearing on thevisible damage done to the vehicle itself.

! Example of the type of accident inwhich the SRS side airbag willmost likely deploy

S01AH030501

1) A severe side impact near the front seat.

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(104,1)


! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag will most likely deploy

S01AH030502 1) The vehicle is involved in a severe sideimpact near the front seat or the rear seat.

2) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.3) The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal or

the skidding vehicle’s tires hit a curbstonelaterally.

4) An offset frontal collision that is severeenough to deploy the front airbag.


(105,1)


! Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the SRS side airbag and the SRS curtain airbagwill deploy

S01AH030503 1) Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hardsurface

2) Falling into or jumping over a deep hole3) Landing hard or vehicle falling

It is possible that the SRS side and curtainairbags will deploy if a serious impactoccurs to the underside of your vehicle.Some examples are shown in the illustra-tion.

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(106,1)


! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy

S01AH030504 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-onimpact in an area outside the vicinity ofthe passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole orsimilar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-onimpact from a motorcycle.

5) The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

There are many types of collisions whichmight not necessarily require SRS sideairbag deployment. In the event of acci-dents like those illustrated, the SRS sideairbag may not deploy depending on thelevel of accident forces involved.


(107,1)


! Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain airbag is unlikely to deploy

S01AH030505 1) The vehicle is involved in an oblique side-on impact.

2) The vehicle is involved in a side-onimpact in an area outside the vicinity ofthe passenger compartment.

3) The vehicle strikes a telephone pole orsimilar object.

4) The vehicle is involved in a side-onimpact from a motorcycle.

There are many types of collisions whichmight not necessarily require SRS curtainairbag deployment. In the event of acci-dents like those illustrated, the SRScurtain airbag may not deploy dependingon the level of accident forces involved.

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(108,1)


! Examples of the types of acci-dents in which the SRS sideairbag and SRS curtain airbagare not designed to deploy inmost cases

S01AH030506

1) The vehicle is involved in frontal collisionwith another vehicle (moving or station-

ary).2) The vehicle is struck from behind.3) The vehicle pitches end over end.

In the event of accidents like thoseillustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRScurtain airbag are not designed to deployin most cases.

1) First impact2) Second impactA) SRS curtain airbagB) SRS side airbag

In an accident where the vehicle is struckfrom the side more than once, the SRSside airbag and SRS curtain airbag deployonly once on the first impact.

Example: In the case of a double sideimpact collision, first with one vehicle andimmediately followed by another from the

same direction, once the SRS side airbagand SRS curtain airbag are activated onthe first impact, they will not be activatedon the second.

& SRS airbag system monitorsS01AH04

SRS airbag system warning lightA diagnostic system continually monitorsthe readiness of the SRS airbag system(including front seatbelt pretensioners)with the ignition switch in the “ON” position.The SRS airbag system warning light willshow normal system operation by illumi-nating for approximately 6 seconds whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position.


(109,1)


The following components are monitoredby the indicator:. Front impact sensor

– Right-hand side– Left-hand side

. Airbag control module (including im-pact sensor and rollover sensor). Frontal airbag module

– Driver’s side– Front passenger’s side

. Knee airbag module (driver’s side)

. Side impact sensor– Center pillar right-hand side– Center pillar left-hand side– Front door right-hand side– Front door left-hand side– Rear wheel house right-hand side– Rear wheel house left-hand side– Under the rear center seat

. Side airbag module– Driver’s side– Front passenger’s side

. Curtain airbag module– Right-hand side– Left-hand side

. Seatbelt pretensioner and adaptiveforce limiter


. Lap belt pretensioner


. Seatbelt buckle switch (front passen-ger’s side). Front passenger’s occupant detectionsystem sensor. Front passenger’s occupant detectioncontrol module. Front passenger’s frontal airbag ONand OFF indicator. All related wiring. Driver’s seat position sensor. Passenger’s seat position sensor. Rear seatbelt pretensioner

– Right-hand side– Left-hand side

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any ofthe following conditions, immedi-ately stop the vehicle in a safe place,and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un-less a technician checks and repairsthe system as needed, the seatbeltpretensioners and/or the SRS airbagwill not operate properly in the eventof a collision, which may result ininjury.. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light

. No illumination of the warninglight when the ignition switch isfirst turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of thewarning light

. Illumination of the warning lightwhile driving

& SRS airbag system servicingS01AH05

WARNING

. When discarding an airbag mod-ule or scrapping the entire vehi-cle damaged by a collision, con-sult your SUBARU dealer.

. The SRS airbag has no user-serviceable parts. Do not useelectrical test equipment on anycircuit related to the SRS airbagsystem. For required servicing ofthe SRS airbag, consult yournearest SUBARU dealer. Tamper-ing with or disconnecting thesystem’s wiring could result inaccidental inflation of the SRSairbag or could make the systeminoperative, which may result inserious injury.

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(110,1)


CAUTION

If you need service or repair in areasindicated in the following list, havethe work performed by an author-ized SUBARU dealer. The SRS air-bag control module, impact sensorsand airbag modules are stored inthese areas.. Under the center of the instru-

ment panel. On both the right and left sides at

the front of the vehicle. Steering wheel and column and

nearby areas. Bottom of the steering column

and nearby areas. Top of the dashboard on front

passenger’s side and nearbyareas

. Each front seat and nearby area

. Inside each center pillar

. Inside each front door

. In each roof side (from the frontpillar to a point over the rear seat)

. Between the rear seat cushionand rear wheel house on eachside

. Under the rear center seat

In the event that the SRS airbag isdeployed, replacement of the systemshould be performed only by an author-ized SUBARU dealer. When the compo-nents of the SRS airbag system arereplaced, use only genuine SUBARUparts.

NOTEIn the following cases, contact yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possible.. The front part of the vehicle wasinvolved in an accident in which onlythe driver’s SRS frontal airbag or bothdriver’s and front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbags did not deploy.. The pad of the steering wheel, thecover over the front passenger’s SRSfrontal airbag, or either roof side (fromthe front pillar to a point over the rearseat) is scratched, cracked, or other-wise damaged.. The center pillar, front door, rearwheel house or rear sub frame, or anarea near these parts, was involved inan accident in which the SRS sideairbag and SRS curtain airbag did notdeploy.. The fabric or leather of either frontseatback is cut, frayed, or otherwisedamaged.

. The rear part of the vehicle wasinvolved in an accident in which noSRS airbag was deployed.

& Precautions against vehiclemodification

S01AH06

WARNING

. To avoid accidental activation ofthe system or rendering the sys-tem inoperative, which may re-sult in serious injury, no modifi-cations should be made to anycomponents or wiring of the SRSairbag system.This includes following modifica-tions.– Installation of custom steering

wheels– Attachment of additional trim

materials to the dashboard– Installation of custom seats– Replacement of seat fabric or

leather– Installation of additional fabric

or leather on the front seat– Attachment of a hands-free

microphone or any other ac-cessory to a front pillar, a


(111,1)


center pillar, a rear pillar, thewindshield, a side window, anassist grip, or any other cabinsurface that would be near adeploying SRS curtain airbag.

– Installation of additional elec-trical/electronic equipmentsuch as a mobile two-wayradio on or near the SRS air-bag system components and/or wiring is not advisable. Thiscould interfere with properoperation of the SRS airbagsystem.

– Modifications on or inside thefront door panels for the pur-pose of a speaker replace-ment or sound insulation.

. The impact sensors, which detectthe pressure of an impact, arelocated in the doors. Do notmodify any components of thedoors or door trims, such as theaddition of door speakers forexample. Any modifications tothe doors create a risk of theairbag system becoming inop-erative or unintended airbag de-ployment.

CAUTION

Do not perform any of the followingmodifications. Such modificationscan interfere with proper operationof the SRS airbag system.. Attachment of any equipment

(bush bar, winches, snow plow,skid plate, etc.) other than genu-ine SUBARU accessory parts tothe front end.

. Modification of the suspensionsystem or front end structure.

. Installation of a tire of differentsize and construction from thetires specified on the vehicleplacard attached to the driver’sdoor pillar or specified for indivi-dual vehicle models in this Own-er’s Manual.

. Attachment of any equipment(side steps or side sill protectors,etc.) other than genuine SUBARUaccessory parts to the side body.

Always consult your SUBARU dealer if youwant to install any accessory parts on yourvehicle.

& How to contact the vehiclemanufacturer concerningmodifications for personswith disabilities that may af-fect the advanced airbagsystem

S01AH15Changing or moving any parts of the frontseats, rear seat, seatbelts, front bumper,front side frame, radiator panel, instrumentpanel, combination meter, steering wheel,steering column, tire, suspension or floorpanel can affect the operation of theSUBARU advanced airbag system. If youhave any questions, you may contact thefollowing SUBARU distributors.

<Continental U.S., Alaska and the Districtof Columbia>Subaru of America, Inc.Customer Advocacy DepartmentOne Subaru DriveP.O. Box 9103Camden, NJ 08101-98771-800-SUBARU3 (1-800-782-2783)

<Hawaii>Subaru Hawaii2850-A Pukoloa St.,Honolulu, HI 96819877-215-0338

– CONTINUED –


1

Seat,seatbeltandSR

Sairbags

(112,1)


<Guam>Shen’s Corporation dba Prestige Automo-biles491 East Marine Corps Drive,Dededo, Guam 96929671-633-2698

<Puerto Rico>Trebol Motors296 Marginal JF Kennedy, San Juan,Puerto Rico787-793-2828

<Canada>Subaru Canada, Inc.Consumer Support Department560 Suffolk Court, Mississauga, OntarioL5R 4J71-800-894-4212

There are currently no SUBARU distribu-tors in any other U.S. territories. If you arein such an area, please contact theSUBARU distributor or dealer from whichyou bought your vehicle.


(113,1)


S022-1. Keys................................................................. 113

Key number plate ............................................... 1132-2. Keyless access with push-button start

system (if equipped) ..................................... 113Safety precautions.............................................. 114Locking and unlocking by holding the accesskey fob ............................................................. 117

Unlock using PIN Code Access...........................121Power saving function ........................................123Power saving function of access key fob ............124Disabling keyless access function ......................124Selecting audible signal operation ......................127Warning chimes and warning indicator ...............127When access key fob does not operateproperly............................................................127

Replacing battery of access key fob....................127Replacing access key fob ...................................127Certification for keyless access with push-button start system ..........................................127

2-3. Immobilizer...................................................... 129Security indicator light........................................129Key replacement.................................................129Certification for immobilizer system....................130

2-4. Remote keyless entry system ....................... 131Locking the doors ..............................................132Unlocking the doors ...........................................132Unlocking the rear gate.......................................133Vehicle finder function ........................................133Sounding a panic alarm ......................................133

Setting audible signal operation (modelswithout “keyless access with push-buttonstart system”) .................................................. 133

Replacing the battery ......................................... 134Replacing lost transmitters................................. 134Certification for remote keyless entry system ..... 134

2-5. Door locks........................................................135Locking and unlocking from the outside............. 135Locking and unlocking from the inside............... 136Automatic door locking/unlocking ...................... 137Key lock-in prevention function.......................... 138Battery drainage prevention function.................. 138

2-6. Alarm system...................................................139Alarm system operation ..................................... 139Arming the system............................................. 139Disarming the system ........................................ 140Alarm system setting ......................................... 141If you have accidentally triggered the alarmsystem............................................................. 141

Valet mode......................................................... 1412-7. Child safety locks............................................1422-8. Windows...........................................................142

Power window operation .................................... 143Initialization of power window (windows withoff delay function) ............................................ 145

2-9. Rear gate..........................................................145Manual rear gate ................................................ 145Power rear gate (if equipped) ............................. 146

Keys and doors

2

Keys

anddoors

(114,1)


2-10. Moonroof (if equipped)................................. 154Moonroof switch.................................................154

Anti-entrapment function.................................... 155Sunshade........................................................... 155

Keys and doors

(115,1)


2-1. KeysS02AA

NOTEFor models with “keyless access withpush-button start system”, refer to“Keyless access with push-button startsystem” FP113.The following keys are provided with thevehicle.

1) Master keys2) Sub key3) Key number plate

A key can be used in the followinglocations.. Ignition switch. Driver’s door. Glove box

The valet key fits only the ignition switchand door locks. You can keep the glovebox locked when you leave your vehicleand valet key at a parking facility.

NOTELocking/unlocking using the remotekeyless entry system can also be con-trolled with the buttons on the key. Fordetails, refer to “Remote keyless entrysystem” FP131.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder orkey case to either key. If it bangsagainst your knees while you aredriving, it could turn the ignitionswitch from the “ON” position tothe “ACC” or “LOCK” position,thereby stopping the engine.

& Key number plateS02AA01

The key number is stamped on the keynumber plate attached to the key set.Writedown the key number and keep it inanother safe place, not in the vehicle. Thisnumber is needed to make a replacementkey if you lose your key or lock it inside thevehicle. Refer to “Key replacement”FP129.

2-2. Keyless access withpush-button start system (ifequipped)

S02AP

The following access key fobs are pro-vided with the vehicle.

1) Access key fobs2) Key number plate

The “keyless access with push-button startsystem” allows the following functions tobe performed when the access key fob isbeing carried.. Locking and unlocking of doors, reargate and fuel filler lid (For details, refer to“Locking and unlocking by holding theaccess key fob” FP117.). Starting and stopping the engine (Fordetails, refer to “Starting and stopping

– CONTINUED –

Keys 113

2

Keys

anddoors

(116,1)


engine (models with push-button startsystem)” FP319.). Arming and disarming the alarm sys-tem (For details, refer to “Alarm system”FP139.)

NOTE. Locking/unlocking using the remotekeyless entry system can also be con-trolled with the buttons on the accesskey fob. For details, refer to “Remotekeyless entry system” FP131.. Carefully store the key number platesupplied with the access key fob. It isnecessary for vehicle repair and addi-tional registration of access key fobs.For details, refer to “Key replacement”FP129.An emergency key is attached to eachaccess key fob.

1) Release button2) Emergency key

Press the release button of the access keyfob to take out the emergency key.The emergency key is used for the follow-ing operations.. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door. Locking and unlocking the glove box

NOTEThe glove box can be kept locked whenthe vehicle and the access key fob (withthe emergency key removed) are left ata parking facility.

& Safety precautionsS02AP11

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemakeror an implanted defibrillator, stay atleast 8.7 in (22 cm) away from thetransmitting antennas installed onthe vehicle.The radio waves from the transmit-ting antennas on the vehicle couldadversely affect the operation ofimplanted pacemakers and im-planted defibrillators.If youwear electronicmedical equip-ment other than an implanted pace-maker or an implanted defibrillator,before using the keyless accesswith push-button start system, referto “Radio waves used for the key-less access with push-button startsystem” mentioned later, and con-tact the electronic medical equip-ment manufacturer for more infor-mation. The radio waves from thetransmitting antennas on the vehiclecould adversely affect the operationof the electronic medical equipment.

“Radio waves used for the keylessaccess with push-button start sys-tem”

Keyless access with push-button start system114

(117,1)


. The keyless access with push-button start system uses radiowaves of the following fre-quency* in addition to the radiowaves used for the remote key-less entry system. The radiowaves are periodically outputfrom the antennas installed onthe vehicle as shown in thefollowing illustrations.*: Radio frequency: 134 kHz

1) Antennas

CAUTION

. Never leave or store the accesskey fob inside the vehicle orwithin 6.6 ft (2 m) around thevehicle (e.g., in the garage). Theaccess key fob may be lockedinside the vehicle, or the batterymay discharge rapidly. Note thatthe push-button ignition switchmay not turn on in some casesdepending on the location of theaccess key fob.

. The access key fob containselectronic components. Observethe following precautions to pre-vent malfunctions.– It is recommended to have the

access key battery replaced atan authorized SUBARU dealerto avoid the risk of damage.

– Do not get the access key fobwet. If the access key fob getswet, wipe it off immediatelyand let it dry completely.

– Do not apply strong impacts tothe access key fob.

– Never leave the access keyfob in direct sunlight or any-where that may become hot,such as on the dashboard. It

– CONTINUED –

Keyless access with push-button start system 115

2

Keys

anddoors

(118,1)


may damage the battery orcause circuit malfunctions.

– Do not wash the access keyfob in an ultrasonic washer.

– Do not leave the access keyfob in humid or dusty loca-tions. Doing so may causemalfunctions.

– Keep the access key fob awayfrom magnetic sources.

– Do not leave the access keyfob near a personal computeror home electrical appliance.

– Do not leave the access keyfob near a battery charger orany electrical accessories.

– Do not apply metallic windowtint or attach metallic objectsto the windows.

– Do not fit non genuine acces-sories or parts.

. If the access key fob is dropped,the integrated emergency key in-side may become loose. Be care-ful not to lose the emergency key.

. When traveling in an airplane, donot press the button of the ac-cess key fob. If any button of theaccess key fob is pressed, radiowaves are emitted and may affect

the operation of the airplane. in abag, take measures to preventthe buttons from being pressedaccidentally.

NOTE. The operational/non-operationalsetting for the keyless access functioncan be changed. For the setting proce-dure, refer to “Disabling keyless ac-cess function” FP124.. For detailed information about theoperation method for the push-buttonignition switch while the keyless ac-cess function is switched to the non-operational mode, refer to “Access keyfob – if access key fob does not operateproperly” FP451.. The keyless access with push-but-ton start system uses weak radiowaves. The status of the access keyfob and environmental conditions mayinterfere with the communication be-tween the access key fob and thevehicle under the following conditions,and it may not be possible to lock orunlock the doors or start the engine.

– When operating near a facilitywhere strong radio waves are trans-mitted, such as a broadcast stationand power transmission lines.

– When products that transmitradio waves are used, such as anaccess key fob or a remote trans-mitter key of another vehicle.– When carrying the access key fobof your vehicle together with theaccess key fob or the remote trans-mitter of another vehicle.– When the access key fob isplaced near wireless communica-tion equipment such as a cellphone.– When the access key fob isplaced near a metallic object.– When metallic accessories areattached to the access key fob.– When carrying the access key fobwith an electronic appliance such asa laptop computer.– When the battery of the accesskey fob is discharged.

. The access key fob is always com-municating with the vehicle and iscontinuously using the battery.Although the life of the battery variesdepending on the operating conditions,it is approximately 1 to 2 years. If thebattery becomes fully discharged, re-place it with a new one.. If an access key fob is lost, it isrecommended that all of the remainingaccess key fobs be reregistered. For


(119,1)


reregistration of an access key fob,contact a SUBARU dealer.. For a spare access key fob, contact aSUBARU dealer.. Up to 7 access key fobs can beregistered for one vehicle.. Do not leave the access key fob inthe storage spaces inside the vehicle,such as the door pocket, dashboard orinside the corner of the cargo area.Vibrations may damage the key fob orturn on the switch, possibly resulting ina lockout.. After the vehicle battery is dis-charged or replaced, initialization ofthe steering lock system may be re-quired to start the engine. In this case,perform the following procedure toinitialize the steering lock.

(1) Turn the push-button ignitionswitch to the “OFF” position. Fordetails, refer to “Switching powerstatus” FP163.(2) Open and close the driver’sdoor.(3) Wait for approximately 10 sec-onds.

When the steering is locked, the initi-alization is completed.. Do not leave the access key fob inthe following places.

– On the instrument panel– On the floor– Inside the glove box– Inside the door trim pocket– On the rear seat– In the cargo area

If you do, the following situationsmay occur.– The access key fob is mistakenlylocked inside the vehicle.– A false warning issues althoughno malfunction actually occurs.– No warning issues even when amalfunction occurs.

& Locking and unlocking byholding the access key fob

S02AP20When the access key fob is carried withinthe operating range, the doors, rear gateand fuel filler lid can be locked/unlockedjust by touching the door handle.

NOTEThe vehicle can also be locked/un-locked with the remote keyless entrysystem. For details, refer to “Remotekeyless entry system” FP131.

! Operating rangesS02AP2001

1) Antennas2) Operating range (approximately 16 to 32

in (40 to 80 cm))

– CONTINUED –


2

Keys

anddoors

(120,1)


1) LED indicator

When the access key fob is within either ofthe operating ranges of the front doors, theLED indicator on the access key fobflashes. When the keyless access func-tions are disabled, the LED indicator doesnot flash unless a button on the access keyfob is pressed.

NOTE. If the access key fob is placed tooclose to the vehicle body, the keylessaccess functions may not operateproperly. If it does not operate properly,repeat the operation from farther away.. If the access key fob is placed nearthe ground or in an elevated locationfrom the ground, even if it is in theindicated operating range, the keyless

access function may not operate prop-erly.. When the access key fob is withinthe operating range, it is possible foranyone, even someone who is notcarrying the access key fob, to operatethe keyless access function. Note thatthe keyless access function can beoperated only by the door handle, doorlock sensor, rear gate opener button orrear lock button in the operating rangein which the access key fob is detected.. It is not possible to lock the doors,rear gate and fuel filler lid using thekeyless access function when the ac-cess key fob is inside the vehicle.However, depending on the status ofthe access key fob and the environ-mental conditions, the access key fobmay be locked inside the vehicle.Before locking the vehicle, make surethat you have the access key fob.. When the battery of the access keyfob is discharged, or when operating itin a location with strong radio waves ornoise (e.g., near a radio tower, powerplant, broadcast station or an areawhere wireless equipment is used), orwhile talking on a cell phone, theoperating ranges may be reduced, orthe keyless access function may notoperate.In such a case, perform the procedure

described in “Locking and unlocking”FP452.. The doors may lock or unlock whenthe car is being washed or exposed to asignificant amount of water that con-tacts the door handle while the key fobis still in the operating range.

! How to lock and unlockS02AP2002

It is possible to perform the followingoperations when you are carrying theaccess key fob.. Lock and unlock the doors.. Lock and unlock the rear gate.. Lock and unlock the fuel filler lid.

NOTE. It is not possible to lock the doors,rear gate and fuel filler lid using thekeyless access function when thepush-button ignition switch is in the“ACC” or “ON” position. Refer to“Switching power status” FP163.. If the door handle is gripped with agloved hand, the door lock may not bereleased.. If the door lock sensor is touchedthree times or more repeatedly, thesystem will ignore the sensor opera-tion.. When performing the locking proce-dure too quickly, locking may not


(121,1)


complete. After performing the lockingprocedure, it is recommended to pullthe REAR door handle to confirm thatthe doors have been locked.. If any of the doors (or the rear gate)are not fully closed, the following willoccur to alert you that the doors (or therear gate) are not properly closed.

– An electronic chirp sounds fivetimes.– The hazard warning flashersflash five times.

. It is possible to lock the doors evenwhen one of the doors is open. Afterperforming the locking procedure,close the opened door or rear gate tolock it.. Within 3 seconds after locking thedoors and the rear gate using thekeyless access function, it is not pos-sible to unlock doors and/or the reargate using the keyless access function.. When locking, be sure to carry theaccess key fob to prevent locking theaccess key fob in the vehicle.. The setting of the hazard warningflasher operation and the volume of theaudible signal can be changed by yourSUBARU dealer. Contact your SUBARUdealer for details. Also, for models withthe combination meter display (colorLCD), the setting of the hazard warning

flasher operation can be changed byoperating the combination meter dis-play (color LCD). For details, refer to“Keyless Entry System” FP201.

! Lockingwith thedoor locksensorS02AP200201

1) Door lock sensor

Carry the access key fob, close all doorsincluding the rear gate, and touch the doorlock sensor on the door handle. All doorsincluding the rear gate and fuel filler lid willbe locked. Also, an electronic chirp willsound once and the hazard warningflashers will flash once.

! Locking with the rear lock buttonS02AP200202

1) Rear lock button

Carry the access key fob, close all doorsincluding the rear gate, and press the rearlock button. The rear gate, fuel filler lid andall doors will be locked. Also, an electronicchirp will sound once and the hazardwarning flashers will flash once.

– CONTINUED –


2

Keys

anddoors

(122,1)


! Locking with the power rear gatelock button

S02AP200207

1) Power rear gate lock button

Carry the access key fob, and press thepower rear gate lock button. It will closeautomatically, and the rear gate, all doorsand the fuel filler lid will be locked. Also, thehazard warning flashers will flash once,and an electronic chirp will sound once.

! UnlockingS02AP200203

Carry the access key fob, and touch thesensor behind the door handle.. The driver’s door handle:Either the driver’s door and fuel filler lid willunlock, or all doors and the fuel filler lid willunlock.. The front passenger’s door handle:The fuel filler lid, rear gate and all doors willbe unlocked.

Also, an electronic chirp will sound twiceand the hazard warning flashers will flashtwice.

! Unlocking rear gateS02AP200204

1) Rear gate opener button

Carry the access key fob, and press therear gate opener button. Either only therear gate will unlock, or all doors and thefuel filler lid will unlock. Also, an electronicchirp will sound twice and the hazardwarning flashers will flash twice.


(123,1)


! Door unlock selection functionS02AP2003

When the door is unlocked using thekeyless access function, only the doorsthat were set can be unlocked.The settings can be changed with thefollowing methods.. The setting can be changed by operat-ing the combination meter display (colorLCD). Refer to “Keyless Entry System”FP201.. The setting can be changed by aSUBARU dealer.

& Unlock using PIN Code Ac-cess

S02AP21When all doors including the rear gate arelocked, you can unlock the doors (includ-ing rear gate) without a key by pressing therear lock button.

1) Rear lock button

NOTEPIN Code Access will be helpful if thekey fob is accidentally left in thevehicle. It is recommended that a 5-digit security code (PIN code) be regis-tered.

– CONTINUED –


2

Keys

anddoors

(124,1)


! Registration for a PIN codeS02AP2102

Steps Operation Time from the previous step

1 Turn off the ignition switch. —2 Close all doors (including rear gate). —

3 Press and hold the “ ” button on the access key fob, and press and hold therear lock button until a chirp sounds. Within 5 seconds

4 Press and hold the “ ” button on the access key fob until a chirp sounds. Within 30 secondsThe PIN code is inputted by using the rear lock button within 30 seconds afterthe chirp sound of step 4.For example, to register “32468” as the PIN code, perform the followingprocedure.

Within 30 seconds5(1) Press the button three times.(2) After a chirp sounds once, press the button twice.

(3) After a chirp sounds once, press the button four times.(4) After a chirp sounds once (ding), press the button six times.

(5) After a chirp sounds once (ding), press the button eight times.

6 Perform step 5 again within approximately 30 seconds after the chirp startssounding intermittently. —

7 All doors will be unlocked and locked. Then the PIN code will be registered. —

NOTEPress the “ ” buttonwithin 30 seconds of step 6 to end the preparationmode andmove on to the registration stage. Unless the“ ” button is pressed within 30 seconds after step 6, the PIN code registration will be canceled.


(125,1)


NOTE. Press the rear lock button ten timesto enter “0”.. Change the PIN code frequently toprotect your vehicle from theft.. If you have lent your vehicle toanother person, confirm that the PINcode has not been changed or deleted.If the PIN code has been changed ordeleted, reregister a new PIN code.. If you make an error during theregistration procedure, press the “ ”or “ ” button on the access key fob.Then, start over from the proceduredescribed in “Preparation for register-ing a PIN code”.. To protect your vehicle from theft,you cannot register a string of the samefive numbers together, such as“00000”, nor “12345” as a PIN code.. Do not register your vehicle licenseplate number or simple numbers suchas “11122” or “12121” as a PIN code.Doing so will increase the risk ofvehicle theft.. When you try to register “22222”, theregistered PIN code will be deleted. Youcannot unlock the doors by PIN CodeAccess until a new code is registered.. After registering a new PIN code,make sure that you can unlock thedoors using the PIN code.

. The PIN code cannot be deletedwhile the keyless access function isdisabled by operating the access keyfob.. Reregister the PIN code in the fol-lowing cases.

– When you forget the PIN code.– When you want to change the PINcode.

! UnlockingS02AP2103

Perform step 5 described in “Registrationfor a PIN code”.

NOTE. You cannot unlock by PIN CodeAccess in the following cases.

– When the access key fob is withinthe operating ranges.– When the ignition switch is in the“ACC” or “ON” position.

. If you make an operation error dur-ing the unlocking procedure, start overwith the unlocking procedure afterwaiting for 5 seconds or longer.. To protect your vehicle from theft, abuzzer will sound if incorrect PIN codesare entered five times continuously. Ifthis occurs, you cannot unlock thedoors by PIN Code Access for 5minutes.

& Power saving functionS02AP23

The keyless access function will be dis-abled in the following cases to protect theaccess key fob battery and the vehiclebattery.. Case 1: When the keyless accessfunction and the remote keyless entrysystem have not been used for 2 weeksor longer while all doors are locked.

Operate one of the following items torecover the keyless access function:

– Unlock the doors by any procedureother than gripping the front passen-ger’s door handle.– Lock the doors.– Open a door and then close it.

. Case 2: When the access key fob hasbeen left in the operating range for 10minutes or longer while all doors arelocked.

Operate one of the following items torecover the keyless access function:

– Unlock the doors by gripping thedoor handle.– Unlock the doors by pressing therear gate opener button.– Lock the doors by touching the doorlock sensor.– Lock or unlock the doors using the

– CONTINUED –


2

Keys

anddoors

(126,1)


remote keyless entry system.– Lock or unlock the doors using thepower door locking switch.– Open either of the front doors.

& Power saving function of ac-cess key fob

S02AP22This function stops the access key fobfrom receiving signals and helps minimizethe battery consumption of the access keyfob.1. Press the “ ” button twice while hold-ing the “ ” button.

1) LED indicator

2. Confirm that the LED indicator blinks 4times to notify that the setting is complete.When the access key fob is in the powersave mode, the keyless access function

and push-button start system will not beavailable.To cancel the power savemode, press oneof the buttons on the access key fob.

& Disabling keyless accessfunction

S02AP07

WARNING

If you wear an implanted pacemakeror an implanted defibrillator, per-form the procedure described in“By operating the driver’s door”FP125 to disable the keyless accessfunction. If you perform the proce-dure described in “By operating theaccess key fob” FP124, the opera-tion of an implanted pacemaker orimplanted defibrillator may be af-fected by the radio waves from thetransmitter antenna.

When the vehicle is not going to be usedfor a long time or when you choose not touse the keyless access function, the key-less access function can be disabled.

NOTE. The locking and unlocking functionby the remote keyless entry system isnot disabled.

. To start the engine while the func-tions are disabled, perform the proce-dure described in “Starting engine”FP452.

! Disabling functionsS02AP0701

! By operating the access key fobS02AP070102

If you have registered a PIN code for PINCode Access, you can disable the keylessaccess function by operating the accesskey fob. For details about registering a PINcode, refer to “Unlock using PIN CodeAccess” FP121.1. Open the driver’s door.2. Rotate the lock lever toward the lockposition.

3. Press and hold the “ ” button and “ ”button on the access key fob simulta-


(127,1)


neously for more than 5 seconds.

A chirp will sound, and the function will bedisabled.

! By operating the driver’s doorS02AP070101

– CONTINUED –


2

Keys

anddoors

(128,1)


Steps Operation Time from the previous step Driver’s door status1 Sit in the driver’s seat, and close the door. — Close

2 Push “ ” of the power door locking switch. — Close

3 Open the driver’s door. Within 5 seconds Close?Open4 Push “ ” of the power door locking switch twice. Within 5 seconds Open

5 Close and open the driver’s door twice. Within 10 seconds Open?Close?Open?Close?Open

6 Push “ ” of the power door locking switch twice whilethe door is open. Within 10 seconds Open

7 Close and open the driver’s door once. Within 10 seconds Open?Close?Open8 Close the door. Within 5 seconds Open?Close

A chirp will sound, and the functions will be disabled.


(129,1)


NOTEIn steps 4 and 6, press the power doorlocking switch slowly. If the switch ispressed quickly, the functions may notbe disabled.

! Enabling functionsS02AP0702

When the procedure to disable the func-tions is performed again, a chirp willsound, and the functions are enabled.

NOTE. The keyless access function will beenabled only if you perform the proce-dure in the same manner used todisable the function (for example, whendisabling by operating the driver’sdoor, the function will not be enabledeven if you operate the access key fob).. Press the push-button ignitionswitch if you do not know the proce-dure in which the keyless access func-tion was disabled.

– When disabling by operating thedriver’s door: A chirpwill not sound.– When disabling by operating theaccess key fob: A chirp will sound.

& Selecting audible signal op-eration

S02AP12Using an electronic chirp, the system willgive you an audible signal when the doorslock and unlock. If desired, you may turnthe audible signal off. For more details,contact a SUBARU dealer.

NOTEThe setting can be changed by operat-ing the combination meter display(color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi-cle Setting” FP201.

& Warning chimes and warningindicator

S02AP06The keyless access with push-button startsystem sounds a warning chime andflashes the access key warning indicatoron the combination meter in order tominimize improper operations and helpprotect your vehicle from theft.For details, refer to “Warning chimes andwarning indicator of the keyless accesswith push-button start system” FP184.

& When access key fob doesnot operate properly

S02AP08Refer to “Access key fob – if access keyfob does not operate properly” FP451.

& Replacing battery of accesskey fob

S02AP09Refer to “Replacing battery of access keyfob” FP508.

& Replacing access key fobS02AP13

Access key fobs can be replaced by aSUBARU dealer. For more details, contacta SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for keyless ac-cess with push-button startsystem

S02AP14. U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: HYQ14AHKFCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB02FCC ID: Y8PSU19S-3

CAUTION

FCC WARNINGChanges or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment.

– CONTINUED –


2

Keys

anddoors

(130,1)


NOTEThis device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This de-vice may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

. Canada-spec. models– Type 1

– Type 2


(131,1)


. Mexico-spec. models

IFTRLVDE1415-166114AHKDENSO

2-3. ImmobilizerS02AB

The immobilizer system is designed toprevent an unauthorized person fromstarting the engine. Only keys registeredwith your vehicle’s immobilizer system canbe used to operate your vehicle. If enginestart is attempted with an unregisteredaccess key fob or key, the engine will notstart. Even if the engine does start, it willstop after a few seconds. This system,however, is not a 100% anti-theft guaran-tee.

CAUTION

. Do not place the key under directsunlight or anywhere it may be-come hot.

. Do not get the key wet. If the keygets wet, wipe it dry with a clothimmediately.

. Do not modify or remove thesystem. If modified or removed,the proper operation of the sys-tem cannot be guaranteed.

NOTE. To protect your vehicle from theft,please pay close attention to the follow-ing security precautions:

– Never leave your vehicle unat-tended with its keys inside.– Before leaving your vehicle,close all windows and the moon-roof, and lock the doors and reargate.– Do not leave spare keys or anyrecord of your key number in thevehicle.

. The vehicle has a maintenance-freetype immobilizer system.

& Security indicator lightS02AB02

Refer to “Security indicator light” FP188.

& Key replacementS02AB03

Your key number plate will be required ifyou ever need a replacement key made.Any new key must be registered for usewith your vehicle’s immobilizer systembefore it can be used. The maximumnumber of keys that can be registered foruse with one vehicle is as follows.. Four (models without “keyless accesswith push-button start system”). Seven (models with “keyless accesswith push-button start system”)

– CONTINUED –

Immobilizer 129

2

Keys

anddoors

(132,1)


One key that has already been registeredis required in order to register a new key.

NOTEIf you lose a key, the lost key’s ID codestill remains in the memory of thevehicle’s immobilizer system. For se-curity reasons, the lost key’s ID codeshould be erased from the memory. Toerase the lost key’s ID code, all keysthat will be used are required.For details about new key registrationand erasing the lost key’s ID code,contact your SUBARU dealer.

& Certification for immobilizersystem

S02AB05. For models with “keyless accesswith push-button start system”:Refer to “Certification for keyless accesswith push-button start system” FP127.

. For models without “keyless accesswith push-button start system”:

– U.S.-spec. models

FCC ID: Y8PFJ16-2

CAUTION



– Canada-spec. models

Immobilizer130

(133,1)


– Mexico-spec. models 2-4. Remote keyless entrysystem

S02AQ

CAUTION

. Do not expose the remote trans-mitter to severe shocks, such asthose experienced as a result ofdropping or throwing.

. Do not take the remote transmit-ter apart except when replacingthe battery.

. Do not get the remote transmitterwet. If it gets wet, wipe it dry witha cloth immediately.

. When you carry the remote trans-mitter on an airplane, do notpress the button of the remotetransmitter while in the airplane.When any button of the remotetransmitter is pressed, radiowaves are sent and may affectthe operation of the airplane.When you carry the remote trans-mitter in a bag on an airplane,take measures to prevent thebuttons of the remote transmitterfrom being pressed.

Access key fob1) Lock/arm button2) Unlock/disarm button3) Rear gate unlock button4) PANIC button

– CONTINUED –

Remote keyless entry system 131

2

Keys

anddoors

(134,1)


Transmitter1) Lock/arm button2) Unlock/disarm button3) Rear gate unlock button4) PANIC button

The remote keyless entry system has thefollowing functions.. Locking and unlocking the doors, reargate and fuel filler lid. Unlocking the rear gate. Sounding a panic alarm. Arming and disarming the alarm sys-tem. For details, refer to “Alarm system”FP139.

The operable distance of the remote key-less entry system is approximately 30 feet(10 meters). However, this distance willvary depending on environmental condi-

tions. The system’s operable distance willbe shorter in areas near a facility orelectronic equipment emitting strong radiowaves such as a power plant, broadcaststation, TV tower, or remote controller ofhome electronic appliances.

NOTE. For models with “keyless accesswith push-button start system”, theremote keyless entry system will notbe activated when the push-buttonignition switch is in any position otherthan the “OFF” position.. For models without “keyless accesswith push-button start system”, theremote keyless entry system will notbe activated when the key is inserted inthe ignition switch.. The hazard warning flashers willflash once or twice when the accesskey fob/transmitter button is pressed inthe following cases.

– When locking the doors– When unlocking the doors– When unlocking the rear gate

Operation of the hazard warningflashers in the above cases can be setto “On” or “Off” by a SUBARU dealer.Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-tails.

& Locking the doorsS02AQ01

Press the lock/arm button to lock all doors,the rear gate and fuel filler lid. An electro-nic chirp will sound once and the hazardwarning flashers will flash once.

If any of the doors (or the rear gate) are notfully closed, the following will occur to alertyou that the doors (or the rear gate) are notproperly closed.. An electronic chirp sounds five times.. The hazard warning flashers flash fivetimes.

When you close the door, it will automati-cally lock and then the following will occur.. An electronic chirp sounds once.. The hazard warning flashers flashonce.

& Unlocking the doorsS02AQ02

Press the unlock/disarm button to unlockthe driver’s door and fuel filler lid. Anelectronic chirp will sound twice and thehazard warning flashers will flash twice. Tounlock all doors and the rear gate, brieflypress the unlock/disarm button a secondtime within 5 seconds.

Remote keyless entry system132

(135,1)


NOTEIf the interval between the first andsecond presses of the unlock/disarmbutton (for unlocking of all of the doorsand the rear gate) is extremely short,the system may not respond.

& Unlocking the rear gateS02AQ05

Press the rear gate unlock button to unlockthe rear gate.An electronic chirp will sound twice and thehazard warning flashers will flash twice.

& Vehicle finder functionS02AQ07

Use this function to find your vehicleparked among many vehicles in a largeparking lot. Provided you are within 30 feet(10 meters) of the vehicle, pressing thelock/arm button three times in a 5-secondperiod will cause your vehicle’s horn tosound once and its hazard warningflashers to flash three times.

NOTEIf the interval between presses is tooshort when you press the lock/armbutton three times, the system maynot respond to the signals from theremote transmitter.

& Sounding a panic alarmS02AQ08

To activate the alarm, press the “PANIC”button once.The horn will sound and the hazardwarning flashers will flash.To deactivate the panic alarm, press anybutton on the remote transmitter. Unless abutton on the remote transmitter ispressed, the alarm will be deactivatedafter approximately 30 seconds.

& Setting audible signal opera-tion (modelswithout “keylessaccesswithpush-buttonstartsystem”)

S02AQ09Using an electronic chirp, the system willgive you an audible signal when the doorslock and unlock. If desired, you may turnthe audible signal off.

Perform the following steps to deactivatethe audible signal. You can also use thesame steps to restore the function.1. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut alldoors and the rear gate.

2. Press and hold the “ ” of the powerlocking switch and pull the key out andreinsert it into the ignition switch at least 6times within 10 seconds after Step 2.3. Open and close the driver’s door oncewithin 10 seconds after Step 3. The hazardwarning flashers flash 3 times to indicatecompletion of the setting.

Your SUBARU dealer can perform theabove procedure for you. Also, for modelswith a combination meter display (colorLCD), the setting can be changed usingthe display. For details, refer to “VehicleSetting” FP201.

– CONTINUED –

Remote keyless entry system 133

2

Keys

anddoors

(136,1)


& Replacing the batteryS02AQ12

Refer to “Replacing key battery” FP508.

& Replacing lost transmittersS02AQ13

If you lose a transmitter or want topurchase additional transmitters (up tofour can be programmed), your transmit-ters should be reprogrammed for securityreasons. For details, contact yourSUBARU dealer and have the transmittersprogrammed into the remote keyless entrysystem.

& Certification for remote key-less entry system

S02AQ18

! U.S.-spec. modelsS02AQ1801

FCC ID: CWTB1G077FCC ID: CWTD1G141

CAUTION



! Canada-spec. modelsS02AQ1802

Remote keyless entry system134

(137,1)


! Mexico-spec. modelsS02AQ1803

IFETEL RLVSUTB15-1814SUBARUMODEL: TB1G077

IFETEL RLVSUTD18-0302SUBARUMODEL: TD1G141

2-5. Door locksS02AC

& Locking and unlocking fromthe outside

S02AC01NOTEIf you unlock the driver’s door with akey (including an emergency key) andopen the door while the alarm system isarmed, the alarm system is triggeredand the vehicle’s horn sounds. In thiscase, perform any of the followingoperations:

. Models with “keyless access withpush-button start system”:

– Press any button on the accesskey fob (except when the accesskey fob battery is discharged).– Press the push-button ignitionswitch to “ACC”.– Carry the access key fob andperform either of the following pro-cedures.

– Grip the front door handle.– Press the rear gate openerbutton.

. Models without “keyless accesswith push-button start system”:

– Press any button on the remotetransmitter (except when the trans-mitter battery is discharged).

– Insert the key into the ignitionswitch and turn the ignition switchto “ON”.

For details about the alarm system,refer to “Alarm system” FP139.

! How to lock and unlock the vehicleusing the key

S02AC0101

1) Rotate the key toward the front to lock.2) Rotate the key toward the rear to unlock.

In this case, only the driver’s side door islocked or unlocked.

NOTEModels with “keyless access withpush-button start system”:The emergency key is directional. If thekey cannot be inserted, change the

– CONTINUED –

Door locks 135

2

Keys

anddoors

(138,1)


direction that the grooved side is facingand insert it again.

! How to lock the vehicle withoutusing the key

S02AC0102To lock the door from outside without thekey, the following methods are available.

! Locking using lock leverS02AC010201

1) Rotate the lock lever forward.2) Close the door.

In this way, only the door that was operatedwill be locked.

! Locking using power door lock-ing switch

S02AC010202

1) Press the lock side of the power doorlocking switch.*

2) Close the door.*: For details about the power door lockingswitch, refer to “How to operate the powerdoor locking switches” FP137.

In this case, all closed doors, the rear gateand fuel filler lid are locked at the sametime.

NOTEMake sure that you do not leave the keyinside the vehicle when locking thedoors from the outside without the key.

& Locking and unlocking fromthe inside

S02AC02

! How to use the lock leverS02AC0202

1) Rotate the lock lever rearward to unlock.2) Rotate the lock lever forward to lock.

Always make sure that all doors and therear gate are closed before starting todrive.

The red mark on the lock lever appearswhen the door is unlocked.Pull the inside door handle to open anunlocked door.

Door locks136

(139,1)


WARNING

. Keep all doors locked when youdrive, especially when small chil-dren are in your vehicle.Along with the proper use ofseatbelts and child restraints,locking the doors reduces thechance of being thrown out ofthe vehicle in an accident.It also helps prevent passengersfrom falling out if a door isaccidentally opened, and intru-ders from unexpectedly openingdoors and entering your vehicle.

. Do not pull the front door handlefrom inside while driving. Thedoor could open even if it islocked.

! How to operate the power doorlocking switches

S02AC0203All doors, the rear gate and fuel filler lid canbe locked and unlocked using the powerdoor locking switches located on thedriver’s side and the front passenger’sside doors.

Example1) Press to lock.2) Press to unlock.

NOTEMake sure that you do not leave the keyinside the vehicle before locking thedoors from the outside using the powerdoor locking switches.

& Automatic door locking/un-locking

S02AC08All doors, rear gate and the fuel filler lid areautomatically locked or unlocked underthe following conditions.. For automatic door locking

– When the vehicle speed reaches 12mph (20 km/h) or higher (factory

default setting).– When the select lever is shifted intoa position other than the “P” position.

. For automatic door unlocking– When the driver’s door is open(factory default setting).– When the ignition switch is turned toOFF.– When the select lever is shifted intothe “P” position.

NOTE. The user can change the automaticdoor locking/unlocking setting with thecombination meter. Refer to “Menuscreens” FP200.. When locking the door by operatingpower door locking switches, auto-matic door locking will not operate.. When unlocking the door by operat-ing power door locking switches, auto-matic door unlocking will not operate.. When getting out of the vehicle froma rear door, make sure to unlock all thedoors by pushing the unlock side of thepower door locking switch. If a reardoor is unlocked from the inside doorlever then the door is opened andclosed, the Key lock-in preventionfunction will be triggered. All doors willbe unlocked, the Key lock-in preventionwarning indicator “ ” will appear and

– CONTINUED –

Door locks 137

2

Keys

anddoors

(140,1)


the warning chime will also sound.

& Key lock-in prevention func-tion

S02AC06Under the following conditions, all thedoors will not lock when the door lockswitch is pushed with the front door open.. The key is still in the ignition switch(models without “keyless access withpush-button start system”).. The ignition switch is in the “ACC” or“ON” position (models with “keyless ac-cess with push-button start system”).

NOTE. When leaving the vehicle, make sureyou are holding the key before lockingthe doors.. The factory setting (default setting)for this function is set as “operational”.This function’s operational/non-opera-tional setting can be changed by aSUBARU dealer. Contact a SUBARUdealer for details.. When getting out of the vehicle froma rear door, make sure to unlock all thedoors by pushing the unlock side of thepower door locking switch. If a reardoor is unlocked from the inside doorlever then the door is opened andclosed, the Key lock-in prevention

function will be triggered. All doors willbe unlocked, the Key lock-in preventionwarning indicator “ ” will appear andthe warning chime will also sound.

! Non-operation of key lock-in pre-vention function

S02AC0602When the system is set so that it does notoperate, the doors are locked by thefollowing operation.. If the lock lever is turned to the front(“LOCK”) position with the driver’s dooropen and the driver’s door is then closedwith the lock lever in that position, thedriver’s door is locked.. If the spare key is used to lock thedriver’s door from the outside of thevehicle, the door is locked.

& Battery drainage preventionfunction

S02AC03If a door or the rear gate is not completelyclosed, the interior lights will remainilluminated as a result. However, severallights are automatically turned off by thebattery drainage prevention function toprevent the battery from discharging. Thefollowing interior lights are affected by thisfunction.

Item Switchposition

Automaticallyturning off

Map lights DOOR Approximately 20minutes later

Dome light DOOR Approximately 20minutes later

Ignition switchlight — Approximately 20

minutes later

Cargo area light DOOR Approximately 20minutes later

Rear gate light(if equipped) DOOR Approximately 20

minutes later

NOTE. The default setting for this functionis set as “operational”. The operational/non-operational setting of this functioncan be changed by a SUBARU dealer.Contact your SUBARU dealer tochange the setting.. When leaving the vehicle, pleasemake sure that all doors and the reargate are completely closed.. The battery drainage preventionfunction does not operate while thekey is in the ignition switch.

Door locks138

(141,1)


2-6. Alarm systemS02AF

The alarm system helps to protect yourvehicle and valuables from theft. The hornsounds and the hazard warning flashersflash if someone attempts to break intoyour vehicle.

For models with “keyless access withpush-button start system”:The system can be armed or disarmedwith the keyless access function or accesskey fob.The system will not be activated when thepush-button ignition switch is in the “ACC”or “ON” position.

For models without “keyless accesswith push-button start system”:The system can be armed or disarmedwith the remote transmitter.The system will not be activated when thekey is inserted into the ignition switch.

Your vehicle’s alarm system has been setfor activation at the time of shipment fromthe factory. You can set the system fordeactivation yourself or have it done byyour SUBARU dealer.

& Alarm system operationS02AF01

When the alarm system is armed, it istriggered by the opening any of the doors,the rear gate or engine hood.The alarm system will activate the follow-ing alarms when triggered.. The vehicle’s horn will sound for 30seconds.. The hazard warning flashers will flashfor 30 seconds.

If any of the doors, the rear gate or enginehood remains open after the 30-secondperiod, the horn will continue to sound for amaximum of 3 minutes. If the door, reargate or engine hood is closed while thehorn is sounding, the horn will stopsounding with a delay of up to 30 seconds.

NOTEThe alarm system can be set to triggerthe illumination of the following interiorlights.. Map lights (illuminates only whenthe door interlock switch is in the“DOOR” position). Dome light (illuminates only whenthe dome light switch is in the “DOOR”position). Cargo area light (illuminates onlywhen the cargo area light switch is inthe “DOOR” position)

The notifications regarding the maplights, dome light and cargo area lightare deactivated as the factory setting. ASUBARU dealer can activate the sys-tem. Contact your SUBARU dealer fordetails.

& Arming the systemS02AF04

The alarm system becomes armed whenthe following operation is performed.1. Close all windows and the moonroof (ifequipped) and turn the ignition switch tothe “OFF” position.2. Carry the key and get out of thevehicle.3. Make sure that the engine hood islocked.4. Lock the doors using any of thefollowing methods.

. Locking using the remote keylessentry system. For details, refer to“Remote keyless entry system”FP131.. Locking using the keyless accessfunction (if equipped). For details, referto “Locking with the door lock sensor”FP119.. Locking using the power door lock-ing switch. For details, refer to “Lockingusing power door locking switch”FP136.

– CONTINUED –

Alarm system 139

2

Keys

anddoors

(142,1)


. Locking using the rear lock button.For details, refer to “Locking with therear lock button” FP119.. Locking using the power rear gatelock button. For details, refer to “Lock-ing with the power rear gate lockbutton” FP120.

Security indicator light

NOTE. All doors, the rear gate and fuel fillerlid will lock, an electronic chirp willsound once, the hazard warningflashers will flash once, and the secur-ity indicator light will start flashingrapidly.. If any of the doors or the rear gate isnot fully closed, an electronic chirpsounds five times and the hazard

warning flashers flash five times toalert you that the doors (or the reargate) are not properly closed. Whenyou close the door, doors will automa-tically lock and the system will auto-matically arm in 30 seconds.5. Approximately 30 seconds later, thesystem will enter surveillance state.

When the system is in surveillance state,the security indicator light will then flashslowly (twice approximately every 2 sec-onds), indicating that the system has beenarmed for surveillance.

NOTE. The system can be armed even if thewindows and/or moonroof are open.Always make sure that they are fullyclosed before arming the system.. The 30-second standby time can beeliminated if you prefer. Have it per-formed by your SUBARU dealer.. If any of the following actions isdone during the standby period, thesystem will not switch to the surveil-lance state.

– Doors (including the rear gate)are unlocked using the access keyfob/remote transmitter.– Doors (including the rear gate)are unlocked using the keyless

access function (models with “key-less access with push-button startsystem”).– Any door (including the rear gateand engine hood) is opened.– The ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position (models without“keyless access with push-buttonstart system”).– Push-button ignition switch isturned to the “ACC” position (mod-els with “keyless access with push-button start system”).

& Disarming the systemS02AF05

Perform either of the following procedures.. Briefly press a button (for less than 2seconds) on the access key fob/remotetransmitter.. Carry the access key fob and performeither of the following procedures (modelswith “keyless access with push-buttonstart system”).

– Grip the front door handle.– Press the rear gate opener button.– Unlock using the PIN code access.

The flashing of the security indicator lightwill then change slowly (once approxi-mately every 3 seconds from twice ap-proximately every 2 seconds), indicatingthat the alarm system has been disarmed.

Alarm system140

(143,1)


! Emergency disarmingS02AF0501

If you cannot disarm the system using theaccess key fob/transmitter (i.e., the trans-mitter is lost, broken or the transmitterbattery is too weak), you can disarm thesystem without using the access key fob/remote transmitter.The system can be disarmed if you turn theignition switch from the “LOCK”/“OFF”position to the “ON” position with aregistered key/access key fob.

NOTEFor models with “keyless access withpush-button start system”, if the ac-cess key fob battery is discharged,perform the procedure described in“Switching power status” FP452. Insuch a case, replace the battery im-mediately. Refer to “Replacing batteryof access key fob” FP508.

& Alarm system settingS02AF11

To change the setting of your vehicle’salarm system for activation or deactiva-tion, do the following.1. Disarm the alarm system. Refer to“Disarming the system” FP140.2. Sit in the driver’s seat and shut alldoors, the rear gate and engine hood.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.4. Hold down “ ” of the driver’s powerdoor locking switch, open the driver’s doorwithin the following 1 second, and wait 10seconds without releasing the switch. Thesetting will then be changed as follows.

. Type A combination meterSettingstatus

Combinationmeter display Horn

Activate AL on Once

Deactivate AL off Twice

. Type B combination meterSettingstatus

Combinationmeter display Horn

Activate AL ON Once

Deactivate AL OFF Twice

NOTEYoumay have the above setting changedone by your SUBARU dealer.

& If you have accidentally trig-gered the alarm system

S02AF03

! To stop the alarmS02AF0301

Do any of the following operations:. Press any button on the access key fob/remote transmitter.

. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position (models without “keyless accesswith push-button start system”).. Turn the push-button ignition to the“ACC” position (models with “keylessaccess with push-button start system”).

NOTEOnly registered keys will stop thealarm. If the immobilizer transponderis not registered, the alarm will notstop.

& Valet modeS02AF06

When you choose the valet mode, thealarm system does not operate. In valetmode, the remote transmitter is used onlyfor locking and unlocking the doors andrear gate and panic activation.

To enter the valet mode, change thesetting of your vehicle’s alarm system todeactivationmode. Refer to “Alarm systemsetting” FP141. The security indicatorlight will continue to flash once every 3seconds, indicating that the system is inthe valet mode.

To exit valet mode, change the setting ofyour vehicle’s alarm system to activationmode. Refer to “Alarm system setting”FP141.

Alarm system 141

2

Keys

anddoors

(144,1)


2-7. Child safety locksS02AG

Each rear door has a child safety lock.When the child safety lock lever is in thelock position, the door cannot be openedfrom the inside. The door can only beopened from the outside.

WARNING

Always turn the child safety locks tothe “LOCK” position when childrensit in the rear seat. Serious injurycould result if a child accidentallyopens the door and falls out.

2-8. WindowsS02AH

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injurycaused by entrapment, always con-form to the following instructionswithout exception.. When operating the power win-

dows, be extremely careful toprevent anyone’s body parts orany other objects from beingcaught in the window.

. Always lock the passengers’ win-dows using the lock switch whenchildren are riding in the vehicle.

. Always carry the key when youleave the vehicle for safety rea-sons and never allow an unat-tended child to remain in thevehicle. Failure to follow thisprocedure could result in injuryto a child operating the powerwindow.

NOTE. If the power window system detectsresistance, an impact or abnormality,the window operation may be automa-tically stopped to prevent further jam-

ming, entrapment or malfunction.– The closing window slides downslightly and stops.– The opening window stops slid-ing down.

. The power window system maydetect resistance, an impact or anabnormality in the following cases.

– A substantial sized object iscaught between the window andthe window frame.– A foreign object is caught be-tween the window and the windowframe.– The vehicle drives over a deeppothole.

. The window cannot be closed for afew seconds after the window is auto-matically stopped by the system.

Child safety locks142

(145,1)


& Power window operationS02AH07

! Power window switchesS02AH0701

. Driver’s side power window switches:

1) For front left window (with one-touch autoup and down feature)

2) For front right window (with one-touchauto up and down feature (if equipped))

3) For rear left window4) For rear right window5) Lock switch

All door windows can be controlled by thepower window switch cluster on the driverside door.These switches illuminate when activated.

. Passenger’s side power windowswitches:

Each passenger’s window can be con-trolled by the power window switch locatedon the door.These switches illuminate when activated.

! Operating the windowS02AH0702

With one-touch auto up and down feature1) Automatically close*2) Close3) Open4) Automatically open**: To stop the window halfway, operate theswitch to the opposite side.

– CONTINUED –

Windows 143

2

Keys

anddoors

(146,1)


Without one-touch auto up and downfeature1) Close2) Open

NOTEAvoid the following.. Continuously operating a switch inthe same direction after the window isfully closed or fully opened.. Continuously operating three ormore switches all at once in the samedirection after the windows are fullyclosed or fully opened.

Either of the operations describedabove may cause the power windowbreaker to operatemaking it impossibleto open or close the window. Be sure toinitialize the power windows. Refer to

“Initialization of power window (win-dows with off delay function)” FP145.

! Anti-entrapment function (windowswith one-touch auto up and downfunction)

S02AH0703While closing the window automatically, ifthe window senses a substantial enoughobject trapped between the window andthe window frame, it automatically movesdown slightly and stops.If a foreign object is caught while window isopening automatically, the window willstop.

CAUTION

. Never attempt to test the powerwindow operation using bodyparts.

. If an object is caught just beforethe window fully closes, the sys-tem may not operate properly.

NOTE. If a window detects an impact similarto that caused by trapping an object (forexample, when the vehicle encountersa deep pothole), the anti-entrapmentfunction may operate.

. You cannot close the window for afew seconds after the anti-entrapmentfunction operates.

! Off delay function (if equipped)S02AH0705

The windows can be operated for approxi-mately 40 seconds even after the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ACC” or “OFF”position. If a front door is opened within 40seconds, the off delay function is can-celed.! Locking the passengers’ windows

S02AH0704

1) Lock2) Unlock

The lock switch is in the lock position, therear windows cannot be operated by thedriver’s side switches. The passenger’sside switches and the rear seat sideswitches are not operational either.

Windows144

(147,1)


When the indicator on the windowswitches does not illuminate, the windowswitch cannot be operated.

& Initializationofpowerwindow(windows with off delay func-tion)

S02AH06If the one-touch auto up and down functionor off delay function does not operateproperly, operate each window accordingto the following procedure in order toinitialize the power window system.1. Close the door.2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.3. Open the window completely and thenpress and hold down the power windowswitch for approximately 1 second.4. Close the window completely and thenpull and hold the power window switch forapproximately 1 second.

2-9. Rear gateS02AJ

CAUTION

When loading and unloading cargo,be careful not to come in contactwith the hot engine exhaust gas orthe exhaust pipe, because theycould burn you.

& Manual rear gateS02AJ04

The rear gate can be locked and unlockedusing any of the following systems.. Power door locking switch: Refer to“Locking and unlocking from the inside”FP136.. Keyless access with the push-buttonstart system (if equipped): Refer to “Key-less access with push-button start system”FP113.. Remote keyless entry system: Refer to“Remote keyless entry system” FP131.. Automatic door locking/unlocking: Re-fer to “Automatic door locking/unlocking”FP137.

To open:

Rear gate opener button

1. Unlock the rear gate.2. Press and hold the rear gate openerbutton. The rear gate will open slightly.3. Hold the rear gate and lift it up slowly.

NOTEIf the rear gate cannot be opened due toa discharged vehicle battery, a mal-function in the door locking/unlockingsystem or other causes, the rear gatecan be unlocked by manually operatingthe rear gate lock release lever. For theprocedure, refer to “Rear gate – if therear gate cannot be opened” FP453.

– CONTINUED –

Rear gate 145

2

Keys

anddoors

(148,1)


To close:

Lower the rear gate slowly and push downfirmly until the latch engages.The rear gate can be lowered easily if youpull it down holding the handle.

WARNING

. To prevent dangerous exhaustgas from entering the vehicle,always keep the rear gate closedwhile the engine is running.

. Do not attempt to shut the reargate while holding the handle.

. Do not close the rear gate bypulling the handle from inside thecargo space. There is a danger ofyour hand being caught andinjured.

CAUTION

. Do not jam a plastic bag in orplace cellophane tape on the reargate stays or scratch the stayswhile loading or unloading cargo.Doing so could cause leakage ofgas from the stays, which mayresult in their inability to hold therear gate open.

. Be careful not to hit your head orface on the rear gate when open-ing or closing the rear gate andwhen loading or unloading cargo.

& Power rear gate (if equipped)S02AJ01

WARNING

. When operating the power reargate, observe the following pre-cautions. Ignoring the precau-tions may result in an injury (e.g., anyone’s body is hit againstthe rear gate or is caught in therear gate, etc.)– Make sure there are no people

around the rear gate.– Never let anyone get close to

the rear gate.. When closing the rear gate, be

sure to prevent anyone’s bodyparts or any other objects frombeing caught in the rear gate.Otherwise, serious personal in-jury may be caused by entrap-ment.

. After opening the rear gate on aslope using the power rear gatefeature, the rear gate may close.Make sure that the rear gate hasstopped completely after open-ing it.

. When leaving the vehicle, alwayscarry the key for safety and neverallow an unattended child to

Rear gate146

(149,1)


remain in the vehicle. Doing socould result in injury to the childoperating the power rear gate.

. The driver should be aware of andpay careful attention to his/herresponsibilities.

. Use the power rear gate onlywhen the area around the reargate is clearly visible and whenyou have checked that there is nodanger of people being caught inthe gate.

CAUTION

. When closing the rear gate afteropening it, make sure to use thepower rear gate. If the rear gate isclosed manually with extra force,the power rear gate may bedamaged.

. Do not install any accessoriesother than genuine SUBARUparts on the rear gate. If theweight of rear gate increasesexcessively, the rear gate stayscannot support the rear gatesufficiently when opening therear gate. Also, the power reargate may not function properly ormay malfunction.

The power rear gate operates only whenall of the following conditions are satisfied.. The vehicle is stopped completely.. The outside temperature is within arange of −228F to 1408F (from −308C to608C).. The ignition switch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position. Or, the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position and the selectlever is in the “P” position.

We recommend using the power rear gatefunction in most circumstances instead ofmanual operation.

NOTE. Do not press the power rear gatebutton repeatedly while the power reargate is operating. Otherwise, the sys-tem may ignore the button operation inorder to avoid being damaged.. If the vehicle starts tomovewhile thepower rear gate is operating, the sys-tem sounds a buzzer and closes therear gate automatically. At this time, ifthe system detects jamming, it willdeactivate the power rear gate and therear gate will not be closed. If thisoccurs, close the rear gate manually.For details, refer to “Manual rear gate”FP145.

. If you try to open the rear gate usingthe power rear gate function immedi-ately after closing the rear gate usingthe power rear gate function, an elec-tronic chirp will sound and the rear gatewill not open. Wait for a while beforetrying to open the rear gate via thepower rear gate function.. If either of the operating conditionshas not been satisfied while operatingthe power rear gate, an electronic chirpwill sound and the power rear gate willbe deactivated. In this case, the reargate may stop opening or closingsuddenly.

! OperationS02AJ0111

NOTE. The rear gate will remain unlockedeven after closing it. Always lock therear gate when leaving the vehicle.. If you cannot open/close the reargate by performing the operation de-scribed here, a short electronic chirpwill sound three times (beep, beep,beep).

– CONTINUED –

Rear gate 147

2

Keys

anddoors

(150,1)


! By the power rear gate button(other than the buttons on therear gate)

S02AJ011101

Power rear gate button on the instrumentpanel

Power rear gate button on the access keyfob

Power rear gate button on the transmitterTo open the rear gate:Press and hold the power rear gate buttonwhen the rear gate is closed. The rear gate

will open automatically. Then an electronicchirp and the hazard warning flashers willoperate as follows:. When operating the power rear gatebutton on the instrument panel/transmitter:sounds and flashes twice.. When operating the power rear gatebutton on the access key fob: sounds andflashes four times.

NOTE. If the rear gate cannot be opened byoperating the power rear gate button onthe instrument panel, unlock it with thekeyless access function or the remotekeyless entry system. Then, it will bepossible to open the power rear gateusing the power rear gate button on theinstrument panel.. The factory setting (default setting)of the operation for the “ ” button onthe access key fob or the transmitter ispressing and holding. This setting canbe changed to non-operation or press-ing twice at SUBARU dealers. For moredetails, contact a SUBARU dealer.

To pause the opening rear gate:Briefly press the power rear gate buttonwhile the rear gate is being opened. Thenan electronic chirp will sound twice and thehazard warning flashers will flash twice.

Rear gate148

(151,1)


If you press the power rear gate buttonagain, the rear gate will close.You can open the rear gate by pressing thepower rear gate button briefly while therear gate is being closed.

NOTEThe rear gate cannot be paused when itis in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) rangefrom the fully closed position. Thesystemwill ignore any button operationand the rear gate will continue to open.

To close the rear gate:Press and hold the power rear gate button.Then an electronic chirp will sound twiceand the hazard warning flashers will flashtwice. If you briefly press the power reargate button again, the rear gate will open.

NOTEThe factory setting (default setting) ofthe operation for the “ ” button onthe access key fob or the transmitter ispressing and holding. This setting canbe changed to non-operation or press-ing twice at SUBARU dealers. For moredetails, contact a SUBARU dealer.

! By the buttons on the rear gateS02AJ011102

NOTEAfter performing the following proce-dures, an electronic chirp will soundtwice and the hazard warning flasherswill flash twice.

Rear gate opener button

Power rear gate button on the inside edgeof the rear gate1) Power rear gate button2) Power rear gate lock button

To open the rear gate:1. For models with “keyless access withpush-button start system”, carry the ac-cess key fob. For models without “keylessaccess with push-button start system”,unlock the rear gate.2. Briefly press the rear gate openerbutton when the rear gate is closed.

The rear gate will open automatically.

To pause the opening rear gate:Briefly press either of the following buttonswhile the rear gate is being opened.. Rear gate opener button

– CONTINUED –

Rear gate 149

2

Keys

anddoors

(152,1)


. Power rear gate button on the insideedge of the rear gate

If you press the power rear gate buttonagain, the rear gate will close. You canopen the rear gate by pressing the powerrear gate button briefly while the rear gateis being closed.

NOTEThe rear gate cannot be paused when itis in the approximately 2 in (5 cm) rangefrom the fully closed position. Thesystemwill ignore any button operationand the rear gate will continue to open.

To close the rear gate:Briefly press either of the following but-tons.. Rear gate opener button. Power rear gate button on the insideedge of the rear gate

If you press the power rear gate buttonagain, the rear gate will open.

To Lock the doors using the power reargate lock button:Carry the access key fob, and press thepower rear gate lock button. All doors, therear gate and the fuel filler lid are locked,and the rear gate will be closed. Also, thehazard warning flashers will flash once,and an electronic chirp will sound once.

NOTE. By pushing the power rear gate lockbutton for more than 2 seconds, alldoors are locked, however, the autodoor closing function of the rear gatewill be canceled.. If any of the doors is not fully closed,the outside warning chime sounds fivetimes to alert you that the doors are notproperly closed.

! By manual operationS02AJ011103

To open the rear gate:Lift up the rear gate, when the rear gate atmidway position. The rear gate will openautomatically.To close the rear gate:Pull down the rear gate when the rear gateis opened. The rear gate will close auto-matically.

NOTE. If the rear gate is moved slowly, itmay not operate automatically open orclose.. When leaving the vehicle, make surethat all doors and the rear gate arecompletely locked.

! Manual operationS02AJ0108

NOTEUsing the power rear gate operation isrecommended. Manual operation willrequire physical effort.The power rear gate can be closedmanually. Refer to “Manual rear gate”FP145.

Rear gate150

(153,1)


! Memory functionS02AJ0101

Memory switch

Memory switch status1) ON status2) OFF status

Your desired rear gate height can be

registered.

Registration of the rear gate height:To register the rear gate height, performthe following procedures.1. Open the rear gate using the powerrear gate function.2. With the rear gate at the desiredheight, stop it using the power rear gatefunction.3. Press the memory switch to select the“ON” status.

Power rear gate button on the inside edgeof the rear gate1) Power rear gate button2) Power rear gate lock button

4. With the rear gate at the desiredheight, press and hold the power rear gatebutton on the inside edge of the rear gate

until an electronic chirp is heard and thehazard warning flashers flash three times.The electronic chirp and the flashinghazard warning flashers confirm the se-lected rear gate height has been regis-tered.

NOTE. To change the registered height,press the memory switch to select the“OFF” status and perform the register-ing procedure again.. It is possible to register the heightfrom approximately 2 in (5 cm) or morefrom the completely closed position.

Retrieval of the rear gate height:To open the rear gate and stop it at theregistered height, perform the followingprocedure.1. Press the memory switch to select theON status.2. Press and hold any of the power reargate switches.

Even if any of the power rear gate switchesare pressed and held while the memoryswitch is in the OFF status, you can stop itat the registered height by pressing thememory switch to select the ON statusbefore the rear gate reaches the registeredheight.

– CONTINUED –

Rear gate 151

2

Keys

anddoors

(154,1)


NOTEThe rear gate will open to the positionthat is stored in the memory functioneven if the rear gate is opened by thereverse function.

! Reverse functionS02AJ0102

WARNING

. Do not let parts of your body getcaught when operating the re-verse function. If the reversefunction does not operate forsome reason, this may lead toserious injury or accidents.

. The reverse function may notoperate if foreign objects arecaught in the rear gate just beforeit closes completely. Be carefulnot to catch your fingers andother body parts.

. The reverse function may notoperate depending on the objectshape and the manner in which itwas caught. Be careful not tocatch your fingers and otherbody parts.

CAUTION

. If the reverse function is operated3 times consecutively, automaticopening and closing of the powerrear gate function will be can-celed and the rear gate will stopopening or closing suddenly.However, the rear gate may openor close depending on the reargate height when automatic op-eration is ceased. Be careful thatthe rear gate does not hit any-one’s head or face, etc. and thatfingers and baggage, etc. are notcaught in it.

. Take care not to damage thetouch sensors. Otherwise, thereverse function may cease tooperate.

If, while opening or closing using powerrear gate, the rear gate catches persons orbaggage or hits an obstacle, an electronicchirp will sound 3 times and the rear gatewill operate as follows.

When opening the rear gate: The reargate will automatically close.

When closing the rear gate: The reargate will automatically open.

1) Touch sensor

Touch sensors are attached on the left andright edges of the rear gate. If the touchsensors detect fingers, baggage, etc.while closing by the power rear gatefunction, an electronic chirp will sounds 3times and the rear gate will open auto-matically.

NOTEWhen the rear gate is opened using thereverse function, it will be opened fullyor to the height registered in thememory function.

Rear gate152

(155,1)


! Rear gate drop prevention functionS02AJ0104

The rear gate is lowered by the weight ofsnow and such, an electronic chirp willsound and the rear gate drop preventionfunction will apply braking to the rear gateso that it prevents a rapid closure of therear gate.

NOTEIf there is snow on the rear gate, onlyuse the power rear gate function afterremoving the snow.

! Selecting audible signal operationS02AJ0109

Using an electronic chirp, the power reargate will give you an audible signal beforestarting its operation. If desired, the audi-ble signal can be turned off by a SUBARUdealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer fordetails.

For models with “keyless access withpush-button start system”, you can turnthe audible signal off by operating thecombination meter display (color LCD).For details, refer to “Keyless Entry Sys-tem” FP201.

The ON/OFF setting of the audible signalalso works as the audible signal settingsfor the “remote keyless entry system” andthe “keyless access with push-button startsystem”. However, for the warning chime

such as that caused by “Reverse function”FP152 or “Rear gate drop preventionfunction” FP153, it cannot be set as non-operational.! Initialization of power rear gate

S02AJ0112If the power rear gate detects someabnormality while operating, an electronicchirp will sound and the power rear gateoperation will be automatically stopped ineither opening or closing position. In thiscase, the system needs to be initialized inthe following order to restart the functionproperly.

! If the power rear gate is closedS02AJ011201

1. Keep pressing the rear gate openerbutton until it is unlocked (for approxi-mately 5 seconds) and lift up the rear gate.

2. Pull down the rear gate until it starts toclose automatically. The system will beinitialized once the gate is fully closed.3. Operate the power rear gate and checkthat the function operates properly.

! If the power rear gate is openedS02AJ011202

1. Pull down the rear gate until it starts toclose automatically. The system will beinitialized once the gate is fully closed. Ifthe rear gate will not close completely,keep pressing the rear gate opener buttonfor approximately 5 seconds and pull downthe rear gate.2. Operate the power rear gate and checkthat the function operates properly.

CAUTION

If the power rear gate function doesnot operate properly, have yourvehicle checked by SUBARU dealer.

Rear gate 153

2

Keys

anddoors

(156,1)


2-10. Moonroof (if equipped)S02AK

WARNING

Never let anyone’s hands, arms,head or any objects protrude fromthe moonroof. A person could beseriously injured if any of the follow-ing conditions occur.. The vehicle stops suddenly.. The vehicle turns sharply.. The vehicle is involved in an

accident.. Body parts protruding from the

vehicle are struck by outsideobjects.

To avoid serious personal injurycaused by entrapment, always con-form to the following instructionswithout exception.. Before closing the moonroof,

make sure that no one’s hands,arms, head or other objects willbe accidentally caught in themoonroof.

. Always carry the key when youleave the vehicle for safety rea-sons and never allow an unat-tended child to remain in the

vehicle. Failure to follow thisprocedure could result in injuryto a child operating the moon-roof.

. Never try to check the anti-en-trapment function by deliberatelyplacing part of your body in themoonroof.

CAUTION

. Do not sit on the edge of the openmoonroof.

. Do not operate the moonroof iffalling snow or extremely coldconditions have caused it tofreeze shut.

. Do not touch the moving parts ofthemoonroof while themoonroofis operating.

. If the moonroof does not close,we recommend that you have thesystem checked by a SUBARUdealer.

The moonroof operates only when theignition switch is in the “ON” position.

& Moonroof switchS02AK02

1) OPEN/CLOSE switch2) Open3) Close

To open the moonroof:Press the rear side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”switch. The sunshade will also be openedtogether with the moonroof. The moonroofwill stop at a position approximately 6 in(15 cm) away from the fully openedposition. Slide the switch rearward againto open the moonroof completely.

To close the moonroof:Press the front side of the “OPEN/CLOSE”switch.To stop the moonroof at a selected mid-way position while opening or closing it,momentarily push the switch to the

Moonroof154

(157,1)


“OPEN” side or “CLOSE” side.

After washing the vehicle or after it rains,wipe away water on the roof prior toopening the moonroof to prevent drops ofwater from falling into the passengercompartment.

NOTE. Driving with themoonroof fully opencan cause an annoying sound to begenerated at high speeds. If this oc-curs, use the moonroof at the initialstop position of 6 in (15 cm) away fromthe fully opened position.. The moonroof cannot be operatedwhile the remote engine starter systemis operating.

& Anti-entrapment functionS02AK06

When the moonroof senses a substantialenough object trapped between its glassand the vehicle’s roof during closure, itautomatically moves back to the fully openposition and stops there. The anti-entrap-ment function may also be activated by astrong shock on the moonroof even whenthere is nothing trapped.

CAUTION

Never attempt to test this functionusing fingers, hands or other partsof your body.

NOTEFor the sake of safety, it is recom-mended that you avoid driving with themoonroof fully opened.

& SunshadeS02AK05

The sunshade can be slid forward orbackward by hand while the moonroof isclosed.If the moonroof is opened, the sunshadealso moves back.

Moonroof 155

2

Keys

anddoors

(158,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(159,1)


S033-1. Ignition switch (models without “keyless

access with push-button start system”) ..... 160Key positions .....................................................160Key reminder chime............................................161Ignition switch light ............................................161

3-2. Push-button ignition switch (models with“keyless access with push-button startsystem”) ........................................................ 162Safety precautions..............................................162Operating range for push-button start system.....162Switching power status.......................................163When access key fob does not operateproperly............................................................164

3-3. Hazard warning flasher .................................. 1643-4. Meters and gauges ......................................... 164

Speedometer ......................................................164Tachometer.........................................................164Odometer ...........................................................165Double trip meter................................................165Fuel gauge .........................................................166ECO gauge (if equipped).....................................166Combination meter settings ................................167

3-5. Illumination brightness control ..................... 168Auto dimmer cancel function ..............................168

3-6. Warning and indicator .................................... 168Initial illumination for system check....................168Seatbelt warning light and chime ........................169SRS airbag system warning light ........................172Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFFindicators .........................................................172

CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunctionindicator light................................................... 173

Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant temperature high warning light ............ 174

Charge warning light .......................................... 175Oil pressure warning light .................................. 175Engine low oil level warning light ....................... 175Windshield washer fluid warning light ................ 175AT OIL TEMP warning light ................................. 175Rear differential oil temperature warning light(if equipped)..................................................... 176

Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec.models)............................................................ 176

ABS warning light .............................................. 177Brake system warning light (red) ........................ 178Electronic parking brake light............................. 179Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light .................. 180Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator light......... 181Depress brake indicator light (if equipped) ......... 181Low fuel warning light........................................ 181Door open warning light..................................... 181Engine hood open warning light......................... 181All-Wheel Drive warning light ............................. 181Power steering warning light .............................. 182Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/VehicleDynamics Control operation indicator light....... 182

Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicator light ..... 183Warning chimes and warning indicator ofthe keyless access with push-button startsystem (if equipped)......................................... 184

Security indicator light ....................................... 188SI-DRIVE indicator light...................................... 189


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(160,1)


Select lever/gear position indicator .....................189Turn signal indicator lights .................................190High beam indicator light....................................190High beam assist indicator light (if equipped) .....190Cruise control indicator light (if equipped) ..........190Cruise control set indicator light (if equipped).....191Automatic headlight beam leveler warninglight..................................................................191

LED headlight warning light ................................191Steering Responsive Headlight warning light/Steering Responsive Headlight OFF indicatorlight..................................................................191

Front fog light indicator light (if equipped) ..........191Headlight indicator light (if equipped) .................191Auto Start Stop warning light/Auto Start StopOFF indicator light (yellow) ...............................191

Auto Start Stop indicator light (green).................192Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected indicatorlight..................................................................192

X-MODE indicator light (if equipped) ...................192Hill descent control indicator light(if equipped) .....................................................193

BSD/RCTA warning light (if equipped) .................193BSD/RCTA OFF indicator light (if equipped) ........193RAB warning light (if equipped) ..........................193RAB OFF indicator light (if equipped)..................193Driver Monitoring System operation indicatorlight (green)/Driver Monitoring Systemwarning light (yellow) (if equipped) ...................193

Driver Monitoring System OFF indicator light(if equipped) .....................................................193

Driver Monitoring System temporary stopindicator light (if equipped) .............................. 194

Icy road surface warning light (if equipped) ........ 1943-7. Combination meter display (color LCD)

(if equipped) ..................................................194Basic operation.................................................. 195Welcome screen (opening animation) andGood-bye (ending animation) screen ................ 196

Warning screen.................................................. 196Telltale screen.................................................... 197Basic screens .................................................... 198Menu screens .................................................... 200

3-8. Multi-function display (black and white) .......202Driving information display ................................ 202Outside temperature indicator ............................ 207X-MODE indicator (if equipped) .......................... 208Clock ................................................................. 208

3-9. Multi-function display (color LCD) .................208Features ............................................................ 209Welcome screen................................................. 209Self-check screen............................................... 209Interruption screen............................................. 210Basic operation.................................................. 210Basic screens .................................................... 211Setting screen.................................................... 218How to get the source code using the opensource ............................................................. 232

3-10. Clock ..............................................................233Setting the clock manually ................................. 233Setting the clock automatically........................... 234Regulatory information....................................... 235


(161,1)


3-11. Light control switch...................................... 235Precautions and tips...........................................235Headlights ..........................................................236High/low beam change (dimmer) .........................238Headlight flasher ................................................238High beam assist function (if equipped) ..............239Daytime running light system .............................242

3-12. Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH) ........ 2423-13. Headlight beam leveler................................. 2433-14. Fog light switch (if equipped)...................... 2433-15. Turn signal lever ........................................... 244

One-touch lane changer......................................245

3-16. Wiper and washer..........................................245Windshield wiper and washer switches .............. 246Rear window wiper and washer switch ............... 248

3-17. Mirrors............................................................249Inside mirror ...................................................... 249Auto-dimming mirror/compass with HomeLink®

(if equipped)..................................................... 249Outside mirrors.................................................. 257

3-18. Defogger and deicer (if equipped) ...............2593-19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel.......................261

Heated Steering Wheel system (if equipped) ....... 2613-20. Horn................................................................262


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(162,1)


3-1. Ignition switch (modelswithout “keyless access withpush-button start system”)

S03AA

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch tothe “LOCK” position while thevehicle is being driven or towedbecause that will lock the steer-ing wheel, preventing steeringcontrol. And when the engine isturned off, it takes amuch greatereffort than usual to steer.

. Before leaving the vehicle, al-ways remove the key from theignition switch for safety andnever allow an unattended childto remain in the vehicle. Failure tofollow this procedure could re-sult in injury to a child or others.Children could operate the powerwindows, the moonroof or othercontrols or evenmake the vehiclemove.

CAUTION

Do not attach a large key holder orkey case to either key. If it bangedagainst your knees or hands whileyou are driving, it could turn theignition switch from the “ON” posi-tion to the “ACC” or “LOCK” posi-tion, thereby stopping the engine.Also, if the key is attached to a keyholder or to a large bunch of otherkeys, centrifugal force may act on itas the vehicle moves, resulting inunwanted turning of the ignitionswitch.

The ignition switch has four positions:LOCK, ACC, ON and START.

NOTE. Keep the ignition switch in the“LOCK” position when the engine isnot running.. Using electrical accessories for along time with the ignition switch in the“ON” or “ACC” position can cause thebattery to go dead.. If the ignition switch will not movefrom the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”position, turn the steering wheelslightly to the left and right as you turnthe ignition switch.

& Key positionsS03AA11

Position Description

LOCK

The key can only be insertedor removed in this position.The ignition switch will lockthe steering wheel when youremove the key.

ACCIn this position the electricalaccessories (audio, acces-sory power outlet, etc.) can beused.

ONThis is the normal operatingposition after starting the en-gine.

START The engine is started in thisposition.

Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”)160

(163,1)


CAUTION

Do not turn the ignition switch to the“START” position while the engineis running.

NOTE

. To turn the key from the “ACC” to“LOCK” position, the select lever mustbe in the “P” position and the key mustbe pushed in and turned.. If your registered key fails to startthe engine, pull out the key once (thesecurity indicator light will blink), andthen insert the key again and turn it tothe “START” position again to restartthe engine.

. The engine may not start in thefollowing cases:

– The key grip is touching anotherkey or a metallic key holder.

– The key is near another key thatcontains an immobilizer transpon-

der.– The key is near or touchinganother transmitter.

& Key reminder chimeS03AA05

The reminder chime sounds when thedriver’s door is opened and the ignitionswitch is in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position.

The chime stops under the followingconditions.. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position.. The key is removed from the ignitionswitch.. The driver’s door is closed.

& Ignition switch lightS03AA06

For easy access to the ignition switch inthe dark, the ignition switch light illumi-nates when the driver’s door is opened orwhen the driver’s door is unlocked usingthe remote keyless entry transmitter.

The light remains illuminated for severaltens of seconds and then gradually turnsoff under the following conditions.. The driver’s door is closed.. The doors are unlocked using theremote keyless entry transmitter.

– CONTINUED –

Ignition switch (models without “keyless access with push-button start system”) 161

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(164,1)


The light turns off immediately under thefollowing conditions.. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position.. All doors and the rear gate are lockedusing the remote keyless entry transmitter.

3-2. Push-button ignitionswitch (models with “keylessaccesswithpush-buttonstartsystem”)

S03BG

& Safety precautionsS03BG04

Refer to “Safety precautions” FP114.

& Operating range for push-button start system

S03BG01

1) Antennas2) Operating range

NOTE. If the access key fob is not detectedwithin the operating range of the anten-nas inside the vehicle, the push-buttonignition switch and the engine start

cannot be operated.. Even when the access key fob isoutside the vehicle, if it is placed tooclose to the glass, it may be possible toswitch the power or to start the engine.. Do not leave the access key fob inthe following places. It may becomeimpossible to operate the push-buttonignition switch and the engine start. Itmay also cause a false warning to issuealthough no malfunction actually oc-curs, or not to issue a warning whenany malfunction occurs.

– On the instrument panel– On the floor– Inside the glove box– Inside the door trim pocket– On the rear seat– In the cargo area

. When operating the push-buttonignition switch or starting the engine,if the access key fob battery is dis-charged, perform the procedure de-scribed in “Access key fob – if accesskey fob does not operate properly”FP451. In such a case, replace thebattery immediately. Refer to “Repla-cing battery of access key fob”FP508.

Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”)162

(165,1)


& Switching power statusS03BG02

1) Operation indicator2) Push-button ignition switch

The power is switched every time thepush-button ignition switch is pressed.1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in thedriver’s seat.2. Shift the select lever into the “P”/“N”position.3. Press the push-button ignition switchwithout depressing the brake pedal. Everytime the button is pressed, the power isswitched in the sequence of “OFF”, “ACC”,“ON” and “OFF”. When the engine isstopped and the push-button ignitionswitch is in “ACC” or “ON”, the operationindicator on the push-button ignition switchilluminates in orange.

Powerstatus Indicator color Operation

OFF Turned off Power is turnedoff.

ACC Orange

The followingsystems can be

used:audio and ac-cessory power

outlet.

ON

Orange(while engine is

stopped) All electricalsystems can be

used.Turned off(while engine is

running)

CAUTION

. When the push-button ignitionswitch is left in “ON” (while theengine is not running) or “ACC”for a long time, it may result invehicle battery discharge.

. Donot spill drinks or other liquidson the push-button ignitionswitch. It may cause a malfunc-tion.

. Do not touch the push-buttonignition switch with a hand soiledwith oil or other contaminants. Itmay cause a malfunction.

. If the push-button ignition switchdoes not operate smoothly, stopthe operation. Contact a SUBARUdealer immediately.

. If the push-button ignition switchdoes not illuminate even whenthe instrument panel illuminationis turned on, have the vehicleinspected at a SUBARU dealer.

. If the vehicle was left in the hotsun for a long time, the surface ofthe push-button ignition switchmay get hot. Be careful not toburn yourself.

NOTE. When operating the push-buttonignition switch, firmly press it all theway.. If the push-button ignition switch ispressed quickly, the power may notturn on or off.. If the indicator light on the push-button ignition switch flashes in greenwhen the push-button ignition switch ispressed, steering is locked. When thisoccurs, press the push-button ignitionswitch while turning the steering wheelleft and right.

– CONTINUED –

Push-button ignition switch (models with “keyless access with push-button start system”) 163

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(166,1)


! Battery drainage prevention func-tion

S03BG0201The push-button ignition switch automati-cally switches to the “OFF” position toprevent the battery from going dead undereither of the following conditions:. The push-button ignition switch is left inthe “ACC” position for about 20 minuteswhen the select lever is in the “P” position.. The push-button ignition switch is left inthe “ON” position for about 1 hour whenthe select lever is in the “P” position.


S03BG03Refer to “Access key fob – if access keyfob does not operate properly” FP451.

3-3. Hazard warning flasherS03AB

The hazardwarning flasher is used to warnother drivers when you have to park yourvehicle under emergency conditions. Thehazard warning flasher works regardlessof the position of the ignition switch.

To turn on the hazard warning flasher,push the hazard warning flasher switch onthe instrument panel. All the turn signallights and the turn signal indicator lightswill flash. To turn off the flasher, push theswitch again.

NOTEWhen the hazard warning flasher is on,the turn signals do not work.

3-4. Meters and gaugesS03AD

NOTESome of the meters and gauges on thecombination meter use liquid-crystaldisplays. You will find their indicationshard to see if you wear polarizedglasses.

& SpeedometerS03AD03

The speedometer shows the vehiclespeed.

& TachometerS03AD06

The tachometer shows the engine speedin thousands of revolutions per minute.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with thepointer of the tachometer in the redzone. In this range, fuel injection willbe cut by the engine control moduleto protect the engine from overrev-ving. The engine will resume run-ning normally after the engine speedis reduced below the red zone.

Hazard warning flasher164

(167,1)


& OdometerS03AD04

1) TRIP RESET switch2) Type A combination meter3) Type B combination meter

This meter displays the odometer whenthe ignition switch is in the “ON” position.The odometer shows the total distancethat the vehicle has been driven.

NOTEIf you press the TRIP RESET switchwhen the ignition switch is in the“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, theodometer/trip meter will light up.The indicators will turn off when:. The TRIP RESET switch is not oper-ated for approximately 10 seconds.

. The driver’s door is opened and thenclosed.

& Double trip meterS03AD05


This meter displays the two trip meterswhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position.The trip meter shows the distance that thevehicle has been driven since you last setit to zero.

The display can be switched as shown inthe following sequence by pressing theTRIP RESET switch.

To set the trip meter to zero, select the Atrip or B trip meter by pressing the TRIPRESETswitch and keep the knob pressedfor more than 2 seconds.

CAUTION

To ensure safety, do not attempt tochange the function of the indicatorduring driving, as an accident couldresult.

NOTE. If the connection between the com-binationmeter and battery is broken forany reason such as vehicle mainte-nance or fuse replacement, the datarecorded on the trip meter will be lost.. If you press the TRIP RESET switchwhen the ignition switch is in the“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, theodometer/trip meter will light up. It ispossible to switch between the A tripmeter andB tripmeter indicationswhilethe odometer/trip meter is lit up.In addition, it is possible to reset the tripmeter by pressing and holding the TRIP

– CONTINUED –

Meters and gauges 165

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(168,1)


RESET switch.The indicators will turn off when:

– The TRIP RESET switch is notoperated for approximately 10 sec-onds.– The driver’s door is opened andthen closed.

& Fuel gaugeS03AD07


The fuel gauge is displayed when theignition is in the “ON” position, and it showsthe approximate amount of fuel remainingin the tank.

The gauge indication may change slightlyduring braking, turning or acceleration due

to fuel level movement in the tank.

NOTE. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuelgauge. This indicates that the fuel fillerlid is located on the right side of thevehicle.. If you press the TRIP RESET switchwhile the ignition switch is in the“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, thefuel gauge will light up and indicate theamount of fuel remaining in the tank.The indicators will turn off when:

– The TRIP RESET switch is notoperated for approximately 10 sec-onds.– The driver’s door is opened andthen closed.

& ECO gauge (if equipped)S03AD12

The ECO gauge shows the differencebetween the current rate of fuel consump-tion and the average rate of fuel consump-tion since the trip meter was last reset.

If the ECO gauge moves towards the +side, this indicates better fuel efficiency.

NOTE. The ECO gauge shows only anapproximate indication of fuel effi-ciency.. After resetting the trip meter, theaverage rate of fuel consumption is notshown until you have driven for 1 mile(or 1 km). Before that time, the ECOgauge does not operate.

Meters and gauges166

(169,1)


& Combination meter settingsS03AD16

Meter and vehicle settings can be set onthe combination meter.! Type A combination meter

S03AD1601Various adjustments can be made, suchas switching units shown on the combina-tion meter and adjusting the warning tonevolume.While the ignition switch is in the “OFF”position, each press of TRIP RESETswitch results in items shown in the tablebelow being switched.

Item Combinationmeter display

Possiblesettings

A trip —

B trip —

Gaugeneedlesweepfunction

On/Off

Changingthe unit* mile/km

Warningvolume* Lv. 1/Lv. 2/Lv. 3

*: If available

NOTE. If you switch the units on the combi-nation meter, the units on the multi-function display (black and white) alsoswitches accordingly.. If either of the following conditionsis met, the combination meter settingmode will be canceled.

– The driver’s door is opened.– The TRIP RESET switch is notoperated for approximately 10 sec-onds or more.

! Switching methodS03AD160101

1. Push the ignition switch in the “OFF”position.

1) TRIP RESET switch

2. Press the TRIP RESET switch repeat-edly until the item you want to change isdisplayed.3. Press and hold the TRIP RESETswitch while the item to be changed isdisplayed, the setting of the item will beswitched.

! Type B combination meterS03AD1602

Meter and vehicle settings can be set onthe combination meter display (colorLCD). Refer to “Menu screens” FP200.

Meters and gauges 167

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(170,1)


3-5. Illumination brightnesscontrol

S03AJ

The illumination brightness of the instru-ment panel illuminates under the followingconditions.. The light switch is in the “ ” or “ ”position when the ambient light is dark.. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”position and the headlights illuminateautomatically.

You can adjust the illumination brightnessfor better visibility.

To brighten, turn the control dial upward.To darken, turn the control dial downward.

NOTE. When the control dial is turned fullyupward, the illumination brightnessbecomes the maximum and the auto-matic dimming function does not workat all.. The brightness setting is not can-celed even when the ignition switch isturned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

& Auto dimmer cancel functionS03AJ01

When the ambient light is bright, theillumination brightness is set to the max-imum regardless of the position of thecontrol dial. In this case, you cannot adjustthe illumination brightness by using thecontrol dial.When the ambient light is dark,you can dim the illumination brightness asdescribed above.

The operational/non-operational settingand sensitivity of the auto dimmer cancelfunction can be changed by your SUBARUdealer. Contact your SUBARU dealer fordetails.

3-6. Warning and indicatorS03AE

& Initial illumination for systemcheck

S03AE29Several of the warning and indicator lightsilluminate when the ignition switch isinitially turned to the “ON” position. Thispermits checking the operation of thebulbs.

Apply the parking brake and turn theignition switch to the “ON” position. Forthe system check, several of the followinglights illuminate and then turn off afterseveral seconds or after the engine hasstarted.: Seatbelt warning light (The seatbeltwarning light turns off only when thedriver fastens the seatbelt.)/Front pas-senger’s seatbelt warning light (Theseatbelt warning light turns off onlywhen the front seat passenger fastensthe seatbelt.)

: Rear seatbelt warning light (ifequipped)

: SRS airbag system warning light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbag ONindicator light

: Front passenger’s frontal airbagOFF indicator light

Illumination brightness control168

(171,1)


/ : CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light

: Coolant temperature low indicatorlight/Coolant temperature high warn-ing light

: Charge warning light

: Oil pressure warning light

: Engine low oil level warning light

: Windshield washer fluid warning light

: AT OIL TEMP warning light

: Low tire pressure warning light (U.S.-spec. models)

/ : ABS warning light

/ : Brake system warning light

: Electronic parking brake light

: Low fuel warning light

: Door open warning light

: AWD warning light

: Power steering warning light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operationindicator light

: Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF indicatorlight

: Automatic headlight beam levelerwarning light (if equipped)

: Auto Start Stop warning light/Auto StartStop OFF indicator light (yellow)

: Auto Start Stop No Activity Detectedindicator light

If any lights fail to illuminate, it indicates aburned-out bulb or a malfunction of thecorresponding system.Consult your authorized SUBARU dealerfor repair.

& Seatbelt warning lightand chime S03AE01

Your vehicle is equipped with a seatbeltwarning device at the driver’s and passen-ger’s seats, as required by current safetystandards.! Driver’sand frontpassenger’sseats

S03AE0114With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”position, this device reminds the driver andfront passenger to fasten their seatbelts byilluminating the warning lights in the loca-tions indicated in the following illustrationand sounding a chime.

Driver’s seat

Front passenger’s seat

– CONTINUED –

Warning and indicator 169

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(172,1)


! OperationS03AE011401

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the driver’s and/or frontpassenger’s warning light will illuminate,then it will blink for several seconds. If theseatbelt of the driver’s seat is not fastened,the warning chime may make a peepsound.

NOTE. If the driver’s and/or front passen-ger’s seatbelt(s) are/is not fastenedwhile driving, the seatbelt warningsystem operates as follows accordingto the vehicle speed.

– The warning light will illuminatewhen driving approximately 4 mph(6 km/h) or less.– The warning light will blink, andthe warning chime will make a peepsound when driving between ap-proximately 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13mph (20 km/h). The warning chimewill stop when the vehicle stops.– The warning light will blink, andthe warning chime will sound loudlywhen 15 seconds have elapsedwhile driving between approxi-mately 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph(20 km/h).– The warning light will blink, andthe warning chime will sound loudly

when driving approximately morethan 13 mph (20 km/h).

. Thewarning lightwill turn off and thewarning chime will stop when theseatbelt is fastened.. The seatbelt warning system can becancelled. However, when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” positionafter it is turned to the “OFF” position,the warning system settings will berestored. For details about the warningcancellation, contact a SUBARU dealer.If there is no passenger on the frontpassenger’s seat, the seatbelt warningsystem for the front passenger’s seat willbe deactivated. The front passenger’sseatbelt warning systemmonitors whetheror not there is a passenger on the frontpassenger’s seat.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.Failure to do so may prevent thedevice from functioning correctly orcause the device to fail.. Do not install any accessory such

as a table or TV onto the seat-back.

. Do not store a heavy load in theseatback pocket.

. Do not allow the rear seat occu-pant to place his/her hands orlegs on the front passenger’sseatback, or allow him/her to pullthe seatback.

. Do not use front seats with theirbackward-forward position andseatback not being locked intoplace securely. If any of them arenot locked securely, adjust themagain. For adjusting procedure,refer to “Manual seat” FP35.

If the seatbelt warning system for the frontpassenger’s seat does not function cor-rectly (e.g., it is activated even when thefront passenger’s seat is empty or it isdeactivated even when the front passen-ger has not fastened his/her seatbelt), takethe following actions.. Ensure that no article is placed on theseat other than a child restraint systemandits child occupant, although we stronglyrecommend that all children sit in the rearseat properly restrained.. Ensure that there is no article left in theseatback pocket.. Ensure that the backward-forward po-sition and seatback of front passenger’sseat are locked into place securely bymoving the seat back and forth.

Warning and indicator170

(173,1)


If still the seatbelt warning system for frontpassenger’s seat does not function cor-rectly after taking relevant corrective ac-tions described above, immediately con-tact your SUBARU dealer for an inspec-tion.! Rear passenger’s seats (if

equipped)S03AE0115

1) Rear left seat2) Rear center seat3) Rear right seat

With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”position, the seatbelt warning light andchime reminds the rear passenger tofasten their seatbelt by illuminating thewarning lights in the locations indicated inthe above illustration and sounding achime.

WARNING

. The driver must check that the allpassengers have fastened theirseatbelts properly since the seat-belt warning system may notdetect passengers under the fol-lowing circumstances.– When cushions or child re-

straint systems, etc., are used– When a child or small adult is

sitting in the seat. Observe the following precau-

tions– Do not apply any strong im-

pact to the rear seat.– Do not fold the seatback for-

ward when objects are on theseat.

– Do not spill liquid on the rearseat. If liquid is spilled, wipe itoff immediately.

– Do not remove or disassemblethe rear seat.

NOTE. The seatbelt warning system of therear seat detects if the seat is occupiedby a passenger. Heavy cargo or large

pets on the rear seat may result in theactivation of the passenger seatbeltwarning light and chime. Fasteningthe rear seatbelt prior to loading cargoor large pets will avoid activating thepassenger seatbelt warning light andchime.. When folding the rear seat, ensurethat the seat is empty prior to folding.Items caught between the seat bottomand seatback, when folded, may da-mage the seat surface or activate thepassenger seatbelt warning light andchime.

! OperationS03AE011501

If passengers in the rear seats do notfasten their seatbelts while the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position, theseatbelt warning lights will illuminate orblink to indicate that their seatbelts are notfastened.

NOTE. If the rear passenger’s seatbelt(s)are/is still not fastened while driving,the seatbelt warning system operatesas follows according to the vehiclespeed.

– The warning light will illuminatewhen driving approximately 4 mph(6 km/h) or less.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(174,1)


– When driving approximately be-tween 4 mph (6 km/h) and 13 mph(20 km/h), if the seatbelts are notfastened for 50 seconds, the seat-belt warning lights will blink and awarning chime will sound.The chime will make a peep soundfor 15 seconds, and it then willbecome louder and continue for 35seconds. The warning light willblink for 50 seconds, then it willilluminate steadily and the chimewill stop.– When driving more than approxi-mately 13mph (20 km/h), if seatbeltsare not fastened for 35 seconds, thewarning lights of the unfastenedseatbelts will blink and a chime willsound loudly. If the rear seatbeltsare not fastened after 35 seconds,the blinking warning light will illu-minate steadily and the chime willstop. The warning lights will con-tinue to illuminate until their seat-belts are fastened.

. Thewarning light will turn off and thewarning chime will stop when theseatbelt is fastened.. The seatbelt warning light can becancelled. However, when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” positionafter it is turned to the “OFF” position,

the warning system settings will berestored. For details about the warningcancellation, contact a SUBARU dealer.

& SRS airbag systemwarning light S03AE02

WARNING

If the warning light exhibits any ofthe following conditions, immedi-ately stop the vehicle in a safe place,and consult a SUBARU dealer. Un-less a technician checks and repairsthe system as needed, the seatbeltpretensioners and/or the SRS airbagwill not operate properly in the eventof a collision, which may result ininjury.. Flashing or flickering of the warn-

ing light. No illumination of the warning

light when the ignition switch isfirst turned to the “ON” position

. Continuous illumination of thewarning light

. Illumination of the warning lightwhile driving

For details about the components mon-itored by the warning light, refer to “SRS

airbag system monitors” FP106.

& Front passenger’s frontal air-bag ON and OFF indicators

S03AE03


The front passenger’s frontal airbag ONand OFF indicators show you the status ofthe front passenger’s SRS frontal airbag.The indicator is displayed near the maplights.When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, both the ON and OFFindicators illuminate for 6 seconds duringwhich time the system is checked. Follow-ing the system check, both indicators turnoff for 2 seconds. After that, one of the


(175,1)


indicators illuminates depending on thestatus of the front passenger’s SRS frontalairbag determined by the SUBARU ad-vanced frontal airbag system monitoring.If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagis activated, the passenger’s frontal airbagON indicator will illuminate while the OFFindicator will remain off.If the front passenger’s SRS frontal airbagis deactivated, the passenger’s frontalairbag ON indicator will remain off whilethe OFF indicator will illuminate.With the ignition switch turned to the “ON”position, if both the ON and OFF indicatorsremain illuminated or off simultaneouslyeven after the system check period, thesystem is malfunctioning. Contact yourSUBARU dealer immediately for an in-spection.

& CHECK ENGINE warn-ing light/Malfunctionindicator light S03AE04

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicator light illumi-nates while you are driving, haveyour vehicle checked/repaired byyour SUBARU dealer as soon aspossible. Continued vehicle opera-

tion without having the emissioncontrol system checked and re-paired as necessary could causeserious damage, which may not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty.

If this light illuminates steadily or blinkswhile the engine is running, it may indicatethat there is at least one problem orpotential problem somewhere in the emis-sion control system.! If the light illuminates steadily

S03AE0401If the light illuminates steadily while drivingor does not turn off after the engine starts,an emission control system malfunctionhas been detected.You should have your vehicle checked byan authorized SUBARU dealer immedi-ately.

NOTEThis light also illuminates when the fuelfiller cap is not tightened until it clicks.If you have recently refueled your vehicle,the cause of the CHECK ENGINE warninglight/malfunction indicator light illuminatingcould be a loose or missing fuel filler cap.Remove the cap and retighten it until itclicks.Make sure nothing is interfering withthe sealing of the cap. Tightening the capwill not make the CHECK ENGINE warn-

ing light turn off immediately. It may takeseveral driving trips. If the light does notturn off, take your vehicle to your author-ized SUBARU dealer immediately.! If the light is blinking

S03AE0402If the light is blinking while driving, anengine misfire condition has been de-tected which may damage the emissioncontrol system.To prevent serious damage to the emis-sion control system, you should do thefollowing.. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard acceleration.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. Reduce the amount of cargo, if possi-ble.. Stop towing a trailer as soon aspossible.

The CHECK ENGINE warning light maystop blinking and illuminate steadily afterseveral driving trips. You should have yourvehicle checked by an authorizedSUBARU dealer immediately.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(176,1)


& Coolant temperaturelow indicator light/Coolant temperaturehigh warning light S03AE48

CAUTION

. After turning the ignition switchto the “ON” position, if thisindicator light/warning light be-haves in any of the followingways, the electrical system maybe malfunctioning. Contact yourSUBARU dealer immediately foran inspection.– It remains blinking in RED.– It remains illuminated in RED

for more than 2 seconds.– It remains blinking in RED and

BLUE alternately.. While driving, if this indicator

light/warning light behaves inany of the following ways, takethe specified appropriate mea-sure listed below.– Blinking or illuminated in

RED:Safely stop the vehicle assoon as possible, and refer tothe emergency steps to take inthe case of engine overheat-

ing. After that, have the sys-tem checked by your nearestSUBARU dealer. Refer to “En-gine overheating” FP446.

– Blinking in RED and BLUEalternately:The electrical system may bemalfunctioning. Contact yourSUBARU dealer for an inspec-tion.

This coolant temperature low indicatorlight/coolant temperature high warninglight has the following three functions.. Illumination in BLUE indicates insuffi-cient warming up of the engine.. Blinking in RED indicates that theengine is close to overheating.. Illumination in RED indicates overheat-ing condition of the engine.

For a system check, this indicator light/warning light illuminates in RED for ap-proximately 2 seconds when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position. Afterthat, this indicator light/warning lightchanges to BLUE and maintains illumina-tion in BLUE. This BLUE illuminated lightturns off when the engine is warmed upsufficiently.

If the engine coolant temperature in-creases over the specified range, theindicator light/warning light blinks in RED.At this time, the engine is close to over-heating.

If the engine coolant temperature in-creases further, the indicator light/warninglight illuminates in RED continuously. Atthis time, the engine may be overheating.

When the indicator light/warning lightblinks in RED or illuminates in RED, safelystop the vehicle as soon as possible, andrefer to the emergency steps to take in thecase of engine overheating. Refer to“Engine overheating” FP446. After that,have the system checked by your nearestSUBARU dealer.

Also, if the indicator light/warning lightoften blinks in RED, the electrical systemmay be malfunctioning. Contact yourSUBARU dealer for an inspection.

NOTEIf the engine is restarted after a certaindriving condition, this indicator light/warning light may illuminate in RED.However, this is not a malfunction if theindicator light/warning light turns offafter a short time.


(177,1)


& Charge warning light S03AE05

If this light illuminates when the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the chargingsystem is not working properly.

If the light illuminates while driving or doesnot turn off after the engine starts, stop theengine at the first safe opportunity andcheck the alternator belt. If the belt isloose, broken or if the belt is in goodcondition but the light remains illuminated,contact your nearest SUBARU dealerimmediately.

& Oil pressure warninglight S03AE06

If this light illuminates when the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the engine oilpressure is low and the lubricating systemis not working properly.If the light illuminates while driving or doesnot turn off after the engine starts, stop theengine at the first safe opportunity andcontact your nearest SUBARU dealerimmediately.

CAUTION

Do not operate the engine with theoil pressure warning light illumi-nated. This may cause serious en-gine damage.

& Engine low oil levelwarning light S03AE58

This light illuminates when the engine oillevel decreases to the lower limit.If the warning light illuminates, check theengine oil level on a level surface. Whenthe engine oil level is not within the normalrange, refill with engine oil. Refer to“Engine oil”FP474. After adding or chan-ging the engine oil, warm up the engineand stop it on a level surface, then start theengine after a lapse of 1 minute or more.Confirm that the warning light has turnedoff after the engine has started. If thewarning light does not turn off after refillingthe engine oil, or the light illuminates eventhough the engine oil level is within thenormal range, have the vehicle checked bya SUBARU dealer.

NOTE. The oil level will be detected by thesystem just after turning the ignitionswitch to the OFF position. If the oillevel is below the lower limit when theignition switch is turned to the ONposition, the engine low oil level warn-ing light will turn on.. When the vehicle is parked on asteep slope, the engine low oil levelwarning light may not illuminate even ifthe oil level is below the lower limit toavoid erroneous lighting.

& Windshield washerfluid warning light S03AE42

This light illuminates when the fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid tank de-creases to the lower limit (approximately0.6 US qt (0.6 liters, 0.5 Imp qt)).

& AT OILTEMP warninglight S03AE07

If this light illuminates when the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the transmis-sion fluid temperature is too hot.

If the light illuminates while driving, im-mediately stop the vehicle in a safe placeand let the engine idle until the warninglight turns off.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(178,1)


! Transmission control system warn-ing

S03AE0701If the “AT OIL TEMP” warning light flashesafter the engine has started, it may indicatethat the transmission control system is notworking properly. Contact your nearestSUBARU dealer for service immediately.

& Rear differential oiltemperature warninglight (if equipped) S03AE27

CAUTION

If the R.DIFF TEMP warning lightilluminates, reduce vehicle speedand stop the vehicle in a safe loca-tion as soon as possible. Continuingto drive with this light illuminatedmay damage the rear differential andother parts of the powertrain.

If this light illuminates when the engine isrunning, it may indicate that the reardifferential oil temperature is too hot.If the light illuminates while driving, reducevehicle speed and stop the vehicle in thenearest safe location. Park the vehicle forseveral minutes. After the light turns off,you can start driving.If the light does not turn off, contact thenearest SUBARU dealer for service.

NOTE. If the tire pressures are not correctand/or the tires are not all the same sizeand brand, the rear differential will beheavily loaded when the vehicle isdriven, resulting in an abnormally highoil temperature.. The rear differential oil will deterio-rate if its temperature increases en-ough for the rear differential oil tem-peraturewarning light to illuminate. It isadvisable to have the rear differentialoil replaced as soon as possible.

& Low tire pressurewarning light (U.S.-spec. models) S03AE08

When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the low tire pressure warn-ing light will illuminate for approximately 2seconds to check that the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) is functioningproperly. If there is no problem and all tiresare properly inflated, the light will turn off.Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold andinflated to the inflation pressure recom-mended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-sure label. (If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehiclehas been equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat andcan lead to tire failure. Under-inflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,and may affect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached the levelto trigger illumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped witha TPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-bined with the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects a malfunction,the telltale will flash for approximately one


(179,1)


minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continueupon subsequent vehicle start-ups as longas the malfunction exists. When the mal-function indicator is illuminated, the sys-temmay not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on the vehicle thatprevent the TPMS from functioning prop-erly. Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or more tires orwheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.Should the warning light illuminate steadilyafter blinking for approximately one min-ute, have the system inspected by yournearest SUBARU dealer as soon aspossible.

WARNING

If this light does not illuminatebriefly after the ignition switch isturned ON or the light illuminatessteadily after blinking for approxi-mately one minute, you should haveyour Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-tem checked at a SUBARU dealer assoon as possible.

If this light illuminates while driving,never brake suddenly and keepdriving straight ahead while gradu-ally reducing speed. Then slowlypull off the road to a safe place.Otherwise an accident involvingserious vehicle damage and seriouspersonal injury could occur.If this light still illuminates whiledriving after adjusting the tire pres-sure, a tire may have significantdamage and a fast leak that causesthe tire to lose air rapidly. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tireas soon as possible.When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/transmitterbeing transferred, the Low tire pres-sure warning light will illuminatesteadily after blinking for approxi-mately one minute. This indicatesthe TPMS is unable to monitor allfour road wheels. Contact yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possiblefor tire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.If the light illuminates steadily afterblinking for approximately one min-ute, promptly contact a SUBARUdealer to have the system inspected.

CAUTION

The tire pressuremonitoring systemis NOT a substitute for manuallychecking tire pressure. The tirepressure should be checked peri-odically (at least monthly) using atire gauge. After any change to tirepressure(s), the tire pressure mon-itoring system will not re-check tireinflation pressures until the vehicleis first driven more than 20 mph (32km/h). After adjusting the tire pres-sures, increase the vehicle speed toat least 20 mph (32 km/h) to start theTPMS re-checking of the tire infla-tion pressures. If the tire pressuresare now above the severe low pres-sure threshold, the low tire pressurewarning light should turn off a fewminutes later. Therefore, be sure toinstall the specified size for the frontand rear tires.

& ABS warning light S03AE09

CAUTION

. If any of the following conditionsoccur, we recommend that youhave the ABS repaired at the firstavailable opportunity by your

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(180,1)


SUBARU dealer.– The warning light does not

illuminate when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON”position.

– The warning light illuminateswhen the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position,but it does not turn off evenafter the vehicle is started.

– The warning light illuminatesduring driving.

. When the warning light is on (andthe brake system warning light isoff), the ABS function shutsdown. However, the conventionalbrake system continues to oper-ate normally.

The ABS warning light, Vehicle DynamicsControl warning light, and brake systemwarning light illuminate simultaneously ifthe EBD system malfunctions. For furtherdetails of the EBD system malfunctionwarning, refer to “Electronic Brake ForceDistribution (EBD) system warning”FP179.

NOTEIf the warning light behavior is asdescribed in the following conditions,

the ABS may be considered normal.. The warning light illuminates whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position and turns off approximately 2seconds after the engine has started.. The warning light illuminates rightafter the engine is started but turns offimmediately, remaining off.. The warning light remains illumi-nated after the engine has been started,but it turns off while driving.. The warning light illuminates duringdriving, but it turns off immediately andremains off.When driving with an insufficient batteryvoltage, such as when the engine is jumpstarted, the ABS warning light may illumi-nate. This is due to the low battery voltageand does not indicate a malfunction.Whenthe battery becomes fully charged, thelight will turn off.

& Brake system warn-ing light (red)

S03AE10

WARNING

. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on is dangerous.This indicates your brake systemmay not be working properly. Ifthe light remains illuminated,

have the brakes inspected by aSUBARU dealer immediately.

. If at all in doubt about whether thebrakes are operating properly, donot drive the vehicle. Have yourvehicle towed to the nearestSUBARU dealer for repair.

The brake system warning light has thefollowing functions.! Brake fluid level warning

S03AE1002The light illuminates when the brake fluidlevel has dropped to near the “MIN” level ofthe brake fluid reservoir with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” position and with theparking brake fully released.

If the light should illuminate while driving(with the parking brake fully released andwith the ignition switch positioned in “ON”),it could be an indication of leaking of brakefluid or worn brake pads. If this occurs,immediately stop the vehicle at the nearestsafe location and check the brake fluidlevel. For details, refer to “Brake fluid”FP481. If the fluid level is below the “MIN”mark in the reservoir, do not drive thevehicle. We recommend that you have thevehicle towed to the nearest SUBARUdealer for repair. For details, refer to“Towing” FP447.


(181,1)


! Vacuum pressure system warning(models with the vacuum brakebooster)

S03AE1006The brake systemwarning light / willilluminate when the vacuum pressuresensor is malfunctioning or brake boosterpressure is decreasing.If the brake warning light continues toilluminate for several minutes after startingthe engine, there may be a malfunction inthe vacuum system. In this case, drive thevehicle carefully and have the systeminspected by a SUBARU dealer.! Electronic Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) system warningS03AE1003

The EBD system may be malfunctioning ifthe brake system warning light and ABSwarning light illuminate simultaneouslyduring driving.

Even if the EBD system fails, the conven-tional braking system will still function.However, the rear wheels will be moreprone to locking when the brakes areapplied harder than usual and the vehicle’smotion may therefore become somewhatharder to control.

If the brake system warning light, VehicleDynamics Control warning light and ABSwarning light illuminate simultaneously,take the following steps.

1. Stop the vehicle in the nearest safe, flatlocation.2. Shut down the engine, apply theparking brake, and then restart it.3. Fully release the parking brake.4. Even if all the warning lights do notcome back on, the EBD system may havea possible malfunction. Drive carefully tothe nearest SUBARU dealer and have thesystem inspected.5. If all the warning lights stay illuminatedor come back on after approximately 2seconds, shut down the engine, apply theparking brake and check the brake fluidlevel. For details, refer to “Brake fluid”FP481.

. If the brake fluid level is not below the“MIN” mark, the EBD system may bemalfunctioning. We recommend that youdrive carefully to the nearest SUBARUdealer and have the system inspected.. If the brake fluid level is below the “MIN”mark, DO NOT drive the vehicle. Instead,we recommend that you have the vehicletowed to the nearest SUBARU dealer forrepair. For details, refer to “Towing”FP447.

& Electronic parkingbrake light S03AE85

! Parking brake indicatorS03AE8501

The light illuminates with the parking brakeapplied while the ignition switch is in the“ON” position. It turns off when the parkingbrake is fully released.! Electronic parking brake system

warningS03AE8502

WARNING

. When you release the electronicparking brake while the engine isrunning, the electronic parkingbrake indicator light will turn off.However, if the light still illumi-nates, stop the vehicle in a safeplace immediately and have thesystem inspected by a SUBARUdealer.


. If the electronic parking brakeindicator light flashes, the elec-tronic parking brake system maybe malfunctioning. Immediatelystop your vehicle in a safe loca-

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(182,1)


tion, use tire stops under the tiresto prevent the vehicle from mov-ing and contact your SUBARUdealer. For details, refer to “Elec-tronic parking brake” FP354.

NOTE. When the ignition switch is turned tothe “LOCK”/“OFF” position with theelectronic parking brake applied, theelectronic parking brake indicator lightremains illuminated for approximately30 seconds and then turns off.. When the electronic parking brakeswitch is pulled to apply the electronicparking brake while the ignition switchis in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position, theelectronic parking brake indicator lightilluminates, remains illuminated forapproximately 30 seconds and thenturns off.. Even if the electronic parking brakeindicator light flashes, if the warninglight behavior is as described in thefollowing examples, the electronicparking brake system is not malfunc-tioning.

– The indicator light turns off whenthe electronic parking brake is re-leased.

. The electronic parking brake indica-

tor lightmay flash immediately after theengine is started. However, it is notmalfunctioning if the indicator lightturns off after the electronic parkingbrake is released.. The electronic parking brake indica-tor light may flash after the electronicparking brake is frequently applied andreleased. However, the electronic park-ing brake system is not malfunctioningif the light turns off for a short period oftime.The electronic parking brake indicator lightflashes when the electronic parking brakesystem is malfunctioning. If the indicatorlight flashes, promptly park in a safelocation as soon as possible and contactyour SUBARU dealer.The electronic parking brake indicator lightremains illuminated when the parkingbrake cannot be released even if theparking brake switch is pushed. For de-tails, refer to “Electronic parking brake”FP354.

! Parking brake apply inhibit warn-ing

S03AE850201

The electronic parking brake indicator lightflashes for 10 seconds and a chirp soundwill be heard if the parking brake switch isoperated when the parking brake cannotbe applied.

! Frequent operation warningS03AE850202

The electronic parking brake indicator lightflashes for 10 seconds and a chirp soundwill be heard if the parking brake switch isoperated too frequently. In this case, theoperation of the parking brake switch isrestricted to protect the electronic parkingbrake system.

NOTEWait until the indicator light turns off.

& Auto Vehicle Hold ONindicator light S03AE94

CAUTION

If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicatorlight does not illuminate even whenthe Auto Vehicle Hold switch ispressed to activate the Auto VehicleHold function, the electronic parkingbrake system may be malfunction-ing.

This indicator light illuminates when theAuto Vehicle Hold is activated. For details,refer to “Auto Vehicle Hold function”FP356.


(183,1)


& Auto Vehicle Hold op-eration indicator light S03AE95

This indicator light illuminates while thevehicle is stopped by the Auto Vehicle Holdfunction. For details, refer to “Auto VehicleHold function” FP356.

& Depressbrake indicatorlight (if equipped) S03AEB1

This light illuminates if the brake pedal isnot depressed in the following conditions.. The Auto Vehicle Hold switch ispressed to deactivate the Auto VehicleHold function while the vehicle is stoppedby the Auto Vehicle Hold function.. The electronic parking brake is re-leased.

& Low fuel warning light S03AE11

The low fuel warning light illuminates whenthe tank is nearly empty, at approximately2.5 US gal (9.5 liters, 2.1 Imp gal). It onlyoperates when the ignition switch is in the“ON” position.

CAUTION

Promptly put fuel in the tank when-ever the low fuel warning lightilluminates. Engine misfires as aresult of an empty tank could cause

damage to the engine.

& Door open warninglight

S03AE12The warning light illuminates if any door orthe rear gate is not fully closed. Thisfunction is effective even if the ignitionswitch is in the “LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC”position, or the key is removed from theignition switch.

For some models, only the open doors areindicated by the warning lights.

Always make sure this light is not illumi-nated before you start to drive.

& Engine hood openwarning light S03AE98

The warning light illuminates if the enginehood is not fully closed. This function iseffective even if the ignition switch is in the“LOCK”/“OFF” or “ACC” position, or thekey is removed from the ignition switch.

Always make sure this light is not illumi-nated before you start to drive.

& All-Wheel Drive warn-ing light S03AE13

This light blinks if the vehicle is driven withtires of differing diameters fitted on thewheels or with an excessively low airpressure in any of the tires.

WARNING

If the AWD warning light flashes,promptly park in a safe location thencheck whether all four tires are thesame diameter and whether any ofthe tires has a puncture or has lostair pressure for some other reason.Continuing to drive with the AWDwarning light flashing can lead topowertrain damage.

NOTEIf the temporary spare tire is used, theAWDwarning lightmay flash. Use of thetemporary spare tire should thereforebe restricted to the minimum timenecessary. Replace the temporaryspare tire with a conventional tire assoon as possible.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(184,1)


& Power steeringwarninglight S03AE53

While the engine is running, this warninglight illuminates when a malfunction hasbeen detected in the electric power steer-ing system.

CAUTION

When the power steering warninglight is illuminated, there may bemore resistance when the steeringwheel is operated. Drive carefully tothe nearest SUBARU dealer andhave the vehicle inspected immedi-ately.

NOTEIf the steering wheel is operated in thefollowing ways, the power steeringcontrol system may temporarily limitthe power assist in order to prevent thesystem components, such as the con-trol computer and drive motor, fromoverheating.. The steering wheel is operated fre-quently and turned sharply while thevehicle is maneuvered at extremely lowspeeds, such as while frequently turn-ing the steering wheel during parallelparking.

. The steering wheel remains in thefully turned position for a long period oftime.

At this time, there will be more resis-tance when steering. However this isnot a malfunction. Normal steeringforce will be restored after the steeringwheel is not operated for a while andthe power steering control system hasan opportunity to cool down. However,if the power steering is operated in anon-standard way which causes powerassist limitation to occur too frequently,that may result in a malfunction of thepower steering control system.

& Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol warning light/Vehi-cle Dynamics Controloperation indicatorlight S03AE14

! Vehicle Dynamics Control warninglight

S03AE1401

CAUTION

The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-tem provides its ABS controlthrough the electrical circuit of theABS. Accordingly, if the ABS is

inoperative, the Vehicle DynamicsControl system becomes unable toprovide ABS control. As a result, theVehicle Dynamics Control systemalso becomes inoperative, causingthe warning light to illuminate.Although both the Vehicle DynamicsControl system and ABS are inop-erative in this case, the ordinaryfunctions of the brake system arestill available. You will be safe whiledriving with this condition, but drivecarefully and have your vehiclechecked at a SUBARU dealer assoon as possible.

NOTE. If the electrical circuit of the VehicleDynamics Control system itself mal-functions, the warning light only illumi-nates. At this time, the ABS (Anti-lockBrake System) remains fully opera-tional.. The warning light illuminates whenthe electronic control system of theABS/Vehicle Dynamics Control systemmalfunctions.. The Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-ing light, ABS warning light, and brakesystem warning light illuminate simul-taneously if the EBD system malfunc-tions. For further details of the EBD


(185,1)


system malfunction warning, refer to“Electronic Brake Force Distribution(EBD) system warning” FP179.The Vehicle Dynamics Control system isprobably inoperative under any of thefollowing conditions. Have your vehiclechecked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-ately.. The warning light does not illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position.. The warning light illuminates while thevehicle is running.

NOTEIf the warning light behavior is asdescribed in the following examples,the Vehicle Dynamics Control systemmay be considered normal.. The warning light illuminates whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position and turns off approximately 2seconds after the engine has started.. The warning light illuminates rightafter the engine is started but turns offimmediately, remaining off.. The warning light illuminates afterthe engine has started and turns offwhile the vehicle is subsequently beingdriven.. The warning light illuminates duringdriving, but it turns off immediately and

remains off.. The warning light illuminates whenthe engine has stalled and continues toilluminate after the engine has beenrestarted. However, it will turn off oncethe vehicle starts moving.

! VehicleDynamicsControl operationindicator light

S03AE1402The indicator light flashes during activationof the skid suppression function and duringactivation of the traction control function.

NOTE. The light may remain illuminated fora short period of time after the enginehas been started, especially in coldweather. This does not indicate theexistence of a problem. The lightshould turn off as soon as the enginehas warmed up.. The indicator light illuminates whenthe engine has developed a problemand the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light is on.The Vehicle Dynamics Control system isprobably malfunctioning under the follow-ing condition. Have your vehicle checkedat a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.. The light does not turn off even after thelapse of several minutes (the engine haswarmed up) after the engine has started.

& Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol OFF indicator light S03AE15

The light illuminates when the VehicleDynamics Control OFF switch is pressedor turned to deactivate the Vehicle Dy-namics Control system.

The Vehicle Dynamics Control system isprobably malfunctioning under any of thefollowing conditions. Have your vehiclechecked at a SUBARU dealer immedi-ately.. The light does not illuminate when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position.. The light does not turn off even onceseveral seconds have elapsed after theignition switch has been turned to the “ON”position.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(186,1)


& Warning chimes andwarning indicator of thekeyless access withpush-button start sys-tem (if equipped) S03AE55

Access key warning indicatorThe keyless access with push-button startsystem sounds a warning chime andflashes the access key warning indicatoron the combination meter in order tominimize improper operations and helpprotect your vehicle from theft.When the warning chime sounds and/orthe warning indicator flashes, take theappropriate action.

WARNING

Never drive the vehicle if the indica-tor on the push-button ignitionswitch is flashing in green whenstarting the engine. This indicatesthe status that the steering wheel isnot released and could result in anaccident involving serious injury ordeath.

CAUTION

. When starting the engine againafter the operation indicator onthe push-button ignition switchflashes in green, if the operationindicator is still flashing in green,there could be a steering lockmalfunction. Contact yourSUBARU dealer as soon as pos-sible.

. When the operation indicator onthe push-button ignition switchflashes in orange, contact aSUBARU dealer immediately.

NOTE. Even when the access key fob iswithin the operating ranges inside thevehicle, the access key warning for

engine start may be provided depend-ing on the status of the access key foband the environmental conditions.. When the access key fob is taken outof the vehicle through an open window,the access key fob takeout warning orpassenger access key fob takeoutwarning will not be provided.

! List of warningsS03AE5504

CAUTION

When any of the following warningsoccurs even if the access key warn-ing indicator does not appear, takethe appropriate action.


(187,1)


Inside warningchime

Outside warningchime

Operation indicatoron push-button igni-

tion switchStatus Action

Ding, ding ...(intermittent) — —

The driver’s door was opened while thepush-button ignition switch is “ACC”(when the select lever is in the “P”position).

Switch the push-button ignition switch to“OFF”, or close the driver’s door.When exiting the vehicle, be sure toswitch the push-button ignition switch to“OFF”.

The push-button ignition switch wasswitched to “OFF” while the driver’s dooris open.

Close the driver’s door.

Ding Short beep(2 seconds) —

Lockout warning:An attempt was made to lock all doorsusing the power door locking switch oraccess key fob while the access key fob isleft inside the vehicle. For details, refer to“Key lock-in prevention function” FP138.

Take out the access key fob from thevehicle, and lock the doors.The doors cannot be locked while theaccess key fob is inside the vehicle.A chirp sound will be heard, and all doorswill be unlocked.

— Short beep(2 seconds) —

Access key fob lock-in warning:The door lock sensor was touched whilethe push-button ignition switch is “OFF”and the access key fob is inside thevehicle.

Take out the access key fob from thevehicle, and lock the doors.If the access key fob is inside the vehicle,the doors cannot be locked.

—Beep, beep, beep,

beep, beep(5 times)

—

Door ajar warning:The door lock sensor is touched while theignition switch is in the “OFF” position andone of the doors including the rear gate isopened.

Close the doors securely and lock them.If one of the doors including the rear gateis opened, the doors cannot be locked.

Ding Long beep(60 seconds max.) —

Power warning:The door lock sensor was touched whilecarrying the access key fob, the push-button ignition switch is in a position otherthan “OFF” (when the select lever is in the“P” position).

Return the access key fob inside thevehicle, or switch the push-button ignitionswitch to “OFF”.If the push-button ignition switch is notswitched to “OFF”, the doors cannot belocked.

Ding, ding ...(7 seconds) — —

Access key warning:The vehicle was driven while the accesskey fob is not inside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and drive thevehicle.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(188,1)


Inside warningchime




Ding — —Access key warning for engine start:The push-button ignition switch waspressed while the access key fob is notinside the vehicle.

Carry the access key fob, and press thepush-button ignition switch.

Ding Beep, beep, beep(3 times) —

Access key takeout warning:The driver exited the vehicle with theaccess key fob and closed the driver’sdoor while the push-button ignition switchis in a position other than “OFF” (when theselect lever is in the “P” position).

Switch the push-button ignition switch to“OFF”, and get out of the vehicle.

Ding Beep, beep, beep(3 times) —

Passenger access key takeout warn-ing:A fellow passenger exited the vehicle withthe access key fob and closed a doorother than the driver’s door while thepush-button ignition switch is in a positionother than “OFF”.

Return the access key fob to inside thevehicle, or switch the push-button ignitionswitch to “OFF”.

Long beep(continuous)

Long beep(continuous) —

Access key takeout without P positionwarning:The driver exited the vehicle with theaccess key fob and closed the driver’sdoor while the push-button ignition switchis in a position other than “OFF” and theselect lever is in a position other than the“P” position.

Shift the select lever to the “P” position,switch the push-button ignition switch to“OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Long beep(continuous) — —

Select lever position warning:The engine is turned off by pressing thepush-button ignition switch and the selectlever is in a position other than the “P”position.

Start the engine, shift the select lever tothe “P” position, switch the push-buttonignition switch to “OFF” and exit thevehicle.


(189,1)


Inside warningchime




Long beep(continuous) — —

Select lever position warning:The driver’s door was opened while thepush-button ignition switch is in a positionother than “OFF” and the select lever is ina position other than the “P” position.

Shift the select lever to the “P” position,switch the push-button ignition switch to“OFF” and exit the vehicle.

Ding — — The battery of the access key fob is low. Replace the battery of the access key fob.

Ding — Flashes in green(15 seconds max.)

Steering lock warning:The engine start procedure was per-formed, but the steering is still locked.

While turning the steering wheel right andleft lightly, depress the brake pedal andpress the push-button ignition switch.

Ding — Flashes in orange(15 seconds max.)

System malfunction warning:A malfunction was detected in the powersystem or steering lock.

Contact a SUBARU dealer immediatelyand have the vehicle inspected.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(190,1)


& Security indicator light S03AE16

This indicator light shows the status of thealarm system. It also indicates operation ofthe immobilizer system.! Alarm system

S03AE1601It blinks to show the driver the operationalstatus of the alarm system. For detailedinformation, refer to “Alarm system”FP139.! Immobilizer system

S03AE1602The security indicator light starts blinkingin the following conditions.

For models with “keyless access withpush-button start system”:. Immediately after the push-button igni-tion switch is turned to the “OFF” position.. Immediately after the driver’s door isopened or closed when all of the followingconditions are met.

– The push-button ignition switch is inthe “ON” or “ACC” position.– The engine is not running.

In the event that an unauthorized key isused (for example, the key is unregisteredor the ID code does not match), the poweris not switched to “ON” and the securityindicator light continues blinking.

For models without “keyless accesswith push-button start system”:. Immediately after the key is pulled out.. Approximately 60 seconds after theignition switch is turned from the “ON”position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.

If the indicator light does not blink in theabove conditions, it may indicate thatimmobilizer system may be malfunction-ing. Contact your nearest SUBARU dealerimmediately.

In the event that an unauthorized key (forexample, an unauthorized duplicate) isused to start the engine, the securityindicator light illuminates. For details aboutthe immobilizer system, refer to “Immobi-lizer” FP129.

NOTE. The security indicator light remainsoff in the following conditions. It meansthat the matching of the ID code iscompleted and the immobilizer systemis deactivated, and it does not indicatea malfunction.

Models with “keyless access withpush-button start system”:– While the engine is running.– The push-button ignition switchhas been turned to the “ON” or

“ACC” position and the driver’sdoor has not been opened orclosed.

Models without “keyless accesswith push-button start system”:– While the engine is running.– When the ignition switch is in the“ON” position.– For approximately 60 secondsafter the ignition switch is turnedfrom the “ON” position to the “ACC”or “LOCK” position.

. Even if a malfunction occurs, suchas the security indicator light flashesirregularly, it will not affect the func-tionality of the immobilizer system.


(191,1)


& SI-DRIVE indicator lightS03AE52

SI-DRIVE indicator light (type A)1) Sport (S) mode2) Intelligent (I) mode

SI-DRIVE indicator light (type B)1) Sport (S) mode (if equipped)2) Intelligent (I) mode3) Sport Sharp (S#) mode (if equipped)

This light indicates the current SI-DRIVEmode.For details of SI-DRIVE mode, refer to“SI-DRIVE” FP337.

& Select lever/gear position in-dicator

S03AE43

Type A1) Upshift indicator2) Downshift indicator3) Select lever/gear position indicator

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(192,1)


Type B1) Upshift indicator2) Downshift indicator3) Select lever/gear position indicator

This indicator shows the position of theselect lever.

For models with manual mode, when themanual mode is selected, the gear positionindicator (which shows the current gearselection) and the upshift/downshift indi-cator light up. Refer to “Continuouslyvariable transmission” FP330.

& Turn signal indicatorlights S03AE20

These lights show the operation of the turnsignal or lane change signal.If the indicator lights do not blink or blinkrapidly, the turn signal bulb may be burnedout. Replace the bulb as soon as possible.Refer to “Replacing bulbs” FP501.

& High beam indicatorlight S03AE21

This light shows that the headlights are inthe high beam mode.This indicator light also illuminates whenthe headlight flasher is operated.

& High beam assist indi-cator light (if equipped) S03AE83

This light illuminates when the high beamassist function is activated. For detailsabout the high beam assist function, referto “High beam assist function” FP239.

& Cruise control indicatorlight (if equipped) S03AE22

This light illuminates when the cruisecontrol main button is pressed to activatethe cruise control function. For details,refer to “To set cruise control” FP367.If this light blinks, do not use the cruisecontrol. In addition, if it blinks frequently,contact your SUBARU dealer for aninspection.

CAUTION

If the CHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunction indicator light illumi-nates, the cruise control indicatorlight flashes at the same time. At thistime, avoid driving at high speed andhave your vehicle inspected at aSUBARU dealer as soon as possi-ble.


(193,1)


& Cruise control set indi-cator light (if equipped) S03AE23

This light illuminates when vehicle speedhas been set to use the cruise controlfunction. Refer to “To set cruise control”FP367.

& Automatic headlightbeam leveler warninglight S03AE33

This light illuminates when the automaticheadlight beam leveler does not operatenormally.If this light illuminates during driving, haveyour vehicle inspected at your SUBARUdealer.

& LED headlight warninglight S03AE76

This light illuminates if the LED headlightsmalfunction. Have your vehicle inspectedat a SUBARU dealer as soon as possible.

& Steering ResponsiveHeadlight warning light/Steering ResponsiveHeadlight OFF indicatorlight S03AE89

This light illuminates when the SteeringResponsive Headlight OFF switch ispressed to deactivate the Steering Re-sponsive Headlight. Also, the light flasheswhen a malfunction occurs in the SteeringResponsive Headlight. Refer to “SteeringResponsive Headlight (SRH)” FP242.

& Front fog light indicatorlight (if equipped) S03AE25

This indicator light illuminates while thefront fog lights are illuminated.

& Headlight indicatorlight (if equipped) S03AE24

This indicator light illuminates under thefollowing conditions.. The light control switch is in the “ ”position and the following conditions arefulfilled.

– The engine is running.– The parking brake is fully released.– The select lever is in a position otherthan “P” position.

– The level of the ambient light is asdark as the auto on/off headlights turnson.

. The light switch is turned to the “ ” or“ ” position.. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”position and the headlights illuminateautomatically.

& AutoStart Stopwarninglight/Auto Start StopOFF indicator light (yel-low) S03AE65

! Auto Start Stop warning light (yel-low)

S03AE6501

CAUTION

. If the Auto Start Stop warninglight is flashing in yellow, theremay be a malfunction in the AutoStart Stop system. We recom-mend that you have your vehicleinspected at a SUBARU author-ized dealer as soon as possible.

. If the Auto Start Stop warninglight is illuminated in yellow atany time other than in the follow-ing cases, and will not turn offeven if the Auto Start Stop OFFswitch is pushed and held, we

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(194,1)


recommend that you have yourvehicle inspected at a SUBARUdealer as soon as possible.

The Auto Start Stop warning light willilluminate in yellow if you open the enginehood when the engine has been tempora-rily stopped by the Auto Start Stop system.In this case, to ensure safety, the enginewill not be automatically restarted, even ifyou release the brake pedal. Use normaloperation to restart the engine.! Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light

(yellow)S03AE6502

This light will illuminate in yellow when theAuto Start Stop OFF switch is pressed toprevent the Auto Start Stop system fromoperating. It will turn off when the AutoStart Stop OFF switch is pressed oncemore to enable operation of the Auto StartStop system.

& Auto Start Stop indica-tor light (green) S03AE66

This indicator light illuminates when theengine has been temporarily stopped bythe Auto Start Stop system. It will turn offwhen the engine is restarted.

& Auto Start Stop NoActivity Detected indi-cator light S03AEA3

When a vehicle is stopped, the indicatorlight illuminates when the operating con-dition of idling stop are not meet. The lightwill turn off when the vehicle starts driving.Refer to “Non-operational conditions”FP361.

& X-MODE indicator light (ifequipped)

S03AE68

! Type A combination meterS03AE6801

X-MODE indicator

! Type B combination meterS03AE6802

X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode)

X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes)1) X-MODE indicator or D.SNOW/MUD

mode indicator2) SNOW/DIRT mode indicator


(195,1)


This indicator appears while X-MODE isactivated. It will disappear when X-MODEis deactivated. Refer to “To activate/deac-tivate X-MODE” FP348.

& Hill descent control in-dicator light (ifequipped) S03AE69

This indicator appears while the hill des-cent control function is in standby. It willflash while the hill descent control functionis operating. It will disappear when the hilldescent control function is not available.Refer to “Hill descent control function”FP351.

& BSD/RCTA warninglight (if equipped) S03AE80

This warning indicator appears when theBSD/RCTA is malfunctioning. In this casethe BSD/RCTA warning light will be shownon the combination meter display (colorLCD). When this indicator appears, haveyour vehicle inspected by your SUBARUdealer as soon as possible.

& BSD/RCTA OFF indica-tor light (if equipped) S03AE86

The indicator appears when the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed to deactivatethe BSD/RCTA or when the BSD/RCTA issuspended temporarily. In this case theBSD/RCTA OFF indicator light will beshown on the combination meter display(color LCD). For details, refer to “BSD/RCTA” FP371.

& RAB warning light (ifequipped) S03AE91

This indicator illuminates if the ReverseAutomatic Braking (RAB) systemmalfunc-tions. Refer to “Reverse Automatic Brak-ing (RAB) system” FP380.

& RABOFF indicator light(if equipped) S03AE92

This indicator illuminates when the Re-verse Automatic Braking (RAB) system isturned OFF, or when the Reverse Auto-matic Braking (RAB) system is suspendedtemporarily. Refer to “Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) system” FP380.

& Driver Monitoring Sys-tem operation indicatorlight (green)/DriverMonitoring Systemwarning light (yellow) (ifequipped) S03AEA4

! Driver Monitoring System operationindicator light (green)

S03AEA401This indicator illuminates when the DriverMonitoring System is activated. Refer to“Driver Monitoring System operation in-dicator light (green)” FP399.! Driver Monitoring System warning

light (yellow)S03AEA402

This warning illuminates if the DriverMonitoring System malfunctions. Haveyour vehicle inspected at a SUBARUdealer as soon as possible.

& Driver Monitoring Sys-tem OFF indicator light(if equipped) S03AEA5

This indicator illuminates when the DriverMonitoring System OFF switch is pressedto deactivate the Driver Monitoring Sys-tem. Refer to “Driver Monitoring SystemOFF indicator light” FP399.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(196,1)


& Driver Monitoring Sys-tem temporary stop in-dicator light (ifequipped) S03AEA6

This indicator illuminates when the DriverMonitoring System is temporarily stopped.Refer to “Driver Monitoring System tem-porary stop indicator light” FP399.

NOTEThe Driver Monitoring System stopstemporarily when the temperature ofthe Driver Monitoring System unit ishigh.

& Icy road surface warn-ing light (if equipped) S03AE82

When the outside temperature is 378F(38C) or less, the icy road surface warningwill illuminate to inform the driver that theroad surface may be frozen.

NOTE. The outside temperature indicatorshows the temperature in the areaaround the sensor. However, the tem-perature may not be indicated correctlyor the update may be delayed in thefollowing conditions.

– While parking or driving at lowspeeds– When the outside temperaturechanges suddenly (example: whengoing in and out of an undergroundparking area or when passingthrough a tunnel)– When starting the engine afterbeing parked for a certain period oftime

. The icy road surface warning screenshould be treated only as a guide. Besure to check the condition of the roadsurface before driving.. Once the icy road surface warningscreen appears, it will not disappearunless the outside temperature hasincreased to 418F (58C) or higher.

3-7. Combination meter dis-play (color LCD) (if equipped)

S03BN

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention tosafe driving when operating thecombination meter display (colorLCD) while the vehicle is in motion.When operation of the combinationmeter display (color LCD) interfereswith your ability to concentrate ondriving, stop the vehicle beforeperforming operations on thescreen. Also, do not concentrate onthe display while driving. Doing somay cause you to look away from theroad and could result in an accident.

Various information will be shown on thecombination meter display (color LCD).Also, a warning message will appear onthe display if a malfunction is detected. Inaddition, several settings for the displayedcontent can be performed.

Combination meter display (color LCD)194

(197,1)


Combination meter display (color LCD)1) ECO gauge (Refer to “ECO gauge”

FP166.)2) Warning screen (Refer to “Warning

screen” FP196.)/Basic screen (Refer to“Basic screens” FP198.)

3) EyeSight screen

4) Telltale screen (Refer to “Telltale screen”FP197.)

5) Select lever/gear position indicator (Re-fer to “Select lever/gear position indica-tor” FP189.)

6) X-MODE indicator (if equipped) (Refer to“X-MODE indicator light” FP192.)SI-DRIVE indicator (Refer to “SI-DRIVEindicator light” FP189.)

7) Odometer (Refer to “Odometer”FP165.)/Double trip meter (Refer to“Double trip meter” FP165.)

8) Fuel gauge (Refer to “Fuel gauge”FP166.)

A: Deactivating the EyeSight system ormodels without the EyeSight system

B: Activating the EyeSight system

& Basic operationS03BN01

Control switch1) (Up)2) /SET (Enter)3) (Down)

By operating “ ” or “ ” of the controlswitch, the screens and selection itemscan be switched. When the “ /SET”switch is pulled toward you, the item canbe selected and set.

If there are some useful messages, suchas vehicle information, warning informa-tion, etc., they will interrupt the currentscreen, and appear on the display accom-panied by a beep. If such a screen isdisplayed, take proper action according tothe message shown on the screen.

– CONTINUED –

Combination meter display (color LCD) 195

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(198,1)


The warning screen will return to theoriginal screen after a few seconds. Whilethe “ ” information reminder is shown onthe display, it may be possible to displaythe warning screen again. To recall themessage marked with “ ” on the display,pull the “ /SET” switch on the steeringwheel toward you.

NOTEWhen the multi-function display (colorLCD) is set to the setting screen, thecombination meter display (color LCD)cannot be controlled pressing on the“ ”, “ ” and “ /SET” on the controlswitch.

& Welcome screen (openinganimation) and Good-bye(ending animation) screen

S03BN08When the driver’s door is opened andclosed after unlocking the door, the wel-come screen (opening animation) willappear on the combination meter display(color LCD) for approximately 20 seconds.When the ignition switch is turned to the“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the combinationmeter display (color LCD) gradually turnsoff by showing Good-bye screen (endinganimation).

NOTE. The welcome screen and the good-bye screen may differ in the actualwords and appearance.. The basic screen will be shownwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position while the welcomescreen is displayed.. Once thewelcome screen appears, ittakes a certain period of time to displayit again.. If the ignition switch is operatedafter unlocking the driver’s door, thewelcome screen will not appear evenwhen the driver’s door is opened andclosed.. The welcome screen will disappearwhen you lock the driver’s door byusing the remote keyless entry system(all models) or the keyless accessfunction (if equipped) while the wel-come screen is displayed.. The welcome screen including themulti-function display (color LCD) andthe audio/navigation unit can be set toon or off.. Thewelcome screen can be set to onor off. For details, refer to “WelcomeScreen” FP200.. The Good-bye screen can be set toon or off. For details, refer to “Good-byeScreen” FP200.

& Warning screenS03BN05

Example of warningIf there is a warning message or amaintenance notification, it will appear onthis screen. Take the appropriate actionsbased on the messages indicated.


(199,1)


& Telltale screenS03BN09

1) Telltale screen

When the corresponding situation occurs,the following telltales will be displayed onthe telltale screen.

NOTEWhen there is warning information todisplay, it will be displayed in fivewarning indicators, starting on the leftin ascending order of severity. If thereare six or more warning informationsdisplayed, pull the “ /SET” switch andcheck the item.

Mark Name Page

Door open warning light 181

Engine hood openwarning light 181

LED headlight warninglight 191

High beam assist indi-cator light (if equipped) 190

Steering ResponsiveHeadlight warning light 191

Rear differential oiltemperature warninglight (if equipped)

176

Engine low oil levelwarning light 175

RAB warning light (ifequipped) 193

RAB OFF indicator light(if equipped) 193

BSD/RCTA warninglight (if equipped) 193

BSD/RCTA OFF indi-cator light (if equipped) 193

Mark Name PageAuto Start Stop warninglight/Auto Start StopOFF indicator light (yel-low)

191

Automatic headlightbeam leveler warninglight

191

Windshield washer fluidwarning light 175

Auto Start Stop indica-tor light (green) 192

Auto Start Stop No Ac-tivity Detected indicatorlight

192

Hill descent control in-dicator light (ifequipped)

193

Driver Monitoring Sys-tem operation indicatorlight (green) (ifequipped)

193

Driver Monitoring Sys-tem warning light (yel-low) (if equipped)

193

Driver Monitoring Sys-tem OFF indicator light(if equipped)

193

Driver Monitoring Sys-tem temporary stop in-dicator light (ifequipped)

194

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(200,1)


Mark Name Page

Icy road surface warn-ing light 194

& Basic screensS03BN06

By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on thesteering wheel, you can change the screenthat is always displayed.Average fuel consumption screen:

: Average fuel consumption: Driving range on remaining fuel

This screen displays the average rate offuel consumption since the trip meter waslast reset.

NOTEThe driving range on the remaining fuelis only a guide. The indicated valuemaydiffer from the actual driving range onthe remaining fuel, so you must im-mediately fill the tank when the low fuelwarning light illuminates.Current fuel consumption screen:

: Current fuel consumption: Driving range on remaining fuel

NOTEThe driving range on the remaining fuelis only a guide. The indicated valuemaydiffer from the actual driving range onthe remaining fuel, so you must im-mediately fill the tank when the low fuelwarning light illuminates.

Driving information screen:

: Journey time: Journey distance

This screen displays the journey time (thetime that has elapsed since the ignitionswitch was turned to the “ON” position)and journey distance (the distance thathas been driven since the ignition switchwas turned to the “ON” position).


(201,1)


Digital speed screen:

1) Speed limit indicator (if equipped)2) Vehicle speed

This screen displays the current vehiclespeed.

Auto Start Stop screen:

: The total amount of time that the enginewas stopped by means of the Auto StartStop system

: The total amount of fuel saved due to theengine being stopped by the Auto StartStop system

The indicated values are calculated fromthe most recent reset of the currentlydisplayed trip meter to the current time.The indication ranges are as follows.. Total amount of time: from 00’00@ to9999h59’59@

. Total amount of fuel saved: from 0 ml to9999.999 L

NOTE. When the trip meter is reset, thecorresponding accumulated time andthe amount of fuel saving are also reset.

. The time spent with the enginestopped by means of the Auto StartStop system is also added to thejourney time.

TPMS screen (U.S.-spec. models):

This screen displays each tire pressure.When a tire is deflated, the deflated tireand the tire pressure will be displayed onthe screen in yellow.

NOTE. The tire pressure values are dis-played several minutes after driving.. The tire pressure units can be set.For details about setting the units, referto “Tire Pressure Units (U.S.-spec.models)” FP200.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(202,1)


. Once the tire pressure monitoringsystem detects the low tire pressure,the tire pressure values will display inyellow until the system detects thenormal tire pressure.. Immediately adjust the tire pressurewhen the warning light illuminates.When the tire pressure monitoringsystem detects the adjusted tire pres-sure, the warning light will turn off andthe tire pressure values will turn towhite.. For information about the specifiedvalue of the air pressure, refer to“Tires” FP517.Menu screen entering screen:

While this screen is selected, pull and holdthe “ /SET” switch to enter the menuscreen.

& Menu screensS03BN07

Pull and hold the “ /SET” switch to enterthe menu screens when all of the followingconditions are satisfied.. The menu screen entering screen isselected.. The “ ” information reminder is off.

NOTE. While driving, the setting itemsavailable on the combination meterdisplay (color LCD) are limited.. For function settings and adjust-ments on the combination meter dis-play, refer to “Function settings”FP26.By operating the “ ” or “ ” switch on thesteering wheel, you can select the menu.Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter theselected menu.

NOTEIf you enter the “Go Back” menu, thesystem will return to the previousscreen.

! Screen SettingsS03BN0701

After entering the “Screen Settings” menu,select one of the following menus.

! Welcome ScreenS03BN070101

The welcome screen can be activated ordeactivated.

! Good-bye ScreenS03BN070106

The good-bye screen can be activated ordeactivated.

! Gauge Initial MovementS03BN070102

The movement of the meter needles andgauge needles that occurs when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position can be activated or deactivated.

! UnitsS03BN070108

Changes the units displayed in the combi-nation meter display (color LCD), the typeA multi-function display (black and white)and the type Bmulti-function display (colorLCD).

! Tire Pressure Units (U.S.-spec.models)

S03BN070109

Changes the units displayed in the TirePressure Monitoring system.

! LanguagesS03BN070103

Changes the language displayed in thecombination meter display (color LCD)and the multi-function display (color LCD).


(203,1)


! Warning VolumeS03BN0713

Sets the EyeSight warning volume, theBSD/RCTA warning volume and the RABwarning volume.! Rear Seat Reminder (models with

combination meter display (colorLCD))

S03BN0715The rear seat reminder can be activated ordeactivated.! EyeSight

S03BN0702NOTEFor details about how to use theEyeSight system, refer to the Owner’sManual supplement for the EyeSightsystem.

! RAB (if equipped)S03BN0712

! Sonar Audible AlarmS03BN071204

When the Reverse Automatic Braking(RAB) system is in operation, the warningsound to notify that an obstacle is detectedin the rear can be activated or deactivated.

NOTEFor models with Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) system, refer to “Re-verse Automatic Braking (RAB) sys-tem” FP380.

! Vehicle SettingS03BN0708

After entering the “Vehicle Setting” menu,select one of the following menus.

! Keyless Entry SystemS03BN070801

Sets the settings used when the keylessaccess function was operated.. Audible Signal (if equipped)Sets the electronic chirp that sounds whenthe door is locked or unlocked.. Hazard Warning FlasherSets the operation of the hazard warningflasher that blinks when the door is lockedor unlocked.. Driver Door Unlock (if equipped)Select only the driver’s door to unlock or alldoors to unlock simultaneously when thedriver’s door is unlocked.. Rear Gate/Trunk Unlock (if equipped)Select only the rear gate to unlock or alldoors to unlock simultaneously whenaccessing from the cargo area.

! DefoggerS03BN070802

Sets and customizes the operation of thedefogger.

! Interior LightS03BN070803

Sets and customizes the interior light offdelay timer.

! Auto Door Lock and UnlockS03BN070808

Setting conditions for “Auto Door Lock andUnlock”. Auto Door Lock:Set the condition of the following items tolock the door automatically.

– Vehicle Speed: When the vehiclespeed reaches more than 12 mph (20km/h).– Shift Into or Out of PARK: When theselect lever is shifted into a positionother than the “P” position.– Off: When the function is set to OFF.

. Auto Door Unlock:Set the conditions of the following items tounlock the door automatically.

– Shift Into or Out of PARK: When theselect lever is shifted into the “P”position.– Ignition OFF: When the ignitionswitch is turned to OFF.– Driver Door Open: When the dri-ver’s door is open.– Off: When the function is set to OFF.

! Auto Light SensorS03BN070804

Sets and customizes the sensitivity of theauto light sensor.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(204,1)


! Welcome LightingS03BN070806

Sets the leaving time and approachingtime.. Approaching time setSets the illumination time of the headlightsthat illuminate when you approach thevehicle.. Leaving time setSets the time until the headlights turn offwhen you have moved away from thevehicle.

! One-touch lane changerS03BN070807

Sets the one-touch lane changer on/off.

! Door mirror setting (if equipped)S03BN070810

The reverse tilt-down feature can beactivated or deactivated.! Default Settings

S03BN0704Select “Yes” to use the menu screen torestore customized settings (except the“Vehicle Setting” of “Keyless Entry Sys-tem”, “Defogger”, “Interior Light”, “AutoDoor Lock and Unlock”, “Auto Light Sen-sor”, “Welcome Lighting” and “One-touchlane changer”) to the factory default set-tings. Select “No” to return to the previousscreen without restoring to the factorydefault settings.

3-8. Multi-function display(black and white)

S03BO

NOTEFor models with multi-function display(color LCD), refer to “Multi-functiondisplay (color LCD)” FP208.

1) Outside temperature indicator2) X-MODE indicator (if equipped)3) Driving information display4) Clock

With the ignition switch in the “ACC”position, the clock appears on the display.

With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-tion, the outside temperature indicator,driving information display and clock allappear on the display.

NOTEThe indicated values vary in accor-dance with changes in the vehicle’srunning conditions. Also, the indicatedvalues may differ slightly from theactual values and should thus betreated only as a guide.

& Driving information displayS03BO09

NOTEYou can set the units for both the multi-function display (black and white) andthe combination meter at the sametime. For details about setting thelanguage and units, refer to “Type Acombination meter” FP167 or “Menuscreens” FP200.

Multi-function display (black and white)202

(205,1)


! How to change the information dis-play

S03BO0910

1) INFO button

Pressing the INFO button on the steeringwheel switches changes the display to thefollowing sequence.

*1: Models without combination meter display(color LCD)

! Driving range on remaining fuelS03BO0903

1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h

The driving range indicates the distancethat can be driven taking into account theamount of fuel remaining in the tank andthe average rate of fuel consumption.

– CONTINUED –

Multi-function display (black and white) 203

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(206,1)


1) When setting the displayed unit as MPH2) When setting the displayed unit as km/h

If the driving range is shown as “ ”, thereis only a tiny amount of fuel left in the tank.

NOTEThe driving range on the remaining fuelis only a guide. The indicated valuemaydiffer from the actual driving range onthe remaining fuel, so you must im-mediately fill the tank when the low fuelwarning light illuminates.

! Average fuel consumptionS03BO0902

1) Displays the driving range per gallon offuel

2) Displays the driving range per liter of fuel3) Displays the fuel consumption per 100

km

This display shows the average rate of fuelconsumption since the trip meter was lastreset.

1) TRIP RESET switch

Press the TRIP RESET switch to switchbetween the displays for the average fuelconsumption that corresponds to the A tripmeter mileage and the average fuel con-sumption that corresponds to the B tripmeter mileage.When the trip meter displays is reset, thecorresponding average fuel consumptionvalue is also reset.

NOTEWhen the tripmeter display is reset, theaverage fuel consumption correspond-ing to that trip meter display is notshown until the vehicle has subse-quently covered a distance of 1 mile(or 1 km).


(207,1)


! Current fuel consumptionS03BO0901

1) Displays the driving range per gallon offuel

2) Displays the driving range per liter of fuel3) Displays the fuel consumption per 100

kmThis indication shows the rate of fuelconsumption at the present moment.

! Journey time (models without com-bination meter display (color LCD))

S03BO0904

The journey time shows the time that haselapsed since the ignition switch wasturned to the “ON” position.

The journey time indication flashes eachtime a complete hour has elapsed. If thedisplay is giving a reading other than thejourney time, the display switches to thejourney time, flashes for 5 seconds, andreturns to its original reading each time acomplete hour has elapsed.

NOTEThe journey time is reset when theignition switch is turned to the “ACC”or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

! Average vehicle speedS03BO0905

1) When units in miles is selected2) When units in km is selected

This display shows the average vehiclespeed since the trip meter was last reset.Pressing the TRIP RESET switch toggles

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(208,1)


the display between the average vehiclespeed corresponding to the A trip meterdisplay and the average vehicle speedcorresponding to the B trip meter display.When either of the trip meter displays isreset, the corresponding average vehiclespeed value is also reset.

NOTEWhen either trip meter display is reset,the average vehicle speed correspond-ing to that trip meter display is notshown until the vehicle has subse-quently covered a distance of 1 mile(or 1 km).

! Auto Start Stop time (models with-out combination meter display (col-or LCD))

S03BO0907

1) Total time in conjunction with the tripmeter

2) Total time in conjunction with the ignitionswitch

This display shows the total time that theengine was stopped by the Auto Start Stopsystem in the following ways.

Total time in conjunction with the tripmeter: Displays the total time that theengine was stopped by the Auto Start Stopsystem, from the last time the currentlydisplayed trip meter was reset until thecurrent time. By pressing the TRIP RESETswitch, you can toggle the display betweenthe time the engine was stopped for trip Aand the time the engine was stopped for

trip B.

NOTEWhen the trip meter mileage is reset,the total time in conjunction with thetrip meter is not shown until the vehiclehas subsequently covered a distanceof 1 mile (or 1 km).

Total time in conjunction with the igni-tion switch: Displays the total time thatthe engine was stopped by the Auto StartStop system, from the time when theignition switch was turned to the “ON”position to the current time.

! How to switch the displayS03BO090701

Perform the following operation to togglethe display between the total time inconjunction with the trip meter and thetotal time in conjunction with the ignitionswitch.


(209,1)


1. Press and hold the “+” button locatedon the side of the information display. Thestopped time will then flash.2. Within 5 seconds after the stoppedtime starts flashing, press and hold the “−”button located on the side of the informa-tion display. The display will then changeand after flashing for 2 seconds, thestopped time selected will be displayed.3. Each time the “−” button is pressed andheld during the 3 seconds that the displayis flashing, the display will change andflash for 2 seconds. If the “−” button is notpressed and held during the 3-secondperiod that the display is flashing, thestopped time selected will be displayed.

! Turn off display of driving informa-tion display

S03BO0906Select the blank space in the menu to exitthe driving information display selection.

NOTE. The average fuel consumption andaverage vehicle speed are calculatedeven while the driving information dis-play is not displayed.. Even if you turn off the drivinginformation display, the display willautomatically turn on when the batteryvoltage is disconnected and then re-connected for battery replacement orfuse replacement.

& Outside temperature indica-tor

S03BO01

1) U.S.-spec. models2) Except U.S.-spec. models

NOTE. The outside temperature indicatorshows the temperature around thesensor. However, the temperature maynot be indicated correctly or the updatemay be delayed in the following condi-tions.

– While parking or driving at lowspeeds– When the outside temperaturechanges suddenly (example: whengoing in and out of an undergroundparking area or when passing

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(210,1)


through a tunnel)– When starting the engine afterbeing parked for a certain period oftime

. The temperature unit cannot bechanged.

! Road surface freeze warning indi-cation

S03BO0101

1) U.S.-spec. models2) Except U.S.-spec. models

When the outside temperature drops to acertain temperature or lower, the tempera-ture indication flashes for 5 seconds toshow that the road surface may be frozen.If the display is already indicating that theoutside temperature is low when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position, the indication does not flash.

NOTEThe outside temperature indicationmay differ from the actual outsidetemperature. The road surface freezewarning indication should be treatedonly as a guide. Be sure to check thecondition of the road surface beforedriving.

& X-MODE indicator (ifequipped) S03BO12

This indicator will be shownwhile X-MODEis activated. It will turn off when X-MODE isdeactivated.

& ClockS03BO10

For details about clock setting, refer to“Clock” FP233.

3-9. Multi-function display(color LCD)

S03BP

NOTEFor models with multi-function display(black and white), refer to “Multi-func-tion display (black and white)” FP202.

WARNING

Always pay adequate attention tosafe driving when operating themulti-function display (color LCD)while the vehicle is in motion. Whenoperation of the multi-function dis-play (color LCD) is disturbing yourawareness and ability to concen-trate on driving, stop the vehicle ina safe place before performing op-erations on the screen. Also, do notconcentrate on the display whiledriving. Doing so may cause you tolook away from the road and couldresult in an accident.

Multi-function display (color LCD)208

(211,1)


& FeaturesS03BP25

The multi-function display (color LCD) hasthe following functions.

Description Page

Displays useful messages, suchas notification, etc. 210

Displays basic screens (e.g. fuelconsumption screen, etc.) 211

Sets and adjusts maintenancenotification 230

Also, themulti-function display (color LCD)can also be used to set and initialize themulti-function display (color LCD) itself.

NOTE. When the vehicle is in motion,certain functions and selections maynot be available.. You can set the language and unitsfor both the multi-function display(color LCD) and the combination meterat the same time. For details aboutsetting the language and units, refer to“Menu screens” FP200.. The images displayed in this Own-er’s Manual are sample images. Theactual image may vary depending onthe market and vehicle specifications.

& Welcome screenS03BP07

When the driver’s door is opened andclosed, the welcome screen will appear fora short time.

NOTE. The welcome screen will disappearwhen the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position while the welcomescreen is displayed.. Thewelcome screen can be set to onor off. For details, refer to “ScreenSettings” FP200.. For a certain period of time after thewelcome screen has once appeared, itmay not appear again even when thedriver’s door is opened and closedagain. This does not indicate a mal-function.

& Self-check screenS03BP09

NOTEWhen the setting is “On”, the self-check screen appears. For detailsabout this setting, refer to “On/Offsetting” FP231.When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position, the vehicle self-check willbe performed. The screens correspondingto the following items will appear one afteranother for several seconds each.

1) Engine oil: Checks the interval of engineoil replacement.

2) Oil filter: Checks the interval of oil filterreplacement.

3) Tires: Checks the interval of tire rotation.4) Inspection and maintenance: Checks the

interval of inspection and maintenance.

– CONTINUED –

Multi-function display (color LCD) 209

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(212,1)


When the checks are performed, the colorof the icon corresponding to the checkeditem will change.If there is a notification, the message willbe displayed. Take the appropriate actionsbased on the message indicated.After the self-check is completed, today’sdate, the stored birthday or the storedanniversary is displayed.

NOTE. After performing the maintenance,change the setting of the correspond-ing maintenance item. For details, referto “Maintenance settings” FP230.. Themaintenance notification screenwill be displayed under either of thefollowing conditions.

– The period of time remaining untilthe registered notification date is 15days or less.– The total driving distance remain-ing until the registered notificationdistance is approximately 311 miles(500 km) or less.

. Themaintenance notification screenwill be displayed until either of thefollowing conditions is satisfied.

– The period of time passed afterthe registered notification date is 15days or more.– The total distance driven after the

registered notification distance isapproximately 311 miles (500 km) ormore.

& Interruption screenS03BP19

ExampleUseful messages, such as reminder in-formation, weather information (ifequipped) and traffic information (ifequipped)may interrupt the current screenand appear on the display accompaniedby a beep. Take proper action according tothe message.

The interruption screen will return to theoriginal screen after a few seconds. Also,you can press the INFO button to skip theinterruption screen.

& Basic operationS03BP06

Control switch1) INFO button2)3) /SET4)

Press the INFO button on the steeringwheel to switch the item displayed on thebasic screen. You can operate the itemson the setting screen by using the “ ”,“ ” and “ /SET” switches.


(213,1)


& Basic screensS03BP10

1) Clock2) Climate control*3) Outside temperature4) Information screen

*: This is not displayed on the multi-functiondisplay (color LCD) when the ignition switchis in the “ACC” position.

While the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or“ON” position, the basic screen will bedisplayed.! Outside temperature indicator

S03BP1016The outside temperature is displayed onthe multi-function display (color LCD).

NOTE. The outside temperature indicatorshows the temperature around thesensor. However, the temperature maynot be indicated correctly or the updatemay be delayed in the following condi-tions.

– While parking or driving at lowspeeds– When the outside temperaturechanges suddenly (example: whengoing in and out of an undergroundparking area or when passingthrough a tunnel)– When starting the engine afterbeing parked for a certain period oftime

. The temperature unit cannot bechanged.

! Climate control screenS03BP1017

The climate control status is displayed onthe multi-function display (color LCD).

Climate control screen1) Set temperature indicator (left-hand side)2) FULL AUTO indicator3) AUTO indicator4) Airflow mode indicator5) Set temperature indicator (right-hand

side)*16) Air inlet selection indicator7) SYNC indicator*18) Fan speed indicator9) Air conditioner ON indicator*1: Models with the SYNC function only

When operating the climate control sys-tem, the basic screen switches to theclimate control screen. For details aboutclimate control operation, refer to “Climate

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(214,1)


control panel” FP267.! Clock

S03BP1018The clock can be displayed in either 12-hour display or 24-hour display. For detailsabout the setting, refer to “Clock” FP233.


(215,1)


! Information screenS03BP1019

Press the INFO button on the steering wheel to switch the item displayed on the information screen.Content Description Page

Electric components operating status screen*1 Displays the operating status of the electric components and equipment. 214Prevention safety screen Displays the status of your vehicle. 214

EyeSight screen*1 Displays the operating status of EyeSight. 215Favorite screen Displays up to 3 optional items. 215

Weather information screen*2 Displays weather information. 216Traffic information*2/Navigation*3 screen Displays information linked with the navigation system. 216

Audio screen*3 Displays audio system information. 217

Fuel consumption screen Displays fuel consumption information. 217Clock/date screen Displays the clock. 217

Guidance screen Moves to the setting screen. 218

*1: If equipped*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio*3: Models with navigation system

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(216,1)


! Electric components operationscreen (if equipped)

S03BP101901

1) BSD/RCTA*2) Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) sys-

tem*3) Lane Departure Warning indicator*4) Pre-Collision Braking System indicator*5) High beam assist*6) Front view monitor*7) Driver Monitoring System**: If equipped

This screen displays the electric compo-nents operation status of the vehicle.1. Press and hold the “INFO” button toenter the menu screen.2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” button toselect the preferred item.

3. Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter theselected item.

NOTE. Indicators do not display for func-tions that are not equipped to thevehicle.. The indicators of functions that arenot operating are displayed in gray.

! Prevention safety screenS03BP101902

1) Telltale screen2) Steering angle3) Vehicle posture4) Running condition

X-MODE screen1) Vehicle posture2) X-MODE

This screen displays the driving status ofthe vehicle and the operation status func-tions. For functions that are operating, theindicator will illuminate or flash.

NOTE. The vehicle posture indication maydiffer from the actual vehicle posture.. When X-MODE has turned on, thescreen of the multi-function display isswitched to the prevention safetyscreen.. The vehicle posture angle varies notonly due to the angle of the roadsurface, but also due to the vehicle tiltcaused by the occupants, cargo, and


(217,1)


acceleration or deceleration.

! EyeSight screen (if equipped)S03BP101903

1) Lead vehicle indicator2) Your own vehicle indicator3) Stop lights4) Road line indicator5) Lane indicator6) Lane Centering indicator7) Steering wheel indicator

This screen displays the status of theEyeSight system. The lead vehicle indica-tor moves forward and backward depend-ing on the distance with the vehicle in front.For details, refer to the Owner’s Manualsupplement for the EyeSight system.

! Favorite screenS03BP101904

Favorite screen (display example)This screen displays up to three optionalpieces of information that can be selectedfrom the following items.

Item Details

The engine coolant temperature isdisplayed.

The engine oil temperature isdisplayed.

The average vehicle speed isdisplayed.

The accelerator opening ratio isdisplayed.

The vehicle posture is displayed.

The current rate of fuel consump-tion is displayed.

The direction of the vehicle isdisplayed.*1

The weather information is dis-played.*2

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(218,1)


Item Details

The posted speed limit of the roadyou are currently driving on isdisplayed.*1

The calendar is displayed.

Driver Monitoring System infor-mation is displayed.*1

Nothing is displayed.

*1: If equipped*2: Models with SiriusXM Satellite Radio

NOTESome displayed items may not bedisplayed depending on the modeland specifications.The items shown in the favorite screen canbe changed. For details, refer to “Favoritesetting” FP228.

! Weather information screen (ifequipped)

S03BP101905

1) Weather information for the destination*2) Weather information for the current loca-

tion*: Only when a destination is set in thenavigation system

The weather information is displayed onthe screen.

NOTE. When all of the following conditionsare satisfied, weather information isdisplayed.

– The vehicle is equipped with anaudio and navigation system forSiriusXM satellite radio.– You have a current SiriusXMsatellite radio subscription.

. The weather forecast for the setdestination remains displayed until anew destination is set or until you reachthe destination.. Depending on the reception timingof XM, the display of weather informa-tion may be delayed.

! Navigation screen (models withnavigation system)

S03BP101906

The navigation system information to thedestination is displayed on the screen.

NOTEWhen a destination is not set in thenavigation system, the compass orien-tation, name, route sign and speed limitof the road the vehicle is traveling onremain displayed on the screen.


(219,1)


! Audio screenS03BP101907

The screen of the currently selected audiosource is displayed.For details about how to use the audio set,refer to the separate navigation/audioOwner’s Manual.

! Fuel consumption screenS03BP101908

1) Driving range on remaining fuel2) Average fuel consumption corresponding

to the driving distance of each trip meter3) Current fuel consumption4) User information (if equipped)

The fuel consumption information is dis-played on the screen.

If the driver is recognized by the DriverMonitoring System, average fuel con-sumption for the driver will be displayed.

NOTEThe driving range on the remaining fuelis only a guide. The indicated valuemaydiffer from the actual driving range onthe remaining fuel, so you must im-mediately fill the tank when the low fuel

warning light illuminates.

! Clock/date screenS03BP101909

The time and date are displayed.You can adjust the time and date. Fordetails, refer to “Clock” FP233.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(220,1)


! Guidance screenS03BP101910

When the INFO button on the steeringwheel is pressed and held on this screen,the setting screen can be displayed.For details, refer to “Setting screen”FP218.

NOTEWhen the combination meter display(color LCD) is displaying the menuscreen entering screen, the system willnot move to the setting screen even ifthe INFO button is pressed and held.

& Setting screenS03BP28

1. Press and hold the INFO button on theguidance screen. The top menu is dis-played.2. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch toselect the preferred menu from the topmenu.3. Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter theselected menu.4. Operate the “ ” or “ ” switch toselect the preferred menu from the 2ndmenu.5. Pull the “ /SET” switch to enter theselected menu.


(221,1)


The menu lists are as follows.Items that can be set when stopped:

Top menu 2nd menu Description Page

DateBirthday Set a birthday. 221Anniversary Set an anniversary day. 221

Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —

Driver Moni-toring System

Repeat facial scan Perform the user recognition. Yes or No 221

User Recognition Turn the user recognition settings on or off. On or Off 227

Automatically retract seat on entry Turn the automatically retract seat on entryfunction on or off. On or Off 226

Register User Register the user. 222

Update User Settings Re-register the driver’s position. 225

Delete Driver Position Delete the registered driver’s position. 226Delete User Delete the registered user. 224

Delete All Users Delete the registered all user. Yes or No 225Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —

Display/Beep

Screen Off* Turn the screen off. Yes or No 227Favorite Set and customize the triple meter. 228

Bypass Screen Set the bypass screen for each item. On or Off 228Beep Adjust the beep sound volume. High, Low or Off 228


Climate con-trol

Mode Setting Set the operation of the automatic climatecontrol. Normal, Mild, ECO or Power 229

Occupant Detection Set the operation of the climate control depend-ing on passenger. On or Off 229


– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(222,1)


Top menu 2nd menu Description Page

Camera set-tings

Brightness Set and adjust the brightness of a display. 229Contrast Set and adjust the contrast of a display. 230

Camera Shift Link Set the camera shift link. On or Off 230Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —

Maintenance

Engine Oil Set and adjust the oil maintenance notification date. 230Oil Filter Set and adjust the oil filter maintenance notification date. 231

Tires Set and adjust the tire maintenance notification date. 231Maintenance Schedule Set and adjust the vehicle maintenance notification date. 231

ON/OFFTurn on or off the self-check screen that isactivated when the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position.

On or Off 231

Clear All Settings Clear all settings for maintenance items. Yes or No 232Go Back Return to the 1st menu. —

Initialize — Reset all settings to the default settings. Yes or No 232Go Back — Return to the setting screen. —

*: You can also set this while driving.

Items that can be set while driving:Menu Description Page

Screen Off Turn the screen off. Yes or No 227

Go Back Return to the settings screen. —

For safety reasons, we recommend stopping the vehicle in a safe location while setting.


(223,1)


! Date and time settingsS03BP2801

You can set the date, time and 12h or 24hformat settings.

! Current date and time settingS03BP280101

For details about clock setting, refer to“Clock” FP233.

! Birthday settingS03BP280102

If a birthday or anniversary is approaching,a message will be displayed when theignition switch is turned to the “ON”position. This function can be set to on oroff. For details, refer to “Bypass screensetting” FP228.1. Select “Birthday” from the 2nd menu inthe setting screen. Refer to “Settingscreen” FP218.

2. Select from the list the number that youwant to register.

3. Enter the date and the text by using thecontrol switches.

4. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “GoBack” to return to the previous screenwithout applying the setting changes.

NOTEYou can store a maximum of 5 birth-days.

! Anniversary settingS03BP280103

1. The procedure for setting an anniver-sary is the same as “Birthday setting”FP221, except that in step 1 “Anniversary”is selected.

NOTEYou can store a maximum of 5 anniver-saries.

! Driver Monitoring System settingsS03BP2810

You can set the Driver Monitoring Systemsettings.

! Repeat facial scanS03BP281001

1. Select “Repeat facial scan” from the2nd menu in the settings screen. Refer to“Setting screen” FP218.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(224,1)


2. Select “Yes” to start the repeat facialscan. Select “No” to return to the previousscreen.3. While seated in the driver’s seat, facestraight forward and wait for a few mo-ments.

When user recognition is completed, theHello screen appears and the screen thenswitches to the basic screen associatedwith the user information.

! Register UserS03BP281002

1. Adjust the seat position, outside mirrorangle, and reverse tilt-down outside mirrorangle so that you are seated in the correctdriving posture.

NOTE. Start the user registration after ad-justing the seat position, outsidemirrorangle, and reverse tilt-down outsidemirror angle. If they are adjusted duringuser registration, it may be disrupted.Refer to “Power seat” FP36 or “Out-side mirrors” FP257.. If the ignition switch is turned to the“OFF” position before user registrationis complete, the information of theadjusted seat position, outside mirrorangle, and reverse tilt-down outsidemirror angle will not be saved.2. Select “Register User” from the 2ndmenu in the settings screen. Refer to“Setting screen” FP218.


(225,1)



4. Select “Set” to start the registrationfacial scan. Select “Go Back” to return tothe previous screen.

5. While seated in the driver’s seat, facestraight forward and wait for a few mo-ments.

When the screen changes, the registrationfacial scan is completed.

A) Forward directionB) Display direction1) Face forward.2) Do not lower your chin.3) Face the display.*: Display

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(226,1)


NOTE. If user registration cannot be per-formed, turn your face forward asshown in the illustration, then turn tothe display.. If “Unable to register” appears, re-peat the procedure beginning fromstep4.. There are some cases where userregistration cannot be registered prop-erly. In those cases, refer to “DriverMonitoring System” FP391.

6. Enter the text using the controlswitches.7. Set the desired icons using the controlswitches.8. Select “Set” to exit the settings screen.

NOTE. A screen recommending user regis-tration appears at the following times.

– When the driver has not com-pleted user registration– When there are 4 or fewer regis-tered usersOperate the control switch andselect “Yes” to display the screenin step 3. Then follow the registra-tion procedure to complete userregistration.

. An existing user can be overwrittenby selecting a registered number.Whena user is registered by overwriting, theindividual fuel economy data is reset.

. When “User Recognition” is set toOFF, user registration cannot be se-lected.

! Delete UserS03BP281003

1. Select “Delete User” from the 2ndmenu in the settings screen. Refer to“Setting screen” FP218.



(227,1)


3. Select “Yes” to delete the number.Select “No” to return to the previousscreen.

! Delete All UsersS03BP281004

1. Select “Delete All Users” from the 2ndmenu in the settings screen. Refer to“Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select “Yes” to delete all the users.Select “No” to return to the previousscreen.

! Update User SettingsS03BP281009

1. Select “Update User Settings” from the2nd menu in the settings screen. Refer to“Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select “Set” to re-register the driverposition. Select “Go Back” to return to theprevious screen.

NOTE. Start the user registration after ad-justing the seat position, outsidemirrorangle, and reverse tilt-down outsidemirror angle. If they are adjusted duringuser registration, it may be disrupted.Refer to “Power seat” FP36 or “Out-side mirrors” FP257.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(228,1)


. If the ignition switch is turned to the“OFF” position before user registrationis complete, the information of theadjusted seat position, outside mirrorangle, and reverse tilt-down outsidemirror angle will not be saved.

! Delete Driver PositionS03BP281006

1. Select “Delete Driver Position” from the2nd menu in the settings screen. Refer to“Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select “Yes” to delete the driver posi-tion. Select “No” to return to the previousscreen.

! Automatically retract seat onentry setting

S03BP281010

1. Select “Automatically retract seat onentry” from the 2nd menu in the settingsscreen. Refer to “Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the autoentry/exit function on or off by using thecontrol switches.3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “GoBack” to return to the previous screen.


(229,1)


! User Recognition settingsS03BP281008

1. Select “User Recognition” from the 2ndmenu in the settings screen. Refer to“Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the UserRecognition settings on or off by using thecontrol switches.3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “GoBack” to return to the previous screen.

! Display/Beep settingsS03BP2805

You can set the display settings andvolume settings.

! Screen OFF settingS03BP280501

1. Select “Screen Off” from the 2nd menuin setting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”FP218.

2. Select “Yes” to turn off the screen.Select “No” to return to the previousscreen.

Restoring the screenWhen the INFO button is operated afterthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON” or“ACC” position, the screenwill be restored.The screen will be restored with the basicscreen that was displayed when thescreen was turned off.

NOTEWhile the screen is off, the screenswitches to the climate control screenonly when the climate control system isoperated.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(230,1)


! Favorite settingS03BP280502

1. Select “Favorite” from the 2nd menu insetting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”FP218.

2. Set the desired items by using thecontrol switches. For details about items,refer to “Favorite screen” FP215.3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “GoBack” to return to the previous screenwithout applying the setting changes.

NOTE. You can display a maximum of the 3items.. The same item cannot be selectedfor the left, center or right location.. Weather information for 3 hourslater or 6 hours later can be displayed.

! Bypass screen settingS03BP280503

1. Select “Bypass Screen” from the 2ndmenu in the setting screen. Refer to“Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the displayof items on or off by using the controlswitches.3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “GoBack” to return to the previous screenwithout applying the setting changes.

NOTETraffic information setting is only dis-played for the audio unit with SiriusXMsatellite radio.

! Beep settingS03BP280504

1. Select “Beep” from the 2ndmenu in thesetting screen. Refer to “Setting screen”FP218.

2. Set the beep volume by using thecontrol switches.3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “GoBack” to return to the previous screenwithout applying the setting changes.


(231,1)


! Climate Control settingsS03BP2811

You can set the climate control settings.

! Mode SettingS03BP281101

1. Select “Mode Setting” from the 2ndmenu in the setting screen. Refer to“Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select “Normal”, “Mild”, “Power” or“ECO” by using the control switches. Fordetails about “Mode Setting”, refer to“Automatic climate control customization(for type B and C)” FP272.3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “GoBack” to return to the previous screenwithout applying the setting changes.

! Occupant detection settingsS03BP281102

1. Select “Occupant Detection” from the2nd menu in the setting screen. Refer to“Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select on or off to turn the occupantdetection on or off by using the controlswitches.3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “GoBack” to return to the previous screenwithout applying the setting changes.

! Camera settings (if equipped)S03BP2809

You can set the front camera displaysettings.

! Brightness settingS03BP280901

1. Select “Brightness” from the 2nd menuin the setting screen. Refer to “Settingscreen” FP218.

2. Select the brightness level by using thecontrol switches.3. Press the “ /SET” button to confirmthe setting.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(232,1)


! Contrast settingS03BP280902

1. Select “Contrast” from the 2nd menu inthe setting screen. Refer to “Settingscreen” FP218.

2. Select the contrast level by using thecontrol switches.3. Press the “ /SET” button to confirmthe setting.

! Camera shift link settingS03BP280903

1. Select “Camera Shift Link” from the2nd menu in the setting screen. Refer to“Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select “On” or “Off” by using the controlswitches.3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “GoBack” to return to the previous screenwithout applying the setting changes.

! Maintenance settingsS03BP2803

You can set maintenance reminders.

! Engine oil settingS03BP280301

1. Select “Engine Oil” from the 2nd menuin the setting screen. Refer to “Settingscreen” FP218.

2. Set the date and distance of thereminder by using the control switches.3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select“Update” to change the notification dis-tance to the default value. Select “GoBack” to return to the previous screenwithout applying the setting changes.


(233,1)


NOTE. The reminder will be displayed byeither date or distance in accordancewith the setting.. Even when either “Day” or “Dis-tance” are displayed as “_ _” a pop-upscreen will appear.. The reminder will be displayed untileither of the following conditions issatisfied.

– The period of time passed afterthe registered notification date is 15days or more.– The total distance driven after theregistered notification distance isapproximately 311 miles (500 km) ormore.

! Oil filter settingS03BP280302

The setting procedure is the same as“Engine oil setting” FP230, but select the“Oil Filter” item in step 1.

! Tires settingS03BP280303

The setting procedure is the same as“Engine oil setting” FP230, but select the“Tires” item in step 1.

! Maintenance schedule settingS03BP280304

The setting procedure is the same as“Engine oil setting” FP230, but select the“Maintenance Schedule” item in step 1.

! On/Off settingS03BP280305

1. Select “On/Off” from the 2nd menu onthe setting screen. Refer to “Settingscreen” FP218.

2. Select “On” or “Off” to turn the openingscreen on or off by using the controlswitches.3. Select “Set” to exit settings. Select “GoBack” to return to the previous screenwithout applying the setting changes.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(234,1)


! Clear settingS03BP280306

1. Select “Clear All Settings” from the 2ndmenu on the setting screen. Refer to“Setting screen” FP218.

2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using thecontrol switches.

! InitializeS03BP2804

You can initialize the items that have beenset to your preference.1. Select “Initialize” from the 2ndmenu onthe setting screen. Refer to “Settingscreen” FP218.

2. Select “Yes” or “No” by using thecontrol switches.

NOTEYou cannot initialize the items if theDriver Monitoring System is not oper-ated.

& How to get the source codeusing the open source

S03BP29Free/Open Source Software Information

This product contains Free/Open SourceSoftware (FOSS).The license information and/or the sourcecode of such FOSS can be found at thefollowing URL.

http://www.globaldenso.com/en/open-source/ivi/subaru/


(235,1)


3-10. ClockS03AF

For models with a SUBARU genuinenavigation and/or audio system, the clockcan be adjusted using either auto mode ormanual mode.. Automode: automatic clock adjustment. Manual mode: manual clock adjust-ment

CAUTION

The clock in the multi-function dis-play (color LCD) cannot be adjusted,if the SUBARU genuine navigationand/or audio system is removed.

& Setting the clock manuallyS03AF03

! Type Amulti-function display (blackand white)

S03AF03011. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.

2. Press the button.3. Select “Settings”.4. Select “Vehicle”.5. Select “Time/Date” and then select“Manual”.

6. Press the “+” button or the “−” buttonbeside the clock.

! Setting 12-hour or 24-hour dis-play

S03AF030102

The clock can be set to 12-hour or 24-hourdisplay. Perform the following procedure toswitch the display format.1. Turn the ignition switch in the “LOCK”/“OFF” position.2. Press and hold the “−” button locatednear the clock display for approximately 5seconds. The clock display will then startto flash.3. While the clock display is flashing,press and hold the “+” button for approxi-mately 2 seconds. The clock format willthen change.

– CONTINUED –

Clock 233

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(236,1)


4. The clock display will continue to flashfor approximately 3 seconds to indicatethat the clock display has been changed.

! Type Bmulti-function display (colorLCD)


2. Press the button.3. Select “Settings”.4. Select “Vehicle”.5. Select “Time/Date” and then select“Manual”.

6. Set the each items plus and minus.7. Select to complete the clocksetting.Select “Back” to return to the previousscreen without saving settings.

NOTE. Adjust the time, then select 12hdisplay or 24h display from the format.. The Birthday/Anniversary and main-tenance reminder system function arebased on the time and date on themulti-function display (color LCD).

& Setting the clock automati-cally


2. Press the button.3. Select “Settings”.4. Select “Vehicle”.5. Select “Time/Date” and then select“Auto”.

Clock234

(237,1)


6. Press the button again to completethe setting.

! Models with navigation systemS03AF0201

The clock will be set automatically where aGPS signal is available.! Models without navigation system

S03AF0202The clock will be set and adjusted auto-matically when a smartphone is connectedvia Bluetooth® for transferring phonebookdata.1. Register the smartphone to the audiosystem. For details, refer to “BluetoothSETTINGS” in the supplemental Owner’sManual for the audio/navigation system.2. Transfer phonebook data to the sys-tem. For details, refer to “Bluetooth SET-TINGS” in the supplemental Owner’sManual for the audio/navigation system.The clock will be adjusted automatically.

NOTEDepending on the model of smart-phone, the settings of the connectedsmartphone may need to be changed.(ex: For iOS or other models, notifica-tion settings may need to be activated.)For details, check the instructions onconnecting smartphones.

& Regulatory informationS03AF04

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos areregistered trademarks owned by BluetoothSIG, Inc.

3-11. Light control switchS03AH

& Precautions and tipsS03AH06

CAUTION

. Use of any lights for a long periodof time while the engine is notrunning can cause the battery todischarge.

. Before leaving the vehicle, makesure that the lights are turned off.If the vehicle is left unattendedfor a long time with the lightsilluminated, the battery may bedischarged.

NOTE. Even if the key is removed from theignition switch, the lights can be illumi-nated by operating the light controlswitch from the “ ” (off) position to the“ ” or “ ” position (models without“keyless access with push-button sys-tem”).. Even if the push-button ignitionswitch is turned off, the lights can beilluminated by operating the light con-trol switch from the “ ” (off) position tothe “ ” or “ ” position (models with“keyless access with push-button start

– CONTINUED –

Light control switch 235

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(238,1)


system”).. If the driver’s door is opened whilethe lights are illuminated and the key isremoved from the ignition switch, thechirp sound will inform the driver thatthe lights are illuminated.

& HeadlightsS03AH01

Except for Canada models

For Canada modelsTo turn on the headlights, turn the knob onthe end of the turn signal lever.

“ ” position:Instrument panel illumination, headlights,parking lights, front side marker lights, rearside marker lights, tail lights and licenseplate lights are on.“ ” position:Instrument panel illumination, parkinglights, front side marker lights, rear sidemarker lights, tail lights and license platelights are on.“ ” position:. Auto on/off headlightsWhen the ignition switch is in the “ON”position, the instrument panel illumination,headlights, parking lights, front side mar-

ker lights, rear side marker lights, tail lightsand license plate lights are automaticallyon or off depending on the level of theambient light.

NOTE. The sensitivity of the auto on/offheadlights can be changed by aSUBARU dealer. Consult your SUBARUdealer for details. Also, for models witha combination meter display (colorLCD), the setting can be changed usingthe display. For details, refer to “VehicleSetting” FP201.. If the light control switch is in the“AUTO” position and the headlights donot turn on when it becomes darkoutside, turn the light switch to the“ ” position. If this happens, haveyour vehicle inspected by yourSUBARU dealer as soon as possible.“ ” position (except for Canada mod-els):The headlights are all off.

“OFF” position (for Canada models):The headlights are all off *1*2.*1: When the light switch is switched to the

“OFF” position while the vehicle is stopped,the lights turn off. Then the light switch willautomatically return to the “AUTO” position.

Light control switch236

(239,1)


*2: The headlights will automatically change tothe AUTO mode when the following condi-tions are met:

. The engine is running.

. The parking brake is fully released.

. For CVT models, the select lever is in aposition other than the “P” position.

. Auto-on/off wiper-linked headlightsWhile the light control switch is in the“AUTO” position, the headlights will auto-matically turn on when the windshieldwipers operate several times. The head-lights will automatically turn off when thewipers stop.

NOTETheON/OFF setting of this function canbe changed by a SUBARU dealer.Consult your SUBARU dealer for de-tails.

! Welcome lighting functionS03AH0103

The welcome lighting function turns on thelow beam headlight for smooth approach-ing to or exiting from the vehicle at night orin a dark place.

The function is activated while all of thefollowing conditions are met.. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”position.

. It is dark enough to turn on the auto on/off headlights.

NOTEIf the engine is turned off after turningoff the light switch, the welcome light-ing function may not operate (Canadamodels).When approaching:While the welcome lighting function isactivated, the low beam headlights, instru-ment panel illumination, parking lights,front side marker lights, rear side markerlights, tail lights and license plate lights willautomatically illuminate when unlockingthe doors and the rear gate by using theremote keyless entry system.

The lights will remain illuminated for 30seconds*1 and then turn off. However, ifany of the following operations is done, thelights will turn off.. The doors are locked.. The light control switch is turned to aposition other than “AUTO”.. The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position.

When exiting:While the welcome lighting function isactivated, the low beam headlights, instru-ment panel illumination, parking lights,

front side marker lights, rear side markerlights, tail lights and license plate lights willremain illuminated even when either of thefollowing operation is done.. The push-button ignition switch isturned to the “OFF” status (models with“keyless access with push-button startsystem”).. The key is pulled out from the ignitionswitch (models without “keyless accesswith push-button start system”).

The lights will turn off under any of thefollowing conditions.. 3 minutes have passed since the lightswere illuminated by the welcome lightingfunction.. 30 seconds have passed since the dooris opened and closed.*1. The light control switch is turned to aposition other than “AUTO”.. The locking procedure is performedtwice. When performing the unlockingprocedure after performing the lockingprocedure, perform the locking proceduretwice again.*1: The setting for the period of time in which the

low beam headlights remain on by thewelcome lighting function can be changedby a SUBARU dealer. Contact yourSUBARU dealer for details.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(240,1)


! Sensor for the auto on/off head-lights

S03AH0101

The sensor is as shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

If any object is placed on or near thesensor, the sensor may not detectthe level of the ambient light cor-rectly and the auto on/off headlightsmay not operate properly.

& High/low beam change (dim-mer)

S03AH02

1) High beam2) Low beam

When the headlights are on high beam, thehigh beam indicator light “ ” on thecombination meter is also on.

& Headlight flasherS03AH03

CAUTION

Do not hold the lever in the flashingposition for more than just a fewseconds.

To flash the headlights, pull the levertoward you and then release it. The highbeam will stay on for as long as you holdthe lever.

When the headlights are on high beam, thehigh beam indicator light “ ” on thecombination meter also illuminates.


(241,1)


& High beam assist function (ifequipped)

S03AH07NOTE. The high beam assist function uti-lizes the stereo camera installed at theposition of the upper side of wind-shield.. For details on how to handle thestereo camera, refer to the Owner’sManual supplement for the EyeSightsystem.The high beam assist function automati-cally changes the headlight from highbeam to low beam (or vice versa).

When all of the following conditions aremet, the headlight will change to highbeam.. When the vehicle speed increases to orabove 20 mph (32 km/h).. There is no preceding or oncomingvehicle.. The forward area of the vehicle is dark.. The road does not have a sharp curve.

When any of the following conditions aremet, the headlight will change to low beam.. When the vehicle speed decreases toor below 10 mph (16 km/h).. When the forward area of the vehicle isbright.

. When there is a preceding or oncomingvehicle.. When the EyeSight system is malfunc-tioning or is temporarily stopped.

NOTE. Do not overestimate the capacity ofthe high beam assist function. Thedriver always has the responsibility tounderstand the surrounding situation,to drive safely, and to change theheadlight mode manually if necessary.. The factory setting (default setting)for this function is set as “operational”.This setting can be changed to OFF(non-operation) at SUBARU dealers.For more details, contact a SUBARUdealer.

! How to use the high beam assistfunction

S03AH0701The high beam assist function will beactivated when all the following conditionsare met.. The light control switch is in the “AUTO”position and the low beam headlights areon automatically.. The turn signal lever is pushed forward.

High beam assist indicator lightWhen the high beam assist function isactivated, the high beam assist indicatorlight on the combination meter will illumi-nate.

NOTEIf the high beam assist function ismalfunctioning or is temporarilystopped, the headlight will be fixed atlow beam.

! How to temporarily lower the sensi-tivity of the high beam assist func-tion

S03AH0704The sensitivity of the high beam assistfunction can be lowered by performing thefollowing operations.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(242,1)


1. Before turning the ignition switch to the“ON” position, set the light control switch tothe “AUTO” position and push the signallever forward (high beam position).2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position and within approximately 15 sec-onds, press the “ / ” (following distancesetting) switch more than 10 times con-secutively.

When the sensitivity of the high beamassist function is lowered, the high beamassist indicator light “ ” on the combina-tion meter will flash.

NOTE. The sensitivity of the high beamassist function cannot be lowered inthe following conditions.

– Cruise control or Adaptive CruiseControl indicator is illuminated.– The EyeSight warning indicator(yellow) is illuminated.

. The sensitivity of the high beamassist function returns to normal levelthe next time the ignition switch isturned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” positionand the engine is restarted.

! How to change the headlight modemanually

S03AH0702Change to the low beam:When you return the turn signal lever to thecenter position, the high beam assistfunction will turn off and the high beamassist indicator light will turn off.

Change to the high beam:When you turn the light control switch tothe “ ” position, the headlight mode willbe changed to the high beam.At this time, the high beam assist functionwill turn off, the high beam assist indicatorlight will turn off and the high beamindicator light will turn on.

NOTE. After manually changing the head-light mode to the high beam, if you turnon the high beam assist function,return the light control switch to the“AUTO” position.. When manually changing the head-light mode to the high beam, if you turnthe light control switch to the “ ”position, the instrument panel illumina-tion, parking lights, front side markerlights, rear sidemarker lights, tail lightsand license plate lights will be on.

! Tips for the high beam assist sys-tem

S03AH0703. The high beam assist function recog-nizes the conditions surrounding the ve-hicle based on the brightness of illumina-tion ahead of your vehicle, etc. Therefore,the headlight mode may switch in somesituations that do not match to the driver’ssense.. A bicycle or cargo cycle may not bedetected.. Under the following situations, thebrightness of ambient illumination maynot be detected correctly and the highbeam assist function may not work prop-erly. As a result, the glare of the high beammay disturb the oncoming vehicle orvehicle ahead. Also, the low beam modemay continue although there are nooncoming vehicles and vehicles ahead.In the such cases, change the headlightmode manually.

– In bad weather (fog, snow, sandstorm, heavy rain, etc.).– When thewindshield glass is dirty orfogged.– When the windshield is cracked ordamaged.– When the stereo camera is de-formed or the stereo camera lensesare dirty.


(243,1)


– If there are lights similar to theheadlights or the tail lights in thesurrounding area.– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-hicle ahead is driven without its head-lights and tail lights on.– If the headlights of an oncomingvehicle or the tail lights of a vehicleahead are dirty or discolored, or if thelight beams are not aimed correctly.– When a rapid change of brightnesscontinues while driving.– When driving on a road with manyups and downs or uneven surfaces.– When driving on a road with manycurves.– When there are some objects thatreflect light strongly, such as a roadsign or a mirror in vehicle ahead.– When the rear part of the vehicleahead, such as a container, reflectslight strongly.– When the headlights of your vehicleare damaged or dirty.– When your vehicle is tilted, such asin case the vehicle has a flat tire or isbeing towed.– Immediately after the engine hasstarted.

. In the following conditions, the head-light mode will not be automatically chan-ged from the high beam to the low beam.

– When your vehicle passes an on-coming vehicle suddenly in a blindcurve.– When another vehicle passes infront of your vehicle.– When an oncoming vehicle or ve-hicle ahead comes in and out of viewbecause of continuous curves, medianstrips, roadside trees, etc.

. If the stereo camera detects the light ofthe front fog lights of an oncoming vehicle,the headlight mode may change from thehigh beam to the low beam automatically.. The headlight mode may change fromthe high beam to the low beam, or the lowbeam mode may continue, when affectedby a street light, traffic signal, illuminationof an advertisement board, or a reflectiveobject such as a road sign and signboard.. The timing of the change of headlightmode may differ due to the followingfactors.

– Color or brightness of the headlightsof an oncoming vehicle or the tail lightsof a vehicle ahead.– The headlights of the oncomingvehicle or the tail lights of the vehicleahead are covered with mud, snow,etc.– Movement and direction of an on-coming vehicle or a vehicle ahead.

– When the headlights of an oncom-ing vehicle or the tail lights of a vehicleahead illuminate on only one side.– When the oncoming vehicle orvehicle ahead is a motorcycle.– Conditions of a road (slope, curve,road surface, etc.).– Number of passengers and weightof loaded cargo.– Limitation of the detection ability ofthe stereo camera.– If the EyeSight traffic lane customi-zation is not set to the actual flow oftraffic.

– CONTINUED –


3

Instruments

andcontrols

(244,1)


& Daytime running light systemS03AH04

WARNING

When the daytime running lights areilluminated, the tail lights do notilluminate. When it becomes darkoutside, turn the light switch to the“ ” position to illuminate the head-lights and tail lights. This will im-prove visibility and allow other dri-vers to see your vehicle more easily.

The daytime running lights will automati-cally illuminate when the following condi-tions are fulfilled.. The engine is running.. The parking brake is fully released.. The light control switch is in “AUTO” (ifequipped), “ ” or “ ” (except forCanada models).. The light control switch is in “AUTO”,“ ” or “OFF” (for Canada models).. The select lever is in a position otherthan the “P” position.

NOTEWhen the light switch is in the “ ”position, the instrument panel illumina-tion, front side marker lights, tail lightsand license plate lights are also illumi-nated.

3-12. Steering ResponsiveHeadlight (SRH)

S03BL

1) The target area of illumination when SRHis activated.

2) The target area of illumination when SRHis not activated.

SRH is a function that automatically movesthe headlight beam to the left or right inaccordance with the steering angle andvehicle speed. This function helps toimprove the visibility at night by illuminat-ing the road ahead at corners and inter-sections.

You can turn the SRH function on or off bypressing the SRH OFF switch.

1) SRH OFF indicator light

The SRH OFF indicator light on thecombination meter turns off when SRH isturned on.

Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)242

(245,1)


The SRH OFF indicator light on thecombination meter illuminates when SRHis turned off.If SRH is malfunctioning, the SRH OFFindicator light on the combination meterflashes when the ignition switch is in the“ON” position. It indicates that SRH hasbeen deactivated. Contact a SUBARUdealer for an inspection.

NOTE. If you turn the ignition switch to the“OFF” position with SRH turned off andthen start the engine again, SRH willautomatically turn on.. When you turn the ignition switch tothe “ON” position, the SRH OFF indi-cator light will illuminate and turn offafter several seconds.. SRH only activates when the vehicleis traveling forward at the speed ofapproximately 5 mph (8 km/h) or more.

3-13. Headlight beam levelerS03AT

The LED headlights produce more lightthan conventional halogen headlights.When the vehicle is carrying a heavy loadand the headlight beams are angledupwards, the driver of an oncoming vehiclemay experience glare.To prevent this, the automatic headlightbeam leveler adjusts the headlights to theoptimum height automatically dependingon the load the vehicle is carrying.

CAUTION

In certain circumstances, the head-lights may become misaligned, andthe headlight beam leveler will notreset them to the proper angle. Thismay occur after transporting yourvehicle on a flat-bed truck, or if thevehicle is parked and restarted ondifferent angles. In such cases, havethe headlight alignment checked bya SUBARU dealer.

3-14. Fog light switch (ifequipped)

S03BA

Except for Canada models1) Headlight switch2) Fog light switch

– CONTINUED –

Headlight beam leveler 243

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(246,1)


For Canada models1) Headlight switch2) Fog light switch

The front fog lights will turn on when thefog light switch is placed in the “ ” positionwhile the headlights are in the followingcondition.. The headlight switch is in the “ ”position with the low beammode selected.. For models with the auto on/off head-lights, while the headlight switch is in the“AUTO” position and the low beam head-lights turn on automatically.

To turn off the front fog lights, perform thefollowing.. Turn the switch to “ ” (except forCanada models).

. Turn the switch to “OFF” (for Canadamodels).

The indicator light on the combinationmeter will illuminate when the front foglights are illuminated.

3-15. Turn signal leverS03AI

1) Right turn2) Lane change right signal3) Lane change left signal4) Left turn

If the lever does not return after cornering,return the lever to the neutral position byhand.

To signal a lane change, push the turnsignal lever up or down slightly and hold itduring the lane change. The lever willreturn automatically to the neutral positionwhen you release it.

Turn signal lever244

(247,1)


& One-touch lane changerS03AI01

To flash the turn signal and turn signalindicator light three times, push the turnsignal lever up or down slightly andimmediately release it.

NOTEThe operational/non-operationalsetting of the one-touch lane changercan be changed by a SUBARU dealer.Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer fordetails. For models with the combina-tion meter display (color LCD), thesetting can also be changed by operat-ing the combination meter display(color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi-cle Setting” FP201.

3-16. Wiper and washerS03AM

WARNING

In freezing weather, do not use thewindshield washer until the wind-shield is sufficiently warmed by thedefroster.Otherwise the washer fluid canfreeze on the windshield, blockingyour view.

CAUTION

. Do not operate the washer con-tinuously for more than 10 sec-onds, or when the washer fluidtank is empty. This may causeoverheating of the washer motor.Check the washer fluid level fre-quently, such as at fuel stops.

. Do not operate the wipers whenthe windshield or rear window isdry. This may scratch the glass,damage the blade rubbers andmight cause the wiper motor tofail. Before operating the wiperon a dry windshield or rear win-dow, always use the windshieldwasher.

. In freezing weather, be sure thatthe blade rubbers are not frozento the windshield or rear windowbefore switching on the wipers.Attempting to operate the wiperwith the blades frozen to thewindow glass could cause notonly the blade rubbers to bedamaged but also might causethewipermotor to fail. If the bladerubbers are frozen to the windowglass, be sure to operate thedefroster, windshield wiper dei-cer (if equipped) or rear windowdefogger before turning on thewiper.

. If the wipers stop during opera-tion because of ice or some otherobstruction on the window, thismight cause the wiper motor tofail even if the wiper switch isturned off. I f this occurs,promptly stop the vehicle in asafe place, turn the ignitionswitch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” po-sition and clean thewindowglassto allow proper wiper operation.

. Use clean water if windshieldwasher fluid is unavailable. Inareas where water freezes inwinter, use SUBARU WindshieldWasher Fluid or the equivalent.

– CONTINUED –

Wiper and washer 245

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(248,1)


Refer to “Windshield washerfluid” FP492.

. Do not clean the blade rubberswith gasoline or a solvent, suchas paint thinner or benzine. Thiswill cause deterioration of theblade rubbers.

NOTE. The windshield wiper motor is pro-tected against overloads by a circuitbreaker. If the motor operates continu-ously under an unusually heavy load,the circuit breaker may trip to stop themotor temporarily. If this happens, parkyour vehicle in a safe place, turn off thewiper switch, and wait for approxi-mately 10 minutes. The circuit breakerwill reset itself, and the wipers willagain operate normally.. Clean your blade rubbers and win-dow glass periodically with a washersolution to prevent streaking, and toremove accumulations of road salt orroad film. Operate the windshieldwasher for at least 1 second so thatwasher solution will be sprinkled allover the windshield or rear window.. Grease, wax, insects or other mate-rial on the windshield or the bladerubbers results in jerky wiper operation

and streaking on the glass. If youcannot remove those streaks afteroperating the washer or if the wiperoperation is jerky, clean the outer sur-face of the windshield or rear windowand the blade rubbers using a spongeor soft cloth with a neutral detergent ormild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning,rinse the window glass and bladerubbers with clean water. The glass isclean if no beads form on the glasswhen you rinse with water.. If you cannot eliminate the streakingeven after following this procedure,replace the blade rubbers with newones. For replacement instructions,refer to “Replacement of wiper blades”FP493.. If the wipers do not operate when thewiper switch is in the “Lo” position,turn the wiper switch to the “High”position.

In these cases, we recommend that youcontact your SUBARU dealer.

& Windshield wiper and washerswitches

S03AM01The wiper operates only when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.! Windshield wipers

S03AM0105

/ MIST: Mist (for a single wipe)/ OFF: Off/ INT: Intermittent/ LO: Low speed/ HI: High speed

To turn the wipers on, push the wipercontrol lever down.

To turn the wipers off, return the lever tothe “ ”/“OFF” position.

For a single wipe of the wipers, push thelever up. The wipers operate until yourelease the lever.

Wiper and washer246

(249,1)


! Wiper intermittent time controlS03AM0103

When the wiper switch is in the “ ”position, turn the dial to adjust the operat-ing interval of the wiper. The operatinginterval can be adjusted in several stepsfrom the shortest interval to the longest.

! Windshield washerS03AM0104

To wash the windshield, pull the wipercontrol lever toward you. The washer fluidsprays until you release the lever. Thewipers operate while you pull the lever.

Windshield washer fluid warning light

NOTEThe windshield washer fluid warninglight illuminates when the washer fluidlevel in the tank has dropped to thelower limit. If the warning light illumi-nates, refill the tank with fluid. For therefilling procedure, refer to “Wind-shield washer fluid” FP492.

– CONTINUED –

Wiper and washer 247

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(250,1)


& Rear window wiper andwasher switch

S03AM02

: Washer operation (accompanied bywiper operation)

: Continuous operation: Intermittent operation: Off: Washer operation (accompanied bywiper operation)

! Rear wiperS03AM0201

With the switch turned to the “ ” position,the rear wiper will operate intermittently atintervals corresponding to the vehiclespeed. In this position, when you movethe select lever to the “R” position, the rearwiper will switch to continuous operation.

When you move the select lever from the“R” (reverse) position to another position,the rear wiper will return to intermittentoperation.

Reverse gear interlocked rear wiper:Even if the rear wiper switch is in the off“ ” position, if the front windshield wiper isoperating continuously, the rear wiper willoperate intermittently when you move theselect lever to the “R” (reverse) position.

The factory setting (default setting) of thereverse gear interlocked rear wiper is asfollows.. U.S.-spec. models: Non-operational. Other models: Operational

This setting can be changed by aSUBARUdealer. Consult your SUBARU dealer fordetails.

CAUTION

Do not attach anything that disturbsthe rear wiper operation on the reargate. Doing so may damage the rearwiper when it operates.

! WasherS03AM0202

To wash the rear window while the rearwiper is operating, turn the knob switchupward to the “ ” position. The washerfluid sprays until you release the knob.To wash the rear window when the rearwiper is not in use, turn the knob switchdownward to the “ ” position. The washerfluid sprays and the wiper operates untilyou release the knob.The rear view camera washer also oper-ates while the rear window washer isoperating.

Wiper and washer248

(251,1)


3-17. MirrorsS03AP

Always check that the inside and outsidemirrors are properly adjusted before youstart driving.

& Inside mirrorS03AP01

1) Normal position2) Anti-glare position

Push the tab on the mirror for normal use.To reduce glare from the headlights of thevehicle behind you, pull the tab to the anti-glare position.

& Auto-dimming mirror/com-pass with HomeLink® (ifequipped)

S03AP07

1) Compass2) HomeLink buttons3) Switch

During nighttime driving, the auto-dimmingfeature senses distracting glare fromvehicle headlights behind you and auto-matically dims to eliminate the glare andpreserve your vision.

! To Operate the Auto-Dimming Fea-ture

S03AP0705Press the “ ” switch to turn the auto-dimming feature on/off. The auto-dimmingfeature is enabled when the switch’s greenLED indicator is on. The auto-dimmingfeature will default to on with each ignitioncycle.! To Operate the Compass Feature

S03AP07061. To turn the compass feature on/off,press and hold the “ ” switch for morethan 3 seconds or until the display turnson/off. The compass feature will default toon with each ignition cycle.2. If the display reads “C”, slowly drive thevehicle in circles until compass is cali-brated.

Compass calibration zones

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors 249

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(252,1)


3. To adjust for compass zone variance:(1) Find your current location andzone number on the map.(2) Press and hold the “ ” switch formore than 6 seconds or until a zonenumber appears in the display.(3) Once the zone number appears inthe display, toggle the “ ” switchagain until your current location zonenumber appears. After you stop press-ing the switch, your new zone numberwill be saved. Within a few seconds,the display will show a compass direc-tion.

4. If the vehicle’s magnetics have chan-ged or if the compass appears inaccurate,recalibrate the compass. Press and holdthe “ ” switch for more than 9 seconds oruntil a “C” appears in the display. Once a“C” appears in the display, slowly drive thevehicle in circles until compass is cali-brated.

! HomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-tem

S03AP0704The HomeLink® Wireless Control Systemprovides a convenient way to replace up tothree hand-held radio-frequency remotesused to activate devices such as gateoperators, garage door openers, entrydoor locks, security systems, and evenhome lighting. The below steps are gen-eric programming instructions; for Genieand Sommer garage door openers, pleasego directly to the HomeLink website.Additional information and programmingvideos can be found atwww.HomeLink.com andwww.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

CAUTION

. Before programming HomeLinkto a garage door opener or gateoperator, make sure that peopleand objects are out of the way ofthe device to prevent potentialharm or damage.

. When programming a garagedoor opener, it is advised to parkoutside of the garage.

. Do not use HomeLink with anygarage door opener that lackssafety stop and reverse features,as required by U.S. federal safety

standards (this includes any gar-age door opener model manufac-tured before April 1, 1982). Agarage door that cannot detectan object signaling the door tostop and reverse does not meetcurrent U.S. federal safety stan-dards.

. It is also recommended that a newbattery be placed in the hand-held remote (garage door openerremote) of the device for quickerand more accurate training.

. Some vehicles may require theignition switch to be turned to the“ON” or “ACC” position for pro-gramming and/or operation ofHomeLink.

. Keep the hand-held remote (gar-age door opener remote) of thedevice you are programming foruse in other vehicles as well asfor future HomeLink program-ming. It is also suggested thatupon the sale of the vehicle, theprogrammed HomeLink buttonsbe erased for security purposes.Refer to “Erasing HomeLink But-tons” FP253.

Mirrors250

(253,1)


! Programming a New HomeLinkButton

S03AP070409

1) Indicator Light2) HomeLink buttons

1. Press and release the HomeLink but-ton that you would like to program. TheHomeLink indicator light will flash orangeslowly (if not, refer to “Erasing HomeLinkButtons” FP253).

1) Garage door opener remote

2. Position the hand-held remote (garagedoor opener remote) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8cm) away from the HomeLink button thatyou would like to program.

NOTESome hand-held remotes (garage dooropener remotes) may actually trainbetter at a distance of 6 to 12 inches(15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if youhave difficulty with the programmingprocess.

3. While the HomeLink indicator light isflashing orange, press and hold the hand-held remote button. Continue pressing thehand-held remote button until theHomeLink indicator light changes fromorange to green. You may now releasethe hand-held remote button.

NOTESome devices may require you to re-place this “Programming a NewHomeLink Button” step 3 with proce-dures noted in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section. Referto “Gate Operator/Canadian Program-ming” FP253.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors 251

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(254,1)


1) Indicator light

4. Press the HomeLink button that youwould like to program and observe theindicator light.

. If the indicator light remains constantgreen, your device should operatewhen the HomeLink button is pressed.At this point, if your device operates,programming is complete.. If the indicator light rapidly flashesgreen, firmly press, hold for two sec-onds and release the HomeLink buttonup to three times to complete theprogramming process. At this point ifyour device operates, programming iscomplete. If the device does notoperate, continue with the next stepof the programming instructions.

1) “Learn” button

5. At the garage door opener motor,(security gate motor, etc.) locate the“Learn”, “Smart”, or “Program” button. Thiscan usually be found where the hangingantennawire is attached to themotor-headunit (see the device’s manual to identifythis button). The name and color of thebutton may vary by manufacturer.

NOTEA ladder and/or second person maysimplify the following steps.6. Firmly press and release the “Learn”,“Smart”, or “Program” button. You nowhave 30 seconds in which to complete step7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,hold for two seconds and release theHomeLink button up to three times. At thispoint programming is complete and yourdevice should operate when theHomeLinkbutton is pressed and released.

Mirrors252

(255,1)


1) Status indicators

8. If status indicator arrows appear nextto the indicator light, please refer to“Garage Door Two-Way Communication”FP254.

In the event that there are still program-ming difficulties or questions, additionalHomeLink information and programmingvideos can be found atwww.HomeLink.com andwww.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex. ForGenie and Sommer garage door openersplease go directly to the HomeLink web-site.

! Gate Operator/Canadian Pro-gramming

S03AP070410

Canadian radio-frequency laws requiretransmitter remote signals to “time-out”(or quit) after several seconds of transmis-sion, which may not be long enough forHomeLink to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similar to this Canadianlaw, some U.S. gate operators are de-signed to “time-out” in the same manner.The indicator LED on the hand-heldremote will go off when the device timesout, indicating that it has finished transmit-ting.

If you live in Canada or you are havingdifficulties programming a gate operator orgarage door opener by using the program-ming procedures, replace “Programming aNew HomeLink Button” step 3 with thefollowing:

While the HomeLink indicator light isflashing orange, press and release (“cy-cle”) your device’s hand-held remote everytwo seconds until the HomeLink indicatorlight changes from orange to green. Youmay now release the hand-held remotebutton.

NOTEIf programming a garage door openeror gate operator, it is advised to unplugthe device during the “cycling” processto prevent possible overheating.

Proceed with “Programming a NewHomeLink Button” step 4 to complete.

! Using HomeLinkS03AP070411

To operate, simply press and release theprogrammed HomeLink button. Activationwill now occur for the trained device (i.e.garage door opener, gate operator, secur-ity system, entry door lock, home/officelighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held remote of the device may also beused at any time.

! Erasing HomeLink ButtonsS03AP070412

To erase programming from the threebuttons (individual buttons cannot beerased but can be “reprogrammed” asoutlined below), follow the step noted:

Press and hold the two outer HomeLinkbuttons for at least 10 seconds. The LEDindicator will change from continuously litto rapidly flashing. Release both buttons.Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.HomeLink is now ready to be programmedat any time beginning with “Programming aNew HomeLink Button” - step 1.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors 253

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(256,1)


! Reprogramming a SingleHomeLink Button

S03AP070406

To program a previously trained button,follow these steps:1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkbutton. DO NOT release the button.2. The indicator light will begin to slowlyflash orange after 20 seconds. TheHomeLink button can be released at thispoint. Proceed with “Programming a NewHomeLink Button” - step 3.3. If you do not complete the program-ming of a new device to the button, it willrevert to the previously stored program-ming.

! Garage Door Two-Way Commu-nication

S03AP070413

HomeLink has the capability of commu-nicating with your garage door opener.HomeLink can receive and display “clos-ing” or “opening” status messages fromcompatible garage door opener systems.At any time, HomeLink can also recall anddisplay the last recorded status commu-nicated by the garage door opener toindicate your garage door being “closed”or “opened”.

HomeLink has the capability of receivingthis communication from the garage dooropener at a range up to 820 feet (250 m).

Range may be reduced by obstacles suchas houses or trees. You may have to slowyour vehicle speed to successfully receivethe garage door opener communication.

! Programming Two-Way Commu-nication

S03AP070414


Within five seconds after programming anew HomeLink button, both of HomeLink’sgarage door status indicators will flashrapidly green indicating that the garagedoor two-way communication has beenenabled. If your garage door status in-dicators flashed, two-way communicationprogramming is complete.

If the garage door status indicators do notflash, additional HomeLink informationand programming videos can be found

online at www.HomeLink.com andwww.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex.

! Using Two-Way CommunicationS03AP070415


Recall and display (at any time) the lastrecorded garage door status messagecommunicated to HomeLink by simulta-neously pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and2 for two seconds. HomeLink will displaythe last recorded status for three seconds.

Mirrors254

(257,1)


1) Garage door opener CLOSING (blinkingorange)

2) Garage door opener CLOSED (solidgreen)

3) Garage door opener OPENING (blinkingorange)

4) Garage door opener OPENED (solidgreen)

If two-way communication programming issuccessful, HomeLink will display thestatus of your garage door opener witharrow indicators.

! CertificationS03AP070416

In the event that there are still program-ming difficulties or questions, additionalHomeLink information and programmingvideos can be found atwww.HomeLink.com,www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, orby calling the toll-free HomeLink-hotlineat 1-800-355-3515.. U.S.-spec. models

CAUTION


– CONTINUED –

Mirrors 255

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(258,1)


. Canada-spec. models

HomeLink® and the HomeLink® house areregistered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-tion.

WARNING

. When p r o g r amm i n g t h eHomeLink® Wireless Control Sys-tem, you may be operating agarage door opener or otherdevice. Make sure that peopleand objects are out of the way ofthe garage door or other deviceto prevent potential harm or da-mage.

. Do not use the HomeLink® Wire-less Control System with a gar-age door opener that lacks thesafety stop and reverse featureas required by applicable safetystandards. A garage door openerwhich cannot detect an object,signaling the door to stop andreverse, does not meet thesesafety standards. Using a garagedoor opener without these fea-tures increases risk of seriousinjury or death. For more infor-mation, consult the HomeLink®

website at www.homelink.com orcall 1-800-355-3515.

Mirrors256

(259,1)


. Mexico-spec. models & Outside mirrorsS03AP03

! Convex mirror (passenger side)S03AP0301

WARNING

Objects look smaller in a convexmirror and farther away than whenviewed in a flatmirror. Do not use theconvex mirror to judge the distanceof vehicles behind you when chan-ging lanes. Use the inside mirror (orglance backwards) to determine theactual size and distance of objectsthat you view in convex mirror.

CAUTION

Make sure to adjust the mirrorsbefore driving.

! Remote control mirror switchS03AP0302

: Select side to adjust: Direction control

The remote control mirrors operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the “ON” or“ACC” position.1. Turn the control switch to the side thatyou want to adjust. “L” is for the left mirror,“R” is for the right mirror.2. Move the control switch in the directionyou want to move the mirror.3. Return the control switch to the neutralposition to prevent unintentional opera-tion.

The mirrors can also be adjusted manu-ally.

– CONTINUED –

Mirrors 257

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(260,1)


NOTEFor models with memory function:. The outside mirror can be adjustedfor approximately 45 seconds after thefollowing conditions are met.

– The ignition switch is turned tothe “OFF” position.– The door is unlocked using theaccess key fob.

. The outside mirror angle can beregistered with button “1”, “2” or eachof the key fobs.

For details, refer to “Memory function(driver’s seat – if equipped)” FP37.. The outside mirror angle can also beretrieved with the Driver MonitoringSystem user information. To do so,perform user registration in the DriverMonitoring System settings. Refer to“Driver Monitoring System settings”FP221.

! Reverse tilt-down feature (ifequipped)

S03AP030201

When backing up the vehicle, the frontpassenger’s side outside mirrors will turndownward automatically to provide betterrear visibility.1. Push the ignition switch to the ONposition.2. Move the select lever to the R (Re-

verse) position.3. The outside mirror angle moves down-ward.

The outside mirror angle will return to itsoriginal position when the following condi-tion are met.. After approximately 9 seconds from theselect lever is moved to any position otherthan R (Reverse).. The ignition switch is turned to the“OFF” position.. The vehicle is running.

NOTE. The reverse tilt-down mirror anglecan be registered with button “1”, “2”or each of the key fobs. For details,refer to “Memory function (driver’s seat– if equipped)” FP37.. The reverse tilt-down mirror anglecan also be retrieved with the DriverMonitoring System user information.To do so, perform user registration inthe Driver Monitoring System settings.Refer to “Driver Monitoring Systemsettings” FP221.. The operational/non-operationalsetting can be changed by operatingthe combination meter display (colorLCD). For details, refer to “VehicleSetting” FP201.

. The factory setting (default setting)for this function is set as the frontpassenger’s side mirror. The setting ofthe right and left side mirror/frontpassenger’s side mirror operation canbe changed by a SUBARU dealer.Contact your SUBARU dealer for de-tails.

CAUTION

Depress the brake pedal during thereverse tilt-down mirror angle ad-justment.

To adjust the reverse tilt-down mirrorangle, adjust the outside mirror using theremote control mirror switch while thereverse tilt-down operates. For detailsabout how to adjust the outside mirrorangle, refer to “Remote control mirrorswitch” FP257.Memory function:The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirrorcan be registered. Register the positionwith button “1”, “2” or each of the accesskey fobs and retrieve the position.For details about registration or retrieval ofa position, refer to “Memory function(driver’s seat – if equipped)” FP37.

Mirrors258

(261,1)


NOTEIf the seat is moved forward or back-ward 1.18 in (30 mm) or more, thereverse tilt-down will move to thefactory default position or the lastposition hold.Hold last position function:The angle of the reverse tilt-down mirrorcan be set to the latest adjusted angle.The hold last position function operateswhen the following condition are met.. The memory function is not used.. The seat is moved forward or backward1.18 in (30 mm) or more.

NOTE. The factory setting (default setting)for this function is set as “non-opera-tional”. This setting can be changed to“operational” at SUBARU dealers. Formore details, contact a SUBARU dealer.. If the hold last position functionsetting is “non-operation”, the reversetilt-down will move to the factory de-fault position.

3-18. Defogger and deicer (ifequipped)

S03BI

1) Rear window defogger2) Outside mirror defogger (if equipped)3) Windshield wiper deicer (if equipped)

The vehicle is equipped with the defoggerand the deicer (if equipped) system. Thedefogger and deicer system is activatedonly when the ignition switch is in the “ON”position.

Climate control panel type A1) Models without outside mirror defogger2) Models with outside mirror defogger

– CONTINUED –

Defogger and deicer 259

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(262,1)


Climate control panel type B and CTo activate simultaneously the rear win-dow defogger, outside mirror defogger (ifequipped) and windshield wiper deicer (ifequipped), press the control switch that islocated on the climate control panel. Theindicator light on the control switch illumi-nates while the defogger and deicersystem is activated.

To turn them off, press the control switchagain. They also turn off when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.

The defogger and deicer system willautomatically shut off after approximately15 minutes. If the rear window and theoutside mirrors have been cleared and thewindshield blade rubbers have been

deiced completely before that time, pressthe control switch to turn them off.

It is possible for the defogger and deicersystem to be set to continuous operationmode by a SUBARU dealer. Consult yourSUBARU dealer for details. Also, formodels with a combination meter display(color LCD), it is possible to set thedefogger and deicer system for the con-tinuous operation mode. For details, referto “Vehicle Setting” FP201.

CAUTION

. To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not operate thedefogger and deicer system con-tinuously for any longer thannecessary.

. Do not use sharp instruments orwindow cleaner containing abra-sives to clean the inner surface ofthe rear window. They may da-mage the conductors printed onthe window.

NOTE. Turn on the defogger and deicersystem if the wipers are frozen to thewindshield.

. If the windshield is covered withsnow, remove the snow so that thewindshield wiper deicer works effec-tively.. While the defogger and deicer sys-tem is in the continuous operationmode:

– If the vehicle speed remains at 9mph (15 km/h) or lower for 15minutes, the windshield wiper dei-cer system automatically stops op-erating. However, the rear windowdefogger system and outsidemirrordefogger system maintain continu-ous operation in this condition.– If the vehicle battery voltagedrops below the permissible level,continuous operation of the defog-ger system and deicer system iscanceled and the system stopsoperating.

Defogger and deicer260

(263,1)


3-19. Tilt/telescopic steeringwheel

S03BF

WARNING

. Do not adjust the steering wheeltilt/telescopic position while driv-ing. This may cause loss ofvehicle control and result in per-sonal injury.

. If the lever cannot be raised to thefixed position, adjust the steeringwheel again. It is dangerous todrive without locking the steeringwheel. This may cause loss ofvehicle control and result in per-sonal injury.

1) Tilt adjustment2) Telescopic adjustment3) Tilt/telescopic lock lever

1. Adjust the seat position. Refer to“Seats” FP32.2. Pull the tilt/telescopic lock lever down.3. Move the steering wheel to the desiredlevel.4. Pull the lever up to lock the steeringwheel in place.5. Make sure that the steering wheel issecurely locked by moving it up and down,and forward and backward.

& Heated Steering Wheel sys-tem (if equipped)

S03BF01The Heated Steering Wheel systemwarms the steering wheel at a constanttemperature.

1) Heated Steering Wheel switch2) Indicator light3) Heated area

To turn on the Heated Steering Wheelsystem, pull the Heated Steering Wheelswitch when the ignition switch is in the“ON” or “ACC” position. Then the steeringwheel will be warmed and the indicatorlight on the switch will illuminate. To turn offthe Heated Steering Wheel system, pullthe switch again. Then the indicator lightwill turn off.

– CONTINUED –

Tilt/telescopic steering wheel 261

3

Instruments

andcontrols

(264,1)


CAUTION

. Use the Heated Steering Wheelsystem with the engine running.Otherwise, the battery voltagemay drop below the permissiblelevel and itmay not be possible tostart the engine.

. There is a possibility that peoplewith delicate skin may sufferslight burns even at low tempera-tures if they use the HeatedSteering Wheel for a long periodof time. When using the HeatedSteeringWheel, always be sure towarn the persons concerned.

. Do not cover the Heated SteeringWheel with an object such as asteering wheel cover. Doing somay cause the Heated SteeringWheel to overheat.

. Do not spill liquid on the steeringwheel. If liquid is spilled, wipe itoff immediately and dry it beforeusing the Heated Steering Wheelsystem.

NOTE. If the surface temperature of thesteering wheel is approximately above1048F (408C) when the switch is turnedon, the systemwill not heat the steeringwheel. Then, the indicator light willcontinue to illuminate.. The Heated Steering Wheel systemwill automatically turn off approxi-mately 30 minutes after the systemhas been turned on.. The temperature of the Heated Steer-ing Wheel system cannot be adjusted.

3-20. HornS03AR

To sound the horn, push the horn pad.

Horn262

(265,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(266,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(267,1)


S044-1. Ventilator control ............................................ 266

Center ventilators ...............................................266Side ventilators ..................................................266Rear ventilators (if equipped) ..............................266

4-2. Climate control panel ..................................... 267Type A................................................................268Type B................................................................269Type C................................................................270

4-3. Automatic climate control operation............. 271Type A................................................................271Type B and C......................................................271Sensors..............................................................272Automatic climate control customization(for type B and C) .............................................272

4-4. Manual climate control operation for frontclimate control panel .................................... 273Airflow mode selection .......................................273MAX A/C mode (for type B and C) .......................275Temperature control ...........................................275Fan speed control...............................................275

Air conditioner control ....................................... 275Air inlet selection ............................................... 275To turn off the climate control system ................ 276

4-5. Defrosting ........................................................2764-6. Operating tips for heater and air

conditioner.....................................................277Cleaning ventilation grille................................... 277Efficient cooling after parking in directsunlight ........................................................... 277

Lubrication oil circulation in the refrigerantcircuit .............................................................. 277

Checking air conditioning system beforesummer season ............................................... 277

Cooling and dehumidifying in high humidityand low temperature weather conditions .......... 278

Air conditioner compressor shut-off whenengine is heavily loaded................................... 278

Refrigerant for your climate control system........ 2784-7. Air filtration system.........................................278

Replacing the cabin air filter............................... 278

Climate control

4

Clim

atecontrol

(268,1)


4-1. Ventilator controlS04AF

& Center ventilatorsS04AF01

Center ventilatorsTo adjust the airflow direction, move thetab. To close the ventilator, move the tab allthe way down.

& Side ventilatorsS04AF02

Side ventilators1) Close2) Open

To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.

& Rear ventilators (if equipped)S04AF04

Rear ventilators1) Close2) Open

To adjust the flow direction, move the tab.

Ventilator control266

(269,1)


4-2. Climate control panelS04AG

WARNING

. The cooling function operatesonly when the engine is running.

. Do not leave children or adultswho would normally require thesupport of others alone in yourvehicle. Pets should not be leftalone either. On hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehiclecould quickly become high en-ough to cause severe or possiblyfatal injuries to people or ani-mals.

– CONTINUED –

Climate control panel 267

4

Clim

atecontrol

(270,1)


& Type AS04AG01 1) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to

“Airflow mode selection” FP273.)2) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fan

speed control” FP275.)3) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Tem-

perature control” FP275.)4) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Air

conditioner control” FP275.)5) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Air

inlet selection” FP275.)6) Rear window defogger button and out-

side mirror defogger button (if equipped)(Refer to “Defogger and deicer”FP259.)

NOTEThe controllable temperature rangemay vary depending on the regionalspecifications of the vehicle.

Climate control panel268

(271,1)


& Type BS04AG02

1) Driver’s side temperature control dial(Refer to “Automatic climate controloperation” FP271 and/or “Temperaturecontrol” FP275.)

2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-mate control operation” FP271.)

3) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Airconditioner control” FP275.)

4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Airinlet selection” FP275.)

5) MAX A/C button (Refer to “MAX A/Cmode (for type B and C)” FP275.)

6) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”FP276.)

7) Rear window defogger button and out-side mirror defogger button (Refer to“Defogger and deicer” FP259.)

8) Passenger’s side temperature controldial (Refer to “Temperature control”FP275.)

9) SYNC button (Refer to “SYNC mode(type B)” FP275.)

10) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fanspeed control” FP275.)

11) Airflow mode selection button (Refer to“Airflow mode selection” FP273.)

12) ON/OFF button (Refer to “Automaticclimate control operation” FP271.)

NOTEThe climate control screen is displayedon the multi-function display (colorLCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”FP211.

– CONTINUED –

Climate control panel 269

4

Clim

atecontrol

(272,1)


& Type CS04AG03 1) Temperature control dial (Refer to “Auto-

matic climate control operation” FP271and/or “Temperature control” FP275.)

2) AUTO button (Refer to “Automatic cli-mate control operation” FP271.)

3) Air conditioner button (Refer to “Airconditioner control” FP275.)

4) Air inlet selection button (Refer to “Airinlet selection” FP275.)

5) MAX A/C button (Refer to “MAX A/Cmode (for type B and C)” FP275.)

6) Defroster button (Refer to “Defrosting”FP276.)

7) Rear window defogger button and out-side mirror defogger button (Refer to“Defogger and deicer” FP259.)

8) Airflow mode selection dial (Refer to“Airflow mode selection” FP273.)

9) Fan speed control dial (Refer to “Fanspeed control” FP275.)

10) ON/OFF button (Refer to “Automaticclimate control operation” FP271.)

NOTEThe climate control screen is displayedon the multi-function display (colorLCD). Refer to “Climate control screen”FP211.

Climate control panel270

(273,1)


4-3. Automatic climate con-trol operation

S04AI

When thismode is selected, the fan speed,airflow distribution, air-inlet control, and airconditioner compressor operation areautomatically controlled. To activate thismode, perform the following.

NOTE. Operate the automatic climate con-trol systemwhen the engine is running.. Even when cooling is not necessary,the air conditioner compressor willautomatically turn on if the temperatureis set much lower than the currentoutlet air temperature. Even in thiscase, the “A/C” indicator light on thecontrol panel illuminates.. The air conditioner may not operatein the following cases:

– When the cabin temperature islow.– When the ambient temperaturedecreases close to 328F (08C).

. The controllable temperature rangemay vary depending on the regionalspecifications of the vehicle.

& Type AS04AI04

1. Turn the airflow mode selection dial

and fan speed control dial to the “AUTO”position.2. Set the preferred temperature usingthe temperature control dial.

NOTEEach function can be individually set tothe “AUTO” mode independently of theother functions. Any function set to the“AUTO” mode is controlled automati-cally. Any function not set to the“AUTO” mode can be manually ad-justed as desired.To turn off the climate control system, turnthe fan speed control dial to the “OFF”position. The status of the air inlet selec-tion will be changed as follows dependingon the setting when the climate controlsystem is turned off.

. When the air inlet selection is in “AUTO”mode, the mode will be set to outside airinlet.. When the air inlet selection is in“MANUAL” mode, the mode from beforethe climate control system was turned offwill be maintained.

& Type B and CS04AI05

1. Press the AUTO button. The indicatorlight “FULL AUTO” on the multi-functiondisplay (color LCD) illuminates.

2. Set the preferred temperature usingthe temperature control dial.

NOTEIf you operate any of the buttons on thecontrol panel other than the ON/OFFbutton, the rear window defogger but-ton, the SYNC button (if equipped) andthe temperature control dial(s) duringFULL AUTO mode operation, the“FULL” indicator light on the controlpanel will turn off and the “AUTO”indicator light will remain illuminated.You can then manually control thesystem as desired using the buttonyou operated. To change the systemback to the “FULL AUTO” mode, pressthe “AUTO” button.To turn off the climate control system,press the ON/OFF button. The status ofthe air inlet selection will be changed asfollows depending on the setting when theclimate control system is turned off.

. When the air inlet selection is in “AUTO”mode, the mode will be set to outside airinlet.. When the air inlet selection is in“MANUAL” mode, the mode from beforethe climate control system was turned offwill be maintained.

– CONTINUED –

Automatic climate control operation 271

4

Clim

atecontrol

(274,1)


& SensorsS04AI03

The sensors are located as follows.

1) Interior air temperature sensor2) Solar sensor

The automatic climate control systememploys several sensors. These sensors

are delicate. If they are not treated properlyand become damaged, the system maynot be able to control the interior tempera-ture correctly. To avoid damaging thesensors, observe the following precau-tions.. Do not subject the sensors to impact.. Keep water away from the sensors.. Do not cover the sensors.

& Automatic climate controlcustomization (for type B andC)

S04AI10The automatic climate control can becustomized on the multi-function display(color LCD).Refer to “Setting screen” FP218 forsetting methods.! Mode setting

S04AI1001The climate control can be set in thefollowing mode.

! Normal modeS04AI100101

Use this mode for normal climate control.

! Mild modeS04AI100102

Use this mode for the mild airflow mode.

! Power modeS04AI100103

Use this mode when climate control needsto be operate to increase the comfort

quickly. This will reduce the operationrange of the Auto Start Stop function.

! ECO modeS04AI100104

Use this mode when fuel efficiency isprioritized over comfort. This increasesthe range of the Auto Start Stop operation.! Occupant detection

S04AI1003This mode switches the climate controloperation according to the number ofpassengers.

! Front occupant detectionS04AI100301

This mode detects passenger by theoccupant detection system sensor whenthere is no front passenger in the seat. Thesetting temperature will be changed to thedriver’s setting temperature automatically.

NOTEThe occupant detection system sensormay not detect passengers because oftheir posture, physical size or weight.The front occupant detection functionmay not operate properly.

! Rear occupant detectionS04AI100302

This function judges if there are anypassenger in the rear seat by the openingand closing record of rear doors. If thereare no passenger in the rear seat, theairflow of the climate control is reduced

Automatic climate control operation272

(275,1)


and priority is on the front seat passenger.

NOTEIf the system cannot judge correctly ifthere are passengers or not in the rearseat by the opening and closing of therear door, such as when the doors areopened to place some cargo in thevehicle, the rear occupant detectionmay not operate properly.

4-4. Manual climate controloperation for front climatecontrol panel

S04AJ

& Airflow mode selectionS04AJ01

Select the airflow mode using the airflowmode selection dial (type A and C) or theairflow mode selection button (type B).

Airflow modes are as follows.

1) If equipped

Ventilation: Instrument panel outlets

1) If equipped

Ventilation 2 for type B and C: Instru-ment panel outlets and foot outlets

1) If equipped

Bi-level: Instrument panel outlets and foot

– CONTINUED –

Manual climate control operation for front climate control panel 273

4

Clim

atecontrol

(276,1)


outlets

1) If equipped

Heat: Foot outlets, both side outlets of theinstrument panel and some through wind-shield defroster outlets (A small amount ofair flows to the windshield and both sidewindows to prevent fogging.)

1) If equipped

Heat-def: Windshield defroster outlets,foot outlets and both side outlets of theinstrument panel (Refer to “Defrosting”FP276.)

1) If equipped

Defrost for type A: Windshield defrosteroutlets and both side outlets of the instru-ment panel (Refer to “Defrosting”FP276.)

Manual climate control operation for front climate control panel274

(277,1)


& MAXA/Cmode (for typeBandC)

S04AJ06For quicker cooling, press the MAX A/Cbutton.When the MAX A/C mode is on, thefollowing settings will be changed auto-matically.. The air conditioner will turn on.. The temperature will be set on thelowest.. The fan speed will be set on themaximum speed.. The air inlet will be set to recirculation.. The airflow mode setting will be set toventilation mode.

To turn off MAX A/C mode and return theprevious setting, press the MAX A/Cbutton again.

& Temperature controlS04AJ02

Turn the temperature control dial to set thepreferred interior temperature.For models with the Driver MonitoringSystem, the temperature setting can alsobe changed with the gesture controlfunction. Refer to “Gesture control”FP403.

NOTEThe controllable temperature rangemay vary depending on the regionalspecifications of the vehicle.

! SYNC mode (type B)S04AJ0207

When the SYNC mode is turned on, boththe driver’s and passenger’s side tem-peratures are synchronized using thedriver’s side temperature control dial.Press the SYNC button to turn on theSYNC mode. The SYNC button indicatorwill illuminate.Press the SYNC button again or turn thepassenger’s side temperature control dialto cancel the SYNC mode. The SYNCbutton indicator will not illuminate. In thiscase, temperature control on the driver’sside and passenger’s side is separated.The temperature will be controlled indivi-dually using the driver’s and passenger’stemperature control dials.

& Fan speed controlS04AJ03

Select the preferred fan speed by turningthe fan speed control dial.

& Air conditioner controlS04AJ04

The air conditioner operates only when theengine is running.Press the air conditioner button while the

fan is in operation to turn on the airconditioner. When the air conditioner ison, the “A/C” indicator light illuminates.To turn off the air conditioner, press thebutton again.

NOTEFor efficient defogging or dehumidify-ing in cold weather, turn on the airconditioner. If the ambient temperaturedecreases to approximately 328F (08C),the air conditioner and dehumidifica-tion system may not operate properly.

& Air inlet selectionS04AJ05

Select the air inlet by pressing the air inletselection button.

. Recirculation:When the indicator light on the air inletselection button illuminates, interior air isrecirculated inside the vehicle. Press theair inlet selection button to the ON positionin the following cases.

– When driving on a dusty road– When you want cooling perfor-mance to increase (for example, inparticularly hot weather)

. Outside air circulation:When the indicator light on the air inletselection button does not illuminate, out-

– CONTINUED –

Manual climate control operation for front climate control panel 275

4

Clim

atecontrol

(278,1)


side air is drawn into the passengercompartment. Press the air inlet selectionbutton to the OFF position in the followingcases.

– When the road is no longer dusty– When the interior has cooled to acomfortable temperature

WARNING

Continued operation in the ON posi-tionmay fog up the windows. Switchto the OFF position as soon as theoutside conditions are no longerdusty.

NOTE. When the indicator light on the airinlet selection button is flashing atengine starting, a malfunction mightbe occurring in the electrical system.We recommend that you contact yourSUBARU dealer for inspection.. The indicator light on the air inletselection button may flash in the fol-lowing cases. However, this does notindicate a malfunction.

– After the vehicle battery has beendisconnected and reconnected.– When the vehicle battery voltageis low.

. When outside air circulation is se-lected, the system may automaticallyadjust the air inlet setting depending onsuch factors as the temperaturesetting, the temperature inside thevehicle, or conditions outside the ve-hicle.

& To turn off the climate controlsystem

S04AJ07To turn off the climate control system:. Type A: Select the “OFF” position usingthe fan speed control dial.. Type B and C: Press the ON/OFFbutton.

4-5. DefrostingS04AH

1) If equipped

Select the “ ” or “ ” mode to defrost ordehumidify the windshield and front doorwindows.

NOTE. When the “ ” or “ ” mode isselected, the air conditioner compres-sor operates automatically regardlessof the position of the air conditionerbutton to defrost the windshield morequickly. However the indicator on theair conditioner button may not illumi-nate. At the same time, the air inletselection is automatically set to theoutside air mode.

Defrosting276

(279,1)


. For types B and C climate controlsystem, after defrosting the windshieldby pressing the defroster button “ ”,pressing the button again returns thesystem to the setting that had beenselected before the defroster was acti-vated.

4-6. Operating tips for heaterand air conditioner

S04AD

& Cleaning ventilation grilleS04AD01

1) Front ventilation inlet grille

Always keep the front ventilation inlet grillefree of snow, leaves, or other obstructionsto ensure efficient heating and defrosting.Since the condenser is located in front ofthe radiator, this area should be kept cleanbecause cooling performance is impairedby any accumulation of insects and leaveson the condenser.

& Efficient cooling after parkingin direct sunlight

S04AD02After parking in direct sunlight, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes toallow outside air to circulate into theheated interior. This results in quickercooling by the air conditioner. Keep thewindows closed during the operation of theair conditioner for maximum cooling effi-ciency.

& Lubrication oil circulation inthe refrigerant circuit

S04AD03Operate the air conditioner compressor ata low engine speed (at idle or low drivingspeeds) a few minutes each month duringthe off-season to circulate its oil.

& Checking air conditioningsystem before summer sea-son

S04AD04Check the air conditioner unit for refriger-ant leaks, hose conditions, and properoperation each spring. Have the air con-ditioning system checked by yourSUBARU dealer.

– CONTINUED –

Operating tips for heater and air conditioner 277

4

Clim

atecontrol

(280,1)


& Cooling and dehumidifying inhigh humidity and low tem-perature weather conditions

S04AD05Under certain weather conditions (highrelative humidity, low temperatures, etc.) asmall amount of water vapor emissionfrom the air outlets may be noticed. Thiscondition is normal and does not indicateany problem with the air conditioningsystem.

& Air conditioner compressorshut-off when engine isheavily loaded

S04AD06To improve acceleration and gas mileage,the air conditioner compressor is designedto temporarily shut off during air condi-tioner operation whenever the acceleratoris fully depressed such as during rapidacceleration or when driving on a steepupgrade.

& Refrigerant for your climatecontrol system

S04AD07Your air conditioner uses ozone friendlyrefrigerant R-1234yf (HFO-1234yf). Con-sult your SUBARU dealer for service.Repairs needed as a result of using thewrong refrigerant are not covered underwarranty.

4-7. Air filtration systemS04AE

Your vehicle’s air conditioning system isequipped with an air filtration system.Replace the cabin air filter according tothe replacement schedule found in the“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Thisschedule should be followed to maintainthe filter’s dust collection ability. Underextremely dusty conditions, the filtershould be replaced more frequently. Haveyour filter checked or replaced by yourSUBARU dealer. For replacement, useonly a genuine SUBARU air filter kit.

CAUTION

Contact your SUBARU dealer if thefollowing occurs, even if it is not yettime to change the filter:. Reduction of the airflow through

the vents.. Windshield gets easily fogged or

misted.

NOTEThe filter can influence the air condi-tioning, heating and defroster perfor-mance if not properly maintained.

& Replacing the cabin air filterS04AE01

1. Remove the glove box.

NOTEWe recommend that you takemeasuresto protect the center console withmasking tape first, so that you avoidscratching the center console with theglove box.

(1) Open the glove box.

(2) Remove the damper shaft from theglove box.

Air filtration system278

(281,1)


1) Stoppers

(3) Push in the stoppers located onboth sides of the glove box and thenpull down the glove box as far as it willgo.

(4) Pull out the glove box horizontally

and remove the hinge portion. Whendoing this, be careful not to damagethe hinge.

2. Remove the cabin air filter according tothe following procedure in order to preventdust on the cabin air filter from falling to theinside of its housing.

(1) Push in the four stoppers to unlock,and then slowly pull out the cabin airfilter 0.4 in (1 cm) from the housing.(2) Completely pull out the cabin airfilter by gently tilting the front side of thecabin air filter downward.

3. Replace the cabin air filter elementwith a new one.

CAUTION

The arrow mark on the filter mustpoint UP.

– CONTINUED –

Air filtration system 279

4

Clim

atecontrol

(282,1)


4. Reinstall the glove box, and connectthe damper shaft.5. Close the glove box.

Air filtration system280

(283,1)


S055-1. Antenna ........................................................... 282

Roof antenna......................................................2825-2. Audio set..........................................................282

Audio

5

Audio

(284,1)


5-1. AntennaS05AA

& Roof antennaS05AA04

The roof antenna is installed on the roof.

5-2. Audio setS05AC

If your vehicle is equipped with a genuineSUBARU navigation system or audiosystem, refer to the separate navigation/audio Owner’s Manual for details.

Antenna282

(285,1)


S066-1. Interior lights................................................... 284

Map lights ..........................................................284Dome light..........................................................284Cargo area light..................................................285Rear gate light (if equipped)................................285OFF delay timer ..................................................286

6-2. Sun visors ....................................................... 286Sun visor extension plate ...................................286Vanity mirror.......................................................287Vanity mirror with light (if equipped) ...................287

6-3. Overhead console........................................... 2886-4. Storage compartment..................................... 288

Glove box...........................................................288Center console ...................................................289Cup holders........................................................289Bottle holders.....................................................289

6-5. Accessory power outlets ............................... 290Use with the cigarette lighter (dealer option) .......292

6-6. USB power supply.......................................... 292How to use the USB power supply......................293

6-7. Ashtray (dealer option) .................................. 2946-8. Floor mat ......................................................... 2946-9. Assist grip ....................................................... 295

6-10. Shopping bag hook.......................................2966-11. Convenience hook.........................................2966-12. Cargo area cover (if equipped) ....................297

Using the cover.................................................. 297To install the front part of the cover ................... 297To remove the front cover .................................. 298To remove the cover housing ............................. 298Stowage of the cargo area cover ........................ 298To install the cover housing ............................... 299

6-13. Cargo tie-down hooks...................................2996-14. Cargo upper hooks .......................................3006-15. Under-floor storage compartment

(if equipped) ..................................................3006-16. Front View Monitor (if equipped) .................301

How to access the Front View Monitor................ 302How to cancel the Front View Monitor ................ 302How to adjust the display contrast andbrightness ....................................................... 302

Range of image on screen.................................. 303Guiding line ....................................................... 304Handling of camera ............................................ 304

6-17. Rear View Camera .........................................305

Interior equipment

6

Interiorequipm

ent

(286,1)


6-1. Interior lightsS06AA

CAUTION

When leaving your vehicle, makesure the lights are turned off toavoid battery discharge.

& Map lightsS06AA06

1) Door interlock switch

To turn on the map light, push the lens.To turn it off, push the lens again.

! Automatic illuminationS06AA0603

When the door interlock switch is in the“DOOR” position, the map lights illuminateautomatically in the following cases.. Any of the doors other than the reargate is opened.. The doors are unlocked using thekeyless access function (if equipped).Refer to “Locking and unlocking by holdingthe access key fob” FP117.. The doors are unlocked using theremote keyless entry system. Refer to“Remote keyless entry system” FP131.. The ignition switch is turned from the“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-tion.

& Dome lightS06AA01

1) OFF2) DOOR3) ON

The dome light switch has the followingthree positions.

ON: The light remains on continuously.OFF: The light remains off.DOOR: The dome light illuminates auto-matically in the following cases.. Any of the doors or the rear gate isopened.. The doors or the rear gate are unlockedusing the keyless access function (ifequipped). Refer to “Locking and unlock-ing by holding the access key fob”FP117.

Interior lights284

(287,1)


. The doors or the rear gate are unlockedusing the remote keyless entry system.Refer to “Remote keyless entry system”FP131.. The ignition switch is turned from the“ACC” position to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-tion.

& Cargo area lightS06AA02

Cargo area light (models without rear gatelight)1) ON2) OFF3) DOOR

Cargo area light (models with rear gatelight)1) OFF2) DOOR3) ON

ON: The light remains on continuously.OFF: The light remains off.DOOR: The cargo area light will illuminateautomatically in the following case.. The rear gate is opened.

& Rear gate light (if equipped)S06AA04

Rear gate light1) OFF2) DOOR

OFF: The light remains off.DOOR: The rear gate light will illuminateautomatically in the following case.. The rear gate is opened.

– CONTINUED –

Interior lights 285

6

Interiorequipm

ent

(288,1)


& OFF delay timerS06AA07

The following lights have an automaticillumination function.. Dome light. Map light. Cargo area light. Rear gate light (if equipped)

When the interior light switch is set to the“DOOR” position, the light will automati-cally turn on and turn off depending on thelocking and unlocking of the doors, theopening and closing of the doors includingthe rear gate, as well as the position of theignition switch.

NOTEThe setting for the period of time inwhich the lights remain on (OFF delaytimer) can be changed by a SUBARUdealer. Contact your SUBARU dealerfor details. For models with the combi-nation meter display (color LCD), thesetting can also be changed by operat-ing the combination meter display(color LCD). For details, refer to “Vehi-cle Setting” FP201.

6-2. Sun visorsS06AC

To block out glare, swing down the visors.To use the sun visor at a side window,swing it down and move it sideways.

& Sun visor extension plateS06AC01

With the sun visor positioned over the sidewindow, you can use the sun visor exten-sion plate to prevent glare through the gapbetween the sun visor and center pillar. Touse the extension plate, pull it toward therear of the vehicle. When you havefinished using it, stow it by pushing ittoward the front of the vehicle.

Sun visors286

(289,1)


CAUTION

Do not pull out the extension platewith the sun visor positioned overthe windshield. The extension platewould obstruct your view of therearview mirror.

& Vanity mirrorS06AC03

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closedwhile the car is being driven to avoidbeing temporarily blinded by theglare of bright light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down thesun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.

& Vanity mirror with light (ifequipped)

S06AC02

CAUTION

Keep the vanity mirror cover closedwhile the car is being driven to avoidbeing distracted by the light.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down thesun visor and open the vanity mirror cover.The light beside the vanity mirror illumi-nates when the mirror cover is opened.

NOTEUse of the vanity mirror light for a longperiod of time while the engine is notrunning can cause battery discharge.

Sun visors 287

6

Interiorequipm

ent

(290,1)


6-3. Overhead consoleS06BC

To open the console, push on the lid lightlyand it will automatically open.

CAUTION

. Before driving, ensure that theoverhead console is closed.

. When your vehicle is parked inthe sun or on a warm day, theinside of the overhead consoleheats up. Avoid storing plastic orother heatvulnerable or flam-mable articles such as a lighterin the overhead console.

6-4. Storage compartmentS06AD

CAUTION

. Always keep the storage com-partment closed while driving toreduce the risk of injury in theevent of a sudden stop or anaccident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-ers with flammable or corrosiveliquids or any other dangerousitems in the storage compart-ment.

& Glove boxS06AD01

1) Rotate the key clockwise to lock.2) Rotate the key counterclockwise to un-

lock.

To open the glove box, pull the handle.To close it, push the lid firmly upward.

NOTE. The emergency key is directional. Ifthe key cannot be inserted, change thedirection that the grooved side is facingand insert it again.. For models with the “keyless accesswith push-button start system”, use theemergency key to lock or unlock theglove box.

Overhead console288

(291,1)


& Center consoleS06AD02

The center console box provides a storagespace.

The top of the console can be used as anarmrest.

& Cup holdersS06AD16

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a cup from the cupholder or put a cup in the holderwhile you are driving, as this maydistract you and lead to an acci-dent.

. Take care to avoid spills. Bev-erages, if hot, might scald youand/or your passengers. Spilledbeverages may also damage up-holstery or carpets.

. When a cup in the rear passen-ger’s cup holder contains a bev-erage, do not fold down the rearseatback. Otherwise, the bever-age could spill and, if the bev-erage is hot, it could scald youand/or your passengers.

Front passenger’s cup holderA dual cup holder is built into the centerconsole.

Rear seat’s cup holder (if equipped)A dual cup holder is built into the armrest.

& Bottle holdersS06AD17

CAUTION

. Do not pick up a bottle from thebottle holder or put a bottle in theholder while you are driving, asthis may distract you and lead toan accident.

. When placing a beverage in abottle holder, make sure it iscapped. Otherwise, the beveragecould spill when opening/closingthe door or while driving and, ifthe beverage is hot, it could scaldyou and/or your passengers.

– CONTINUED –

Storage compartment 289

6

Interiorequipm

ent

(292,1)


The bottle holder equipped on each doortrim can be used to hold beverage bottlesand other items.

6-5. Accessory power outletsS06AF

CAUTION

. Do not place any foreign objects,especially metal ones, such ascoins or aluminum foil, into theaccessory power outlet. Thatcould cause a short circuit. Al-ways put the cap on the acces-sory power outlet when it is not inuse.

. If the plug on your electric appli-ance is either too loose or tootight for the accessory poweroutlet, this can result in a poorcontact or cause the plug to getstuck. Only use plugs that fitproperly.

. Use of an electric appliance in theaccessory power outlet for a longperiod of time while the engine isnot running can cause batterydischarge.

. Before driving your vehicle, makesure that the plug and the cord onyour electrical appliance will notinterfere with shifting gears andoperating the accelerator andbrake pedals. If they do, do notuse the electrical appliance while

driving.

Electrical power (12 V DC) is available atany of the accessory power outlets whenthe ignition switch is in either the “ACC” or“ON” position. Accessory power outletsare located in the following places.

Power outlet below the climate controlpanel

Accessory power outlets290

(293,1)


Power outlet in the center console

Power outlet in the cargo areaYou can use an in-vehicle electrical appli-ance by connecting it to an outlet.The maximum power rating of an appli-ance that can be connected is 120 W.

CAUTION

. Do not attempt to use a cigarettelighter in the accessory poweroutlets.

. Use only electrical applianceswhich are designed for 12 V DC.The maximum power rating of anappliance that can be connectedis 120W. Do not use an appliancewhich exceeds the indicated wat-tage for each outlet.

. When using appliances con-nected to two outlets simulta-neously, the total power con-sumed by them must not exceed120 W. Overloading the acces-sory power outlet can cause ashort circuit. Do not use doubleadapters or more than one elec-trical appliance.

NOTEWhen the lid of the center console isclosed, an opening remains betweenthe center console and the lid to allowthe power outlet in the center consoleto be used. Pass the cord of theelectrical appliance through this open-ing.

– CONTINUED –

Accessory power outlets 291

6

Interiorequipm

ent

(294,1)


& Use with the cigarette lighter(dealer option)

S06AF01To use the accessory power outlet as acigarette lighter socket, purchase thecigarette lighter plug, which is an optionalaccessory. A cigarette lighter plug isavailable from your SUBARU dealer.The cigarette lighter operates only whenthe ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC”position.To use the cigarette lighter, push in theknob and wait a few moments. It willautomatically spring up when ready foruse.

WARNING

To avoid being burned, never graspthe lighter by the end with theheating element. Doing so couldresult in injury and could also da-mage the heating element.

CAUTION

. Do not hold the lighter pushed in,because it will overheat.

. The electrical power socket isoriginally designed to use a gen-uine SUBARU cigarette lighterplug. Do not use a non-genuine

cigarette lighter plug in the sock-et. Doing so may cause a short-circuit and overheating, resultingin a fire.

. If the socket is ever used for aplug-in accessory such as a cellphone, that may damage theportion of the socket’s internalmechanism that causes a cigar-ette lighter plug to “pop out” afterits lighter element is heated.Therefore, do not place a cigar-ette lighter plug in a socket thathas been used, even once, topower a plug-in accessory. Doingso may cause the plug to stickand overheat, creating a potentialfire hazard.

6-6. USB power supplyS06AY

CAUTION

. The specification of a USB term-inal that can be used is the A-type. If a different specification ofterminal is connected, powersupply or charging may not bepossible, or the device may mal-function.

. There is a risk that a connecteddevice may malfunction or datamay be damaged. The connec-tion of a device shall be per-formed at your responsibility.

. To avoid an electric shock or amalfunction, observe the follow-ing precautions.– Do not connect a USB hub.– Do not insert any metal or

other foreign objects into theUSB terminal.

– Do not spill water or otherliquid on the USB terminal.

. Be careful not to pull the con-nected cable. Doing so couldbreak the USB terminal and theconnected device.

USB power supply292

(295,1)


. If a device is connected for a longtime when the engine is notrunning, the battery may be dis-charged. Evenwhen the engine isrunning, we recommend that youdo not connect a device for anunnecessarily long time.

. Do not connect a malfunctioningdevice. Doing so may causesmoke and fire.

NOTE. The rated voltage of each USBterminal is DC 5 V/2.1 A (total 4.2 A).Before connecting a device, be sure toread the instruction manual of thedevice and check whether or not thisspecification of the output is supportedby the device. If a device that requirespower exceeding the maximum ratingis connected, power supply or chargingmay not be possible. Even if chargingcould be completed, the time requiredfor charging may be longer than whenthe genuine charger for that device isused.. Depending on the device, chargingmay be possible only when a specialcable is used. In this case, be sure toconnect the device using the specialcable.

. When a device that communicateswith a PC is connected, power supplyor charging may not be possible.. When connect a device for charging,disconnect the device promptly aftercharging is completed.

& How to use the USB powersupply

S06AY01

Front seat USB power supply (An audiodevice can be connected and used)

Console USB power supply (power supplyfunction only) (if equipped)

Use the USB terminal to use or charge anelectronic device.When using the terminal, open the USBpower supply cover. After use, close theUSB power supply cover.When the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or“ON” position, the power can be suppliedto the electronic device. Up to DC5V/2.1 Acan be supplied from each terminal (totalof 4.2 A).

USB power supply 293

6

Interiorequipm

ent

(296,1)


6-7. Ashtray (dealer option)S06AG

CAUTION

. Do not use ashtrays as wastereceptacles or leave a lightedcigarette in an ashtray. This couldcause a fire.

. Always extinguish matches andcigarettes before putting theminto the ashtray, and then closethe ashtray securely. If you keepthe ashtray open, the fire of thecigarette may spread to anothercigarette butt and start a fire.

. Do not put flammable material inthe ashtray.

. Do not leave a lot of cigarettebutts in the ashtray.

NOTEParticles of ash and tobacco will accu-mulate around the hinges of the ash-tray’s inner lid. Clean them off using atoothbrush or a similar narrow-endedimplement.

The portable ashtray can be installed ineach cup holder or bottle holder. For thelocations of the cup holders, refer to “Cupholders” FP289. For the locations of thebottle holders, refer to “Bottle holders”FP289.

When using the ashtray, open the lid of theashtray. Fully close the lid after using theashtray to help reduce residual smoke.

6-8. Floor matS06AJ

CAUTION

If the floor mat slips forward andinterferes with the movement of thepedals during driving, it could causean accident. Observe the followingprecautions to prevent the floor matfrom slipping forward.. Be sure to use a genuine

SUBARU floor mat or an equiva-lent designed with grommets inthe correct locations.

. Make sure that the driver’s floormat is placed in its proper loca-tion and is correctly secured onits retaining pins.

Ashtray (dealer option)294

(297,1)


. Do not use more than one floormat.

Retaining pins are located on the driver’sside floor.The floor mat should be properly securedusing the built-in grommets, by placing thegrommets over the pins and pushing themdownward.

6-9. Assist gripS06BD

1) Assist grip

The assist grip is to be held to support thebody of the passengers when they are inthe seat and the vehicle is moving.

WARNING

Do not hold the assist grip whengetting up from the seat. Holdingand pulling the assist grip in thewrong way could break the grip andpossibly cause injury.

CAUTION

Do not attach heavy objects to theassist grip. Doing so could break itand damage the object.

Assist grip 295

6

Interiorequipm

ent

(298,1)


6-10. Shopping bag hookS06AI

CAUTION

Do not hang items on the shoppingbag hook that weigh 6 lbs (3 kg) ormore.

A shopping bag hook is attached to eachside of the cargo area.

6-11. Convenience hookS06AX

CAUTION

. Do not hang items on the conve-nience hook that weigh 6 lbs (3kg) or more. Depending on theconditions of use (for example, inlow temperatures, etc.), the reargate may lower even with lighterloads. However, this is not amalfunction. Be careful not to hityour head or other body parts.

. When using the conveniencehook, do not try to close the reargate. Doing so may cause theitem on the hook to be jammed inthe rear gate and damaged. Re-move the item from the hookbefore closing the rear gate.

A convenience hook is attached to the reargate trim. When the rear gate is open, youcan hang a lantern, wet suit, etc. on thehook.

Shopping bag hook296

(299,1)


6-12. Cargo area cover (ifequipped)

S06AK

The cargo area cover is provided forcovering the cargo area and to protect itscontents from direct sunlight. This cover isdetachable to make room for additionalcargo.

& Using the coverS06AK01

To extend the cover, pull the end of thecover out of the housing, then insert itshooks into the catches as shown. Torewind it, unhook it from the catches andit will rewind automatically. You shouldhold on to the cover and guide it back intothe cover housing while it is rewinding.

WARNING

Do not place anything on the ex-tended cover. Putting excessiveweight on the extended cover canbreak it and an object on the covercould tumble forward in the event ofa sudden stop or collision. Thiscould cause serious injury.

CAUTION

Be careful not to scratch the reargate stays while extending and re-winding the cover. Scratches on thestays could cause leakage of gasfrom the stays, which may result intheir inability to hold the rear gateopen.

& To install the front part of thecover

S06AK08

CAUTION

For models with a reclining rearseatback, when reclining, move thefront part of the cover back so that itis not damaged.

1. Align the right side of the front coverwith the triangle mark before fixing thecover in place.2. Align the left side of the front cover withthe triangle mark before fixing the cover inplace.3. Push the front cover to the right sideand adjust the size of the bar as necessary.

– CONTINUED –

Cargo area cover 297

6

Interiorequipm

ent

(300,1)


& To remove the front coverS06AK09

1. Push the front cover to the right sideand shorten the bar.2. Remove the front cover.

& To remove the cover housingS06AK02

1. Rewind the cover.

2. Push the cover housing to the rightside and shorten it.3. Take it off the retainer.

& Stowage of the cargo areacover

S06AK04The cargo area cover can be stowed inunder the cargo floor.

1. Pull the strap to open the center part ofthe cargo floor lid, and then remove the lid.2. Remove the left and right parts of thecargo floor lid.

3. Stow the cover housing in the cargoarea end.

Cargo area cover298

(301,1)


& To install the cover housingS06AK05

1. Insert the protrusion located on theright end of the sleeve into the recess ofthe retainer.

2. Push the cover housing to the rightside and shorten the bar.3. Insert the other protrusion into therecess of the other retainer.

6-13. Cargo tie-down hooksS06AM

The cargo area is equipped with severaltie-down hooks so that cargo can besecured with a cargo net or ropes.When using the tie-down hooks, turn themdown out of the storing recesses.

CAUTION

The cargo tie-down hooks are de-signed only for securing light cargo.Never try to secure cargo that ex-ceeds the capacity of the hooks. Themaximum load capacity is 22 lbs (10kg) per hook.

Cargo tie-down hooks 299

6

Interiorequipm

ent

(302,1)


6-14. Cargo upper hooksS06BF

There are two hooks on the lining in thecargo area. Use them to hang or securelightweight objects when the vehicle isstopped.

WARNING

Do not hang anything on the hooksthat produces a flame. Flammablegas may fill the inside of the vehicleor cause a fire.

CAUTION

When using a hook, observe thefollowing precautions.. Do not drive with an object hang-

ing on a hook. There is a risk thatyou will not be able to see behindyou, or that an object may bepropelled when braking or start-ing suddenly, which could lead toan accident or injury.

. Do not hang heavy or large ob-jects on the hook.Maximum load capacity: 6 lbs (3kg)

. Do not use the hooks to securethe child restraint system.

. On hot, sunny days, do not leaveobjects hanging from the hooksfor a long time. If the inside of thecar becomes hot, the hook maybe deformed, and the hangingobjects may fall.

6-15. Under-floor storagecompartment (if equipped)

S06AN

NOTEThe shape of the storage compartmentmay be different depending on themodel.

The storage compartment is located underthe floor of the cargo area and can be usedto store small items. Pull the strap to openthe center part of the cargo floor lid, andthen remove the lid.

Cargo upper hooks300

(303,1)


CAUTION

. Always keep the lid of the storagecompartment closed while driv-ing to reduce the risk of injury inthe event of sudden stop or anaccident.

. Do not store spray cans, contain-ers with flammable or corrosiveliquids or any other dangerousitems in the storage compart-ment.

6-16. Front View Monitor (ifequipped)

S06BA

The image from the camera mountedinside the front grille is displayed in themulti-function display (color LCD). Thiseliminates blind spots and allows the driverto check the forward direction of bothsides.

WARNING

. Never rely on only the Front ViewMonitor when driving the vehicle.The image on the monitor screenmay be different from the actualsituation. If you drive the vehicleby viewing only the monitor im-age, a collision or an unexpected

accident may occur. When driv-ing the vehicle, always check thetraffic around the vehicle directlywith your eyes and the mirrors.

. Always operate the vehicle asyou would without the Front ViewMonitor.

. Donot use the Front ViewMonitorin the following situations.– You are driving on a dirt road

or a road covered in snow.– The camera malfunctions (e.g.

the lens or bracket is broken).. If the outside temperature is low,

the monitor screen may becomedark or the image may becomedim. In particular, the image of amoving object may be distortedor disappear from the screen.Youmust always check the trafficaround the vehicle directly withyour eyes when driving it.

– CONTINUED –

Front View Monitor 301

6

Interiorequipm

ent

(304,1)


& How to access the Front ViewMonitor

S06BA01

1) Front view monitor switch

To change over to the camera screen,perform either of the following operationswhen the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or“ON” position.. Press the front view monitor switch.. Shift the select lever from “R” to “D”.

& How to cancel the Front ViewMonitor

S06BA02

! Manual cancellationS06BA0201

. Press the front view monitor switch.

. Press the INFO button.

! Automatic cancellationS06BA0202

If any of the following conditions are met,the Front View Monitor is canceled auto-matically.After accessing the Front View Monitorby pressing the front view monitorswitch:. Approximately 3 minutes have passedsince the last operation.. The vehicle speed becomes 12.5 mph(20 km/h) or more*.. The select lever is shifted to the “P”position.. The parking brake is applied.*: The Front View Monitor can be activated

when pressing the front view monitor switch,regardless of the vehicle speed.

*: When the Front View Monitor is activated atspeeds of more than 12.5 mph (20 km/h), tocancel the Front View Monitor, the vehiclespeed needs to be decreased to less than12.5 mph (20 km/h) and then increased tomore than 12.5 mph (20 km/h).

After accessing the Front View Monitorusing the select lever:. Shift the select lever into the “P”position.. The vehicle speed becomes 5 mph (8km/h) or more.

. Approximately 9 seconds have passedsince the last operation.. The parking brake is applied.

& How to adjust the displaycontrast and brightness

S06BA06The contrast and brightness of the frontview monitor display can be adjusted. Fordetails, refer to “Camera settings”FP229.

Front View Monitor302

(305,1)


& Range of image on screenS06BA03

A) Traffic intersection with a poor visibilityview

B) Parking facing a wall1) Range of displayed image2) Obstacles (e.g., buildings, fences or

other vehicles)

WARNING

Because the range of the imagecaptured by the camera is limited,always check the traffic around thevehicle directly with your eyes whendriving the vehicle.

NOTE. The range of the displayed imagemay differ depending on the vehiclestatus or the road surface status.. Because the Front View Monitorsystem uses a specially designed lens,the sense of distance in the displayedimage is different from the actual dis-tance.. The camera imagemay be difficult toview in the following situations. This isnot a malfunction.

– Dark place (at night)– High or low temperature aroundthe lens– Water contacts lens or in highhumidity (rainy weather)– There are foreign materials (suchas mud) around the camera.– Sunlight or headlight beam di-rectly shines towards the cameralens.

. Under an artificial light such as afluorescent lamp, sodium-vapor lampor mercury lamp, the lighted portionmay look like it is flickering (flickerphenomenon).. While the display has cooled down,the image may leave traces or becomedarker than usual, causing a difficultyin viewing the screen. Always check thetraffic around the vehicle directly withyour eyes while driving the vehicle.. The following incidents should notbe deemed a malfunction.

– The camera lens may becomefoggy when the humidity is high ona rainy day.– The light from a vehicle or build-ing located ahead may be reflectedtowards the camera image whiledriving at night.– In a dark place or while driving atnight, the camera image may beadjusted to make noises less visi-ble. Therefore, the image may looklike a monochromatic image or theimage colors may differ from theactual colors. The camera imagemay be deteriorated in regard tosharpness at the center and fourcorners of the screen. This is not amalfunction.

– CONTINUED –

Front View Monitor 303

6

Interiorequipm

ent

(306,1)


& Guiding lineS06BA04

1) Guiding line2) Warning message

The guiding line that indicates the widthand the front end of your vehicle isdisplayed on the display.

& Handling of cameraS06BA05

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, the systemmaymalfunc-tion.. Do not apply any strong impact to

the camera such as banging it orhitting it with an object. Themounting angle may change.

. The camera unit is a waterproofstructure. Do not attempt to re-move, disassemble or modify theunit.

. Do not rub strongly or polish thecamera lens with a hard brush orabrasive compounds. The lensmay be scratched resulting in anadverse effect to the cameraimage.

. The camera lens is made of glassor plastic. Do not allow anyorganic solvent, body wax, oilfilm remover or glass coatingagent to become attached on thelens surface. If any becomesattached, remove it immediately.

. Do not expose the camera lens toany sudden temperature change,for example, spraying hot wateron it in cold weather.

. Do not apply the water jet of ahigh pressure washer to the cam-era or the surrounding area whencleaning the vehicle. The impactby the strongwater pressuremaycause the camera to come off.Also, water may enter inside thecamera and cause a malfunction.

. If the camera is exposed to anyimpact, itmay lead tomalfunction

of the camera. Have the camerainspected by your SUBARU deal-er as soon as possible.

. Do not use a steam cleaner underany circumstances. Some typesof steam cleaners inject hotsteam.

. The camera surface may be da-maged by a flying stone.

NOTEIf the camera lens is contaminated, nosharp image is available. When thecamera is contaminated with waterdrops, snow or mud, wash it with waterand wipe away any moisture with a softcloth. If it heavily gets dirty, wash it witha neutral detergent.

Front View Monitor304

(307,1)


6-17. Rear View CameraS06AW

Refer to the separate navigation/audioOwner’s Manual.

Rear View Camera 305

6

Interiorequipm

ent

(308,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(309,1)


S077-1. Fuel .................................................................. 310

Fuel requirements...............................................310Fuel filler lid and cap .......................................... 311

7-2. State emission testing (U.S. only)................. 3147-3. Preparing to drive........................................... 3167-4. Starting and stopping the engine (models

without push-button start system) .............. 316Starting engine ...................................................317Stopping the engine ...........................................318Steering lock ......................................................318

7-5. Starting and stopping engine (modelswith push-button start system).................... 319Safety precautions..............................................319Operating range for push-button start system.....319Starting engine ...................................................319Stopping engine .................................................320When access key fob does not operateproperly............................................................321

Steering lock ......................................................3217-6. Remote engine start system (dealer

option)............................................................ 322Remote engine starter transceiver (fob) ..............322Alternate operation method for models with“keyless access with push-button startsystem”............................................................326

Entering the vehicle while it is running viaremote start (models without “keyless accesswith push-button start system”) ........................326

Entering the vehicle while it is running viaremote start (models with “keyless accesswith push-button start system”) ........................327

Entering the vehicle following remote enginestart shutdown................................................. 327

Pre-heating or pre-cooling the interior ofthe vehicle ....................................................... 327

Remote transmitter program (Remote enginestarter transceiver) ........................................... 327

System maintenance .......................................... 328Certification for remote engine starter ................ 329

7-7. Continuously variable transmission ..............330Continuously variable transmission features ...... 330Select lever ........................................................ 331Selection of manual mode (if equipped).............. 333Selection of “L” (if equipped) ............................. 334Shift lock function.............................................. 335Driving tips ........................................................ 336

7-8. SI-DRIVE...........................................................337Intelligent (I) mode ............................................. 337Sport (S) mode (if equipped) .............................. 337Sport Sharp (S#) mode (if equipped)................... 338SI-DRIVE switches.............................................. 338

7-9. Power steering.................................................339Power steering warning light .............................. 339Power steering system features ......................... 339

7-10. Braking...........................................................340Braking tips ....................................................... 340Brake system..................................................... 340Disc brake pad wear warning indicators ............. 341

7-11. ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)......................342ABS self-check .................................................. 342ABS warning light .............................................. 342

Starting and operating

7

Startingand

operating

(310,1)


7-12. Electronic Brake Force Distribution(EBD) system ................................................ 343If EBD system malfunctions................................343

7-13. Vehicle Dynamics Control system .............. 344Safety precautions..............................................344System features..................................................345Vehicle Dynamics Control system monitor ..........345Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF switch.................345

7-14. X-MODE (if equipped)................................... 347To activate/deactivate X-MODE............................348Hill descent control function ...............................351

7-15. Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)(U.S.-spec. models)....................................... 352

7-16. Parking your vehicle..................................... 354Electronic parking brake .....................................354Parking tips ........................................................359

7-17. Auto Start Stop system................................ 360System operation ...............................................360Displaying the Auto Start Stop system status .....365System warning..................................................365

7-18. Hill start assist system................................. 3657-19. Cruise control (if equipped)......................... 367

To set cruise control...........................................367To temporarily cancel the cruise control .............368To turn off the cruise control ..............................369To change the cruising speed .............................369Cruise control indicator light ..............................371Cruise control set indicator light.........................371

7-20. BSD/RCTA (if equipped)................................371System features ................................................. 371System operation ............................................... 374BSD/RCTA approach indicator light/warningbuzzer.............................................................. 375

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator light ............................ 377BSD/RCTA warning light..................................... 377BSD/RCTA OFF switch ....................................... 378Certification for the BSD/RCTA ........................... 378Handling of radar sensors .................................. 380

7-21. Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)system (if equipped) .....................................380

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) systemoverview .......................................................... 381

Operating conditions.......................................... 383Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) systemoperation ......................................................... 385

Canceling the Reverse Automatic Braking(RAB) system operation ................................... 388

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) systemON/OFF setting ................................................ 389

RAB warning light .............................................. 390Handling of the sonar sensors ........................... 390

7-22. Driver Monitoring System (if equipped) ......391User recognition function................................... 395Inattentive/drowsy driving warning ..................... 397Driver Monitoring System indicator/warning ....... 399Using the Driver Monitoring System ................... 399Registering and deleting a user .......................... 401


(311,1)


Registering and deleting driver positionpersonalization .................................................401

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF settings .........402Gesture control ..................................................403

Certification for Driver Monitoring System(U.S.-spec. models) .......................................... 405

How to get the source code using the opensource ............................................................. 406


7

Startingand

operating

(312,1)


7-1. FuelS07AA

CAUTION

. Use of a fuel which is low inquality or use of an inappropriatefuel additive may cause damageto the engine and/or fuel system.

. Some gas stations, particularlythose in high altitude areas, offerfuels posted as regular octanegasoline with an octane ratingbelow 87 AKI (90 RON). Use ofthose fuels is not recommended.

& Fuel requirementsS07AA01

The engine is designed to operate usingunleaded gasoline with an octane ratingof 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher.! Mexico only

S07AA0121Add a bottle of genuine SUBARU fueladditive to the fuel every 9,000 miles(15,000 km). Refer to an authorizedSUBARU dealer for details.! Fuel octane rating

S07AA0103Using a gasoline with a lower octane ratingcan cause persistent and heavy knocking,which can damage the engine. Do not beconcerned if your vehicle sometimes

knocks lightly when you drive up a hill orwhen you accelerate. Contact yourSUBARU dealer if you use a fuel with thespecified octane rating and your vehicleknocks heavily or persistently.

! RONS07AA010301

This octane rating is the Research OctaneNumber.

! AKIS07AA010302

This octane rating is the average of theResearch Octane and Motor Octane num-bers and is commonly referred to as theAnti Knock Index (AKI).! Unleaded gasoline

S07AA0104The neck of the fuel filler pipe is designedto accept only an unleaded gasoline fillernozzle. Under no circumstances shouldleaded gasoline be used because it willdamage the emission control system andmay impair driveability and fuel economy.! Reformulated gasoline

S07AA0128SUBARU supports the use of reformulatedgasoline when available. Reformulatedgasoline has been blended to burn morecleanly and reduce vehicle emissions.! MMT

S07AA0106Some gasoline contains an octane-enhan-cing additive called MMT (Methylcyclo-pentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). If

you use such fuels, your emission controlsystem performance may deteriorate andthe CHECK ENGINE warning light/Mal-function indicator light may turn on. If thishappens, return to your authorizedSUBARU dealer for service. If it is deter-mined that the condition is caused by thetype of fuel used, repairs may not becovered by your warranty.! Gasoline for cleaner air

S07AA0107Your use of gasoline with detergent ad-ditives will help prevent deposits fromforming in your engine and fuel system.This helps keep your engine in tune andyour emission control system workingproperly, and is a way of doing your partfor cleaner air. If you continuously use ahigh-quality fuel with the proper detergentand other additives, you should neverneed to add any fuel system cleaningagents to your fuel tank.

Many gasolines are now blended withmaterials called oxygenates. Use of thesefuels can also help keep the air cleaner.Oxygenated blend fuels, such as ethanol(ethyl or grain alcohol) may be used in yourvehicle, but should contain no more than10% ethanol for the proper operation ofyour SUBARU.

Do not use any gasoline that containsmore than 10%ethanol, including from any

Fuel310

(313,1)


pump labeled, E15, E30, E50 or E85(which are only some examples of fuelcontaining more than 10% ethanol).

In addition, some gasoline suppliers arenow producing reformulated gasolines,which are designed to reduce vehicleemissions. SUBARU approves the use ofreformulated gasoline.

If you are not sure what the fuel contains,you should ask your service station op-erators if their gasolines contain deter-gents and oxygenates and if they havebeen reformulated to reduce vehicle emis-sions.

As additional guidance, only use fuelssuited for your vehicle as explained in thefollowing description.. Fuel should be unleaded and have anoctane rating no lower than that specifiedin this manual.. Methanol (methyl or wood alcohol) issometimes mixed with unleaded gasoline.Methanol can be used in your vehicleONLY if it does not exceed 5% of the fuelmixture AND if it is accompanied bysufficient quantities of the proper cosol-vents and corrosion inhibitors required toprevent damage to the fuel system. Do notuse fuel containing methanol EXCEPTunder these conditions.

. If undesirable driveability problems areexperienced and you suspect they may befuel related, try a different brand of gaso-line before seeking service at yourSUBARU dealer.. Fuel system damage or driveabilityproblems which result from the use ofimproper fuel are not covered under theSUBARU Limited Warranty.

CAUTION

Do not let fuel spill on the exteriorsurfaces of the vehicle. Because fuelmay damage the paint, be sure towipe off any spilled fuel quickly.Paint damage caused by spilled fuelis not covered under the SUBARULimited Warranty.

& Fuel filler lid and capS07AA02

! Locations of the fuel filler lidS07AA0202

! RefuelingS07AA0201

Only one person should be involved inrefueling. Do not allow others to approachthe area of the vehicle near the fuel fillerpipe while refueling is in progress.Be sure to observe any other precautionsthat are posted at the service station.

1. Stop the vehicle and turn the ignitionswitch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position andturn off all the other electrical components.2. To unlock the fuel filler lid, perform oneof the operations below.

– Press the unlock/disarm button onthe key fob.

– CONTINUED –

Fuel 311

7

Startingand

operating

(314,1)


– Press the unlock side of the powerdoor locking switch.

3. Push the rear side of the fuel filler lid.4. The fuel filler lid opens automatically.Open it further by hand.

WARNING

Before opening the fuel filler cap,first touch the vehicle body or ametal portion of the fuel pump orsimilar object to discharge any sta-tic electricity that may be present onyour body. If your body is carryingan electrostatic charge, there is apossibility that an electric sparkcould ignite the fuel, which couldburn you. To avoid acquiring a newstatic electric charge, do not getback into the vehicle while refuelingis in progress.

1) Open2) Close

5. Remove the fuel filler cap by turning itslowly counterclockwise.

WARNING

. Gasoline vapor is highly flam-mable. Before refueling, alwaysturn the ignition switch to the“LOCK”/“OFF” position first andthen close all vehicle doors andwindows. Make sure that thereare no lighted cigarettes, openflames or electrical sparks in theadjacent area. Only handle fueloutdoors. Quickly wipe up anyspilled fuel.

. When opening the cap, grasp itfirmly and turn it slowly to the left.Do not remove the cap quickly.Fuel may be under pressure andspray out of the fuel filler neck,especially in hot weather. If youhear a hissing sound while youare removing the cap, wait for thesound to stop and then slowlyopen the cap to prevent fuel fromspraying out and creating a firehazard.

6. Set the fuel filler cap on the cap holderinside the fuel filler lid.

Fuel312

(315,1)


WARNING

. When refueling, insert the fuelnozzle securely into the fuel fillerpipe. If the nozzle is lifted or notfully inserted, its automatic stop-ping mechanism may not func-tion, causing fuel to overflow thetank and creating a fire hazard.

. Stop refueling when the auto-matic stop mechanism on thefuel nozzle activates. If you con-tinue to add fuel, temperaturechanges or other conditionsmay cause fuel to overflow fromthe tank and create a fire hazard.

7. Stop filling the tank after the fuel fillerpump automatically stops. Do not add anymore fuel.8. Put the cap back on and turn it clock-wise until you hear a clicking noise. Becertain not to catch the tether under thecap while tightening.

CAUTION

Make sure that the cap is tighteneduntil it clicks to prevent fuel spillagein the event of an accident.

9. Close the fuel filler lid completely.

CAUTION

If you spill any fuel on the paintedsurface, rinse it off immediately.Otherwise, the painted surfacecould be damaged.

NOTE. You will see the “ ” sign in the fuelgauge. This indicates that the fuel fillerdoor (lid) is located on the right side ofthe vehicle.. If the fuel filler cap is not tighteneduntil it clicks or if the tether is caughtunder the cap, the CHECK ENGINEwarning light/malfunction indicatorlight may illuminate. Refer to “CHECKENGINE warning light/Malfunction in-dicator light” FP173.. To lock the fuel filler lid, perform oneof the operations below. However ifthese operations are performed whenthe fuel filler lid is open, the fuel filler lidwill not lock when it is subsequentlyclosed.

– Press the lock/arm button on thekey fob.– Press the lock side of the powerdoor locking switch.

. When the doors are locked or un-locked using the automatic door lock

system, the fuel filler lid will be lockedor unlocked at the same time.

CAUTION

. Never add any cleaning agents tothe fuel tank. The addition of acleaning agent may cause da-mage to the fuel system.

. After refueling, turn the cap to theright until it clicks to ensure thatit is fully tightened. If the cap isnot securely tightened, fuel mayleak out while the vehicle is beingdriven or fuel spillage could oc-cur in the event of an accident,creating a fire hazard.

. Do not let fuel spill on the exteriorsurfaces of the vehicle. Becausefuel may damage the paint, besure to wipe off any spilled fuelquickly. Paint damage caused byspilled fuel is not covered underthe SUBARU Limited Warranty.

. Always use a genuine SUBARUfuel filler cap. If you use thewrong cap, it may not fit or haveproper venting and your fuel tankand emission control systemmay be damaged. It could alsolead to fuel spillage and a fire.

– CONTINUED –

Fuel 313

7

Startingand

operating

(316,1)


. Immediately put fuel in the tankwhenever the low fuel warninglight illuminates. Engine misfiresas a result of an empty tank couldcause damage to the engine.Continuing to operate your vehi-cle at an extremely low fuel levelmay result in a reduction ofengine performance.

! If the fuel filler lid cannot be openedS07AA0203

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened due tomalfunction or a dead battery, it can beopened from the cargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at the right-side of the cargo area trim using flat-headscrewdriver.

1) Clip

2. Remove the orange knob from the clip.

3. Pull the orange knob to unlock the fuelfiller lid.

7-2. State emission testing(U.S. only)

S07AB

WARNING

Only use a four-wheel dynamometerwhen testing an All-Wheel Drivemodel.Testing of an AWD model mustNEVER be performed on a singletwo-wheel dynamometer. Attempt-ing to do so will result in uncon-trolled vehicle movement and maycause an accident or injuries topersons nearby.

CAUTION

. At state inspection time, remem-ber to tell your inspection orservice station in advance not toplace your SUBARU AWD vehicleon a two-wheel dynamometer.Otherwise, serious transmissiondamage will result.

. Resultant vehicle damage due toimproper testing is not coveredunder the SUBARU Limited War-ranty and is the responsibility ofthe state inspection program or

State emission testing (U.S. only)314

(317,1)


its contractors or licensees.

California and a number of federal stateshave Inspection/Maintenance programs toinspect your vehicle’s emission controlsystem. If your vehicle does not pass thistest, some states may deny renewal ofyour vehicle’s registration.

Your vehicle is equipped with a computerthat monitors the performance of theengine’s emission control system. Certi-fied emission inspectors will inspect theOn-Board Diagnostic (OBDII) system aspart of the state emission inspectionprocess. The OBDII system is designedto detect engine and transmission pro-blems that might cause the vehicle emis-sions to exceed allowable limits. OBDIIinspections apply to all 1996 model yearand newer passenger cars and trucks.Over 30 states plus the District of Colum-bia have implemented emission inspectionof the OBDII system.. The inspection of the OBDII systemconsists of a visual operational check ofthe “CHECK ENGINE” warning light/mal-function indicator light (MIL) and an ex-amination of the OBDII system with anelectronic scan tool.. A vehicle passes the OBDII systeminspection if proper operation of the“CHECK ENGINE” warning light is ob-

served, there are no stored diagnostictrouble codes, and the OBDII readinessmonitors are all complete.. A vehicle fails the OBDII inspection ifthe “CHECK ENGINE” warning light is notproperly operating (light is illuminated or isnot working due to faulty LED [LightEmitting Diode]) or there is one or morediagnostic trouble codes stored in thevehicle’s computer.. A state emission inspection may reject(not pass or fail) a vehicle if the number ofOBDII system readiness monitors “NOTREADY” is greater than one. If thevehicle’s battery has been recently re-placed or disconnected, the OBDII systeminspection may indicate that the vehicle isnot ready for the emission test. Under thiscondition, the vehicle driver should beinstructed to drive his/her vehicle for afew days to reset the readiness monitorsand return for an emission re-inspection.. Owners of rejected or failing vehiclesshould contact their SUBARU dealer forservice.

Some states still use dynamometers intheir emission inspection program. Adynamometer is a treadmill or roller-liketesting device that allows your vehicle’swheels to turn while the vehicle remains inone place. Prior to your vehicle being put

on a dynamometer, tell your emissioninspector not to place your SUBARUAWD vehicle on a two-wheel dynam-ometer. Otherwise, serious transmis-sion damage will result.The U.S. Environmental ProtectionAgency (EPA) and states using two-wheeldynamometers in their emission testingprogram have EXEMPTED SUBARUAWD vehicles from the portion of thetesting program that involves a two-wheeldynamometer. There are some states thatuse four-wheel dynamometers in theirtesting program. When properly used, thisequipment should not damage a SUBARUAWD vehicle.

Under no circumstances should the rearwheels be jacked off the ground, norshould the driveshaft be disconnected inan attempt to bypass AWD for stateemission testing. An AWD vehicle mustbe tested using an AWD dynamometerwith all 4 wheels driven and loaded.

State emission testing (U.S. only) 315

7

Startingand

operating

(318,1)


7-3. Preparing to driveS07AC

You should perform the following checksand adjustments every day before youstart driving.1. Check that all windows, mirrors, andlights are clean and unobstructed.2. Check the appearance and conditionof the tires. Also check tires for properinflation.3. Look under the vehicle for any sign ofleaks.4. Check that no small animals enter theengine compartment.5. Check that the hood and rear gate arefully closed.6. Check the adjustment of the seat.7. Check the adjustment of the inside andoutside mirrors.8. Fasten your seatbelt. Check that yourpassengers have fastened their seatbelts.9. Check the operation of the warningand indicator lights when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position.10. Check the gauges, indicator and warn-ing lights after starting the engine.

CAUTION

Trapping small animals in the cool-ing fan and belts of the engine mayresult in a malfunction. Check thatno small animal enters the enginecompartment or under the vehiclebefore starting the engine.

NOTE. Engine oil, engine coolant, brakefluid, washer fluid and other fluid levelsshould be checked daily, weekly or atfuel stops.. When towing a trailer, refer to “Trai-ler hitch (dealer option)” FP423.

7-4. Starting andstopping theengine (modelswithout push-button start system)

S07BD

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter motorcontinuously for more than 10 sec-onds. If the engine fails to start afteroperating the starter for 5 to 10seconds, wait for 10 seconds ormore before trying again.

NOTEIt may be difficult to start the enginewhen the battery has been discon-nected and reconnected (for mainte-nance or other purposes). This diffi-culty is caused by the electronicallycontrolled throttle’s self-diagnosisfunction. To overcome it, keep theignition switch in the “ON” positionfor approximately 10 seconds beforestarting the engine.

Preparing to drive316

(319,1)


& Starting engineS07BD01

! General precautions when startingengine

S07BD0105

WARNING

. Never start the engine from out-side the vehicle (except whenusing the remote engine startsystem). It may result in an acci-dent.

. Do not leave the engine runningin locations with poor ventilation,such as a garage and indoors.The exhaust gas may enter thevehicle or indoors, and it mayresult in carbon monoxide poi-soning.

. Do not start the engine near dryfoliage, paper, or other flammablesubstances. The exhaust pipeand exhaust emissions can cre-ate a fire hazard at high tempera-tures.

CAUTION

. If the engine is stopped whiledriving, the catalyst may over-heat and burn.

. When starting the engine, be sureto sit in the driver’s seat (exceptwhen using the remote enginestart system).

NOTE. Avoid rapid racing and rapid accel-eration immediately after the enginehas started.. For a short time after the engine hasstarted, the engine speed is kept high.When the warm-up is completed, theengine speed lowers automatically.. On rare occasions, it may be difficultto start the engine depending on thefuel and the usage condition (repeateddriving of a distance in which theengine has not warmed up sufficiently).In such a case, it is recommended thatyou change to a different brand of fuel.. On rare occasions, transient knock-ing may be heard from the engine whenthe accelerator is operated rapidly suchas a rapid start-up and a rapid accel-eration. This is not a malfunction.. The engine starts more easily whenthe headlights, air conditioner and rearwindow defogger are turned off.. Do not shift the select lever while thestarter is cranking.1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.3. Shift the select lever to the “P” or “N”position (preferably the “P” position).The starter motor will only operate whenthe select lever is at the “P” or “N” position.4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position and check the operation of thewarning and indicator lights. Refer to“Warning and indicator” FP168.5. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”position without depressing the accelera-tor pedal. Release the key immediatelyafter the engine has started.

If the engine does not start, try thefollowing procedure.

(1) Turn the ignition switch to the“LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for atleast 10 seconds. After checking thatthe parking brake is firmly set, turn theignition switch to the “START” positionwhile depressing the accelerator pedalslightly (approximately a quarter of thefull stroke). Release the acceleratorpedal as soon as the engine starts.(2) If this fails to start the engine, turnthe ignition switch back to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and wait for at least 10seconds. Then fully depress the accel-erator pedal and turn the ignitionswitch to the “START” position. If the

– CONTINUED –

Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system) 317

7

Startingand

operating

(320,1)


engine starts, quickly release the ac-celerator pedal.(3) If this fails to start the engine, turnthe ignition switch again to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position. After waiting for 10seconds or longer, turn the ignitionswitch to the “START” position withoutdepressing the accelerator pedal.(4) If the engine still does not start,contact your nearest SUBARU dealerfor assistance.

6. Confirm that all warning and indicatorlights have turned off after the engine hasstarted. The fuel injection system auto-matically lowers the idle speed as theengine warms up.

While the engine is warming up,make surethat the select lever is in the “P” or “N”position and that the parking brake isapplied.

CAUTION

If you restart the engine while thevehicle is moving, shift the selectlever into the “N” position. Do notattempt to place the select lever of amoving vehicle into the “P” position.

& Stopping the engineS07BD02

The ignition switch should be turned offonly when the vehicle is stopped and theengine is idling.

WARNING

Do not stop the engine when thevehicle is moving. This will causeloss of power to the power steeringand the brake booster, making steer-ing and braking more difficult. Itcould also result in accidental acti-vation of the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-tion on the ignition switch, causingthe steering wheel to lock.

& Steering lockS07BD07

After stopping the engine and the key isremoved from ignition switch, the steeringwheel will be locked due to the steeringlock function.When the engine is restarted, the steeringlock will be automatically released.! When the steering lock cannot be

releasedS07BD0701

When you cannot unlock the steeringwheel, perform the following steps.1. Check that the parking brake is ap-plied.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.3. Check that the select lever is set in the“P” position.4. Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position while turning the steering wheelleft and right.

If you cannot unlock the steering wheel bydoing the steps, contact your nearestSUBARU dealer.

Starting and stopping the engine (models without push-button start system)318

(321,1)


7-5. Starting and stoppingengine (models with push-button start system)

S07BE

& Safety precautionsS07BE06

Refer to “Safety precautions” FP114.

& Operating range for push-button start system

S07BE01Refer to “Operating range for push-buttonstart system” FP162.

& Starting engineS07BE03

WARNING

. There are some general precau-tions when starting the engine.Carefully read the precautionsdescribed in “Starting engine”FP317.

. If the indicator on the push-but-ton ignition switch flashes ingreen after the engine hasstarted, never drive the vehicle.The steering is still locked, and itmay result in an accident.

CAUTION

. When the operation indicator onthe push-button ignition switch isflashing in orange, theremay be amalfunction with the vehicle.Contact a SUBARU dealer imme-diately.

. If the indicator on the push-but-ton ignition switch is flashing ingreen after the engine hasstarted, it means that the steeringis still locked. Depress the brakepedal while moving the steeringwheel to the right and left, andpress the push-button ignitionswitch.

. Do not continue pushing thepush-button ignition switch formore than 10 seconds. Doing socould cause a malfunction. If theengine does not start, stop push-ing the push-button ignitionswitch. Instead, press the push-button ignition switch withoutdepressing the brake pedal toswitch the power status to“OFF”.Wait 10 seconds, and thenpush the push-button ignitionswitch to start the engine.

NOTE. For a short time after the engine hasstarted, the engine speed is kept high.When the warm-up is completed, theengine speed lowers automatically.. When the push-button ignitionswitch is pressed while depressingthe brake pedal, the engine starteroperates for a maximum of 10 seconds.After starting the engine, the starterstops automatically.. When the push-button ignitionswitch is pressed while depressingthe brake pedal, the engine can bestarted regardless of the status of thepush-button ignition switch.. If the security indicator light illumi-nates when you attempt to start theengine but the engine does not start,press the push-button ignition switchto switch the power to “OFF” and thentry to start the engine again.. If the engine does not start, press thepush-button ignition switch withoutdepressing the brake pedal to switchthe power to “OFF”. Then, while de-pressing the brake pedal more force-fully, press the push-button ignitionswitch.. The engine start proceduresmay notfunction depending on the radio waveconditions around the vehicle. In such

– CONTINUED –

Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) 319

7

Startingand

operating

(322,1)


a case, refer to “Starting engine”FP452.. It may be difficult to start the enginewhen the battery has been discon-nected and reconnected (for mainte-nance or other purposes). This diffi-culty is caused by the electronicallycontrolled throttle’s self-diagnosisfunction. To overcome it, keep theignition switch in the “ON” positionfor approximately 10 seconds beforestarting the engine.. If the vehicle battery is discharged,the steering cannot be unlocked.Charge the battery.. Do not shift the select lever while thestarter is cranking.


When the push-button ignition switch ispressed while depressing the brake pedal,the engine will start. The starting proce-dure for the engine is as follows.1. Carry the access key fob, and sit in thedriver’s seat.2. Apply the parking brake.3. Shift the select lever into the “P”position. The engine can also start whenthe select lever is in the “N” position,however, for safety reasons, start in the “P”position.4. Depress the brake pedal until theoperation indicator on the push-buttonignition switch turns green. When startingwith the select lever in the “N” position, theindicator does not turn green.5. While depressing the brake pedal,press the push-button ignition switch.

NOTE. While pressing the select lever but-ton in, the indicator on the push-buttonignition switch will not turn green evenwhen the select lever is in the “P”position.. In case the engine does not start bythe normal engine start procedure,move the select lever to the “P” posi-tion, and switch the power to “ACC”.Depress the brake pedal, and press the

push-button ignition switch for at least15 seconds. The engine may start. Onlyuse this engine start procedure in caseof emergency.. When the engine is not started, thebrake pedal may feel stiff. In such acase, depress the brake pedal moreforcefully than usual. Check that theoperation indicator on the push-buttonignition switch turns green, and pressthe push-button ignition switch to startthe engine.

& Stopping engineS07BE04

1. Stop the vehicle completely.2. Move the select lever to the “P”position.3. Press the push-button ignition switch.The engine will stop, and the power will beswitched off.

WARNING

. Do not touch the push-buttonignition switch during driving.When the push-button ignitionswitch is operated as follows,the engine will stop.– The switch is pressed and heldfor 2 seconds or longer.

– The switch is pressed briefly 3

Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system)320

(323,1)


times or more in succession.When the engine stops, the brakebooster will not function. A great-er foot pressure will be requiredon the brake pedal.The power steering system willnot operate either. A greater forcewill be required to steer, and itmay result in an accident.

. If the engine stops during driving,do not operate the push-buttonignition switch or open any of thedoors until the vehicle is stoppedin a safe location. It is dangerousbecause the steering lockmay beactivated. Stop the vehicle in asafe place, and contact aSUBARU dealer immediately.

CAUTION

. Do not stop the engine while theselect lever is in a position otherthan the “P” position.

. If the engine is stopped while theselect lever is in a position otherthan the “P” position, the powerwill be in “ACC”. If the vehicle isleft in this condition, the batterymay be discharged.

NOTE. If you press the push-button ignitionswitch while driving, the emergencyengine stop interrupt screen alerts thedriver bymessages on the combinationmeter display (color LCD) and beeps.. Although you can stop the engine byoperating the push-button ignitionswitch, do not stop the engine duringdriving except in an emergency.


S07BE05Refer to “Access key fob – if access keyfob does not operate properly” FP451.

& Steering lockS07BE07

After stopping the engine and any doorincluding the rear gate is opened, thesteering wheel will be locked due to thesteering lock function.When the engine is restarted, the steeringlock will be automatically released.! When the steering lock cannot be

releasedS07BE0701


When you cannot restart the engine due tothe steering lock, check the status ofoperation indicator and perform the follow-ing steps.

– CONTINUED –

Starting and stopping engine (models with push-button start system) 321

7

Startingand

operating

(324,1)


! Operation indicator flashing ingreen

S07BE070101

1. Check that the select lever is set in the“P” position.2. Depress the brake pedal and keep it.3. Press the push-button ignition switchwhile turning the steering wheel left andright.

! Operation indicator flashing inorange

S07BE070102

There may be amalfunction in the steeringlock function. Immediately contact yournearest SUBARU dealer.

7-6. Remote engine startsystem (dealer option)

S07AZ

WARNING

. There are some general precau-tions when starting the engine.Carefully read the precautionsdescribed in “General precau-tions when starting engine”FP317.

. Donot remote start a vehicle in anenclosed environment (e.g.closed garage). Prolonged opera-tion of a motor vehicle in anenclosed environment can causea harmful build-up of carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide isharmful to your health. Exposureto high levels of carbon monox-ide can cause headaches, dizzi-ness or in extreme cases uncon-sciousness and/or death.

The remote engine start system allows youto start the engine from outside the vehicle.In addition, the remote engine start systemcan activate the heater or air conditioner,providing you with a comfortable cabinupon entry. For more details, refer to theOwner’s Manual supplement for the re-

mote engine start system.

NOTE. The length of time for which it isacceptable to allow the engine toremain idling may be bound by locallaws and regulations. Check the localrules when using the remote enginestart system.. When taking your vehicle in forservice, it is recommended that youinform the service personnel that yourvehicle is equipped with a remoteengine start system.

& Remote engine starter trans-ceiver (fob)

S07AZ21

1) Fob button

Remote engine start system (dealer option)322

(325,1)


! Starting the engineS07AZ2101

NOTEAll vehicle doors (including rear gate)and the engine hood must be closedprior to activating the remote enginestart system. Any open entry point willprevent starting or cause the engine tostop.

The remote engine start system is acti-vated by pressing the fob button on yourremote engine starter transceiver (fob)twice within 3 seconds. If the fob is withinoperating range of the system and the startrequest is received, the following willoccur.. The fob flashes and beeps once.. The horn sounds once.. The side marker lights, tail lights, andparking lights flash once.

If the fob is not within range (the user is toofar away from the vehicle), the fob willindicate two long flashes without beeping.

The system will check certain safetypreconditions before starting, and if allconditions are met, the engine will startwithin 5 seconds. After the engine starts,the following will occur.. The fob flashes and beeps twice.. The horn sounds once.

. The side marker lights, tail lights, andparking lights flash once.

While the engine is idling via the remoteengine start system, the following willoccur.. The side marker lights, tail lights, andparking lights remain illuminated.. The fob button flashes once every 3seconds.. The power windows are disabled.

If the engine turns over but does not start(or starts and stalls) the remote enginestart system will power off and thenattempt to start the engine 3 additionaltimes. The system will not attempt torestart the engine if it determines a vehiclemalfunction is preventing starting. If theengine does not start after 3 additionalattempts, the remote engine start requestwill be aborted.! Stopping the engine

S07AZ2102Press and hold the fob button for at least 2seconds to stop the engine. The fob willflash and beep three times, indicating theengine has stopped. If the stop request isnot received (for example, if the user is toofar away from the vehicle), the fob willcontinue to flash once every 3 seconds.The system will automatically stop theengine after 15 minutes.

! Remote start safety featuresS07AZ2103

For safety and security reasons, theremote engine start system will preventstarting (or stop the engine if running) andsound the horn twice if any of the followingconditions is detected. In addition, the fobwill flash and beep 3 times.. The total run-time has exceeded 20minutes.. The brake pedal is depressed.. A key is in the ignition switch.. The engine hood is open.. The engine idle speed exceeds 3,500rpm.. The security alarm is triggered.. The select lever is not in the “P”position.

If the system detects any door (includingthe rear gate) open during operation, it willprevent starting or stop the engine, andsound the horn and flash side markerlights, tail lights, and parking lights 6 times.

In addition to the items above, if thevehicle’s engine management systemdetermines there is a safety risk due to avehicle-related problem, the vehicle willpower down and the horn will sound 3times.

– CONTINUED –

Remote engine start system (dealer option) 323

7

Startingand

operating

(326,1)


NOTE. If the alarm system is armed at thetime of remote engine starter activation(the security indicator light on thecombination meter is flashing), thealarm system will remain armedthroughout the remote start run cycle.. If the alarm system is disarmed atthe time of remote engine starter acti-vation (the security indicator light onthe combination meter is not flashing),the alarm system will remain disarmedthroughout the remote start run cycle.

! Remote start operation - fob con-firmation

S07AZ2104Your remote engine starter fob is abidirectional transceiver that can confirmsystem operation with several differentvisual and audible indications. The fob’sLED-backlit button and internal piezobuzzer will indicate status of the systemusing the following flash and beep se-quences, provided the fob is within opera-tional range of the system.


(327,1)


PreconditionFob Indication

MeaningFlash Beep

Fob start button is being pressed Continuous while button isheld down — The fob is transmitting an RF signal

User attempts to start engine by pressing fobbutton twice within 3 sec

1 flash 1 beep Engine start request received

2 flashes 2 beeps Engine started successfully1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps Vehicle is in range but engine not started2 long flashes — Vehicle not in range (engine not started)

Engine idling by remote engine start operation1 flash every 3 sec — Engine idling

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by system timeout or for safetyreasons (see sections above)

User attempts to stop engine by pressing andholding fob button for at least 2 sec

3 flashes 3 beeps Engine stopped by user request1 flash every 3 sec — Stop request not received. Engine still idling.

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(328,1)


& Alternate operation methodfor models with “keyless ac-cess with push-button startsystem”

S07AZ22

Access key fob1) Lock button

An access key fob can be used as theremote engine start transmitter. Operatethe lock button to start or stop the engineas follows.! Before starting the engine

S07AZ2201Before using the remote engine startsystem to start the engine, confirm thefollowing conditions.. The select lever is in the “P” position.. All doors including the rear gate areclosed.

. The engine hood is closed.

. The push-button ignition switch is in the“OFF” position.! When starting the engine

S07AZ2202To start the engine with remote enginestart system, briefly press the lock buttontwice within 2 seconds, then press andhold the lock button for 3 seconds.

1. Press the lock button briefly. Thehazard warning flashers then flash onceand the keyless buzzer chirps once.2. Within 2 seconds, press the lock buttonbriefly again. The hazard warning flashersthen flash once again, and the keylessbuzzer chirps once again.3. After step 2, immediately press andhold the lock button. Some exterior lightsthen flash three times, and the horn willhonk once.4. Approximately 3 seconds after step 3,release the lock button. The engine willthen start successfully.

! When stopping the engineS07AZ2203

Press and hold the lock button to stop theengine with remote engine start system.! Remote start safety features

S07AZ2204For detailed information, refer to “Remotestart safety features” FP323.

& Entering the vehiclewhile it isrunning via remote start(models without “keyless ac-cess with push-button startsystem”)

S07AZ031. Unlock the vehicle doors using theremote keyless entry system.

NOTEIf the vehicle’s doors are unlockedmanually using the key, the vehicle’salarm system will trigger (if the alarmsystem is armed prior to activating theremote engine start system) and theengine will turn off. Perform either ofthe following procedures to disarm thealarm system. Refer to “Alarm system”FP139.

– Insert the key into the ignitionswitch and turn it to the “ON”position.– Press any button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter.

2. Enter the vehicle. The engine will shutdown when any door or rear gate isopened.3. Insert the key into the ignition switchand turn it to the “START” position torestart the engine.


(329,1)


& Entering the vehiclewhile it isrunning via remote start(modelswith “keyless accesswith push-button start sys-tem”)

S07AZ241. Unlock the vehicle doors using thekeyless access function and remote key-less entry system.

NOTEIf the vehicle’s doors are unlockedmanually using the key, the vehicle’salarm system will trigger (if the alarmsystem is armed prior to activating theremote engine start system) and theengine will turn off. Perform either ofthe following procedures to disarm thealarm system. Refer to “Alarm system”FP139.

– Turn the push-button ignitionswitch to the “ACC” or “ON” posi-tion.– Press any button on the accesskey fob.

2. Enter the vehicle. The engine willremain running provided the access keyfob is present and detected by the vehicle.3. Press the push-button ignition switchonce while depressing the brake pedalbefore driving your vehicle. The remoteengine starter transceiver (fob) will flash

and beep 3 times to indicate that theremote start system has been shut down.

& Entering thevehicle followingremote engine start shut-down

S07AZ10An alarm trigger may occur if the vehicle isopened by the remote keyless entrytransmitter within a few seconds immedi-ately following remote engine start shut-down.

& Pre-heating or pre-coolingthe interior of the vehicle

S07AZ04Before exiting the vehicle, set the tem-perature controls to the desired setting andoperation. After the system starts theengine, the heater or air conditioning willactivate and heat or cool the interior toyour setting.

& Remote transmitter program(Remote engine startertransceiver)

S07AZ13New transmitters can be programmed tothe remote engine start system in theevent that a transmitter is lost, stolen,damaged or additional transmitters aredesired (the system will accept up to eighttransmitters). New remote engine starttransmitters can be programmed accord-

ing to the following procedure.1. Open the driver’s door (the driver’sdoor must remain open throughout theentire process).2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” then“LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/“OFF”, back to “ON” then “LOCK”/“OFF”,then back to “ON” again and leave theignition “ON” throughout the programmingprocess.4. The system will flash the side markerlights, tail lights and parking lights andhonk the horn three times, indicating thatthe system has entered the transmitterlearn mode.5. Press and release the “ ” button onthe transmitter that you want to program.6. The system will flash the side markerlights, tail lights and parking lights andhonk the horn one time, indicating that thesystem has learned the transmitter. Uponsuccessful programming, the remote startconfirmation transmitter button will flashone time.7. Repeat step 5 for any additionaltransmitters (the system will accept up toeight transmitters).8. The system will exit the transmitterlearn mode if the key is turned to the“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the door is closed

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(330,1)


or after 2 minutes.

& System maintenanceS07AZ09

NOTEFor remote engine starter transceiver:In the event that the vehicle’s battery isreplaced, discharged or disconnected,it will be necessary to start the vehicle aminimum of one time using the keyprior to activating the remote enginestart system. This is required to allowthe vehicle electronic systems to re-synchronize.

! Changing the batteryS07AZ0901

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get onor in the remote engine starttransmitter when replacing thebattery.

. Be careful not to damage theprinted circuit board in the re-mote engine start transmitterwhen replacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children totouch the battery and any re-moved parts; children couldswallow them.

. There is a danger of explosion ifan incorrect replacement batteryis used. Replace only with thesame or equivalent type of bat-tery.

. Battery should not be exposed toexcessive heat such as sunshine,fire or the like.

For models with “keyless access withpush-button start system”:Perform the procedure described in “Re-placing battery of access key fob”FP508.For remote engine starter transceiver:The 3-volt lithium battery (model CR-2450)supplied in your remote engine starttransmitter should last approximately oneyear, depending on usage. When thebattery begin to weaken, you will notice adecrease in range (distance from thevehicle that your remote control operates).Follow the instructions below to changethe remote engine start transmitter battery.

1. Remove the small phillips screw lo-cated on the back side lower left corner ofthe transmitter.2. Carefully pry the remote engine starttransmitter halves apart using a small flat-head screwdriver.


(331,1)


3. Remove the circuit board from thebottom half of the case and remove thebattery and replace with new one. Be sureto observe the (+) sign on the old batterybefore removing it to ensure that the newbattery is inserted properly (battery “+”

should be pointed away from the transmit-ter circuit board on battery).4. Carefully snap the case halves backtogether, reinstall the phillips screw andtest the remote engine start system.

& Certification for remote en-gine starter

S07AZ23

! U.S.-spec. modelsS07AZ2301

CAUTION



! Canada-spec. modelsS07AZ2302


7

Startingand

operating

(332,1)


7-7. Continuously variabletransmission

S07BG

WARNING

Do not shift from the “P” or “N”position into the “D” or “R” positionwhile depressing the acceleratorpedal. This may cause the vehicleto jump forward or backward.

CAUTION

. Observe the following precau-tions. Otherwise, the transmis-sion could be damaged.– Shift into the “P” or “R” posi-

tion only after the vehicle hascompletely stopped.

– Do not shift from the “D”position into the “R” positionor vice versa until the vehiclehas completely stopped.

. Do not race the engine for morethan 5 seconds in any positionexcept the “N” or “P” positionwhen the brake is applied orwhen chocks are used in thewheels. This may cause thetransmission fluid to overheat.

. Never move the vehicle as fol-lows. Doing so may result in anunexpected accident or malfunc-tion.– Moving rearward by inertia

with the select lever set in aforward driving position.

– Moving forward by inertia withthe select lever set in the “R”position.

. When parking the vehicle, firstsecurely apply the parking brakeand then place the select lever inthe “P” position. Avoid parkingfor a long time with the selectlever in any other position asdoing so could result in a deadbattery.

& Continuously variable trans-mission features

S07BG06The continuously variable transmission iselectronically controlled and provides aninfinite number of forward speeds and 1reverse speed. It also has a manual modeor an “L” position.

NOTE. When the engine coolant tempera-ture is still low, the transmission willshift at higher engine speeds thanwhen the coolant temperature is suffi-ciently high in order to shorten thewarm-up time and improve driveability.The gearshift timing will automaticallyshift to the normal timing after theengine has warmed up.. Immediately after transmission fluidis replaced, you may feel that thetransmission operation is somewhatunusual. This results from invalidationof data which the on-board computerhas collected and stored in memory toallow the transmission to shift at themost appropriate times for the currentcondition of your vehicle. Optimizedshifting will be restored as the vehiclecontinues to be driven for a while.. When driving a CVT model undercontinuous heavy load conditions suchas when towing a camper or climbing a

Continuously variable transmission330

(333,1)


long, steep hill, the engine speed or thevehicle speed may automatically bereduced. This is not a malfunction. Thisresults from the engine control func-tion maintaining the cooling perfor-mance of the vehicle. The engine andvehicle speed will return to a normalspeed when the engine is able tomaintain the optimum cooling perfor-mance after the heavy load decreases.Driving under a heavy load must beperformedwith extreme care. Do not tryto pass a vehicle in front when drivingon an uphill slope while towing.. The continuously variable transmis-sion is a chain type system that pro-vides superior transmission efficiencyfor maximum fuel economy. At times,depending on varying driving condi-tions, a chain operating sound may beheard that is characteristic of this typeof system.

& Select leverS07BG01

Type A1) Select lever button

Type B1) Select lever button

1) Models with “L” position2) Models with manual mode

:With the brake pedal depressed, shiftwhile pressing the select lever buttonin.: Shift while pressing the select leverbutton in.

: Shift without pressing the select leverbutton.

The select lever has four positions, “P”,“R”, “N”, “D” and it also has an “L” or “M”gate.

NOTEFor somemodels, to protect the enginewhile the select lever is in the “P” or “N”position, the engine is controlled sothat the engine speed may not becometoo high even if the accelerator pedal is

– CONTINUED –

Continuously variable transmission 331

7

Startingand

operating

(334,1)


depressed hard.

! P (Park)S07BG0101

This position is for parking the vehicle andstarting the engine. In this position, thetransmission is mechanically locked toprevent the vehicle from rolling freely.

When you park the vehicle, first apply theparking brake firmly, then shift into the “P”position. Do not hold the vehicle with onlythemechanical friction of the transmission.

To shift the select lever from the “P”position to any other position, you shoulddepress the brake pedal fully then movethe select lever. This prevents the vehiclefrom lurching when it is started.! R (Reverse)

S07BG0102This position is for backing the vehicle. Toshift from the “N” to “R” position, stop thevehicle completely then move the lever tothe “R” position while pressing the selectlever button in.

When the ignition switch has been turnedto the “ACC” position, the movement of theselect lever from the “N” to “R” position isonly possible by depressing the brakepedal. For details, refer to “Shift lockfunction” FP335.

! N (Neutral)S07BG0103

This position is for restarting a stalledengine. In this position, the transmission isneutral, meaning that the wheels andtransmission are not locked. Therefore,the vehicle will roll freely, even on theslightest incline unless the parking brakeor foot brake is applied.

Avoid coasting with the transmission inneutral. Engine braking has no effect inthis condition.

WARNING

Do not drive the vehicle with theselect lever in the “N” (neutral)position. Engine braking has noeffect in this condition and the riskof an accident is consequently in-creased.

! D (Drive)S07BG0104

This position is for normal driving. Thetransmission shifts automatically and con-tinuously into a suitable gear according tothe vehicle speed and the acceleration yourequire. Also, while driving up and down ahill, the transmission assists and controlsthe driving performance and engine brak-ing while corresponding to the road grade.

When more acceleration is required in the“D” position, depress the accelerator pedalfully to the floor and hold that position. Thetransmission will automatically downshift.In this case, the transmission will operatelike a conventional automatic transmis-sion. When you release the pedal, thetransmission will return to the original gearposition.

Formodels withmanual mode, if one of theshift paddles behind the steering wheel isoperated while driving in the “D” position,the transmission will temporarily switch tothe manual mode. In this mode, you canshift into any gear position using the shiftpaddles. For details about the manualmode, refer to “Selection of manual mode”FP333. Once the vehicle speed stabi-lizes, the transmission will switch from themanual mode back to the “D” position fornormal driving.


(335,1)


& Selection of manual mode (ifequipped)

S07BG02

Type A

Type BWith the vehicle either moving or station-ary, move the select lever from the “D”

position to the “M” position to select themanual mode.

Select lever/gear position indicator (typeA)1) Upshift indicator2) Downshift indicator3) Gear position indicator

Select lever/gear position indicator (typeB)1) Upshift indicator2) Downshift indicator3) Gear position indicator

When the manual mode is selected, thegear position indicator and upshift indica-tor and/or downshift indicator on thecombination meter illuminate.

The gear position indicator shows thecurrently selected gear in the followingrange.. 1st-to-7th-gear range (except forSubaru Forester Wilderness models). 1st-to-8th-gear range (for SubaruForester Wilderness models)

The upshift and downshift indicators showwhen a gear shift is possible. When the

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(336,1)


upshift indicator “ ” illuminates, upshift-ing is possible. When the downshift in-dicator “ ” illuminates, downshifting ispossible. When both indicators illuminate,upshifting and downshifting are both pos-sible. When the vehicle stops (for exam-ple, at traffic signals), the downshift in-dicator turns off.

Gearshifts can be performed using theshift paddle behind the steering wheel.

To upshift to the next higher gear position,pull the shift paddle that has “+” indicatedon it. To downshift to the next lower gearposition, pull the shift paddle that has “–”indicated on it.

To deselect the manual mode, return theselect lever to the “D” position from the “M”position.

CAUTION

Donot place or hang anything on theshift paddles. Doing somay result inaccidental gear shifting.

NOTEPlease read the following points care-fully and bear them in mind when usingthe manual mode.. If you attempt to shift downwhen theengine speed is too high, i.e., when adownshift would push the tachometerneedle beyond the red zone, beeps willbe emitted to warn you that the down-shift is not possible.. If you attempt to shift up when thevehicle speed is too low, the transmis-sion will not respond.. You can perform a skip-shift (forexample, from 4th to 2nd) by operatingthe shift paddle twice in rapid succes-sion.. The transmission automatically se-lects 1st gear when the vehicle stopsmoving.. If the temperature of the transmis-sion fluid becomes too high, the “ATOIL TEMP” warning light on the combi-nation meter will illuminate. Immedi-ately stop the vehicle in a safe location

and let the engine idle until the warninglight turns off.

& Selection of “L” (if equipped)S07BG03

Type A

Type B


(337,1)


“L” is for using engine braking when goingdown a hill, etc. To select this mode, movethe select lever from the “D” position to the“L” position.

Type A

Type B

When selected, the indicator “L” willilluminate on the combination meter.

To deselect “L”, move the select lever tothe “D” position.

& Shift lock functionS07BG04

The shift lock function helps prevent theimproper operation of the select lever.. The select lever cannot be operatedunless the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position and the brake pedal isdepressed.. The select lever cannot be moved fromthe “P” position to any other position beforethe brake pedal is depressed. Depress thebrake pedal first, and then operate theselect lever.. Only the “P” position allows you to turnthe ignition switch from the “ACC” positionto the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and removethe key from the ignition switch.. If the ignition switch is turned to the“ACC” position while the select lever is inthe “N” position, the select lever may notbe moved to the “P” position withoutdepressing the brake pedal and pressingthe select lever button.

! Shift lock releaseS07BG0401

If the select lever cannot be operated, turnthe ignition switch back to the “ON”

position then move the select lever to the“P” position with the select lever buttonpressed and the brake pedal depressed.

If the select lever does not move afterperforming the above procedure, checkand confirm the following and release theshift lock accordingly.. When the select lever cannot beshifted from “P” to “N”:Refer to “Shift lock release using the shiftlock release button” FP336.. When the select lever cannot beshifted from “N” to “R”, “P”:Place the ignition switch in the “ACC”position, then move the select lever to the“P” position with the brake pedal de-pressed.

If the select lever still does not move, referto “Shift lock release using the shift lockrelease button” FP336.

If the shift lock cannot be released withoutusing the shift lock release button in theabove cases, there may be a malfunctionin the shift lock system or the vehiclecontrol system.

Contact a SUBARU dealer for an inspec-tion as soon as possible.

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(338,1)


! Shift lock release using the shiftlock release button

S07BG0402Perform the following procedure to releasethe shift lock.1. Apply the parking brake and stop theengine.

2. Wrap the tip of a flat-head screwdriverwith vinyl tape or a cloth and use it toremove the shift lock cover. The shift lockrelease button is located under the shiftlock cover.

3. While depressing the brake pedal,insert a screwdriver into the hole, pressthe shift lock release button using ascrewdriver, and then move the selectlever.

If the select lever does not move afterperforming the above procedure, the shiftlock system may be malfunctioning. Con-tact a SUBARU dealer for an inspection assoon as possible.

& Driving tipsS07BG05

CAUTION

If the accelerator and brake pedalsare depressed at the same time,driving torque may be restrained.This is not a malfunction.

. Always apply the foot or parking brakewhen the vehicle is stopped in the “D” or“R” position.. Make sure to apply the parking brakewhen parking your vehicle. Do not hold thevehicle with only the mechanical friction ofthe transmission.. Do not keep the vehicle in a stationaryposition on an uphill grade by using the “D”position. Use the brake instead.. The engine may, on rare occasions,knock when the vehicle rapidly acceler-ates or rapidly pulls away from a standstill.This phenomenon does not indicate amalfunction.


(339,1)


7-8. SI-DRIVES07BC

SI-DRIVE (SUBARU Intelligent Drive)works to maximize engine performance,control and efficiency.This system consists of two modes:Intelligent (I), Sport (S), and Sport Sharp(S#). By operating the SI-DRIVE switches,the character of the power unit changes.

& Intelligent (I) modeS07BC02

! For smooth, efficient performancedriving

S07BC0201

Type A

Type BThe linear acceleration characteristic ofthe Intelligent (I) mode is ideal for normaldriving usage.The Intelligent (I) mode provides well-balanced performance with greater fuelefficiency and smooth driveability withoutstress. Power delivery is moderate duringacceleration for maximum fuel efficiency.This is ideal for around-town driving andsituations that do not require full poweroutput. It provides better control in difficultdriving conditions, such as slippery roadsor loose surfaces, due to gentler throttleresponse.

& Sport (S) mode (if equipped)S07BC03

! For all-around performance drivingS07BC0301

Type A

Type B

– CONTINUED –

SI-DRIVE 337

7

Startingand

operating

(340,1)


The Sport (S) mode provides the enginepower desired by those who want to makethe driving experience their own personaladventure.

& Sport Sharp (S#) mode (ifequipped)

S07BC04

! For maximum performance drivingS07BC0401

For sports-minded drivers, the SportSharp (S#) mode offers an exhilaratinglevel of engine performance and control.The throttle becomes more responsiveregardless of the engine speed. Deliveringmaximum driving enjoyment, this mode isideal for tackling twisting roads and formerging or overtaking other vehicles onthe freeway with confidence.

& SI-DRIVE switchesS07BC01

Type A SI-DRIVE switches

Type B SI-DRIVE switches. To select the Intelligent (I) mode, pressthe “I” switch.

. To select the Sport (S) mode, press the“S” switch.. To select the Sport Sharp (S#) mode,press the “S#” switch.

NOTE. While the engine is cool, you cannotchange to Sport Sharp (S#) mode.. The next time you turn on the engine,after you turned off the engine in theSport (S) mode (type A) or Sport Sharp(S#) mode (type B), the SI-DRIVE modechanges to the Intelligent (I) mode.. While the engine is running, if theCHECK ENGINE warning light/malfunc-tion indicator light illuminates, theSI-DRIVE mode changes to the Sport(S) mode (type A) or Sport Sharp (S#)mode (type B). In this case, it is notpossible to change to another mode.. If any of the SI-DRIVE indicatorsblink, the SI-DRIVE system may bemalfunctioning. Contact your SUBARUdealer.

SI-DRIVE338

(341,1)


7-9. Power steeringS07AJ

& Power steering warning lightS07AJ10

& Power steering system fea-tures

S07AJ11The vehicle is equipped with an electricpower steering system. When the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position, thepower steering warning light on the com-bination meter illuminates to inform thedriver that the warning system is function-ing properly. Then, if the engine started,the warning light turns off to inform thedriver that the steering power assist isoperational.

CAUTION

When the power steering warninglight is illuminated, there may bemore resistance when the steeringwheel is operated. Drive carefully tothe nearest SUBARU dealer andhave the vehicle inspected immedi-ately.

NOTEIf the steering wheel is operated in thefollowing ways, the power steeringcontrol system may temporarily limitthe power assist in order to prevent thesystem components, such as the con-trol computer and drive motor, fromoverheating.. The steering wheel is operated fre-quently and turned sharply while thevehicle is maneuvered at extremely lowspeeds, such as while frequently turn-ing the steering wheel during parallelparking.. The steering wheel remains in thefully turned position for a long period oftime.

At this time, there will be more resis-tance when steering. However, this isnot a malfunction. Normal steeringforce will be restored after the steering

wheel is not operated for a while andthe power steering control system hasan opportunity to cool down. However,if the power steering is operated in anon-standard way which causes powerassist limitation to occur too frequently,this may result in a malfunction of thepower steering control system.

Power steering 339

7

Startingand

operating

(342,1)


7-10. BrakingS07AK

& Braking tipsS07AK01

WARNING

Never rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. This can causedangerous overheating of thebrakes and needless wear on thebrake pads.

! When the brakes get wetS07AK0101

When driving in rain or after washing thevehicle, the brakes may get wet. As aresult, brake stopping distance will belonger. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicleat a safe speedwhile lightly depressing thebrake pedal to heat up the brakes.! Use of engine braking

S07AK0102Remember to make use of engine brakingin addition to foot braking. When descend-ing a grade, if only the foot brake is used,the brakes may start working improperlybecause of brake fluid overheating,caused by overheated brake pads. To helpprevent this, shift to a lower gear to getstronger engine braking.! Braking when a tire is punctured

S07AK0103Do not depress the brake pedal suddenlywhen a tire is punctured. This could cause

a loss of control of the vehicle. Keepdriving straight ahead while graduallyreducing speed. Then slowly pull off theroad to a safe place.

& Brake systemS07AK02

! Two separate circuitsS07AK0201

Your vehicle has two separate circuit brakesystems. Each circuit works diagonallyacross the vehicle. If one circuit of thebrake system should fail, the other half ofthe system still works. If one circuit fails,the brake pedal will go down much closerto the floor than usual and you will need topress it down much harder. A much longerdistance will be needed to stop the vehicle.! Vacuumbrake booster (models with

the vacuum brake booster)S07AK0202

The vacuum brake booster uses an enginemanifold vacuum and a vacuum pump toassist braking force. Do not turn off theengine while driving because that will turnoff the vacuum brake booster, resulting inpoor braking power.The brakes will continue to work evenwhen the vacuum brake booster comple-tely stops functioning. If this happens,however, you will have to depress thepedal much harder than normal and thebraking distance will increase.

! Supplemental booster functionwhen vacuum pressure fails

S07AK020201

While the ignition switch is turned “ON”and the engine is running, the supple-mental booster function operates when thebrake booster performance is decreaseddue to insufficient vacuum boost.When the brake pedal is depressed whilethe supplemental booster function is oper-ating, an operation sound and brake pedalvibration may be generated. This is not amalfunction.! Electronic brake booster (models

with the electronic brake booster)S07AK0207

The vehicle is equipped with an electronicbrake booster to provide additional brakingforce. Do not turn off the ignition switchwhile driving because that will turn off thebrake booster, resulting in poor brakingpower.The brakes will continue to work evenwhen the brake booster completely stopsfunctioning. If this happens, you will haveto depress the pedal much harder thanduring normal braking, and the brakingdistance will increase.

NOTEWhen the following operations areperformed, an operating sound fromthe electronic brake boost control

Braking340

(343,1)


module may be heard. This is not amalfunction.. The brake pedal was operated.. The driver’s door was opened.. The EyeSight function was acti-vated.. Several minutes have passed afterthe engine stopped.

! Supplemental booster functionwhen electronic brake boosterfails

S07AK020701

If there is a malfunction in the brakingsystem, the power for the braking will bestored by controlling the hydraulic pres-sure of the VDC system.When the brake pedal is depressed whilethe supplemental booster function is oper-ating, an operation sound and brake pedalvibration may be generated.! Brake assist system

S07AK0203

WARNING

Do not be overconfident about thebrake assist. It is not a system thatbrings more braking ability to thevehicle beyond its braking capabil-ity. Always use the utmost carewhen driving regarding vehiclespeed and safe distance.

CAUTION

When you need to brake suddenly,continue depressing the brake pedalstrongly to bring the effect of thebrake assist.

Brake assist is a driver assistance system.It assists the brake power when the drivercannot depress the brake pedal stronglyand the brake power is insufficient.Brake assist generates the brake poweraccording to the speed at which the driverdepresses the brake pedal.

NOTEWhen you depress the brake pedalstrongly or suddenly, the following willoccur. However, even though theseoccur, they do not indicate any mal-functions, and the brake assist systemis operating properly.. Youmight feel that the brake pedal isapplied by lighter force and generates agreater braking force.. You might hear an ABS operatingnoise from the engine compartment.

& Disc brake pad wear warningindicators

S07AK03

The disc brake pad wear warning indica-tors on the disc brakes give a warningnoise when the brake pads are worn.If a squeaking or scraping noise is heardfrom the disc brakes while braking, im-mediately have your vehicle checked byyour SUBARU dealer.

Braking 341

7

Startingand

operating

(344,1)


7-11. ABS (Anti-lock BrakeSystem)

S07AL

The ABS prevents the lock-up of wheelswhich may occur during sudden braking orbraking on slippery road surfaces. Thishelps prevent the loss of steering controland directional stability caused by wheellock-up.

When the ABS is operating, you may heara chattering noise or feel a slight vibrationin the brake pedal. This is normal when theABS operates.

The ABS will not operate when the vehiclespeed is below approximately 6 mph (10km/h).

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv-ing – overconfidence because youare driving a vehicle with the ABScould easily lead to a serious acci-dent.

CAUTION

. The ABS does not always de-crease stopping distance. Youshould always maintain a safefollowing distance from othervehicles.

. When driving on badly surfacedroads, gravel roads, icy roads, orover newly fallen snow, stoppingdistances may be longer for avehicle with the ABS than onewithout. Therefore, when drivingunder these conditions, reduceyour speed and leave ample dis-tance from other vehicles.

. When tire chains are installed,stopping distances may be long-er for a vehicle with the ABS thanone without. Be sure to reduceyour speed and maintain a safedistance from the vehicle in front.

. When you feel the ABS operating,you should maintain constantbrake pedal pressure. Do notpump the brake pedal sincedoing so may defeat the opera-tion of the ABS.

& ABS self-checkS07AL01

Just after the vehicle is started, you mayfeel on the brake pedal a vibration similarto when the ABS operates, and you mayalso hear the sound of the ABS workingfrom the engine compartment. This iscaused by an automatic functional test ofthe ABS being carried out and does notindicate a malfunction.

& ABS warning lightS07AL02

Refer to “ABS warning light” FP177.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)342

(345,1)


7-12. Electronic Brake ForceDistribution (EBD) system

S07AM

The EBD system maximizes the effective-ness of the brakes by allowing the rearbrakes to supply a greater proportion of thebraking force. It functions by adjusting thedistribution of braking force to the rearwheels in accordance with the vehicle’sloading condition and speed.The EBD system is an integral part of theABS and uses some of the ABS compo-nents to perform its function of optimizingthe distribution of braking force. If any ofthe ABS components used by the EBDsystem malfunction, the EBD system alsostops working.

When the EBD system is operating, youmay hear a chattering noise or feel a slightvibration in the brake pedal. This is normaland does not indicate a malfunction.

& If EBD system malfunctionsS07AM01

If a malfunction occurs in the EBD system,the system stopsworking and the followingwarning lights illuminate simultaneously.. Brake system warning light. ABS warning light. Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light

If the both warning light remains on eventhough the parking brake is released, thebrake fluid level may be low or there couldbe a problem with the EBD system. Parkthe vehicle in a safe place immediately andcontact a Subaru dealer.

WARNING

. Driving with the brake systemwarning light illuminated is dan-gerous. This indicates your brakesystemmay not be working prop-erly. If the light remains illumi-nated, have the brakes inspectedby a SUBARU dealer immedi-ately.


Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system 343

7

Startingand

operating

(346,1)


7-13. Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol system

S07AN

& Safety precautionsS07AN05

WARNING

Always use the utmost care in driv-ing – overconfidence because youare driving a vehicle with the VehicleDynamics Control system could ea-sily lead to a serious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equippedwith the Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol system, winter tires shouldbe used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition,vehicle speed should be reducedconsiderably. Simply having aVehicle Dynamics Control sys-tem does not guarantee that thevehicle will be able to avoidaccidents in any situation.

. Activation of the Vehicle Dy-namics Control system is anindication that the road on whichthe vehicle is traveling has aslippery surface; since having

Vehicle Dynamics Control is noguarantee that full vehicle controlwill bemaintained at all times andunder all conditions, its activa-tion should be seen as a sign thatthe speed of the vehicle shouldbe reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-nents, steering components, oran axle are removed from avehicle, have an inspection ofthat system performed by anauthorized SUBARU dealer.

. The following precautions shouldbe observed in order to ensurethat the Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol system is operating properly:– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the samesize, type, and brand. Further-more, the amount of wearshould be the same for all fourtires.

– Keep the tire pressure at theproper level as shown on thevehicle placard attached tothe driver’s side door pillar.

– Use only the specified tempor-ary spare tire to replace a flattire. With a temporary sparetire, the effectiveness of the

Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem is reduced and thisshould be taken into accountwhen driving the vehicle insuch a condition.

. If non-matching tires are used,the Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem may not operate cor-rectly.

. The Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem helps prevent unstablevehicle motion such as skiddingusing control of the brakes andengine power. Do not turn off theVehicle Dynamics Control sys-tem unless it is absolutely neces-sary. If you must turn off theVehicle Dynamics Control sys-tem, drive very carefully accord-ing to the road surface condi-tions.

Vehicle Dynamics Control system344

(347,1)


& System featuresS07AN06

In the event of wheelspin and/or skiddingon a slippery road surface and/or duringcornering and/or an evasive maneuver,the Vehicle Dynamics Control systemadjusts the engine’s output and thewheels’ respective braking forces to helpmaintain traction and directional control.

. Traction Control FunctionThe traction control function is designed toprevent spinning of the driving wheels onslippery road surfaces, thereby helping tomaintain traction and directional control.Activation of this function is shown byflashing the Vehicle Dynamics Controloperation indicator light.

. Skid Suppression FunctionThe skid suppression function is designedto help maintain directional stability bysuppressing the wheels’ tendency to slidesideways during steering operations. Acti-vation of this function is shown by flashingthe Vehicle Dynamics Control operationindicator light.

NOTE. The Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-tem may be considered normal whenthe following conditions occur.

– Slight twitching of the brake

pedal is felt.– The vehicle or steering wheelshakes to a small degree.– An operating sound from theengine compartment is heard brieflywhen starting the engine and whendriving off after starting the engine.– The brake pedal seems to joltwhen driving off after starting theengine.

. In the circumstances shown in thefollowing list, the vehicle may be lessstable than it feels to the driver. TheVehicle Dynamics Control system maytherefore operate. Such operation doesnot indicate a system malfunction.

– On gravel-covered or ruttedroads– On unfinished roads– When the vehicle is towing atrailer– When the vehicle is fitted withsnow tires or winter tires.

. Activation of the Vehicle DynamicsControl system will cause operation ofthe steering wheel to feel slightlydifferent compared to that for normalconditions.. It is always important to reducespeed when approaching a corner,even if your vehicle is equipped withthe Vehicle Dynamics Control system.

. Always turn off the engine beforereplacing a tire. Failure to do so mayrender the Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem unable to operate correctly.

& Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem monitor

S07AN01Refer to “Vehicle Dynamics Control warn-ing light/Vehicle Dynamics Control opera-tion indicator light” FP182 and “VehicleDynamics Control OFF indicator light”FP183.

& Vehicle Dynamics ControlOFF switch

S07AN02

Type A

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle Dynamics Control system 345

7

Startingand

operating

(348,1)


Type BPress or turn the Vehicle Dynamics Con-trol OFF switch to deactivate the VehicleDynamics Control system. Creating ade-quate driving wheel slip by deactivating theVehicle Dynamics Control system mayhelp to recover from the loss of traction.Use the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFFswitch as necessary.. A standing start on a steeply slopingroad with a snowy, gravel-covered, orotherwise slippery surface. Extrication of the vehicle when itswheels are stuck in mud or deep snow

When the switch is pressed or turnedduring engine operation, the Vehicle Dy-namics Control OFF indicator light “ ” onthe combination meter illuminates. TheVehicle Dynamics Control system will bedeactivated and the vehicle will behavelike a model not equipped with the VehicleDynamics Control system. When theswitch is pressed again (type A) or turnedto the “NORMAL” side (type B) to reacti-vate the Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-tem, the Vehicle Dynamics Control OFFindicator light turns off.With the Vehicle Dynamics Control systemdeactivated, traction and stability en-hancement offered by the Vehicle Dy-namics Control system is unavailable.Therefore, you should not deactivate theVehicle Dynamics Control system except

under the above-mentioned situations.

NOTE. When the switch has been pressed(type A) or turned (type B) to deactivatethe Vehicle Dynamics Control system,the Vehicle Dynamics Control systemautomatically reactivates itself the nexttime the ignition switch is turned to the“LOCK”/“OFF” position and the engineis restarted.. If the switch is pressed (type A) orturned (type B) and held for 30 secondsor longer, the indicator light turns off,the Vehicle DynamicsControl system isactivated, and the system ignores anyfurther pressing of the switch. To makethe switch usable again, turn the igni-tion switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” posi-tion and restart the engine.. When the switch is pressed (type A)or turned (type B) to deactivate theVehicle Dynamics Control system, thevehicle’s running performance is com-parable to that of a vehicle that does nothave a Vehicle Dynamics Control sys-tem. Do not deactivate the VehicleDynamics Control system except whenabsolutely necessary.. Even when the Vehicle DynamicsControl system is deactivated, compo-nents of the brake control system maystill activate. When the brake control

Vehicle Dynamics Control system346

(349,1)


system is activated, the Vehicle Dy-namics Control operation indicatorlight flashes.

7-14. X-MODE (if equipped)S07BI

WARNING

. Always use the utmost care indriving – overconfidence be-cause you are driving a vehiclewith X-MODE could easily lead toa serious accident.

. Always use the utmost care indriving – overconfidence be-cause you are driving a vehiclewith hill descent control function(if equipped) could easily lead toa serious accident. Be especiallycareful, and depress the brakepedal if necessary when drivingon extremely steep downhill, fro-zen, muddy or sandy roads. Fail-ure to control the vehicle’s speedmay cause a loss of control andresult in a serious accident.

CAUTION

. Even if your vehicle is equippedwith X-MODE, winter tires shouldbe used when driving on snow-covered or icy roads; in addition,vehicle speed should be reducedconsiderably. Simply having

X-MODE does not guarantee thatthe vehicle will be able to avoidaccidents in any situation.

. Activate X-MODE when you en-counter a very slippery surface atlow speed. However, havingX-MODE is no guarantee that fullvehicle control will bemaintainedat all times and under all condi-tions. When activating X-MODE,the speed of the vehicle shouldbe reduced considerably.

. Whenever suspension compo-nents, steering components, oran axle are removed from avehicle, have the system in-spected by an authorizedSUBARU dealer.

. Observe the following precau-tions in order to ensure thatX-MODE is operating properly:– All four wheels should be

fitted with tires of the samesize, type, and brand. Further-more, the amount of wearshould be the same for all fourtires.

– Keep the tire pressure at theproper level as shown on thelabel attached to the vehicle’sdoor pillar.

– CONTINUED –

X-MODE 347

7

Startingand

operating

(350,1)


– Use only the special tempor-ary spare tire to replace a flattire. With a normal temporaryspare tire, the effectiveness ofX-MODE is reduced and thisshould be taken into accountwhen driving the vehicle insuch a condition.

. Models with hill descent control:If the hill descent control functionhas operated continuously for along time, the temperature of thebrake disc may increase and thehill descent control function maybe temporarily disabled. In thiscase, the hill descent controlindicator will disappear. Whenthe hill descent control indicatordisappears, the hill descent con-trol function is disabled.

X-MODE is the integrated control systemof the engine, AWD and Vehicle DynamicsControl system, etc. for driving with badroad conditions. Using X-MODE, you candrive more comfortably even in slipperyroad conditions including uphill and down-hill.

X-MODE has the following functions.. Hill descent control function (ifequipped):Using the hill descent control function, youcan keep the vehicle at a consistent speeddriving downhill. If the vehicle speed islikely to increase, the brake control systemwill be activated to adjust the vehiclespeed.. Driving ability control:This mode increases the hill-climbingability and driving ability as well asenabling smooth application of torque foreasier control of the steering wheel.

& To activate/deactivateX-MODE

S07BI01

! X-MODE switch (models with 2modes)

S07BI0105

Type A

X-MODE348

(351,1)


Type B

! X-MODE switch (models with 1mode)

S07BI0106

! Type A combination meterS07BI0103

X-MODE indicator

! Type B combination meterS07BI0104

X-MODE indicator (models with 2 modes)1) D.SNOW/MUD mode indicator2) SNOW/DIRT mode indicator

X-MODE indicator (models with 1 mode)

– CONTINUED –

X-MODE 349

7

Startingand

operating

(352,1)


! To activateS07BI0101

Models with 2 modesTurn the X-MODE switch to the right or leftand select SNOW/DIRTor D.SNOW/MUD.While X-MODE is activated, the X-MODEindicator appears.

Models with 1 modePress the X-MODE switch.While X-MODEis activated, the X-MODE indicator ap-pears.! To deactivate

S07BI0102Press the X-MODE switch. The X-MODEindicator will disappear when X-MODE isdeactivated.

NOTE. SNOW/DIRT is suitable for drivingon a snow-covered road where thepoints of contact between the tiresand road surface are visible, or fordriving on an unpaved road.. D.SNOW/MUD is suitable for drivingon a road covered with deep snowwhere the points of contact betweenthe tires and road surface are notvisible, or for driving on a muddy road.. Even if you try to activate X-MODEby turning (models with 2 modes) orpressing (models with 1 mode) theX-MODE switch when the vehicle speedis 12 mph (20 km/h) or more, X-MODE

will not be activated. At this time, abuzzer will sound twice.. If the vehicle speed reaches 25 mph(40 km/h) or more while X-MODE isactivated, a buzzer will sound once andX-MODE will be deactivated. X-MODEwill automatically reactivate when thevehicle speed drops below 22 mph (35km/h).. While the engine is running, if any ofthe following conditions is met,X-MODE will be deactivated. In thiscase, it is not possible to activateX-MODE.

– The CHECK ENGINE warninglight/malfunction indicator light illu-minates.– The AT OIL TEMP warning lightflashes.– The ABS warning light illumi-nates.– The Vehicle Dynamics Controlwarning light illuminates.

. If the engine could overheat becauseof a temperature increase of the enginecoolant, it may not be possible toactivate X-MODE. Even while X-MODEis activated, X-MODE will be deacti-vated when the engine coolant tem-perature increases.. For models with Auto Start Stopsystem, the system will be stopped

while X-MODE is activated.

NOTEFor models with SI-DRIVE:. The SI-DRIVE mode will change tothe Intelligent (I) modewhen X-MODE isdeactivated.. The SI-DRIVE mode cannot be chan-ged while X-MODE is activated. At thistime, a buzzer will sound twice.. While the engine is running, if any ofthe following conditions is met,X-MODE will be deactivated. In thiscase, it is not possible to activateX-MODE. Also, for models withSI-DRIVE, the mode will change to theSport (S) mode or Sport Sharp (S#)mode and it will not be possible tochange to the other modes.

– The CHECK ENGINE warninglight/malfunction indicator light illu-minates.– The AT OIL TEMP warning lightflashes.– The ABS warning light illumi-nates.– The Vehicle Dynamics Controlwarning light illuminates.

. If there is a possibility that theengine could overheat because of atemperature increase of the enginecoolant, it is not possible to change to

X-MODE350

(353,1)


X-MODE. While the vehicle is inX-MODE, it changes to the Sport (S)mode or Sport Sharp (S#) mode whenthe engine coolant temperature in-creases.. It is not possible to activate X-MODEwhen the engine is not running, be-cause the hill descent control functionis not activated.. When X-MODE automatically reacti-vates, the hill descent control functionalso reactivates.

& Hill descent control functionS07BI03

The hill descent control function will be instandby mode when X-MODE is activatedand the vehicle speed is less than approxi-mately 12 mph (20 km/h).The function will operate when the vehiclespeed is less than approximately 12 mph(20 km/h) and the accelerator ratio is lessthan approximately 10%.The function will turn off when the vehiclespeed is more than approximately 12 mph(20 km/h) and the accelerator pedal isdepressed.

CAUTION

The braking power of the hill des-cent control function may not besufficient when strong braking

power is needed (e.g., when towing atrailer).

NOTE. Even while the hill descent controlfunction is operating, you can vary thevehicle speed using the brake pedal oraccelerator pedal.. During braking by the hill descentcontrol function, the hill descent con-trol indicator will flash.. The hill descent control function isoperable regardless of the gradient ofthe road.. The hill descent control functionmay be considered normal when thefollowing conditions occur.

– An operating sound is heardbriefly from the engine compart-ment while the hill descent controlfunction is operating.– The sensation of depressing thebrake pedal is different, (harder thanusual etc.) when the brake pedal isdepressed during hill descent con-trol function operation.

! Hill descent control indicatorS07BI0301

Hill descent control indicator (type A)

Hill descent control indicator (type B)This indicator appears while the hill des-cent control function is in the standbymode. It flashes while the function is

– CONTINUED –

X-MODE 351

7

Startingand

operating

(354,1)


operating. It will disappear when thefunction is in the disabled mode. Whenthis function is changed from operationalto non-operational, it will disappear whenthe vehicle speed reaches more thanapproximately 18 mph (30 km/h).

7-15. Tire pressure monitor-ing system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)

S07AO

Low tire pressure warning lightThe tire pressure monitoring system pro-vides the driver with a warning messagewhen tire pressure is severely low.The tire pressure monitoring system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven atspeeds above 20 mph (32 km/h). Also, thissystem may not react immediately to asudden drop in tire pressure (for example,a blow-out caused by running over a sharpobject).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warninglight illuminates while driving,never brake suddenly. Instead,perform the following procedure.Otherwise, an accident involvingserious vehicle damage and ser-ious personal injury could occur.(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducingspeed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to asafe location.

(3) Check the pressure for all fourtires and adjust the pressureto the COLD tire pressureshown on the tire inflationpressure label. The tire infla-tion pressure label is locatedon the door pillar on thedriver’s side.

Even when the vehicle is driven avery short distance, the tires getwarm and their pressures in-crease accordingly. Be sure tolet the tires cool thoroughly be-fore adjusting their pressures tothe standard values shownon thetire inflation pressure label. Referto “Tires and wheels” FP483.

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models)352

(355,1)


The tire pressure monitoring sys-tem does not function when thevehicle is stationary. After adjust-ing the tire pressures, increasethe vehicle speed to at least 20mph (32 km/h) to start the TPMSrechecking of the tire inflationpressures. If the tire pressuresare now above the severe lowpressure threshold, the low tirepressure warning light shouldturn off a few minutes later.If this light still illuminates whiledriving after adjusting the tirepressure, a tire may have signifi-cant damage and a fast leak thatcauses the tire to lose air rapidly.If you have a flat tire, replace itwith a spare tire as soon aspossible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/trans-mitter being transferred, the lowtire pressure warning light willilluminate steadily after blinkingfor approximately 1 minute. Thisindicates the TPMS is unable tomonitor all four road wheels.Contact your SUBARU dealer assoon as possible for tire andsensor replacement and/or sys-

tem resetting.. When a tire is repaired with liquid

sealant, the tire pressure warningvalve and transmitter may notoperate properly. If a liquid sea-lant is used, contact your nearestSUBARU dealer or other qualifiedservice shop as soon as possi-ble. Make sure to replace the tirepressure warning valve andtransmitter when replacing thetire. You may reuse the wheel ifthere is no damage to it and if thesealant residue is properlycleaned off. Do not inject any tireliquid or aerosol tire sealant intothe tires, as this may cause amalfunction of the tire pressuresensors. If the light illuminatessteadily after blinking for ap-proximately 1 minute, promptlycontact a SUBARU dealer to havethe system inspected.

CAUTION

Do not place metal film or any metalparts in the cargo area. This maycause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, andthe tire pressure monitoring systemwill not function properly.


FCC CAUTIONChanges or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) (U.S.-spec. models) 353

7

Startingand

operating

(356,1)


7-16. Parking your vehicleS07AP

& Electronic parking brakeS07AP03

1) Parking brake switch2) Indicator light3) Release the electronic parking brake4) Apply the electronic parking brake

WARNING

. Before exiting the vehicle, makesure that you turn off the engine.Otherwise, the parking brakemaybe released and an accident mayoccur.

. If the brake system warning lightturns on, the electronic parkingbrake system may be malfunc-tioning. Immediately stop your

vehicle in a safe location, use tirestops under the tires to preventthe vehicle from moving andcontact your SUBARU dealer.

. If you operate the electronic park-ing brake when the brake is over-heated or the vehicle is on a steepslope, the electronic parkingbrake indicator light may flash.In this case, the vehicle may startto move and it may lead to anaccident. Always use the tirestops.

CAUTION

. When the electronic parkingbrake system has a malfunctionand the parking brake cannot beapplied, contact your SUBARUdealer immediately for an inspec-tion. If you have to park yourvehicle in such conditions, per-form the following procedure.– Stop your vehicle in a flat

location.– Shift the select lever in the “P”

position. When the select le-ver cannot be shifted into the“P” position, youmust releaseshift lock. Refer to “Shift lock

function” FP335.– Use tire stops under the tires

to prevent the vehicle frommoving.

. Never drive with the parkingbrake applied. Doing so willcause unnecessary brake padwear. Before driving off, alwaysmake sure that the parking brakehas been released and the brakesystem warning light has turnedoff.

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronicparking brake. You can apply/release theparking brake by operating the parkingbrake switch.

To apply: Depress the brake pedal andpull up the parking brake switch.To release: Press the parking brakeswitch firmly while the ignition switch is inthe “ON” position and the brake pedal isdepressed.

When the parking brake is applied whilethe ignition switch is in the “ON” position,the electronic parking brake indicator lightand the indicator light on the parking brakeswitch illuminate. Refer to “Brake systemwarning light (red)” FP178.

Parking your vehicle354

(357,1)


NOTE. If you press the parking brake switchunder the following conditions, theparking brake will not be released.

– The ignition switch is in the“ACC” or “LOCK”/“OFF” position.– You are not depressing the brakepedal.

. The electronic parking brake systemusesmotors to apply the parking brake.Therefore, operating sounds from themotors will be heard when applying orreleasing the parking brake. Make surethat the motor sounds are heard whenapplying or releasing the parkingbrake.. If you operate the parking brakeswitch under the following conditions,a chirp will sound and the electronicparking brake indicator light will flash.

– When the electronic parkingbrake system has a malfunction.– When the electronic parkingbrake operation is prohibited tem-porarily.

. When you cannot release the park-ing brake due to, for example, a systemmalfunction, contact your SUBARUdealer and have your SUBARU dealerrelease the parking brake.. If you stop operating the electronicparking brake switch midway or oper-

ate extremely slowly, the system maydetect an error and turn on the brakesystem warning light. However, thisdoes not indicate a malfunction if thebrake system warning light turns offafter operating the switch.. When the electronic parking brakehas not been used for a long period oftime, the electronic parking brake mayoperate automatically after the ignitionswitch is turned to the “LOCK”/“OFF”position. This occurs due to checkingthe proper operation of the electronicparking brake and does not indicate amalfunction.. If you cannot release the electronicparking brake due to the switch mal-function, refer to the instructions de-scribed in “Automatic release functionby accelerator pedal” FP355.After activating the electronic parkingbrake, you may hear a short soundseveral minutes after the electronicparking brake indicator light illumi-nates as the system confirms properengagement. This sound is differentfrom the apply and release sound.This can occur:

– If the brakes are extremely hot.– If the car is parked on a steepincline.– If the electronic parking brake is

applied after the ignition switch isturned OFF.

This is a normal operating sound underany of these conditions.. The Auto Start Stop system is deac-tivated while the electronic parkingbrake is applied.. If you operate the electronic parkingbrake switch while the Auto Start Stopsystem is activated, the Auto Start Stopsystem will be deactivated. The elec-tronic parking brake will activate afterthe engine is restarted. After the elec-tronic parking brake indicator light isilluminated, release your foot from thebrake pedal.. When starting the engine or restart-ing the engine using theAutoStart Stopsystem, if you operate the electronicparking brake switch, the electronicparking brake indicator light may flashtemporarily. However, this is not amalfunction if the light turns off afterthe electronic parking brake is deacti-vated.

! Automatic release function by ac-celerator pedal

S07AP0301The parking brake will be automaticallyreleased by depressing the acceleratorpedal. However, the automatic releasefunction does not operate under the

– CONTINUED –

Parking your vehicle 355

7

Startingand

operating

(358,1)


following conditions.. Any door (other than the rear gate) isopen.. The driver’s seatbelt is not fastened.

If the parking brake is automaticallyreleased, the electronic parking brakeindicator light and the indicator light onthe parking brake switch turn off.! Auto Vehicle Hold function

S07AP0305The Auto Vehicle Hold function will auto-matically keep the vehicle stopped evenafter releasing the brake pedal when thevehicle is at a complete stop, such as attraffic signals.

WARNING

. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Holdfunction on a steep hill or slip-pery road. The vehicle may moveevenwhenusing theAutoVehicleHold function, causing seriousinjury or accidents.

. Do not use the Auto Vehicle Holdfunction to park the vehicle. Thevehicle may move unexpectedly,causing serious injury or acci-dents. Make sure to shift theselect lever to the “P” positionand apply the electronic parkingbrake in the following cases.

– When you are going to parkyour vehicle.

– When passengers are gettingin or out of the vehicle.

– When you are loading or un-loading.

. When using the Auto VehicleHold function, do not release thebrake pedal before the Auto Ve-hicle Hold operation indicatorilluminates. The vehicle maymove unexpectedly, causing ser-ious injury or accidents.

. Deactivate the Auto Vehicle Holdfunction in the following cases.Otherwise, the vehicle may moveunexpectedly, causing seriousinjury or accidents.– When washing your vehicle in

an automatic car wash– When being towed

CAUTION

. When stopping on a steep slopewith the Auto Vehicle Hold func-tion turned on, the electronicparking brake may be automati-cally applied. Then the electronicparking brake indicator light will

flash. In such a case, depress andhold the brake pedal while stop-ping. Otherwise, the vehicle maymove.

. When being towed, turn off theAuto Vehicle Hold function.

NOTEWe recommend turning on the AutoVehicle Hold function when stoppingon an incline. If the Auto Vehicle Holdfunction is turned off, the vehicle mayroll backward when driving off.

! To turn on/off the Auto VehicleHold function

S07AP030501

Auto Vehicle Hold switch


(359,1)


Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator lightTo turn on:Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch whenthe Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator light isOFF. Then the Auto Vehicle Hold ONindicator light will illuminate.

To turn off:Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch whenthe Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicator lightilluminates. Then the Auto Vehicle HoldON indicator light will turn off.

NOTE. When the electronic parking brakesystem has a malfunction while theAuto Vehicle Hold function is turned on,a chirp will sound, the Auto VehicleHold ON indicator light will turn off and

the brake system warning light will turnon.. Every time when starting the engine,the Auto Vehicle Hold function will beset to “OFF”.. If the Auto Vehicle Hold switch ispressed and held for more than 30seconds, the Auto Vehicle Hold ONindicator light will turn off, and thesystem will ignore any further pressingof the switch. To activate the functionagain, restart the engine.. When the Auto Vehicle Hold functionis deactivated while the Auto VehicleHold function has a malfunction, if youpress the Auto Vehicle Hold switch, achirp will sound.

! To operate the Auto Vehicle Holdfunction

S07AP030503

Stop the vehicle by depressing the brakepedal when all of the following conditionsare met. Then the Auto Vehicle Holdfunction will operate.. Driver’s door is closed.. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.. The select lever is in a position otherthan the “P” position.

Auto Vehicle Hold operation indicator lightWhile the vehicle is kept stopped by theAuto Vehicle Hold function, the AutoVehicle Hold operation indicator light willilluminate.

! To release the Auto Vehicle Holdfunction

S07AP030504

Perform any of the following operations torelease the Auto Vehicle Hold function.. Depress the accelerator pedal.. Depress the brake pedal again.. Apply the electronic parking brake.. Shift the select lever to the “P” positionwith the brake pedal pressed.. Press the Auto Vehicle Hold switch withthe brake pedal pressed (The Auto VehicleHold function turns off).

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(360,1)


When the Auto Vehicle Hold function isreleased, the Auto Vehicle Hold operationindicator light will turn off.

Under any of the following conditions, theAuto Vehicle Hold function will be auto-matically released and the electronicparking brake will be automatically ap-plied.. The Auto Vehicle Hold function hasbeen in operation for 10 minutes.. The driver’s seatbelt is unfastened.. The ignition switch is turned to the“LOCK”/“OFF” position.. The vehicle is stopped on a steepslope.. The Auto Vehicle Hold function ismalfunctioning.

In such cases, the Auto Vehicle Holdoperation indicator light will turn off andthe electronic parking brake indicator lightwill illuminate.

! TipsS07AP030505

. When the electronic parking brake isautomatically applied with the vehicle keptstopped by the Auto Vehicle Hold function,release the electronic parking brake byeither of the following operations beforestarting off. Then make sure that theelectronic parking brake indicator light isoff.

– Depress the accelerator pedal withthe driver’s seatbelt fastened and withthe doors closed.– Press the electronic parking brakeswitch with the brake pedal depressed.

. Under certain conditions, including amalfunction of the Auto Vehicle Hold, awarning buzzer will sound and a warningmessage will appear on the combinationmeter display (color LCD). All warningmessages should be strictly observed.. On a steep slope, the vehicle cannot bekept stopped by the Auto Vehicle Holdfunction. In such a case, depress and holdthe brake pedal.. When stopping on a steep slope withthe Auto Vehicle Hold function activated,the electronic parking brake may automa-tically applied after stopping, then theelectronic parking brake indicator lightmay flash. In such a case, depress andhold the brake pedal while stopped.Otherwise, the vehicle may move. Whengetting out of the vehicle, stop the vehicleon a flat surface, then apply the electronicparking brake.. If the Auto Vehicle Hold ON indicatorlight does not illuminates even afterpressing the Auto Vehicle Hold switch withthe operating conditions met, the functionmay have a malfunction. Contact yourSUBARU dealer for an inspection.

. You may hear a sound while the AutoVehicle Hold function is keeping yourvehicle stopped. This is normal, and doesnot represent a malfunction.. When you depress the brake pedal torelease the Auto Vehicle Hold function, anoperation sound or vibration may begenerated, or the brake pedal may returnslowly. This is not a malfunction.. While the vehicle is kept stopped by theAuto Vehicle Hold function, the brakepedal may feel stiff. However, this is not amalfunction.. When using the Auto Vehicle Holdfunction, depress the brake pedal firmly.Otherwise, the Auto Vehicle Hold may notoperate.. When the Auto Vehicle Hold switch ispressed and held for more than 30seconds, the Auto Vehicle Hold ON in-dicator light will turn off and further opera-tion of the switch will be ignored. To makethe switch usable again, turn the ignitionswitch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position andthen turn it to the “ON” position.! Emergency brake

S07AP0303

CAUTION

Use the emergency brake only incase of an emergency. If the emer-gency brake is excessively used, the


(361,1)


brake parts will wear down faster orthe brake may not work sufficientlydue to brake overheating.

NOTEWhile using the emergency brake:. The electronic parking brake indica-tor light and the indicator light on theparking brake switch illuminate and achirp sounds.. A sound may be heard from theengine compartment. This is the oper-ating sound of the brake that is acti-vated by the Vehicle Dynamics Controlsystem, and does not indicate a mal-function.If the foot brake has amalfunction, you canstop the vehicle by pulling the parkingbrake switch continuously.While applying the emergency brake, theelectronic parking brake indicator light andthe indicator light on the parking brakeswitch illuminate and a chirp sounds.! Electronic parking brake system

warningS07AP0304

CAUTION

If the brake system warning lightturns on, the electronic parkingbrake system may be malfunction-

ing. Immediately stop your vehicle inthe nearest safe location and con-tact your SUBARU dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the electronicparking brake system, the brake systemwarning light turns on. Refer to “Electronicparking brake light” FP179.

& Parking tipsS07AP02

When parking your vehicle, always per-form the following items.. Apply the parking brake firmly.. Put the select lever in the “P” position.

Never rely on the mechanical friction of thetransmission alone to hold the vehicle.

When parking on a hill, always turn thesteering wheel. When the vehicle is

headed up the hill, the front wheels shouldbe turned away from the curb.

When facing downhill, the front wheelsshould be turned into the curb.

WARNING

. Never leave unattended childrenor pets in the vehicle. They couldaccidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent op-eration of the vehicle. Also, onhot or sunny days, the tempera-ture in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough tocause severe or possibly fatalinjuries to people.

. Do not park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(362,1)


grass, waste paper or rags, astheymay burn easily if they comenear hot engine or exhaust sys-tem parts.

. Be sure to stop the engine if youtake a nap in the vehicle. If engineexhaust gas enters the passen-ger compartment, occupants inthe vehicle could die from carbonmonoxide (CO) contained in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

. If your vehicle has a bumperunder guard (optional), pay atten-tion to blocks and other obstruc-tions on the ground when park-ing. The underspoiler could bedamaged by contact with them.

. The braking power of the parkingbrake may not be sufficient whenstronger braking power isneeded (e.g., when parking on asteep slope while towing a trai-ler).

7-17. Auto Start Stop systemS07BH

The Auto Start Stop system is designed toautomatically stop and restart the enginewhen the vehicle is stationary for a shortperiod of time (while waiting for a trafficlight or in a traffic jam) after the engine haswarmed up. The system operates in orderto reduce fuel consumption, exhaust emis-sions and undesired idling noise.

& System operationS07BH01

CAUTION

The Auto Start Stop system is de-signed to automatically stop andrestart the engine for a short periodof time during idling. Do not use thesystem when parking the vehiclenormally.

So that it can be used safely and comfor-tably, in addition to driver operations, theAuto Start Stop system is designed toconstantly monitor the vehicle conditionsas well as the environment inside andoutside the vehicle, in order to controlstopping and restarting of the engine.After the vehicle has been completelystopped by depressing the brake pedalwith the select lever in the “D” position, the

engine will be automatically stopped.If you release the brake pedal with theselect lever kept in the “D” position, theengine will be automatically restarted.However, when the Auto Vehicle Hold ONindicator light illuminates, the engine willnot restart.

Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)(type A)

Auto Start Stop system360

(363,1)


Auto Start Stop indicator light (green)(type B)

If the engine is temporarily stopped by thesystem, the Auto Start Stop indicator lighton the combination meter will illuminate ingreen. This indicator light will turn off whenthe system restarts the engine.

NOTE. After starting the engine, if thevehicle is left idling without beingdriven, the Auto Start Stop system willnot operate.. Your vehicle is equipped with aspecial high-performance battery.When replacing the vehicle battery, besure to replace it with a genuineSUBARU battery (or equivalent) de-signed specifically for use in a vehicle

equipped with the Auto Start Stopsystem. For details, we recommendthat you consult your SUBARU dealer.

! Operational conditionsS07BH0105

The engine can be automatically stoppedby the Auto Start Stop system when all ofthe following conditions are met.. The engine is sufficiently warmed up.. The engine hood is closed.. The driver’s door is closed.. The driver’s seatbelt is fastened.. The malfunction indicator light (CheckEngine light) is off.. The airflow mode selection is set to amode other than “ ” mode.. The rear window defogger is not in use.. X-MODE has been turned off (ifequipped).

After the vehicle is stopped, the engine willbe automatically stopped when the follow-ing conditions are met.. The steering wheel is in the straightahead position.. The steering wheel is not being oper-ated.

NOTE. After the vehicle is stopped, theengine may not automatically stop

under the following conditions.– The vehicle is stopped on a roadwith a steep slope.– The vehicle is stopped by hardbraking.– Negative pressure in the brakebooster is not sufficient (modelswith the vacuum brake booster).

. After the vehicle is stopped, theengine may not automatically stop ifthe brake pedal is not fully depressed.Make sure to depress the brake pedalfirmly when stopping the vehicle.. In the following cases, it may takesome time for the Auto Start Stopsystem to operate.

– When the battery is dischargedbecause the vehicle has not beenused for a long period of time, etc.– The coolant temperature is low.– When the battery terminals havebeen reconnected after replacingthe battery, etc.

! Non-operational conditionsS07BH0106

In any of the following cases, the AutoStart Stop system will not operate.. When the Auto Start Stop warning light/Auto Start StopOFF indicator light (yellow)is illuminating or flashing.. When the malfunction indicator light(Check Engine light) is illuminating.

– CONTINUED –

Auto Start Stop system 361

7

Startingand

operating

(364,1)


. The electronic parking brake is applied.

. When the engine hood is opened.

. When the vehicle is at an altitude ofmore than approximately 10,000 ft (3,000m).. When the CVT fluid is not sufficientlywarmed up.. When the temperature of the CVT fluidis abnormally high.. When the vehicle battery is not in goodcondition.. When using the climate control system,the temperature difference between thesetting temperature and the temperatureinside the vehicle is significant.. When using the climate control system,the amount of air flow is significant.

NOTEThe Auto Start Stop system may notoperate if the malfunction indicatorlight (Check Engine light) or otherwarning lights on the combinationmeter are illuminating or flashing.

! Engine restart operational condi-tions

S07BH0107In any one of the following cases, theengine will be automatically restarted evenif the brake pedal is kept depressed.. When slightly releasing the brake pedal

on road with a steep slope and the vehiclebegins rolling. When further depressing the brakepedal. When depressing the accelerator pedal. When you move the select lever to the“R” position.. When turning the steering wheel. When operating the electronic parkingbrake switch. When activating X-MODE (if equipped). When the airflow mode selection set to“ ” mode.. When the climate control system canno longer maintain the set temperature.. When unbuckling the driver’s seatbelt. When opening the driver’s door. When activating the rear window de-fogger. When the Auto Vehicle Hold function isreleased, refer to “Auto Vehicle Holdfunction” FP356.! Engine restart non-operational

conditionsS07BH0108

To ensure safety, the engine will not beautomatically restarted if the engine hoodis opened when the Auto Start Stopsystem is in operation, even if the brakepedal is released. In this case, check thesurrounding area and restart the engine by

normal operation.Also, when the Auto Vehicle Hold opera-tion indicator light is illuminated, theengine will not restart.

NOTE. When the Auto Start Stop system isin operation, the brake pedal may feelstiff. However, this is not a malfunction.. In the following conditions, the en-gine will be automatically restartedeven if you keep the brake pedaldepressed.

– When the battery is discharged.– When the negative pressure inthe brake booster has lowered(models with the vacuum brakebooster).

. In the following cases, the length oftime that the engine is temporarilystopped by the Auto Start Stop systemmay be shorter.

– When the climate control systemis in operation.– When the outside temperature ishigh, or when it is low (because theclimate control system can no long-er maintain the set temperature).– When consumption of electricityby electrical components is high.

. When the engine is automaticallyrestarted by the Auto Start Stop sys-


(365,1)


tem, the power provided via the acces-sory power outlet will be reduced.Depending on the connected appli-ance, the power of the appliance maytemporarily turn off.

! Auto Start Stop warning lightS07BH0109

Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)(type A)

Auto Start Stop warning light (yellow)(type B)

The Auto Start Stop warning light willilluminate in yellow when initially turningthe ignition switch to the “ON” position. Thelight will turn off after the engine hasstarted.The Auto Start Stop warning light will flashwhen the Auto Start Stop system ismalfunctioning. We recommend that youcontact your authorized SUBARU dealerfor an inspection.

CAUTION

If the Auto Start Stop warning lightdoes not turn off after the engine hasstarted, the Auto Start Stop systemmay be malfunctioning. We recom-mend that you contact your author-

ized SUBARU dealer for an inspec-tion.

! Auto Start Stop OFF switchS07BH0104

Auto Start Stop OFF switch

– CONTINUED –

Auto Start Stop system 363

7

Startingand

operating

(366,1)


Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yel-low) (type A)

Auto Start Stop OFF indicator light (yel-low) (type B)

If the Auto Start Stop OFF switch ispressed, operation of the Auto Start Stopsystem will be disabled. The Auto StartStop OFF indicator light on the combina-tion meter will then illuminate in yellow. Ifthe switch is pressed once more, the AutoStart Stop system will turn on again. TheAuto Start StopOFF indicator light will thenturn off.

While the engine is temporarily stopped bythe system, if the Auto Start Stop OFFswitch is pressed, the engine will berestarted even if you do not release thebrake pedal.

NOTE. If the engine is restarted when theAuto Start Stop system is not opera-tional and the ignition switch has beenturned to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position,the Auto Start Stop system will turn onagain.. Be sure to turn the ignition switch tothe “LOCK”/“OFF” position when leav-ing the vehicle. Failure to do so couldresult in the battery discharging.

! AutoStart StopNoActivityDetectedindicator light

S07BH0110

Auto Start Stop No Activity Detectedindicator light (type A)

Auto Start Stop No Activity Detectedindicator light (type B)


(367,1)


If the operational conditions are not metwhen the vehicle is stopped, the enginewill not stop and the Auto Start Stop NoActivity Detected indicator light will illumi-nate. It will turn off when the vehicle beginsto drive.

& Displaying the Auto StartStop system status

S07BH02Approximate indications of the time thatthe engine has been stopped by the AutoStart Stop system and/or the amount offuel saved can be displayed on the multi-function display (black and white) orcombination meter display (color LCD).For details, refer to “Auto Start Stop time(models without combination meter dis-play (color LCD))” FP206 or “Basicscreens” FP198.

& System warningS07BH03

So that it can be used safely and comfor-tably, the Auto Start Stop system isdesigned to constantly monitor the vehicleconditions as well as the environmentinside and outside the vehicle in additionto driver operations, and to provide variouswarnings to the driver via the warning lightand/or indicator light illuminating or flash-ing and a buzzer sounding. For detailsabout the warning light and indicator light,refer to “Auto Start Stop warning light/Auto

Start Stop OFF indicator light (yellow)”FP191.! Warning buzzer

S07BH0301The buzzer will sound when the enginehood is opened while the engine isstopped by the Auto Start Stop system.When this occurs, the buzzer will stopsounding when the following operationsare performed.. The engine is restarted by normaloperation. (Refer to “Preparing to drive”FP316.). The ignition switch is turned to the“LOCK”/“OFF” position.! Display of warning messages

(models with combination meterdisplay (color LCD))

S07BH0302If a warning message is displayed on thecombination meter display (color LCD)while driving, a malfunction may haveoccurred in the Auto Start Stop system.In this case, the Auto Start Stop warninglight will illuminate or flash in yellow. Werecommend that you have your vehicleinspected at a SUBARU dealer as soon aspossible.

7-18. Hill start assist systemS07AU

WARNING

. The Hill start assist system is adevice only for helping the driverto START the vehicle on an uphillgrade. To prevent accidentswhen the vehicle is parked on aslope, be sure to firmly set theparking brake. When setting theparking brake, make sure that thevehicle remains stationary whenthe brake pedal is released.

. Do not turn the ignition switch tothe “LOCK”/“OFF” position whilethe Hill start assist system isoperating. The Hill start assistsystem will be deactivated andmay lead to an accident.

The Hill start assist system is a device tomake the following vehicle operationseasier.

– CONTINUED –

Hill start assist system 365

7

Startingand

operating

(368,1)


1) Starting forward facing uphill2) Starting backward facing downhillA) Brake pedal

When the vehicle has stopped with thebrake pedal depressed, the Hill start assistsystem operates.

Braking power is maintained temporarily(for approximately 2 seconds) by the Hillstart assist system after the brake pedal isreleased. The driver is therefore able tostart the vehicle in the same way as on alevel grade, just using the acceleratorpedal.

If the braking power of the Hill start assistsystem is insufficient after the brake pedalis released, apply more braking power bydepressing the brake pedal again.

The Hill start assist system may notoperate on slight grades. Also, the Hillstart assist system does not operate in thefollowing cases.

. When starting backward facing uphill

. When starting forward facing downhill

. While the parking brake is applied

. While the ignition switch is in the “ACC”or “LOCK”/“OFF” position

Hill start assist system366

(369,1)


. While the Vehicle Dynamics Controlwarning light is illuminated. Refer to“Vehicle Dynamics Control warning light/Vehicle Dynamics Control operation indi-cator light” FP182.. While the Auto Start Stop warning lightis illuminated. Refer to “Auto Start Stopwarning light/Auto Start Stop OFF indica-tor light (yellow)” FP191.

When using the Hill start assist system, abraking effect may be felt even after thebrake pedal has been released.

CAUTION

The braking power of the Hill startassist system may not be sufficientwhen strong braking power isneeded (e.g., when towing a trailer).

NOTEA slight jolt may be felt when thevehicle begins to move forward afterbeing reversed.

7-19. Cruise control (ifequipped)

S07AQ

NOTEFor models with the EyeSight system:Refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-ment for the EyeSight system.Cruise control enables you to maintain aconstant vehicle speed without holdingyour foot on the accelerator pedal and it isoperative when the vehicle speed is 20mph (30 km/h) or more.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control underany of the following conditions.These may cause loss of vehiclecontrol.– Driving up or down a steep grade– Driving on slippery or winding

roads– Driving in heavy traffic– Towing a trailerWhen using the cruise control, al-ways set the speed appropriatelyaccording to the speed limit, trafficflow, road conditions, and otherconditions.

NOTEMake sure the cruise control system isturned off when the cruise control is notin use to avoid unintentionally settingof the cruise control.

& To set cruise controlS07AQ01

Cruise control main button

1. Press the cruise control main button.

– CONTINUED –

Cruise control 367

7

Startingand

operating

(370,1)


The cruise control indicator light on thecombination meter will illuminate.2. Depress the accelerator pedal until thevehicle reaches the desired speed.

3. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the“SET” side and release it. Then release the

accelerator pedal.

NOTEWhen setting a cruise speed for the firsttime during a drive, both “SET” and“RES” may be used to set the initialcruise speed.

Cruise control set indicator light1) When setting the displayed unit as “MPH”2) When setting the displayed unit as “km/h”

At this time, the cruise control set indicatorlight is illuminated in the combinationmeter. The set speed will be shown onthe combination meter. You can changethe displayed unit by operating the combi-nation meter display. For meter details,refer to “Combination meter settings”FP167.

The vehicle will maintain the desiredspeed.

Vehicle speed can be temporarily in-creased while driving with the cruisecontrol activated. Simply depress theaccelerator pedal to accelerate the vehi-cle. When the accelerator pedal is re-leased, the vehicle will return to andmaintain the previous cruising speed.

& To temporarily cancel thecruise control

S07AQ02The cruise control can be temporarilycanceled in the following ways.

. Press the “CANCEL” button.

. Press the X-MODE switch to activateX-MODE.. Depress the brake pedal.

Cruise control368

(371,1)


WARNING

You can cancel the cruise control byshifting the select lever into the “N”position. However, do not shift thelever into the “N” position whiledriving except in case of emergency.If the select lever is shifted into the“N” position, the engine brake willno longer work. This could result inan accident.

The cruise control set indicator light in thecombination meter turns off when thecruise control is canceled.

To resume the cruise control after it hasbeen temporarily canceled and with vehi-cle speed of approximately 20 mph (30km/h) or more, press the “RES/SET”

switch to the “RES” side to return to theoriginal cruising speed automatically.The cruise control set indicator light in thecombination meter will automatically illu-minate at this time.

& To turn off the cruise controlS07AQ03

There are two ways to turn off the cruisecontrol:. Press the cruise control main buttonagain.. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” or“LOCK”/“OFF” position (but only when thevehicle is completely stopped).

& To change the cruising speedS07AQ04

! To increase the speed (by the “RES/SET” switch)

S07AQ0405

Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES”side and hold it until the vehicle reachesthe desired speed. Then, release theswitch. The vehicle speed at that momentwill be memorized and treated as the newset speed.

When setting the displayed unit as“MPH”:The set speed can be increased 1 mph(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the “RES” side.

When setting the displayed unit as“km/h”:The set speed can be increased 1 km/heach time by pressing the “RES/SET”switch to the “RES” side.

– CONTINUED –

Cruise control 369

7

Startingand

operating

(372,1)


! To increase the speed (by accelera-tor pedal)

S07AQ04021. Depress the accelerator pedal to ac-celerate the vehicle to the desired speed.

2. Press the “RES/SET” switch to the“SET” side once. Now the desired speed isset and the vehicle will keep running at thatspeed without depressing the acceleratorpedal.

! Todecrease the speed (by the “RES/SET” switch)

S07AQ0406

Press the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET”side and hold it until the vehicle reachesthe desired speed. Then, release theswitch. The vehicle speed at that momentwill be memorized and treated as the newset speed.

When setting the displayed unit as“MPH”:The set speed can be decreased 1 mph(1.6 km/h) each time by pressing the “RES/SET” switch to the “SET” side.

When setting the displayed unit as“km/h”:The set speed can be decreased 1 km/heach time by pressing the “RES/SET”switch to the “SET” side.! To decrease the speed (by brake

pedal)S07AQ0404

1. Depress the brake pedal to releasecruise control temporarily.

2. When the speed decreases to thedesired speed, press the “RES/SET”switch to the “SET” side once. Now thedesired speed is set and the vehicle willkeep running at that speed without depres-sing the accelerator pedal.

Cruise control370

(373,1)


& Cruise control indicator lightS07AQ05

Refer to “Cruise control indicator light”FP190.

& Cruise control set indicatorlight

S07AQ06Refer to “Cruise control set indicator light”FP191.

7-20. BSD/RCTA (if equipped)S07BM

The BSD/RCTA consists of rear cornerradars with Blind Spot Detection and RearCross Traffic Alert.

These functions enable the system todetect objects or vehicles to the rear,drawing attention to the driver whenchanging a lane or when driving in reverse.

WARNING

The driver is responsible for drivingsafely. Always be sure to check thesurroundings when changing lanesor reversing the vehicle.The system is designed to assist thedriver to change lanes or reversesafely by monitoring the rear andside areas of the vehicle. However,you cannot rely on this system alonein assuring the safety during a lanechange or reversing. Overconfi-dence in this system could result inan accident and lead to seriousinjury or death. Since the systemoperation has various limitations,the flashing or illumination of theBSD/RCTA approach indicator lightmay be delayed or it may not operateat all even when a vehicle is present

in a neighboring lane or approach-ing from either side.The driver is responsible for payingattention to the rear and side areasof the vehicle.

& System featuresS07BM01

BSD/RCTA consists of the following func-tions.. To detect a vehicle in a blind spot on anadjacent lane or a vehicle approaching athigh speeds (Blind Spot Detection).. To detect a vehicle approaching fromthe right or left while reversing the vehicle(Rear Cross Traffic Alert).

The system uses radar sensors for theabove functions.

NOTEThe BSD/RCTA radar sensor has beencertified by the radio wave related lawsof the U.S. , Canada and Mexico. Whendriving in other countries, certificationof the country where the vehicle isdriven must be obtained. For certifica-tion in the U.S. , Canada and Mexico,refer to “Certification for the BSD/RCTA” FP378.

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA 371

7

Startingand

operating

(374,1)


! Blind Spot Detection (BSD)S07BM0101

1) Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers asfollows.. If the system detects a vehicle in theblind spot, the BSD/RCTA approach in-dicator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) willilluminate.

BSD/RCTA approach indicator light. If the driver operates the turn signallever in the direction which the BSD/RCTAapproach indicator light is illuminating, thecorresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-cator light will flash.

! Lane Change Assist (LCA)S07BM010101

1) Operating range

The system warns the driver of dangers asfollows.. If the system detects a vehicle ap-proaching at a high speed in the neighbor-ing lanes, the BSD/RCTA approach indi-cator light(s) on the outside mirror(s) willilluminate.. If the driver operates the turn signallever in the direction which the BSD/RCTAapproach indicator light is illuminating, thecorresponding BSD/RCTA approach indi-cator light will flash.

BSD/RCTA372

(375,1)


! Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)S07BM0103

1) Operating range

The system notifies the driver of anothervehicle approaching from either side whendriving in reverse. This feature helps thedriver check the rear and side areas of thevehicle when moving backward.

If the system detects a vehicle approach-ing from either side while moving back-ward, it warns the driver of dangers in thefollowing way.. The BSD/RCTA approach indicatorlight(s) on the outside mirror(s) flashes.. A warning buzzer sounds.. An icon appears on the rear viewcamera screen (audio/navigation monitor)

! Limitations of the detectability ofRCTA

S07BM010301

Since the detectability of RCTA is limited,the RCTA may not operate properly inangled parking.

Example 11) The detection range of the radar sensors2) Area out of detection range of the radar

sensorsA) Vehicle that may not be detected.B) Parked vehicle

WARNING

An approaching vehicle (A) may notbe detected because the detectionrange is limited by the parked vehi-cle (B). Always be sure to check thesurroundings when reversing the

vehicle.

Example 21) The detection range of the radar sensorsC) Vehicle that may be detected.

NOTEThe system may detect that a vehicle(C) is passing in front of your vehicle.Always be sure to check the surround-ings when reversing the vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA 373

7

Startingand

operating

(376,1)


& System operationS07BM02

! Operating conditionsS07BM0201

The BSD/RCTAwill operate when all of thefollowing conditions are met.. The ignition switch is in the “ON”position.. The BSD/RCTAwarning light and BSD/RCTA OFF indicator light are turned off.. The EyeSight warning indicator is off.. The vehicle is driven at speeds above 7mph (12 km/h) (except when reversing).. The select lever is in the “R” position(when reversing).

The BSD/RCTA will not operate in thefollowing situations.. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator light ison.. The vehicle speed is below 6 mph (10km/h) even when the BSD/RCTA OFFindicator light remains off (except whenreversing).

NOTE. In the following case, the BSD/RCTAwill stop operating and the BSD/RCTAwarning light will appear. If the BSD/RCTA warning light appears, have yourvehicle inspected at a SUBARU dealeras soon as possible.

– When amalfunction occurs in the

system, including the BSD/RCTAapproach indicator light.

. In the following cases, the BSD/RCTA will temporarily stop operating(or may stop operating) and the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator light will appear.

– When the radar sensor becomessignificantly misaligned (If the or-ientation of the radar sensor isshifted for any reason, readjust-ment is required. Have the sensoradjusted at a SUBARU dealer.)– When a large amount of snow orice sticks to the rear bumper sur-face around the radar sensors.– When the vehicle is driven on asnow-covered road or in an envir-onment in which there are no ob-jects around (such as in a desert) fora long time.– When the temperature around theradar sensors increased exces-sively due to long driving on uphillgrades in summer, etc.– When the temperature around theradar sensors becomes extremelylow.– When the vehicle battery voltagelowers.– When an overvoltage occurs inthe vehicle battery.

When the above conditions are cor-rected, the BSD/RCTA will resume op-eration and the BSD/RCTA OFF indica-tor light will disappear. However, if theBSD/RCTA OFF indicator light hasappeared for a prolonged time, havethe system inspected at a SUBARUdealer as soon as possible.. The detectability of the radar sen-sors is restricted. The BSD/RCTA de-tectionmaybe impaired and the systemmay not operate properly under thefollowing conditions.

– When the rear bumper around theradar sensors is distorted.– When ice, snow or mud adheresto the rear bumper surface aroundthe radar sensors.– When stickers, etc. are affixed onthe areas of the radar sensors onthe rear bumper.– During adverse weather condi-tions such as rain, snow or fog– When driving on wet roads suchas snow-covered roads or throughpuddles

. The radar sensors may not detect ormay have difficulty detecting the fol-lowing.

– Small motorcycles, bicycles, pe-destrians, stationary objects on theroad or road side, etc.

BSD/RCTA374

(377,1)


– Vehicles with body shapes thatthe radar may not reflect (vehicleswith a low body height such assports cars or a trailer with nocargo).– Vehicles that are not approachingyour vehicle even though they are inthe detection area (either on aneighboring lane to the rear or be-side your vehicle when reversing).(The system determines the pre-sence of approaching vehiclesbased on data detected by the radarsensors.)– Vehicles traveling at significantlydifferent speeds– Vehicles driving parallel to yourvehicle at almost the same speedfor a prolonged time– Oncoming vehicles– Vehicles in a lane beyond theneighboring lane– Vehicles travelling at a signifi-cantly lower speed that you aretrying to overtake

. On a road with extremely narrowlanes, the system may detect vehiclesdriving in a lane next to the neighboringlane.. When the 8-inch audio/navigationsystem is performing a software up-date, the RCTA warning icons may not

be displayed on the audio/navigationscreen until the update is complete.

& BSD/RCTA approach indica-tor light/warning buzzer

S07BM03When the BSD/RCTA is active, the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will operateto alert the driver when there are vehiclesin the neighboring lanes. When reversingthe vehicle, the BSD/RCTA approachindicator light and warning buzzer willoperate to alert the driver that a vehicle isapproaching from the left or right side.! BSD/RCTA approach indicator light

S07BM0301

BSD/RCTA approach indicator lightIt is mounted in each side of the outsidemirrors.The indicator light will illuminate when a

vehicle approaching from behind is de-tected.The indicator light will flash to warn thedriver of dangers under the followingconditions.. While the indicator light illuminates, ifyou operate the turn signal lever towardthe side in which this light turned on.. When reversing the vehicle while thesystem detects a vehicle approachingfrom either side.

! BSD/RCTA approach indicatorlight dimming function

S07BM030101

When the headlights are turned on, thebrightness of the BSD/RCTA approachindicator light will be reduced.

NOTE. You may have difficulty recognizingthe BSD/RCTA approach indicator lightunder the following conditions.

– When affected by direct sunlight– When affected by the headlightbeams from the vehicles behind

. While the illumination brightnesscontrol dial is in the fully upwardposition, even if the headlights areturned on, the brightness of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light will notbe reduced. For details about theillumination brightness control dial,

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA 375

7

Startingand

operating

(378,1)


refer to “Illumination brightness con-trol” FP168.

! BSD/RCTA approach warning buz-zer (only when reversing)

S07BM0302A warning buzzer sounds along withflashing of the BSD/RCTA approach in-dicator light to warn the driver of dangers.

The setting of the warning buzzer volumecan be changed by operating the combi-nation meter display (color LCD). Fordetails, refer to “Menu screens” FP200.! Safety tips regarding the BSD/RCTA

approach indicator light/warningbuzzer

S07BM0303. In the following cases, operation of theBSD/RCTA approach indicator light andthe warning buzzer may be delayed or thesystem may fail to issue these warnings.

– When a vehicle moves to the neigh-boring lane from a lane next to theneighboring lane.– When driving on a steep incline oron repeated sharp uphill and downhillgrades– When going beyond a pass– When both your vehicle and avehicle driving on a neighboring laneare driving on the far side of each lane.– When several narrowly-spaced ve-hicles are approaching in a row.

– In low radius bends (tight bends orwhen making turns at an intersection)– When there is a difference in heightbetween your lane and the neighboringlane.– Immediately after the BSD/RCTA isactivated by pressing the BSD/RCTAOFF switch.– Immediately after the select lever isshifted to the “R” position.– When extremely heavy cargo isloaded in the cargo area.

. During reversing, operation of the BSD/RCTA approach indicator light and thewarning buzzer may be delayed or thesystem may fail to issue these warningsunder the following conditions.

– When backing out of an angledparking space– When a large-sized vehicle isparked next to your vehicle. (Thatvehicle prevents the propagation ofradar waves.)– When reversing on sloped roads– When reversing at a high speed

. The BSD/RCTA approach indicatorlight may illuminate when driving close tosolid objects on the road or road side (suchas guardrails, tunnels or sidewalls).. The BSD/RCTA approach indicatorlight may flash when turning at an inter-section in urban areas or a multilaneintersection.. The BSD/RCTA approach indicatorlight may flash and the warning buzzermay sound if a building or a wall exists inthe reversing direction.. In the following cases, the system maydetect a vehicle driving two lanes awayfrom your vehicle.

– When you are driving on the nearside of the lane of the correspondingvehicle.– When the vehicle driving two lanes

BSD/RCTA376

(379,1)


away is driving on the near side of itslane from your vehicle.

& BSD/RCTA OFF indicatorlight

S07BM08

! System temporary stopS07BM0801

1) BSD/RCTA temporary stop message2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator light

This display appears when the system isused under the following conditions.. Extremely high or low temperatures. When abnormal voltage exists for thevehicle battery.. When the radar sensor is significantlymisaligned.

Once the above conditions are corrected,the system will recover from the temporary

stop condition and the indicator will dis-appear. If the indicator remains displayedfor a prolonged time, have the systeminspected at a SUBARU dealer.! System temporary stop due to re-

duced radar sensitivityS07BM0802

1) BSD/RCTA temporary stopmessage dueto reduced radar sensitivity

2) BSD/RCTA OFF indicator light

This display appears when the detectabil-ity of the radar sensors is reduced. Oncethe condition is corrected, the system willrecover from the temporary stop conditionand the indicator will disappear. If theindicator remains displayed for a pro-longed time, have the system inspectedat a SUBARU dealer.

& BSD/RCTA warning lightS07BM04

! System malfunctionS07BM0403

1) BSD/RCTA malfunction message2) At first, this message will appear3) Then this message will appear4) BSD/RCTA warning light

This display appears when a malfunctionoccurs in the system. Contact a SUBARUdealer and have the system inspected.

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA 377

7

Startingand

operating

(380,1)


& BSD/RCTA OFF switchS07BM05

BSD/RCTA OFF switch

BSD/RCTA OFF indicator lightIf the BSD/RCTA OFF switch is pressed,the BSD/RCTA OFF indicator light ap-pears on the combination meter, and the

BSD/RCTA is deactivated.Press the switch again to activate the BSD/RCTA. The BSD/RCTA OFF indicator lightwill disappear.When this occurs, the BSD/RCTA ap-proach indicator light on the side of therearview mirror illuminates for a fewseconds and then turns off.

NOTE. In the following cases, the systemmay not operate properly due toblocked radar waves. Press the BSD/RCTA OFF switch to deactivate thesystem.

– When towing a trailer– When a bicycle carrier or othercarrier item is fitted to the rear of thevehicle.– When using a chassis dynam-ometer or free roller device, etc.– When running the engine andmaking the wheels rotate whilelifting up the vehicle

. If the ignition switch is turned to the“LOCK”/“OFF” position, the last knownstatus of the system is maintained. Forexample, if the ignition switch is turnedto the “LOCK”/“OFF” position with theBSD/RCTA deactivated, the BSD/RCTAwill remain deactivated the next timethe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

& Certification for the BSD/RCTA

S07BM06

! U.S.-spec. modelsS07BM0601

FCC ID: OAYSRR3A

CAUTION



BSD/RCTA378

(381,1)


! Canada-spec. modelsS07BM0602

! Mexico-spec. modelsS07BM0603

– CONTINUED –

BSD/RCTA 379

7

Startingand

operating

(382,1)


& Handling of radar sensorsS07BM07

1) Sensors

The radar sensors, one on each side of thevehicle, are mounted inside the rearbumper.To ensure correct operation of the BSD/RCTA, observe the following precautions.. Always keep the bumper surface nearthe radar sensors clean.. Do not affix any stickers or other itemson the bumper surface near the radarsensors.. Do not modify the bumper near theradar sensors.. Do not paint the bumper near the radarsensors.. Do not expose the bumper near theradar sensors to strong impacts. If a

sensor becomes misaligned, a systemmalfunction may occur, including the in-ability to detect vehicles entering thedetection areas. If any strong shock isapplied to the bumper, be sure to contactyour SUBARU dealer for inspection.. Do not disassemble the radar sensors.

NOTEIf the radar sensors require repair orreplacement, or the bumper areaaround the radar sensors requiresrepair, paintwork or replacement, con-tact your SUBARU dealer for assis-tance.

7-21. Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) system (ifequipped)

S07BN

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) is asystem designed to help avoid collisions orreduce collision damage when reversingthe vehicle. If a wall or an obstacle isdetected in the reversing direction, thesystem will notify the driver with a warningsound and may activate the vehicle’sbrakes automatically.

WARNING

. Reverse Automatic Braking(RAB) is not a system intendedto replace the driver’s responsi-bility to check surrounding areasfor vehicles or obstacles to avoida collision.

. The driver is responsible for driv-ing safely. Before reversing, besure to first depress the brakepedal and visually check thesurroundings.

. There are some cases in whichthe vehicle cannot avoid colli-sion, because the system opera-tion has limitations. The warningsound or automatic braking may

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system380

(383,1)


be delayed or may not operate atall even when an obstacle ispresent.

. The system is not designed todetect people (including chil-dren), animals or other movingobjects.

. Depending on the vehicle condi-tion or the surrounding environ-ment, the sonar sensor’s abilityto detect objects may be compro-mised.

. Do not remove the SUBARU gen-uine navigation and/or audio sys-tem. If the SUBARU genuinenavigation and/or audio systemis removed, the rear view cameraimage and help lines (distancemarker, dynamic guidelines andvehicle width lines) will no longerbe displayed.

. Even if the Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) system and objectdetection warning is ON, thevisible alert of Reverse Auto-matic Braking (RAB) system willnot be displayed. However, theaudible alert and its function willoperate.

NOTEThe Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)system records and stores the follow-ing data when automatic braking oper-ates. It does not record conversations,personal information or other audiodata.. Distance from the object. Vehicle speed. Accelerator pedal operation status. Brake pedal operation status. Select lever position. Outside temperature. The sensitivity setting of the sonarsensors

SUBARU and third parties contractedby SUBARU may acquire and use therecorded data for the purpose of vehi-cle research and development.SUBARU and third parties contractedby SUBARUwill not disclose or providethe acquired data to any other thirdparty except under the following con-ditions.. The vehicle owner has given his/herconsent.. The disclosure/provision is basedon a court order or other legally en-forceable request.. Data that has been modified so thatthe user and vehicle cannot be identi-

fied is provided to a research institutionfor statistical processing or similarpurposes.

& Reverse Automatic Braking(RAB) system overview

S07BN01The system detects objects using sonarsensors installed in the rear bumper.. If the system determines a possiblecollision with an object in the reversingdirection, automatic deceleration will beactivated. Also, beeping sounds will acti-vate.. If the vehicle is further reversed, auto-matic hard braking will be applied and acontinuous beeping sound will activate.

– CONTINUED –

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system 381

7

Startingand

operating

(384,1)


1) When reversing2) When either strong automatic braking or

torque control is applied to preventcollision (in this case, short warningbeeps or continuous warning beeps willsound)

3) When the vehicle is stopped by thesystem (in this case, the continuousbeep will remain sounding)

4) Object (e.g., a wall)

! Detecting rangeS07BN0101

1) Detecting range (width): Approximately 6in (15 cm) outside of the vehicle width

2) Range that the system cannot detect:Approximately 20 in (50 cm) behind therear of the vehicle

3) Detecting range (length): Approximately5 ft (1.5 m) from the rear of the vehicle

WARNING

If your vehicle is trapped on a rail-road crossing and you are trying toescape by reversing through thecrossing gate, the system may re-cognize the crossing gate as anobstacle and the brakemay activate.In this case, remain calm and eithercontinue to depress the acceleratorpedal or cancel the system. To


(385,1)


cancel the system, refer to “Cancel-ing the Reverse Automatic Braking(RAB) system operation” FP388.

& Operating conditionsS07BN02

The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)system will operate when all of the follow-ing conditions are met.

1) EyeSight warning indicator2) RAB warning light3) RAB OFF indicator light

. The ignition switch is in the “ON”position.. The EyeSight warning indicator is off.. The RAB warning light is off.. The RAB OFF indicator light is off.. The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)

system is set to on.. The select lever is in the “R” position.. The vehicle speed is between 1 to 9mph (1.5 to 15 km/h).

NOTE. In the following cases, the ReverseAutomatic Braking (RAB) system willnot operate. Promptly contact aSUBARU dealer to have the systeminspected.

– The EyeSight warning indicatoris illuminated.– The RAB warning light is illumi-nated.

. When the RAB OFF indicator light isilluminated, the Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) system cannot be oper-ated.. In the following cases, the systemmay not be able to properly detect anobstacle. Promptly contact a SUBARUdealer to have the system inspected.

– A sticker, paint, or a chemical isapplied to the sonar sensor or therear bumper near the sonar sensor.– The rear bumper is modified.– The rear bumper has been re-moved and reattached.

– The ground clearance is changeddue to the vehicle’s loading condi-tion or modification.– Ice, snow or mud is adhered tothe rear bumper near the sonarsensor.– The rear bumper is exposed tostrong impact, or the rear bumper isdeformed.

. When the 8-inch audio/navigationsystem is performing a software up-date, the Reverse Automatic Braking(RAB) system may not display thefollowing items on the audio/navigationscreen until the update is complete.

– Display Icon on/off Function– Distance Indicator Image– Warning Message

. On a steep hill, the system’s auto-matic braking ability will be reduced.. The system is designed to avoidcollisions by automatic hard brakingwhen the vehicle’s reversing speed isless than approximately 3mph (5 km/h).However, the system does not guaran-tee that the vehicle will be able to avoidcollisions in any situation.. If the vehicle is reversed at anextremely slow speed, the driver’soperation may be prioritized. In thiscase, automatic braking will not oper-ate.

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(386,1)


. The systemmaynot be able to detectthe following objects.

– Sharp or thin objects such aspoles, fences and ropes which maynot reflect the sound wave emittedfrom the sonar sensor.– Objects that are too close to therear bumper when the select lever isset to the “R” position.– Objects with a surface whichmaynot reflect the sound wave emittedfrom the sonar sensor such as achain link fence.

. Objects the system is not designedto detect.

– Pedestrians– Moving objects includingmovingvehicles– Objects which absorb soundwaves such as cloth or snow.– Objects whose surface has adiagonal angle.– Objects that are low to the groundsuch as parking blocks.– Objects that are high above theground such as objects hangingfrom above.

. The system may not be able toproperly detect objects or may causea system malfunction when the follow-ing conditions exist.

High frequency sound from othersources are nearby:– Horn sounds from other vehicles.– Engine sounds from other vehi-cles.– Sounds of air brakes– Vehicle detection equipment or asonar from other vehicles– A sound wave with a frequencysimilar to the vehicle’s system istransmitted nearby.– A vehicle equipped with the samesystem is reversing toward yourreversing direction.

Weather conditions:– Extremely high or extremely lowtemperatures in which the area nearthe sonar sensor becomes too hotor too cold to operate.– The sonar sensors or the rearbumper near the sonar sensors isexposed to heavy rain or a signifi-cant amount of water.– Fog, snow or sandstorm, etc.– Air is moving rapidly such aswhen a strong wind is blowing.

Parts attached to the rear bumpernear the sonar sensor:– Commercial electronic parts (foglight, fender pole, radio antenna) or

commercial attachment parts (trai-ler hitch, bicycle carrier, bumperguard) are attached.– Parts that emit high frequencysound, such as a horn or speaker,are attached.

Vehicle conditions:– The vehicle is significantly in-clined.– The ground clearance is signifi-cantly reduced due to the vehicle’sloading condition, etc.– When the sonar sensor is mis-aligned due to a collision or anaccident.

Surrounding environment:– A cloth banner, flag, hangingbranch or railroad crossing barsare present in the reversing direc-tion.– When reversing on a gravel orgrassy area.– When reversing in an area whereobjects or walls are adjacent to thevehicle such as narrow tunnels,narrow bridges, narrow roads ornarrow garages.– Wheel tracks or a hole is presentin the ground of the reversingdirection.


(387,1)


– When reversing over a drainagecover (grate cover).

– The path of the reversing direc-tion is inclined such as on a steepuphill.

– A curb is present in the reversingdirection.– When reversing downhill.

– When reversing on an unevenroad.

. In circumstances such as the follow-ing, it may not be possible to avoid acollision even when the system oper-ates normally.

– The roads are slippery.– The tire air pressure is not cor-rect.– The tires have become worn.– Tires which are not the desig-nated size are installed.– Emergency repairs were per-formed using a puncture repair kit.– The suspension was modified.

– Tire chains are installed.– Vehicle driving is unstable due toaccident or malfunction.– The brake warning light is illumi-nated.

& Reverse Automatic Braking(RAB) system operation

S07BN03When the Reverse Automatic Braking(RAB) system is in operation, the rangebetween the vehicle and the detectedobject will be indicated on the audio/navigation monitor. Also, warning soundswill activate in 3 levels to warn the driver ofa potential collision.While the RAB is operating, a warningmessage is displayed on the audio/navi-gation monitor and the combination meterdisplay (color LCD).

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(388,1)


Guideline of detecting rangeAlert level Range of detected object* Distance indicator Alarm pattern

Long proximity (ob-ject detected) 35 in (90 cm) or more Green No warning sound

Medium proximityalert (approaching theobject)

28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm) Yellow Short beeps

Short proximity alert(approaching closerto the object)

20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm) Orange Rapid short beeps

Closest proximityalert (too close to theobject)

20 in (50 cm) or less Red Continuous beep

*: Range of detection may vary depending on the environmental condition.

! Obstacle detected and alert levelS07BN0301

Long proximity alert (object detected)1) Green: 35 in (90 cm) or more

Medium proximity alert (approaching theobject)1) Yellow: 28 to 35 in (70 to 90 cm)


(389,1)


Short proximity alert (approaching theobject closer)1) Orange: 20 to 28 in (50 to 70 cm)

Closest proximity alert (too close to theobject)1) Red: 20 in (50 cm) or less

When an object is detected in the rever-sing direction, the range of detected objectwill be shown on the audio/navigationmonitor.A warning alarm will sound and, depend-ing on the speed, either torque control togenerate engine braking or automaticbraking will be applied.! Object close behind warning

S07BN0302

Automatic braking warning1) Warning message

If the vehicle continues to go in reverse,the system may determine the risk ofcollision with the object. In this case, shortwarning beeps or continuous warningbeeps will sound and either strong auto-matic braking or torque control will beapplied to prevent collision.

Depress brake pedal warning1) Warning message

Make sure to depress the brake pedalonce the vehicle has been stopped byautomatic braking. Until the brake pedal isdepressed, a message will be displayedon the audio/navigation monitor and thecontinuous beep will remain sounding.At this time, a warning message is alsodisplayed on the combination meter dis-play (color LCD).

WARNING

Depress the brake pedal immedi-ately after the system stops thevehicle by automatic braking. De-pending on the conditions of theroad surface and tires, the vehicle

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(390,1)


may not remain stopped, possiblyleading to an unexpected accident.

! After the vehicle is stopped by thesystem

S07BN0304

1) RAB OFF indicator

After the brake pedal is depressed, theRAB OFF indicator will illuminate and thesystem will temporarily stop operating.The RAB OFF indicator will turn off whenthe select lever is shifted to a position otherthan the “R” position.The system will operate again the nexttime the select lever is shifted to “R”position.

In circumstances such as the following, theReverse Automatic Braking (RAB) systemautomatically stops operating and theRABOFF indicator illuminates.– There is ice, snow, mud, or othersubstance on the sonar sensors.– The select lever was shifted to “R”when there is an obstacle located close tothe rear bumper.– A sound with a frequency close to thatof the sonar used by the Reverse Auto-matic Braking (RAB) system was de-tected.

NOTE. In the following cases, after thevehicle has been stopped by the Re-verse Automatic Braking (RAB) sys-tem, brake control is released and theelectronic parking brake operates. Fordetails about releasing the parkingbrake, refer to “Electronic parkingbrake” FP354.

– When 2 minutes pass after thevehicle is stopped.– When any door is opened.– When the EyeSight system mal-functions.– When the Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) system stops tem-porarily.

. The message/warning message willnot display for approximately 8 sec-onds after turning the ignition switch tothe “ON” position.

& Canceling the Reverse Auto-matic Braking (RAB) systemoperation

S07BN04The Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)system can be temporarily canceled byany of the following operations.. Depressing the brake pedal*. Depressing the accelerator pedal*. The accelerator pedal is kept de-pressed. (In this case, limited accelerationwill be canceled and the vehicle willcontinue reversing.). The select lever is shifted to a positionother than the “R” position.*: While the vehicle is stopped by the automaticbraking

NOTEThe system will be canceled if theobject is no longer detected.


(391,1)


& Reverse Automatic Braking(RAB)systemON/OFFsetting

S07BN05While the select lever is shifted to the “R”position, the below functions of the Re-verse Automatic Braking (RAB) systemcan be set by operating the audio/naviga-tion monitor.

1) ON setting key of Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) system

2) OFF setting key of Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) system

3) ON setting key of the object detectionwarning beeping sound

4) OFF setting key of the object detectionwarning beeping sound

When the ON setting key is shown, thecorresponding setting is ON.Touch and hold the ON setting key to turnthe setting OFF.

When the OFF setting is shown, thecorresponding setting is OFF.Touch and hold the OFF setting key to turnthe setting ON.

When the Reverse Automatic Braking(RAB) system is turned OFF, the followingindicator will illuminate.

RAB OFF indicator light: illuminates when theReverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system isturned OFF.

RAB OFF indicator light will turn off whenthe Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)system is turned ON.

NOTE. When the settings cannot be chan-ged, the ON/OFF setting key will begrayed out.. The ON/OFF setting key may begrayed out if the Reverse AutomaticBraking (RAB) system malfunctions,etc. In this case, turn the ignition switchto the “OFF” position and then turn it tothe “ON” position again. If the settingcannot be changed even after turningthe ignition switch to the “ON” positionagain, consult your SUBARU dealer.. The settings will be restored asfollows when the select lever is shiftedto the “R” position next time.

– Reverse Automatic Braking(RAB) system settings: default (ONsetting)– Object detection warning beep-ing sound: the setting selected byoperating the combination meterdisplay (color LCD)

Also, the following settings can be chan-ged by operating the combination meterdisplay (color LCD).. Warning volume. Sonar audible alarm ON/OFF

For details, refer to “Menu screens”FP200.

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(392,1)


& RAB warning lightS07BN07

1) RAB malfunction message2) RAB warning light

If the Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)system malfunctions, the above indicatorilluminates on the combination meter.Contact the nearest SUBARU dealer fordetails.

& Handling of the sonar sen-sors

S07BN06The 4 sonar sensors are located in the rearbumper. To ensure the proper operation ofthe Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB)system, observe the following precau-tions.

. Do not affix any stickers or other itemson the sonar sensor or the bumper surfacenear the sonar sensors.. Always keep the rear bumper surfacenear the sonar sensors clean.. Do not modify the rear bumper.. Do not paint the bumper near the sonarsensors.. Do not apply strong impacts to the rearbumper near the sonar sensors. If a sensorbecomes misaligned, a system malfunc-

tion may occur, including inability to detectobjects in the reversing direction. If anystrong impact is applied to the rearbumper, contact a SUBARU dealer tohave the system inspected.. Do not disassemble the sonar sensors.

NOTEIf the sonar sensors require repair orreplacement, or if the area of the rearbumper near the sonar sensors re-quires repair, paintwork or replace-ment, contact your SUBARU dealer forassistance.


(393,1)


7-22. Driver Monitoring Sys-tem (if equipped)

S07BP

Driver Monitoring System is introduced asDriverFocus in some countries.The Driver Monitoring System monitorspossible cases when the driver is notpaying attention to the forward direction,and also recognizes individual users.This systemwarns the driver of inattentive/drowsy driving, and can support safe andcomfortable driving by automatically re-trieving the following settings.– Driver’s position– Climate control setting– Meter setting– Multi-function display setting

When a user is registered, various settingsare automatically retrieved when the userenters the vehicle.The interior temperature setting can alsobe changed using gesture control. Refer to“Gesture control” FP403.

1) Camera

CAUTION

. Always use the utmost care indriving– Overconfidence because you

are driving a vehicle with theDriver Monitoring Systemcould easily lead to a seriousaccident.

. This system cannot detect if thedriver is feeling drowsy or isconcentrating on safe driving.

. It cannot judge if the driver isawake or asleep, if their drivingabilities have diminished, or ifthey are concentrating on safe

driving.. In some circumstances, the sys-

tem may not be able to correctlydetect the driver state.

NOTE. The user recognition camera doesnot save images, audio, or video.. The Driver Monitoring System maynot operate correctly when sunlight isshining into the vehicle in the followingways.

– Sunlight is shining directly (orthrough glass) onto the user recog-nition camera.– There are shadows on the dri-ver’s face caused by sunlight (orany light with a strong infraredcomponent).– There are large momentary fluc-tuations in the strength of the sun-light (or any light with a stronginfrared component) shining on theface.

. Correct detection may not be possi-ble when a device that includes aninfrared light source (such as a com-mercially available driver monitoringsystem) is installed in the vehicleinterior.

– CONTINUED –

Driver Monitoring System 391

7

Startingand

operating

(394,1)


. The Driver Monitoring System maynot operate correctly at the followingtimes when the driver is wearingglasses or sunglasses.

– The sunglasses do not allow theeasy passage of infrared light.– The surrounding scenery is re-flected strongly in the lenses of theglasses or sunglasses.– The eyes are hidden by the frameof the glasses and the user recogni-tion camera cannot detect the eyes.– The light from an infrared lightsource (LED) is reflected in thelenses of the glasses or sunglasses.– The driver is wearing an eye-patch.– The driver is wearing a hat setdeeply over the eyes.

. Depending on the type of mask,correct detection of inattentive/drowsydriving may not be possible.. Correct user recognition is not pos-sible if the eyes, nose, or mouth iscovered with a mask, muffler, sun-glasses, or other item.. The Driver Monitoring System maynot operate correctly when the eye-brows, eyes, nose, or mouth is hiddendue to item that is between the face andthe system.

. If a thick cover is attached to thesteering wheel, then depending on theposition set for the tilt/telescopic steer-ing wheel, the cover may block thesystem’s view of the face, and thesystem and the Driver Monitoring Sys-tem may not operate correctly.. Do not attach any stickers to theuser recognition camera or the infraredlight source (LED). If the user recogni-tion camera or infrared light source(LED) is covered by an obstruction, itwill not be possible to correctlymonitorthe driver.. If an accessory is hung from theinsidemirror, correct detectionmay notbe possible.. Do not touch the user recognitioncamera or the infrared light source(LED) directly with your fingers. If thereis dirt or a fingerprint on these parts, itwill not be possible to correctlymonitorthe driver. If there is dirt or a fingerprinton these parts, either wipe them with asoft dry cloth, or wipe gently with adamp cloth after first firmly wringingthe water out.. If the surface of the user recognitioncamera or the infrared light source(LED) becomes scratched, correct de-tection may not be possible. Be carefulthat hard objects do not contact theseparts.

. If there is condensation on the userrecognition camera or the infrared lightsource (LED), correct detection maynot be possible. If there is condensa-tion on these parts, wipe it away with asoft dry cloth.. When registering a user for userrecognition, avoid closing your eyesas much as possible.. If the user recognition success rateis low, it is possible that the user is notcorrectly registered. Delete the regis-tered data and perform registrationagain.. If a user frequently drives both withglasses and contact lenses, it is re-commended that registration be per-formed both when wearing glasses andwhen wearing contact lenses.. User recognition starts immediatelyafter entering the vehicle, however ifthe user looks downward or at thedriver side mirror for a long time, theuser may not be recognized.. When one person among twins oranother pair of persons with similarfacial features is registered, the otherperson may be incorrectly recognizedas the registered user when enteringthe vehicle.. If the person in the passenger’s seatleans into the driver’s seat, or in othercases when there are two ormore faces

Driver Monitoring System392

(395,1)


near the driver’s seat, the system maynot operate correctly.. There are cases when the systemconcludes that the user’s eyes areclosed when the user is looking down-ward during driving, such as whenchecking instruments or the navigationscreen. In such cases, the drowsydriving warning buzzer may sound orthe system may otherwise not operatecorrectly.. If the eyes are narrowedwhen laugh-ing or when there is a dazzling outsidelight, the system may judge that theeyes are closed and the drowsy drivingwarning buzzer may sound or thesystem may otherwise not operatecorrectly.. The drowsy driving or asleep warn-ing states are recognized from thelength of time and percentage of timethat the eyes are closed. The drowsydriving warning buzzer will not soundsimply when the driver feels sleepy oryawns.. Even when the driver does not feelsleepy, if his or her eyes are closed or ifhe or she blinks frequently, the drowsydriving warning buzzer may sound.. The inattentive driving warning buz-zer may sound if the driver leansforward or puts his or her head out ofthe window while driving.

. The inattentive driving warning buz-zer will not sound when the vehicle isstopped or travelling at slow speedeven if the driver is not looking ahead.. The Driver Monitoring System col-lects and stores data regarding drivers’facial features. Facial recognition datais stored locally and does not leave thevehicle. It is not transmitted to or storedby SUBARU or anyone else. The DriverMonitoring System may be disabledand any stored driver data may bedeleted by following the instructionsbelow. If the Driver Monitoring Systemis disabled, it will be unable to provideany of its safety or convenience func-tions.

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(396,1)


The functions which are available vary depending on the Driver Monitoring Systemsetting and the user recognition function setting.

Available functionsDriver Monitoring System*1

ON OFF

User recognitionfunction*2

ON

Inattentive/drowsydriving warning Available Not available

User recognitionfunction Available Not available

OFF

Inattentive/drowsydriving warning Available Not available

User recognitionfunction Not available Not available


(397,1)


Available function itemsDriver Monitoring System*1

ON OFF

User recognitionfunction*2

ON

Register User Available Not availableDelete User Available Not available

Delete All Users Available Not available

Update User Set-tings Available Not available

Delete Driver Posi-tion Available Not available

OFF

Register User Not available Not availableDelete User Available Not available

Delete All Users Available Not availableUpdate User Set-tings Not available Not available

Delete Driver Posi-tion Not available Not available

*1: The system can be turnedON/OFFwith the DriverMonitoring SystemOFF switch. Refer to “DriverMonitoring System OFF switch” FP402.

*2: The function can be turned ON/OFF in the multi-function display customization settings. Refer to“User Recognition settings” FP227.

The functions which are available vary depending on whether or not the user isregistered.

Available functions

The user is registered. The user is not registered.

User recognition function Available Not available

& User recognition functionS07BP01

WARNING

Perform registration, retrieving, ordelete of the seat position and out-side mirror angle before beginningdriving. There is the risk of anaccident if registration, retrieving,or delete is performed while driving.

When a user is registered, it is possible toretrieve the following settings.! Driver position personalization

S07BP0101. Seat position and outside mirror angleRetrieves the registered seat position andoutside mirror angle.. Reverse tilt angleRetrieves the registered reverse tilt-downoutside mirror angle.! Meter personalization

S07BP0102. Combination meter display basicscreenDisplays the screen which the user hadselected at the time when he/she lastexited the vehicle.. Fuel consumption screenDisplays the average fuel economy forpast driving by that user.

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(398,1)


! Multi-function display personalizationS07BP0103

. Multi-function display basic screenDisplays the screen which the user had selected at the time when he/she last exited thevehicle.. Fuel consumption screenDisplays the average fuel economy for past driving by that user.. Customization linked with the user recognition function

Menu Item

DateBirthday

Anniversary

Display/Beep

Screen Off

Favorite

Bypass Screen

Birthday Reminder

Anniversary ReminderTraffic Info

WeatherTurn by turn

Beep

Climate ControlMode SettingOccupant Detection

! Climate control personalizationS07BP0104

. Climate control settingsRetrieves setting the temperature, airflowmode, and other settings which the userhad selected at the time when he/she lastexited the vehicle.

NOTEWhen a recognized user exits thevehicle with MAX A/C ON, then thesetting which preceded MAX A/C ONis stored.

! Driver Monitoring System ON/OFFstatus

S07BP0105Retrieves the Driver Monitoring SystemON/OFF status which the user had se-lected at the time when he/she last exitedthe vehicle.


(399,1)


! Changing the personalization settingsS07BP0106

Item

Driver’s position personaliza-tion

Seat position/outside mirrorangle

Change the setting by using themulti-function display customi-zation function. Refer to “DriverMonitoring System settings”FP221.

Reverse tilt-down outside mir-ror angle

Meter personalization* Combination meter display ba-sic screen

When the customization screenlinked with the synchronizeduser function is selected andthe setting is changed, it isautomatically stored.

Multi-function display persona-lization*

Multi-function display basicscreenCustomization linked with syn-chronized user function

Climate control personaliza-tion* Climate control settings

Driver Monitoring System ON/OFF status

*: When the Driver Monitoring System is OFF, the Driver Monitoring System continues to store theconditions from immediately before the Driver Monitoring System was turned OFF even if thescreen was selected and the setting was changed.

& Inattentive/drowsy drivingwarning

S07BP02While driving, the Driver Monitoring Sys-tem monitors possible cases of driverinattention or drowsiness and warns thedriver.When the inattentive/drowsy driving warn-ing activates, the buzzer sounds and aninterrupt display appears.

NOTE. The inattentive/drowsy drivingwarn-ing operates regardless of the status ofthe user recognition function.. The inattentive driving warning doesnot activate when the turn signal isoperating or when the select lever is inthe “R” position.. When the pre-crash brake OFF in-dicator is illuminated on the combina-tion meter display, the inattentive driv-ing warning activates at the sametiming as usual even when a vehicleahead or obstacle is detected. Fordetails about the EyeSight system,refer to the Owner’s Manual supple-ment for the EyeSight system.

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(400,1)


! Inattentive driving warningS07BP0201

When the system monitors that the drivermay be inattentive, it warns the driver.When the inattentive driving warning acti-vates, the buzzer sounds and an interruptdisplay appears on the combination meterdisplay.When the EyeSight system has detected avehicle ahead or obstacle in the forwarddirection, the inattentive driving warningmay activate at earlier timing than usual.Refer to the Owner’s Manual supplementfor the EyeSight system.

! Drowsy driving warningS07BP0202

Possible drowsiness is detected from the amount of driver eyelid closure, and a warningis given to the driver. When the drowsy driving warning activates, the buzzer sounds andan interrupt display appears.

Combination meterdisplay Multi-function display Warning chime

Drowsy drivingBeep, beep... (Con-

tinues until the driver’seyes open.)

Very drowsy Beep, beep, beep,beep, beep (5 times)

Slightly drowsy — Beep

Not drowsy — — —


(401,1)


& Driver Monitoring System in-dicator/warning

S07BP03

1) Driver Monitoring System operation in-dicator light (green)

2) Driver Monitoring System OFF indicatorlight

3) Driver Monitoring System temporary stopindicator light

4) Driver Monitoring System warning light(yellow)

The Driver Monitoring System indicator/warning indicates the status of the DriverMonitoring System on the combinationmeter display.

NOTEWhen the Driver Monitoring SystemOFF indicator, Driver Monitoring Sys-tem temporary stop indicator, or DriverMonitoring System warning is illumi-

nated, the Driver Monitoring Systemfunction cannot be used. In addition,the following items cannot be selected.. Register User. Delete User. Delete All Users. Update User Settings. Delete Driver Position. Automatically retract seat on entry

! Driver Monitoring System operationindicator light (green)

S07BP0301This indicator illuminates when the DriverMonitoring System is operating.! Driver Monitoring System OFF in-

dicator lightS07BP0302

This indicator illuminates when the userhas pressed the Driver Monitoring SystemOFF switch and the Driver MonitoringSystem is not operating.! Driver Monitoring System tempor-

ary stop indicator lightS07BP0303

This indicator illuminates when the DriverMonitoring System is temporarily stopped.

NOTEThe Driver Monitoring System stopstemporarily in the following circum-stances.. When the temperature of the mainunit of the Driver Monitoring System is

high or low.. When the Driver Monitoring Systemcannot monitor the driver’s eye move-ment.. When the Driver Monitoring Systemcannot monitor the driver’s eyebrows,eyes, nose or mouth.. When the camera and the infraredlight source (LED) are covered and theDriver Monitoring System cannot moni-tor the driver correctly.

! Driver Monitoring System warninglight (yellow)

S07BP0304This warning illuminates when there is aproblem with the Driver Monitoring Sys-tem. Contact a SUBARU dealer to havethe system inspected.

& Using the Driver MonitoringSystem

S07BP04

! User recognitionS07BP0401

When a user is registered with the userrecognition function, the Driver MonitoringSystem performs the following.

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(402,1)


1. When the door is opened and thepush-button ignition switch is OFF, theuser recognition screen appears and theDriver Monitoring system starts user re-cognition.The user recognition screen may notappear when the door is opened in somecases, such as when only a short time haspassed after the push-button ignitionswitch was turned OFF. In such cases,user recognition starts when the door isclosed however the user recognitionscreen does not appear.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat and face forwardfor a few moments.3. When user recognition is completed,the Hello screen appears on the multi-function display.

At this time, the seat position, outsidemirror angle, climate control settings,combination meter display basic screen,multi-function display basic screen, andcustomization settings all change basedon the user information.

NOTE. When a multi-function display op-eration switch is pressed, the userrecognition screen is canceled, how-ever user recognition continues.

. When the select lever is not in the“P” position, the seat position will notchange even when user recognition iscompleted.. If user recognition fails, performrecognition again following the instruc-tions, refer to “When a user is notrecognized” FP401.. User recognition is not performedwhile driving.. If the seat position or outside mirrorangle are in motion at the time whenuser recognition is completed, then it isnot possible to retrieve the seat posi-tion, outside mirror angle, or reversetilt-down outside mirror angle.. If any of the following operations isperformed while retrieving of the seatposition or outside mirror angle, re-trieving of the seat position and outsidemirror angle is canceled.

– The power seat adjustmentswitch was operated.– The outside mirror adjustmentswitch was operated.– The “SET” button was pressed.– The “1” or “2” button waspressed.– The select lever was moved to aposition other than “P” position.


(403,1)


! When a user is not recognizedS07BP0402

In the following case, user recognition maynot be possible and “User recognitionstopped” may be displayed.. There is an object blocking the camera.

Remove the obstacle and follow thereference procedure to perform user re-cognition again.Refer to “Repeat facial scan” FP221.

1) Camera

NOTE. User recognition may not be possi-ble when there is dirt or fingerprints onthe user recognition camera. To clean,either wipe using a soft cloth or elsewipe gently using a moistened cloththat has been thoroughly wrung out.

. When the synchronized user func-tion is turned OFF, manual repeat facialscan is not possible.

& Registering and deleting auser

S07BP05Users can be registered in the DriverMonitoring System, and registered userscan be deleted. For the user registrationand delete procedures, refer to “DriverMonitoring System settings” FP221.

NOTE. When the Driver Monitoring SystemOFF indicator, Driver Monitoring Sys-tem temporary stop indicator, or DriverMonitoring System warning is illumi-nated, the following items cannot beselected.

– Register User– Delete User– Delete All Users

. User information can also be deletedby resetting the multi-function displayto the factory default settings. Whenthe settings are reset to the factorydefault settings, all user information isdeleted. The settings cannot be reset tothe factory default settings when theDriver Monitoring System is OFF.

& Registering and deleting dri-ver position personalization

S07BP06At the time when a user is registered, theseat position, outside mirror angle, andreverse tilt-down outside mirror angle areregistered at the same time. To change thesetting for the seat position, outside mirrorangle, or reverse tilt-down outside mirrorangle, refer to “Driver Monitoring Systemsettings” FP221.

NOTE. Start the user registration after ad-justing the seat position, outsidemirrorangle, and reverse tilt-down outsidemirror angle. If they are adjusted duringuser registration, it may be disrupted.Refer to “Power seat” FP36 or “Out-side mirrors” FP257.. If the ignition switch is turned to the“OFF” position before user registrationis complete, the information of theadjusted seat position, outside mirrorangle, and reverse tilt-down outsidemirror angle will not be saved.. When the user recognition setting isOFF, or when the Driver MonitoringSystem OFF indicator, Driver Monitor-ing System temporary stop indicator, orDriver Monitoring System warning isilluminated, the following items cannotbe selected.

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(404,1)


– Update User Settings– Delete Driver Position

. The driver position can be registeredor deleted only when a registered useris sitting in the driver’s seat and userrecognition is completed.

& Driver Monitoring SystemON/OFF settings

S07BP07NOTE. When the Driver Monitoring Systemis turned OFF after user recognitionwas completed, the user recognitionfunction stores the Driver MonitoringSystem ON/OFF state.. Even when the Driver MonitoringSystem OFF switch is set to OFF, theDriver Monitoring System automati-cally turns ON once the driver’s dooris opened and closed while the vehicleis stopped. This only occurs when theuser recognition setting is ON. Thesystem then reverts automatically tothe OFF state.. After the Driver Monitoring Systemwas turnedOFF, if the DriverMonitoringSystem is turned ON while the driver’sdoor is open, user recognition may notoccur correctly.

! Driver Monitoring System OFFswitch

S07BP0701

When the Driver Monitoring System OFFswitch is pressed, the Driver MonitoringSystem turns OFF. When the DriverMonitoring System is turned OFF, theDriver Monitoring System OFF indicatoron the combination meter display willilluminate. To turn the Driver MonitoringSystem ON, press the Driver MonitoringSystem OFF switch again.

NOTEEven when the Driver Monitoring Sys-tem is turned off, the user recognitionand automatically retract seat on entryfunctions do not switch on or offautomatically.

! User recognition settingsS07BP0702

The Driver Monitoring System User recog-nition function can be turned ON/OFF. Forthe setting procedure, refer to “DriverMonitoring System settings” FP221.

NOTE. The user recognition functionsetting cannot be changed for eachindividual user.. The default setting for the userrecognition function is ON.. When the user recognition functionis turned OFF, the following itemscannot be selected.

– Repeat facial scan– Register User– Update User Settings– Delete Driver Position

! Automatically retract seat on entryS07BP0704

The automatically retract seat on entrywhich automatically slides back the dri-ver’s seat when the driver’s door isunlocked and opened. This function canbe turned ON/OFF. For the setting proce-dure, refer to “Driver Monitoring Systemsettings” FP221.


(405,1)


CAUTION

Wait until the seat automatic retrac-tion is fully completed before sittingin the driver’s seat.

NOTE. If the seat position is not registeredin the access key fob memory, theautomatically retract seat on entryfunction can be used.. Even when the automatically retractseat on entry setting is ON, the auto-matically retract seat on entry functionautomatically turns OFF when the userrecognition function is OFF.. Automatically retract seat on entrycannot be selected when the DriverMonitoring System OFF indicator, Dri-ver Monitoring System temporary stopindicator, or Driver Monitoring Systemwarning is illuminated.. This function will operate if the seatis in front of the center of the seatsliding mechanism.

& Gesture controlS07BP10

Gesture control is a function that allowsyou to raise or lower the set temperatureon the driver’s side by 4 steps of thetemperature dial when a specific gestureoperation is performed in the area imme-diately in front of the navigation systemand/or audio system.Gesture control allows you to operate theclimate control system without taking youreyes off the road and reduces the time youtake your hand off the steering wheel.Gesture control can be used under thefollowing conditions:. The engine is running.. The climate control system is activated.Refer to “Climate control panel” FP267.. The select lever is in a position otherthan the “P” or “R” position.

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(406,1)


1) Camera2) When the gesture is an open palm, the

set temperature rises.3) When the gesture is a closed fist, the set

temperature lowers.

Face your palm toward the camera andgesture so that your fingers are in a vertical

position in front of the camera. Keep yourhand in that position until you hear a shortbeep sound.If there is no sound within a few seconds,remove your hand from the detection area,such as by returning your hand to thesteering wheel, and then perform thegesture again.The set temperature changes once pergesture operation. The temperature can-not be changed continuously by usinggesture operations. If you want to continuesetting the temperature, remove your handfrom the detection area, such as byreturning your hand to the steering wheel,and then perform the gesture again.

Gesture control is not available under thefollowing conditions.. Any of the following lights is illuminated.

– Driver Monitoring System OFF in-dicator light– Driver Monitoring System tempor-ary stop indicator light– Driver Monitoring System warninglight (yellow)

. The select lever is in the “P” or “R”position.. Driver Monitoring System does notrecognize the driver’s face. Refer to“Driver Monitoring System” FP391.

While you are driving the vehicle, gesturecontrol is not available when the followingapplies.. The turn signal or hazard warningflasher is activated.. The steering wheel is turned sharply.. The inattentive driving warning is acti-vated.. The drowsy driving warning is acti-vated.. Driver Monitoring System is in theprocess of recognizing the driver.. The vehicle is traveling at low speeds.

NOTE. Gesture control may not operatecorrectly under the following condi-tions.

– The sunlight (or any light sourcewith a strong infrared component) iscausing the driver’s hand to cast ashadow.– There are large momentary fluc-tuations in the strength of the sun-light (or any light source with astrong infrared component) shiningon the driver’s hand.– The driver is wearing gloves oraccessories on their hands.– There is something between thedriver’s hand and the camera.


(407,1)


– There is more than one handwithin the range of detection, suchas when the passenger’s hand iswithin the range of detection.

. Gesture control may not operatecorrectly when the following applies.

– The driver’s hand is too close tothe camera. If the camera does notrecognize your hand, move yourhand slightly closer to your face.– The driver’s hand is outside ofthe sensor range.– The driver’s hand is rotatinggreatly.– The driver’s hand is tilted at asharp perpendicular angle relativeto the sensor area.

. In the following cases, the systemmay mistakenly detect hand movementas a hand gesture, whichmay cause thetemperature setting to change.

– Your hand is within the sensorrange when you motion to a personoutside the vehicle.– You operate the inside mirror orroom lamp.– A rear passenger reaches for-ward from the rear seats and placestheir hand within the range of detec-tion.

. When the climate control system isoff, the systemmay beep in response to

the driver’s gestures.. The operational/non-operationalsetting of gesture control can be chan-ged by a SUBARU dealer. For details,we recommend that you contact yourSUBARU dealer.

& Certification for Driver Mon-itoring System (U.S.-spec.models)

S07BP08

CAUTION



– Canada-spec. models

– CONTINUED –


7

Startingand

operating

(408,1)


– Mexico-spec. models & How to get the source codeusing the open source

S07BP09Free/Open Source Software InformationThis product contains Free/Open SourceSoftware (FOSS).The license information and/or the sourcecode of such FOSS can be found at thefollowing URL.http://www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/RTOS/License/oss/DMS_0102/


(409,1)


S088-1. New vehicle break-in driving – the first

1,000 miles (1,600 km) .................................. 4088-2. Fuel economy hints........................................ 4088-3. Engine exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)....... 4088-4. Catalytic converter ......................................... 4098-5. Periodic inspections....................................... 4108-6. Driving in foreign countries........................... 4108-7. Driving tips for AWD models ......................... 4108-8. On-road and off-road driving......................... 412

Before driving.....................................................413During driving ....................................................413After driving .......................................................414

8-9. Winter driving ................................................. 415Operation during cold weather............................415Driving on snowy and icy roads..........................416Corrosion protection...........................................417Snow tires ..........................................................417

Tire chains......................................................... 418Rocking the vehicle............................................ 418

8-10. Loading your vehicle ....................................419Vehicle capacity weight ...................................... 419GVWR and GAWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating and Gross Axle Weight Rating).............. 420

Roof rails (if equipped)....................................... 421Roof tent (models with roof rails) ....................... 421

8-11. Trailer hitch (dealer option) ..........................423Connecting a trailer............................................ 424If not towing a trailer .......................................... 425

8-12. Trailer towing.................................................426Warranties and maintenance .............................. 426Maximum load limits .......................................... 426Trailer Hitches.................................................... 429When you do not tow a trailer ............................ 430Connecting a trailer............................................ 430Trailer towing tips .............................................. 431

Driving tips

8

Driving

tips

(410,1)


8-1. New vehicle break-indriving – the first 1,000 miles(1,600 km)

S08AA

The performance and long life of yourvehicle are dependent on how you handleand care for your vehicle while it is new.Follow these instructions during the first1,000 miles (1,600 km):. Do not race the engine. And do notallow engine speed to exceed 4,000 rpmexcept in an emergency.. Do not drive at one constant engine orvehicle speed, either fast or slow.. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid ac-celeration, except in an emergency.. Avoid hard braking, except in an emer-gency.

The same break-in procedures should beapplied to an overhauled engine, newlymounted engine or when brake pads arereplaced with new ones.

8-2. Fuel economy hintsS08AB

The following suggestions will help to saveyour fuel.. Select the proper gear position for thespeed and road conditions.. Avoid sudden acceleration or decelera-tion. Always accelerate gently until youreach the desired speed. Then try tomaintain that speed for as long as possi-ble.. Do not pump the accelerator and avoidracing the engine.. Avoid unnecessary engine idling.. Keep the engine properly tuned.. Keep the tires inflated to the correctpressure shown on the tire inflation pres-sure label, which is located under the doorlatch on the driver’s side. Low pressure willincrease tire wear and fuel consumption.. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.. Keep the front and rear wheels inproper alignment.. Avoid carrying unnecessary luggage orcargo.

8-3. Engine exhaust gas (car-bon monoxide)

S08AC

WARNING

. Never inhale engine exhaust gas.Engine exhaust gas containscarbon monoxide, a colorlessand odorless gas which is dan-gerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.

. Always properly maintain the en-gine exhaust system to preventengine exhaust gas fromenteringthe vehicle.

. Never run the engine in a closedspace, such as a garage, exceptfor the brief time needed to drivethe vehicle in or out of it.

. Avoid remaining in a parked ve-hicle for a lengthy time while theengine is running. If that is un-avoidable, then use the ventila-tion fan to force fresh air into thevehicle.

. Always keep the front ventilatorinlet grille free from snow, leavesor other obstructions to ensurethat the ventilation system al-ways works properly.

New vehicle break-in driving – the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km)408

(411,1)


. If at any time you suspect thatexhaust fumes are entering thevehicle, have the problemchecked and corrected as soonas possible. If you must driveunder these conditions, driveonly with all windows fully open.

. Keep the rear gate closed whiledriving to prevent exhaust gasfrom entering the vehicle.

NOTEDue to the expansion and contractionof the metals used in the manufactureof the exhaust system, you may hear acrackling sound coming from the ex-haust system for a short time after theengine has been shut off. This sound isnormal.

8-4. Catalytic converterS08AD

The catalytic converter is installed in theexhaust system. It serves as a catalyst toreduceHC, COandNOx in exhaust gases,thus providing cleaner exhaust.

To avoid damage to the catalytic converter:. Use only unleaded fuel. Even a smallamount of leaded fuel will damage thecatalytic converter.. Never start the engine by pushing orpulling the vehicle.. Avoid racing the engine.. Never turn the ignition switch to the“OFF” position while the vehicle is moving.. Keep your engine tuned-up. If you feelthe engine running rough (misfiring, back-firing or incomplete combustion), have

your vehicle checked and repaired by anauthorized SUBARU dealer.. Do not apply undercoating or rustprevention treatment to the heat shield ofcatalytic converter and the exhaust sys-tem.. Do not drive with an extremely low fuellevel.

WARNING

. Avoid fire hazards. Do not driveor park the vehicle anywherenear flammable materials (e.g.,grass, paper, rags or leaves),because the catalytic converteroperates at very high tempera-tures.

. Keep everyone and flammablematerials away from the exhaustpipe while the engine is running.The exhaust gas is very hot.

Catalytic converter 409

8

Driving

tips

(412,1)


8-5. Periodic inspectionsS08AE

To keep your vehicle in the best conditionat all times, always have the recom-mended maintenance services listed inthe maintenance schedule in the “War-ranty and Maintenance Booklet” per-formed at the specified time or mileageintervals.

8-6. Driving in foreign coun-tries

S08AF

When planning to use your vehicle inanother country:. Confirm the availability of the correctfuel. Refer to “Fuel requirements”FP310.. Comply with all regulations and require-ments of each country.

8-7. Driving tips for AWDmodels

S08AG

WARNING

. Always maintain a safe drivingspeed according to the road andweather conditions in order toavoid having an accident on asharp turn, during sudden brak-ing or under other similar condi-tions.

. Always use the utmost care indriving – overconfidence be-cause you are driving an All-Wheel Drive vehicle could easilylead to a serious accident.

. When replacing or installingtire(s), all four tires must be thesame for following items.(a) Size(b) Speed symbol(c) Load index(d) Circumference(e) Construction(f) Manufacturer(g) Brand (tread pattern)(h) Degrees of wear

Periodic inspections410

(413,1)


For the items (a) to (c), you mustobey the specification that isprinted on the tire inflation pres-sure label. The tire inflation pres-sure label is located on the dri-ver’s door pillar.If all the four tires are not thesame for items (a) to (h), seriousmechanical damage could becaused to the drivetrain of thecar, and affect the followings.– Ride– Handling– Braking– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration– Clearance between the body

and tiresIt also may be dangerous andlead to loss of vehicle control,and it can lead to an accident.

CAUTION

If you use a temporary spare tire toreplace a flat tire, be sure to use theoriginal temporary spare tire storedin the vehicle. Using other sizesmayresult in severe mechanical damageto the drivetrain of your vehicle.

All-Wheel Drive distributes the enginepower to all four wheels. AWD modelsprovide better traction when driving onslippery, wet or snow-covered roads andwhen moving out of mud, dirt and sand. Byshifting power between the front and rearwheels, SUBARU AWD can also provideadded traction during acceleration andadded engine braking force during decel-eration.

Therefore, your SUBARU AWD vehiclemay handle differently than an ordinarytwo wheel drive vehicle and it containssome features unique to AWD. For safetypurposes as well as to avoid damaging theAWD system, you should keep the follow-ing tips in mind.. An AWD model is better able to climbsteeper roads under snowy or slippery

conditions than a two wheel drive vehicle.There is little difference in handling, how-ever, during extremely sharp turns orsudden braking. Therefore, when drivingdown a slope or turning corners, be sure toreduce your speed and maintain an ampledistance from other vehicles.. Always check the cold tire pressurebefore starting to drive. The recommendedtire pressure is provided on the tire inflationpressure label, which is located under thedoor latch on the driver’s side.. Frequent driving of an AWD vehicleunder hard-driving conditions such assteep hills or dusty roads will necessitatemore frequent replacement of the follow-ing items than that specified in the “War-ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

– Engine oil– Brake fluid– Rear differential gear oil– Continuously variable transmissionfluid– Front differential gear oil

. There are some precautions that youmust observe when towing your vehicle.For detailed information, refer to “Towing”FP447.

Driving tips for AWD models 411

8

Driving

tips

(414,1)


8-8. On-road and off-roaddriving

S08AN

WARNING

. In a rollover crash, an unbeltedperson is significantly morelikely to die than a person wear-ing a seatbelt. The driver and allpassengers should fasten theirseatbelts before starting to drivein order to minimize the chanceof serious injury or death.

. Do not make sharp turns or quickmaneuvers unless absolutely un-avoidable. Such actions are dan-gerous, as you may lose control,possibly resulting in a rolloverwhich could cause death or ser-ious injury.

. Always maintain a safe drivingspeed according to the road andweather conditions in order toavoid having an accident on asharp turn, during sudden brak-ing or under other similar condi-tions.

. Whenever strong crosswinds arepresent, slow down sufficientlyto maintain control of your vehi-cle. Remember that your vehicle,

with its higher profile and centerof gravity, is more likely to beaffected by crosswinds than or-dinary passenger cars.

. Always use the utmost care indriving – overconfidence be-cause you are driving an All-Wheel Drive model could easilylead to a serious accident.

. Never attempt to drive throughpools and puddles, or roadsflooded with water. Water enter-ing the engine air intake or theexhaust pipe or water splashingonto electrical parts may damageyour vehicle and may cause it tostall. In this case, contact yourSUBARU dealer immediately. Re-gardless of its depth, it can washaway the ground from under yourtires, resulting in possible loss oftraction and even vehicle roll-over.

CAUTION

. After driving on gravel roads orrough roads, check the under-carriage of the vehicle body forany damage, deformation, orpaint removal. If you notice any

irregularities, contact a SUBARUdealer for an inspection as soonas possible.

. Frequent driving of an AWDmod-el under hard-driving conditionssuch as rough roads or off roadswill necessitate more frequentreplacement of the followingitems than that specified in themaintenance schedule describedin the “Warranty and Mainte-nance Booklet”.– Engine oil– Brake fluidRemember that damage done toyour SUBARU while operating itoff-road and not using commonsense precautions such as thoselisted above is not eligible forwarranty coverage.

Your vehicle is classified as a utilityvehicle. A utility vehicle features a highground clearance and may be equippedwith off-road tires (Subaru ForesterWilderness models only), which enablethe vehicle to be used for a wider range ofapplications. Because of the AWD featureand higher ground clearance, you candrive your SUBARU on ordinary roads oroff-road. It handles and maneuvers differ-

On-road and off-road driving412

(415,1)


ently from many passenger vehicles bothon-road and off-road, so take time tobecome familiar with your vehicle. Note,however, that your vehicle is not a con-ventional off-road vehicle or an all-terrainvehicle, and it should not be operated likeone. A higher center of gravity in relation tothe tread width as compared with ordinarypassenger cars makes vehicles of thistype more likely to roll over. In reality, utilityvehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles. Thehigh ground clearance of this vehicle is areal advantage, giving you a better view ofthe road and allowing you to anticipateproblems earlier. However, remember thatyour utility vehicle is not designed for high-speed cornering comparable to ordinarypassenger cars and that your vehicle couldroll over if you make a sharp turn at highspeed. If you do take your SUBARU off-road, certain common sense precautionssuch as those in the following list should betaken.

& Before drivingS08AN02

. Make certain that you and all of yourpassengers are wearing seatbelts.. Carry some emergency equipment,such as a towing rope or chain, a shovel,wheel blocks, first aid kit and cell phone orcitizens band radio.

. Secure all cargo carried inside thevehicle and make certain that it is not piledhigher than the seatbacks. During suddenstops or jolts, unsecured cargo could bethrown around in the vehicle and causeinjury. Do not pile heavy loads on the roof.Those loads raise the vehicle’s center ofgravity and make it more prone to tip over.. Never equip your vehicle with tireslarger than those specified in this manual.

& During drivingS08AN03

General precautions:. Drive carefully. Do not take unneces-sary risks by driving in dangerous areas orover rough terrain.. Slow down and employ extra caution atall times. When driving off-road, you willnot have the benefit of marked trafficlanes, banked curves, traffic signs andthe like.. Do not drive across steep slopes.Instead, drive either straight up or straightdown the slopes. A vehicle canmuchmoreeasily tip over sideways than it can endover end. Avoid driving straight up or downslopes that are too steep.. Avoid sharp turning maneuvers, espe-cially at higher speeds.. Do not grip the inside or spokes of thesteering wheel. A bad bump could jerk the

wheel and injure your hands. Instead,drive with your fingers and thumbs on theoutside of the rim.. Do not drive or park over or nearflammable materials such as dry grass orfallen leaves, as they may burn easily. Theexhaust system is very hot while theengine is running and right after the enginestops. This could create a fire hazard.

Precautions when driving under espe-cially dangerous situations:. When driving over bumps in the road,drive as slowly as possible to avoiddamaging the wheels, underside of thevehicle, etc.. If you must rock the vehicle to free itfrom sand or mud, depress the acceleratorpedal slightly and move the select leverback and forth between “D” and “R”repeatedly. Do not race the engine. Forthe best possible traction, avoid spinningthe wheels when trying to free the vehicle.. Do not perform the following opera-tions. Doing so may cause the transmis-sion to overheat or malfunction.

– Depressing the accelerator pedaland brake pedal at the same time whilethe select lever is in a position otherthan “P” or “N”.– Depressing the accelerator to holdthe vehicle in a stationary position

– CONTINUED –

On-road and off-road driving 413

8

Driving

tips

(416,1)


while on a slope and while the selectlever is in a position other than “P” or“N”.– Trying repeatedly to drive over abump that the vehicle cannot climbover.

. When the road surface is extremelyslippery, you can obtain better traction bystarting the vehicle with the transmission in2nd than 1st. Refer to “Selection of manualmode” FP333.. Do not rotate the tires at a high speed ifthe vehicle is stuck due to muddy, snowy,icy, or similar low-traction conditions, or ifany tire is not touching the ground. Doingso may cause the tires to burst or lead toan accident due to abnormal overheatingor damage to drivetrain components.. On rough roads and roads with largeundulations, have a leader guide you, orcheck the road surface in advance toselect a road where the ground will notcome in contact with the undercarriage ofthe vehicle body.Drive the vehicle at 6 mph (10 km/h) orless. If you hear any abnormal noise whiledriving, contact a SUBARU dealer for aninspection as soon as possible.. Do not allow the vehicle tires to besubmerged in deep sand, a river, or sea-water. If you have to drive under theseconditions, thoroughly wash the vehicle

after driving. If you hear any abnormalnoise while driving, contact a SUBARUdealer for an inspection as soon aspossible.. If the wheels are stuck, cutting thesteering wheel at a sharp angle may causethe steering components to be deformed.If you hear any abnormal noise whiledriving or if you notice any abnormalitiesdue to rough running, contact a SUBARUdealer for an inspection as soon aspossible.. Avoid driving over curbs. Tires, wheels,suspensions, and the mechanical compo-nents under the vehicle body may beunnoticeably damaged by the impact ofstriking a curb or driving on a rough road. Ifdriving over a curb is unavoidable, rideover it slowly and at a right angle to thecurb. When parking your vehicle, makesure that the tires are not pressed againstthe curb.. Do not drive for a long time while thevehicle is tilted to the left or right.

& After drivingS08AN04

. Always check your brakes for effective-ness immediately after driving in sand,mud or water. Do this by driving slowly andstepping on the brake pedal. Repeat thatprocess several times to dry out the brakediscs and brake pads.

. After driving through tall grass, mud,rocks, sand, rivers, etc., check that there isno grass, bush, paper, rags, stones, sand,etc. adhering to or trapped on the under-body. Clear off any such matter from theunderbody. If the vehicle is used with thesematerials trapped or adhering to theunderbody, a mechanical breakdown orfire could occur.. Wash the vehicle’s underbody after off-road driving. Suspension components areparticularly prone to dirt buildup, so theyneed to be washed thoroughly.

On-road and off-road driving414

(417,1)


8-9. Winter drivingS08AI

& Operation during cold weath-er

S08AI01

! MaintenanceS08AI0105

Carry some emergency equipment, suchas a window scraper, a bag of sand, flares,a small shovel and jumper cables.

Check the battery and cables. Cold tem-peratures reduce battery capacity. Thebattery must be in good condition toprovide enough power for cold winterstarts.

It normally takes longer to start the enginein very cold weather conditions. Use anengine oil of a proper grade and viscosityfor cold weather. Using heavy summer oilwill make it harder to start the engine.Keep the door locks from freezing bysquirting them with deicer or glycerin.

Forcing a frozen door open may damageor separate the rubber weather stripsaround the door. If the door is frozen, usehot water to melt the ice, and afterwardsthoroughly wipe the water away.

Use a windshield washer fluid that con-tains an antifreeze solution. Do not useengine antifreeze or other substitutesbecause they may damage the paint of

the vehicle.

If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid witha different concentration from the oneused previously, purge the old fluid fromthe piping between the reservoir tank andwasher nozzles by operating the washerfor a certain period of time. Otherwise, ifthe concentration of the fluid remaining inthe piping is too low for the outsidetemperature, it may freeze and block thenozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-tration appropriately for the out-side temperature. If the concen-tration is inappropriate, sprayedwasher fluid may freeze on thewindshield and obstruct yourview, and the fluid may freeze inthe reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations onvolatile organic compounds mayrestrict the use of methanol, acommon windshield washer anti-freeze additive. Washer fluidscontaining non-methanol anti-freeze agents should be usedonly if they provide cold weatherprotection without damagingyour vehicle’s paint, wiper blades

or washer system.

! Before driving your vehicleS08AI0101

Before entering the vehicle, remove anysnow or ice from your shoes because thatcould make the pedals slippery and drivingdangerous.

While warming up the vehicle beforedriving, check that the accelerator pedal,brake pedal, and all other controls operatesmoothly.

Clear away ice and snow that has accu-mulated under the fenders to avoidmakingsteering difficult. During severe winterdriving, stop when and where it is safe todo so and check under the fendersperiodically.! Parking in cold weather

S08AI0102

WARNING

Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keepsnow clear of the exhaust pipe andfrom around your vehicle if you parkthe vehicle in snow with the enginerunning.

– CONTINUED –

Winter driving 415

8

Driving

tips

(418,1)


CAUTION

. Do not use the parking brakewhen parking for long periods incold weather since it could freezein that position.

. When the vehicle is parked insnow or when it snows, raise thewiper blades off the glass toprevent damage to them.

. When the vehicle has been leftparked after use on roads heavilycovered with snow, or has beenleft parked during a snowstorm,icing may develop on the brakesystem, which could cause poorbraking action. Check for snoworice buildup on the suspension,disc brakes and brake hosesunderneath the vehicle. If thereis caked snow or ice, remove it,being careful not to damage thedisc brakes, brake hoses or ABSharness.

When parking for long periods in coldweather, you should observe the followingtips.1. Place the select lever in the “P”position.2. Use tire stops under the tires to preventthe vehicle from moving.

! Refueling in cold weatherS08AI0103

To help prevent moisture from forming inthe fuel system and the risk of its freezing,use of an antifreeze additive in the fueltank is recommended during cold weather.Use only additives that are specificallydesigned for this purpose. When an anti-freeze additive is used, its effect lastslonger if the tank is refilled whenever thefuel level reaches half empty.

If your SUBARU is not going to be used foran extended period, it is best to have thefuel tank filled to capacity.! Opening rear gate (models with

power rear gate)S08AI0104

CAUTION

Before operating the power reargate, check that there is no frost orsnow between the power rear gateand the vehicle body. If you noticefrost or snow etc. on the power reargate, remove it. If you forcibly oper-ate the power rear gate with frost orsnow, it may cause a malfunction.

& Driving on snowy and icyroads

S08AI02To prevent skidding and slipping, avoidsudden braking, abrupt acceleration, high-speed driving, and sharp turning whendriving on snowy or icy roads.Always maintain ample distance betweenyour vehicle and the vehicle ahead of youto avoid the need for sudden braking.To supplement the foot brake, use theengine brake effectively to control thevehicle speed. (Shift into a lower gearwhen necessary.)Avoid shifting down abruptly. Such beha-vior can cause the wheels to lock, possiblyleading to loss of vehicle control.

An anti-lock brake system (ABS) en-hances your vehicle’s braking perfor-mance on snowy and icy roads. Forinformation on braking on slippery sur-faces, refer to “ABS (Anti-lock BrakeSystem)” FP342 and “Vehicle DynamicsControl system” FP344.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control onslippery roads such as snowy or icyroads. This may cause loss of vehi-cle control.

Winter driving416

(419,1)


CAUTION

Avoid prolonged continuous drivingin snowstorms. Snow will enter theengine’s intake system and mayhinder the airflow, which could re-sult in engine shutdown or evenbreakdown.

! Wiper operation when snowingS08AI0201

Before driving in cold weather, make surethe wiper blade rubbers are not frozen tothe windshield or rear window.

If the wiper blade rubbers are frozen to thewindshield or rear window, perform thefollowing procedure.. To thaw the windshield wiper bladerubbers, use the defroster with the airflowselection in “ ” and the temperature setfor maximum warmth until the wiper bladerubbers are completely thawed. Refer to“Climate control” FP265.. If your vehicle is equipped with a wiperdeicer, use it. It is helpful to thaw thewindshield wiper blade rubbers. Refer to“Defogger and deicer” FP259.. To thaw the rear wiper blade rubbers,use the rear window defogger. Refer to“Defogger and deicer” FP259.

When driving in snow, if frozen snow startsto stick on the surface of the windshielddespite wiper operation, use the defrosterwith the airflow selection in “ ” and thetemperature set for maximum warmth.After the windshield gets warmed enoughto melt the frozen snow on it, wash it awayusing the windshield washer. Refer to“Windshield washer” FP247.

Snow stuck on the wiper arm prevents thewiper from working effectively. If snow isstuck on the wiper arm, pull off the road toa safe place, then remove it. If you stop thevehicle at road side, use the hazardwarning flasher to alert other drivers. Referto “Hazard warning flasher” FP164.! Lighting operation when snowing

S08AI0202Check that the headlights are clean beforedriving. If snow, frost or ice are attached tothe headlights, remove it.If the headlights are not clean, they will notlight the front normally. Also if the indica-tors and brake lamps are not clean, thevehicle will not be able to inform its statusto other drivers and it may result in anaccident.

& Corrosion protectionS08AI03

Refer to “Corrosion protection” FP460.

& Snow tiresS08AI04

WARNING

. When replacing or installing win-ter tire(s), all four tires must bethe same for following items.(a) Size(b) Speed symbol(c) Load index(d) Circumference(e) Construction(f) Manufacturer(g) Brand (tread pattern)(h) Degrees of wearFor the items (a) to (c), you mustobey the specification that isprinted on the tire inflation pres-sure label. The tire inflation pres-sure label is located on the dri-ver’s door pillar.If all the four tires are not thesame for items (a) to (h), seriousmechanical damage could becaused to the drivetrain of thecar, and affect the followings.– Ride– Handling– Braking

– CONTINUED –

Winter driving 417

8

Driving

tips

(420,1)


– Speedometer/Odometer cali-bration

– Clearance between the bodyand tires

It also may be dangerous andlead to loss of vehicle control,and it can lead to an accident.

. Do not use a combination ofradial, belted bias or bias tiressince it may cause dangeroushandling characteristics and leadto an accident.

Your vehicle is equipped with “all seasontires” as original equipment, which aredesigned to provide an adequate measureof traction, handling and braking perfor-mance in year-round driving. In winter, itmay be possible to enhance performancethrough use of tires designed specificallyfor winter driving conditions.When you choose to install winter tires onyour vehicle, be sure to use the correct tiresize and type. You must install four wintertires that are of the same size, construc-tion, brand and load range and you shouldnever mix radial, belted bias or bias tiressince this may result in dangerous hand-ling characteristics. When you choose atire, make sure that there is enoughclearance between the tire and vehicle

body.

Remember to drive with care at all timesregardless of the type of tires on yourvehicle.

& Tire chainsS08AI05

CAUTION

Tire chains cannot be used on yourvehicle because of the lack of clear-ance between the tires and vehiclebody.

NOTEWhen tire chains cannot be used, use ofanother type of traction device (such asspring chains) may be acceptable if useon your vehicle is recommended by thedevice manufacturer, taking into ac-count tire size and road conditions.Follow the device manufacturer’s in-structions, especially regarding max-imum vehicle speed.To help avoid damage to your vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or remove thedevice if it is contacting your vehicle,and do not spin your wheels. Damagecaused to your vehicle by use of atraction device is not covered underwarranty.

Make certain that any traction deviceyou use is an SAE class S device, anduse it on the front wheels only. Alwaysuse the utmost care when driving with atraction device. Overconfidence be-cause you are using a traction devicecould easily lead to a serious accident.

& Rocking the vehicleS08AI06

If you must rock the vehicle to free it fromsnow, sand, or mud, depress the accel-erator pedal slightly and move the selectlever back and forth between “D” and “R”repeatedly. Do not race the engine. For thebest possible traction, avoid spinning thewheels when trying to free the vehicle.When the road surface is extremelyslippery, you can obtain better traction bystarting the vehicle with the transmission in2nd than 1st.

For information about holding the trans-mission in the 2nd position, refer to“Selection of manual mode” FP333.

Winter driving418

(421,1)


8-10. Loading your vehicleS08AJ

WARNING

. Never allow passengers to rideon a folded rear seatback in thecargo area. Doing so may resultin serious injury.

. Never stack luggage or othercargo higher than the top of theseatback because it could tumbleforward and injure passengers inthe event of a sudden stop oraccident. Keep luggage or cargolow, as close to the floor aspossible.

WARNING

. When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secure it wheneveryou can to prevent it from beingthrown around inside the vehicleduring sudden stops, sharp turnsor in an accident.

. Do not pile heavy loads on theroof. These loads raise the vehi-cle’s center of gravity andmake itmore prone to tip over.

. Secure lengthy items properly toprevent them from shooting for-ward and causing serious injuryduring a sudden stop.

. Never exceed the maximum loadlimit. If you do, some parts onyour vehicle can break, or it canchange the way your vehiclehandles. This could result in lossof control and cause personalinjury. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

. Do not place anything on theextended cargo area cover. Suchitems could tumble forward in theevent of a sudden stop or acollision. This could cause ser-ious injury.

CAUTION

Do not carry spray cans, containerswith flammable or corrosive liquidsor any other dangerous items insidethe vehicle.

NOTEFor better fuel economy, do not carryunneeded cargo.

& Vehicle capacity weightS08AJ01

– CONTINUED –

Loading your vehicle 419

8

Driving

tips

(422,1)


Vehicle placardThe load capacity of your vehicle isdetermined by weight, not by availablecargo space. The maximum load you cancarry in your vehicle is shown on thevehicle placard attached to the driver’sside door pillar. It includes the total weightof the driver and all passengers and theirbelongings, any optional equipment suchas a trailer hitch, roof rack or bike carrier,etc., and the tongue load of a trailer.

& GVWR and GAWR (Gross Ve-hicle Weight Rating andGross Axle Weight Rating)

S08AJ02

Certification labelThe certification label attached to thebottom of driver’s side door pillar showsGVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) andGAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating).

The GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) mustnever exceed the GVWR. GVW is thecombined total of weight of the vehicle,fuel, driver, all passengers, luggage, anyoptional equipment and trailer tongueload. Therefore, the GVW changes de-pending on the situation. The GVWRequals Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle – including standard equipment,fluids, emergency tools and spare tire

assembly) plus the vehicle capacityweight.

In addition, the total weight applied to eachaxle (GAW) must never exceed theGAWR. The front and rear GAWs can beadjusted by relocating luggage inside thevehicle.Even if the total weight of your luggage islower than the vehicle capacity weight,either front or rear GAW may exceed theGAWR, depending on the distribution ofthe luggage.When possible, the load should be evenlydistributed throughout the vehicle.

If you carry heavy loads in the vehicle, youshould confirm that GVW and front andrear GAWs are within the GVWR andGAWR by putting your vehicle on a vehiclescale, found at a commercial weighingstation.

Do not use replacement tires with a lowerload range than the originals because theymay lower the GVWR and GAWR limita-tions. Replacement tires with a higher loadrange than the originals do not increasethe GVWR and GAWR limitations.

Loading your vehicle420

(423,1)


& Roof rails (if equipped)S08AJ04

1) Roof rails

Cargo can be carried on the roof aftersecuring the crossbars to the roof rails andinstalling an appropriate carrying attach-ment. When installing crossbars and acarrying attachment, follow the manufac-turer’s instructions. The roof rail system isdesigned to carry loads (cargo, crossbarsand carrying attachment) of no more than176 lbs (80 kg). Be sure not to exceedyour vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR.

CAUTION

. When using a carrying attach-ment, make sure that the totalcarrying load of the cargo, cross-bars and carrying attachment

does not exceed 176 lbs (80 kg).Overloading may cause damageto the vehicle. Read the manufac-turer’s instructions and pay at-tention to not exceed the loadlimit of the parts.

. For cargo carrying purposes, theroof rails must be used togetherwith the SUBARU recommendedcrossbars and any appropriatecarrying attachment that may beneeded. The roof rails must neverbe used alone to carry cargo.Otherwise, damage to the roofor paint, or a dangerous roadhazard due to loss of cargo couldresult.

NOTERemember that the vehicle’s center ofgravity is altered with the weight of theload on the roof, thus affecting drivingcharacteristics.Drive carefully. Avoid rapid starts, hardcornering and abrupt stops. Crosswindeffects will be increased.

& Roof tent (models with roofrails)

S08AJ14

WARNING

Adding weight to the vehicle’s roofcan adversely affect handling, brak-ing, and rollover resistance. Thevehicle must never be driven with atotal roof rail load in excess of 176lbs (80 kg).

CAUTION

. The roof rail load limit for sta-tionary vehicles (700 lbs (317 kg)(for Forester), 800 lbs (360 kg)( f o r S u b a r u F o r e s t e rWilderness)) applies only when

– CONTINUED –

Loading your vehicle 421

8

Driving

tips

(424,1)


the vehicle is parked and the loadis evenly distributed left/right andfront/rear and the roof crossbarsand roof tent are tightly securedto the vehicle. If these conditionsare not met, the load limit will belower.

. The maximum load limit of theroof crossbars must be obtainedfrom the manufacturer or retailerof the roof rack. When driving thevehicle, the maximum roof railload is 176 lbs (80 kg) or thecrossbar load limit (whichever islower).

. Roof tents can only be used onvehicles originally equipped withroof rails. Otherwise, damage tothe vehicle’s roof may occur.

On vehicles equipped with roof rails, rooftents may be used under certain condi-tions at your own risk.! When driving the vehicle

S08AJ1401The total weight on the roof rails, includingthe roof crossbars and roof tent, must notexceed the vehicle’s roof rail load of 176lbs (80 kg), evenly distributed.

A: Roof railsB: Roof crossbarsC: Roof tent

B + C < 176 lbs (80 kg)

! When the vehicle is parked on levelground

S08AJ1402

A: Roof railsB: Roof crossbarsC: Roof tentD: Occupants in the roof tent

Loading your vehicle422

(425,1)


The total weight on the roof rails –including the roof crossbars, roof tent,and all occupants and contents in the rooftent – must not exceed either the vehicle’sroof rail load limit (700 lbs (317 kg) (forForester), 800 lbs (360 kg) (for SubaruForester Wilderness)), evenly distributed,or the load limit of the roof crossbars,whichever is lower.

Load limit of the roof rail (A).Forester: B + C + D < 700 lbs (317 kg)Subaru Forester Wilderness: B + C + D< 800 lbs (360 kg)

Exceeding this load limit could causedamage to the vehicle or racking system.The vehicle must never be driven withoccupants in the roof tent. Before thevehicle is driven, occupants and cargomust be removed from the roof tent andthe roof rail load must be restored to withinthe roof rail load limit of 176 lbs (80 kg).Refer to the user manual that accompa-nied the roof tent for important safetyinformation and instructions on the properinstallation and use of the tent.

8-11. Trailer hitch (dealer op-tion)

S08AK

WARNING

. Never exceed the maximumweight specified for the trailerhitch. Exceeding the maximumweight could cause an accidentresulting in serious personal in-juries. Permissible trailer weightchanges depending on the situa-tion. For possible recommenda-tions and limitations, refer to“Trailer towing” FP426.

. Trailer brakes are required whenthe towing load exceeds 1,000 lbs(453 kg). Be sure your trailer hassafety chains and that each chainwill hold the trailer’s maximumgross weight. Towing trailerswithout safety chains could cre-ate a traffic safety hazard if thetrailer separates from the hitchdue to coupling damage or hitchball damage.

. Be sure to check the hitch pin andsafety pin for positive lockingplacement before towing a trailer.If the ball mount comes off thehitch receiver, the trailer could

get loose and create a trafficsafety hazard.

. Although towing regulations fortrailer or caravan vehicles varyby state/region, all regulationsagree that specifications suchas the maximum gross trailerweight must not exceed the les-ser of the following:– Maximum gross trailer weight– Maximum gross tongue

weight– GVWR– GAWR

. Failure to comply with the proce-dures set forth will not onlycompromise your safety, but willalso negate your insurance cov-erage and/ormay violate the stateroad and traffic acts and regula-tions.

. Use only the recommendedSUBARU ball mount that hasbeen designed to work with thistrailer hitch. Use the hitch only asa weight carrying hitch. Do notuse with any type of weight dis-tributing hitch.

. The standard bumper beam mustbe installed after you remove the

– CONTINUED –

Trailer hitch (dealer option) 423

8

Driving

tips

(426,1)


trailer hitch. Consult a SUBARUdealer for purchase of a standardbumper beam if you do not havethe original.

. Safety performance is decreasedand there is increased risk ofinjury to passengers in the caseof an accident if the trailer hitchor a standard bumper beam is notinstalled. One of them must al-ways be installed on the vehicle.

. If a trailer hitch is installed, it isnot possible to install the reartowing hook.

The maximum gross trailer weight andmaximum gross tongue weight are indi-cated in the following table.

When towing a trailer with brakesMaximumgross trailerweight

Maximumgross tongueweight

Except forSubaruForesterWilderness

1,500 lbs (680kg)

150 lbs (68kg)

For SubaruForesterWilderness

3,000 lbs(1,360 kg)

300 lbs (136kg)

When towing a trailer without brakesMaximum gross trai-ler weight

Maximum gross ton-gue weight

1,000 lbs (453 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

When towing a trailer, refer to “Trailertowing” FP426.

& Connecting a trailerS08AK01

1) Ball mount2) Hitch pin3) Safety pinA) Hitch receiver tube

1. Insert the ball mount into the hitch

Trailer hitch (dealer option)424

(427,1)


receiver tube.2. Insert the hitch pin into the hole locatedon the hitch receiver tube so that the pinpasses through the ball mount.3. Insert the safety pin through the pro-vided hole on the hitch pin securely.4. Check the ball mount assembly bypulling on it to make sure it does not comeoff the hitch receiver.

1) Hitch ball installation point2) Hooks for safety chains

5. Use only a hitch ball that is appropriatefor the ball mount and your trailer. Thehitch ball must be securely installed on theball mount.6. Connect your trailer to the hitch ball.7. Connect the trailer and the hitch withsafety chains that will hold the trailer’s

maximumgross weight. The chains shouldcross under the trailer tongue to preventthe tongue from dropping onto the groundin case it should disconnect from the hitchball. Allow sufficient slack in the chainstaking tight turn situations into account;however, be careful not to let them drag onthe ground.

WARNING

Do not connect safety chains to anypart of the vehicle other than thesafety chain hooks.

Hitch harness connector

8. Connect the hitch electrical wire har-ness’s black four-pin electrical wire con-nector to the towing trailer’s wire harness.

9. Confirm proper function of the hitchelectrical wire harness by individually andcombination activating the brake, stop andturn signal lights on the trailer.

NOTEAlways disconnect the trailer electricalwire harness before launching or re-trieving a watercraft.

& If not towing a trailerS08AK02

. Remove the ball mount from the hitchreceiver tube.. Place the dust cap over the four-pinconnector of the hitch electrical wireharness to protect against possible da-mage.. Occasionally lubricate terminals of thefour-pin connector using terminal grease.

Trailer hitch (dealer option) 425

8

Driving

tips

(428,1)


8-12. Trailer towingS08AL

Your vehicle is designed and intended tobe used primarily as a passenger-carryingvehicle. Towing a trailer puts additionalloads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain,brakes, tires and suspension and has anadverse effect on fuel economy.If you do decide to tow a trailer, your safetyand satisfaction depend upon proper useof correct equipment and cautious opera-tion of your vehicle.Seek the advice of your SUBARU dealer toassist you in purchasing a hitch and othernecessary towing equipment appropriatefor your vehicle. Do not use towing equip-ment other than genuine SUBARU towingequipment. In addition, be sure to followthe instructions for proper installation anduse provided by the trailer or caravan’smanufacturer.SUBARU assumes no responsibility forinjuries or vehicle damage that result fromtrailer towing equipment, or from anyerrors or omissions in the instructionsaccompanying such equipment or for yourfailure to follow the proper instructions.Regularly check that the hitch mountingbolts and nuts are tightened securely.

& Warranties and maintenanceS08AL01

SUBARU warranties do not apply tovehicle damage or malfunction caused bytrailer towing. If you use your vehicle to towa trailer, more frequent maintenance willbe required due to the additional load.(Refer to “Maintenance schedule undersevere driving conditions” in the “Warrantyand Maintenance Booklet”.)Under no circumstances should a trailer betowed with a new vehicle or a vehicle withany new powertrain component (engine,transmission, differential, wheel bearings,etc.) for the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) ofdriving.

& Maximum load limitsS08AL02

WARNING

Never exceed the maximum loadlimits explained in the following.Exceeding the maximum load limitscould cause personal injury and/orvehicle damage.

CAUTION

. Adequate size trailer brakes arerequired when the trailer and itscargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

total weight.. Before towing a trailer, check the

trailer total weight, GVW, GAWsand tongue load. Make sure theload and its distribution in yourvehicle and trailer are acceptable.

! Total trailer weightS08AL0201

Total trailer weightThe total trailer weight (trailer weight plusits cargo load) must never exceed themaximum total trailer weight in the follow-ing table.

Trailer towing426

(429,1)


ConditionsMaximum total trailer weight

For Subaru ForesterWilderness

Except for Subaru ForesterWilderness

When towing a trailer withbrakes 3,000 lbs (1,360 kg) 1,500 lbs (680 kg)

When towing a trailer withoutbrakes 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

When towing a trailer on anuphill grade continuously forover 5 miles (8 km) with anoutside temperature of 1048F(408C) or above

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

! Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) andGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR)

S08AL0202

Gross Vehicle WeightThe Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) mustnever exceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR).Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the com-bined total of the weight of the vehicle,driver, passengers, luggage, trailer hitch,trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment installed on your vehicle.Therefore, the GVW changes dependingon the situation. Determine the GVW eachtime before going on a trip by putting yourvehicle and trailer on a vehicle scale.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer towing 427

8

Driving

tips

(430,1)


Certification labelGVWR of your vehicle that is given bySUBARU is shown on the certificationlabel located at the bottom of driver’s sidedoor pillar of your vehicle.

! Gross Axle Weight (GAW) andGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

S08AL0203

Gross Axle WeightThe total weight applied to each axle(GAW) must never exceed the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). The front and rearGAWs can be adjusted by relocatingpassengers and luggage inside the vehi-cle. The front and rear GAWR of yourvehicle that is given by SUBARU are alsoshown on the certification label located atthe bottom of driver’s side door pillar.

To check both GVWR and GAWR and toconfirm that the total weight and weightdistribution are within safe driving limits,you should have your vehicle and trailerweighed at a commercial weighing station.Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured to

prevent a change in weight distributionwhile driving.! Tongue load

S08AL0204

Tongue loadEnsure that the trailer tongue load is from 8to 11% of the total trailer weight and doesnot exceed the maximum value of 150 lbs(68 kg) for Forester, 300 lbs (136 kg) forSubaru Forester Wilderness.

Trailer towing428

(431,1)


1) Jack2) Bathroom scale

The tongue load can be weighed with abathroom scale as shown in the illustrationabove.When weighing the tongue load, besure to position the towing coupler at theheight at which it would be during actualtowing, using a jack as shown.

F: Front

The tongue load can be adjusted by properdistribution of the load in the trailer. Neverload the trailer with more weight in theback than in the front; approximately 60percent of the trailer load should be in thefront and approximately 40 percent in therear. Also, distribute the load as evenly aspossible on both the left and right sides.Be sure that all cargo is firmly secured toprevent a change in weight distributionwhile driving.

WARNING

If the trailer is loaded with moreweight in the back of trailer’s axlethan in the front, the load is taken offthe rear axle of the towing vehicle.This may cause the rear wheels toskid, especially during braking orwhen vehicle speed is reduced dur-ing cornering, resulting in over-steer, spin out and/or jackknifing.

& Trailer HitchesS08AL03

WARNING

Never drill the frame or under-bodyof your vehicle to install a commer-cial trailer hitch. If you do, danger-ous exhaust gas, water or mud mayenter the passenger compartmentthrough the drilled hole. Exhaustgas contains carbon monoxide, acolorless and odorless gas which isdangerous, or even lethal, if inhaled.Also, drilling the frame or under-body of your vehicle could causedeterioration of strength of yourvehicle and cause corrosion aroundthe drilled hole.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer towing 429

8

Driving

tips

(432,1)


CAUTION

. Do not modify the vehicle ex-haust system, brake system, orother systems when installing ahitch or other trailer towingequipment.

. Do not use axle-mounted hitchesas they can cause damage to theaxle housing, wheel bearings,wheels or tires.

Do not use a trailer hitch other than agenuine SUBARU trailer hitch. A genuineSUBARU trailer hitch is available fromyour SUBARU dealer.

& When you do not tow a trailerS08AL14

CAUTION

. The housing should be kept freeof dirt and corrosion at the pointsof contact. The surfaces onlyrequire cleaning with a cloth.Grease or other lubricantsshould never be used.

. If the tow ball mount is notinstalled, the plastic insertshould then be inserted for pro-tection and to prevent it fromgetting dirty.

When the tow ball mount is not used, placethe ball cap and store securely.

& Connecting a trailerS08AL04

! Trailer brakesS08AL0401

WARNING

. Adequate size trailer brakes arerequired when the trailer and itscargo exceed 1,000 lbs (453 kg)total weight.

. Do not directly connect yourtrailer’s hydraulic brake systemto the hydraulic brake system inyour vehicle. Direct connectionwould cause the vehicle’s brakeperformance to deteriorate andcould lead to an accident.

If your trailer’s total weight (trailer weightplus its cargo weight) exceeds 1,000 lbs(453 kg), the trailer is required to beequipped with its own brake system.Electric brakes or surge brakes are re-commended, and must be installed prop-erly. Check that your trailer’s brakes con-form with Federal, state/province and/orother applicable regulations. YourSUBARU’s brake system is not designedto be tapped into the trailer’s hydraulicbrake system. Please ask your SUBARU

dealer and professional trailer supplier formore information about the trailer’s brakesystem.! Trailer safety chains

S08AL0402

WARNING

Always use safety chains betweenyour vehicle and the trailer. Towingtrailer without safety chains couldcreate a traffic safety hazard if thetrailer separates from the hitch dueto coupling damage or hitch balldamage.

In case the trailer hitch connector or hitchball should break or become discon-nected, the trailer could get loose andcreate a traffic safety hazard.For safety, always connect the towingvehicle and trailer with trailer safetychains. Two chains should be used intotal, one to the right side and the other tothe left side trailer tongue. Pass the chainscrossing each other under the trailertongue to prevent the trailer from droppingonto the ground in case the trailer tongueshould disconnect from the hitch ball.Allow sufficient slack in the chains takingtight turn situations into account; however,be careful not to let them drag on theground.

Trailer towing430

(433,1)


! Side mirrorsS08AL0403

After hitching a trailer to your vehicle,check that the standard side mirrorsprovide a good rearward field of viewwithout significant blind spots. If significantblind spots occur with the vehicle’s stan-dard side mirrors, use towing mirrors thatconform with Federal, state/province and/or other applicable regulations.! Trailer lights

S08AL0404

CAUTION

Direct splicing or other improperconnection of trailer lights maydamage your vehicle’s electricalsystem and cause a malfunction ofyour vehicle’s lighting system.

Connection of trailer lights to your vehicle’selectrical system requires modifications tothe vehicle’s lighting circuit to increase itscapacity and accommodate wiringchanges. To ensure the trailer lights areconnected properly, please consult yourSUBARU dealer. Check for proper opera-tion of the turn signals and the brake lightseach time you connect a trailer to yourvehicle.! Tires

S08AL0405

WARNING

Never tow a trailer when the tempor-ary spare tire is used. The temporaryspare tire is not designed to sustainthe towing load. Use of the tempor-ary spare tirewhen towing can resultin failure of the spare tire and/or lessstability of the vehicle.

Make sure that all the tires on your vehicleare properly inflated. Refer to “Tires”FP517.

Trailer tire condition, size, load rating andproper inflation pressure should be inaccordance with the trailer manufacturer’sspecifications. Also check federal, state,province and/or other applicable regula-tions.

In the event your vehicle gets a flat tirewhen towing a trailer, ask a commercialroad service representative or profes-sional to repair the flat tire.

If you carry a regular size spare tire in yourvehicle or trailer as a precaution againstgetting a flat tire, be sure that the spare tireis firmly secured.

& Trailer towing tipsS08AL05

CAUTION

. For models equipped with theBSD (Blind Spot Detection) andRCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)driving support systems, whentowing a trailer, press the BSD/RCTA OFF switch to deactivatethe system. The system may notoperate properly due to theblocked radar waves. For detailsabout the BSD/RCTA OFF switch,refer to “BSD/RCTA OFF switch”FP378.

. For models equipped with Re-verse Automatic Braking (RAB)system, consult your SUBARUdealer for additional informationabout towing a trailer.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer towing 431

8

Driving

tips

(434,1)


. Towing a trailer in high tempera-tures, or on long or steep grades,may cause the vehicle to over-heat. Refer to “Engine overheat-ing” FP446.

. When towing a trailer, steering,stability, stopping distance andbraking performance will be dif-ferent when compared to normaloperation. For safety’s sake, youshould employ extra cautionwhen towing a trailer and youshould never drive at excessivespeeds. You should also keep thefollowing tips in mind:

. The braking power of the parkingbrake may not be sufficient whenstronger braking power isneeded (e.g., when parking on asteep slope while towing a trai-ler).

! Before starting out on a tripS08AL0501

. Check the towing regulations for traileror caravan vehicles that vary by state/region. Failure to comply with the proce-dures set forth will not only compromiseyour safety, but will also negate yourinsurance coverage and/or may violatethe state road and traffic acts and regula-tions.

. Check that the vehicle and vehicle-to-hitchmounting are in good condition. If anyproblems are apparent, do not tow thetrailer.. Check that the vehicle rests horizon-tally with the trailer attached. If the vehicleis tipped sharply up at the front and downat the rear, check the total trailer weight,GVW, GAWs and tongue load again, thenconfirm that the load and its distribution areacceptable.. Check that the tire rating and pressuresare correct.. Check that the vehicle and trailer areconnected properly. Confirm that:

– The trailer tongue is connectedproperly to the hitch ball.– The trailer lights connector is con-nected properly and trailer’s brakelights illuminate when the vehicle’sbrake pedal is pressed, and that thetrailer’s turn signal lights flash whenthe vehicle’s turn signal lever is oper-ated.– The safety chains are connectedproperly.– All cargo in the trailer is securedsafely in position.– The side mirrors provide a goodrearward field of view without a sig-nificant blind spot.

. Sufficient time should be taken to learnthe “feel” of the vehicle/trailer combinationbefore starting out on a trip. In an area freeof traffic, practice turning, stopping andbacking up.! Driving with a trailer

S08AL0502. You should allow for considerably morestopping distance when towing a trailer.Avoid sudden braking because it mayresult in skidding or jackknifing and lossof control.. Avoid uneven steering, sharp turns andrapid lane changes.. Slow down before turning. Make alonger than normal turning radius becausethe trailer wheels will be closer than thevehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. In atight turn, the trailer could hit your vehicle.. Crosswinds will adversely affect thehandling of your vehicle and trailer, caus-ing sway. Crosswinds can be due toweather conditions or the passing of largetrucks or buses. If swaying occurs, firmlygrip the steering wheel and promptly begindecelerating your vehicle at a gradualpace.. When passing other vehicles, consider-able distance is required because of theadded weight and length caused byattaching the trailer to your vehicle.

Trailer towing432

(435,1)


. Reversing the vehicle with a trailer canbe difficult and requires experience. Neveraccelerate or steer rapidly, and grip thebottom of the steering wheel with onehand.

To reverse around a corner, perform thefollowing procedure.1. Reverse slowly and steer in the oppo-site direction to the way you want to turn.2. Once the trailer begins to swingaround, straighten the steering wheel.3. Turn the wheel in the opposite direc-tion.4. Steer the vehicle around to be in linewith the trailer, then straighten the steeringagain.

. If the ABS warning light illuminateswhile the vehicle is in motion, stop towingthe trailer and have repairs performedimmediately by your nearest SUBARUdealer.! Driving on grades

S08AL0503. Before going down a steep hill, slowdown and shift to a lower gear (if neces-sary, use 1st gear) in order to utilize theengine braking effect and prevent over-heating of your vehicle’s brakes. Do notmake sudden downshifts.. When driving uphill in hot weather, theair conditioner may turn off automaticallyto protect the engine from overheating.. When driving uphill in hot weather, payattention to the following indicators be-cause the engine and transmission arerelatively prone to overheating.

: Coolant temperature high warning light

: AT OIL TEMP warning light

: Rear differential oil temperature warn-ing light (if equipped)

If the coolant temperature high warninglight and/or the ATOILTEMP warning lightilluminates, immediately turn off the airconditioner and stop the vehicle in thenearest safe location. For further instruc-tions and additional information, refer tothe following sections.

– “If you park your vehicle in case ofan emergency” FP436– “Engine overheating” FP446– “Coolant temperature low indicatorlight/Coolant temperature high warn-ing light” FP174– “AT OIL TEMP warning light”FP175– “Rear differential oil temperaturewarning light” FP176

. Avoid using the accelerator pedal tostay stationary on an uphill slope instead ofusing the parking brake or foot brake. Thatmay cause the transmission fluid to over-heat.

– CONTINUED –

Trailer towing 433

8

Driving

tips

(436,1)


! Parking on a gradeS08AL0504

Always block the wheels under bothvehicle and trailer when parking. Applythe parking brake firmly. You should notpark on a hill or slope. If parking on a hill orslope cannot be avoided, you should takethe following steps:1. Apply the brakes and hold the pedaldown.2. Have someone place wheel blocksunder both the vehicle and trailer wheels.3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release the regular brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.4. Apply the regular brakes and thenapply the parking brake; slowly releasethe regular brakes.5. Shift into “P” position and shut off theengine.

Trailer towing434

(437,1)


S099-1. If you park your vehicle in case of

an emergency................................................ 4369-2. Maintenance tools .......................................... 436

Under the rear floor ............................................4369-3. Temporary spare tire ...................................... 4379-4. Flat tires .......................................................... 438

Changing a flat tire .............................................438Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)(U.S.-spec. models)...........................................442

9-5. Jump starting.................................................. 443How to jump start ...............................................444

9-6. Engine overheating ........................................ 446If steam is coming from the enginecompartment ....................................................446

If no steam is coming from the enginecompartment ....................................................446

9-7. Towing..............................................................447Towing hooks and tie-down hooks/holes ............ 447Using a flat-bed truck......................................... 450Towing with all wheels on the ground................. 450

9-8. Access key fob – if access key fob doesnot operate properly .....................................451

Locking and unlocking....................................... 452Switching power status ...................................... 452Starting engine .................................................. 452

9-9. Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot beopened ...........................................................453

9-10. Moonroof (if equipped) – if the moonroofdoes not close...............................................454

9-11. If your vehicle is involved in an accident....454Automatic door locking/unlocking operationwhen involved in an accident ........................... 455

In case of emergency

9

Incase

ofemergency

(438,1)


9-1. If youpark your vehicle incase of an emergency

S09AA

The hazard warning flasher should beused in day or night to warn other driverswhen you have to park your vehicle underemergency conditions.Avoid stopping on the road. It is best tosafely pull off the road if a problem occurs.

The hazard warning flasher can be acti-vated regardless of the ignition switchposition.Turn on the hazard warning by pushing thehazard warning flasher switch. Turn it offby pushing the switch again.When the hazard warning flasher areflashing, the corresponding turn signalindicator will also flash.

NOTEWhen the hazard warning flasher is on,the turn signals do not work.

9-2. Maintenance toolsS09AH

Your vehicle is equipped with the followingmaintenance tools.

. Jack

. Jack handle

. Screwdriver

. Towing hook (eye bolt)

. Wheel nut wrench

& Under the rear floorS09AH12

The maintenance tools are stored asshown in the following illustrations.

If you park your vehicle in case of an emergency436

(439,1)


1) Under-floor storage compartment (ifequipped). Refer to “Under-floor storagecompartment” FP300.

2) Jack handle3) Spare tire4) Tool bucket

1) Wheel nut wrench2) Screwdriver3) Jack4) Towing hook (eye bolt)

NOTE. For how to use the jack, refer to “Flattires” FP438.. The following items may be differentdepending on the model.

– The shape of the storage com-partment– The locations of some mainte-nance tools

9-3. Temporary spare tireS09AB

WARNING

. Never tow a trailer when thetemporary spare tire is used.The temporary spare tire is notdesigned to sustain the towingload. Use of the temporary sparetire when towing can result infailure of the spare tire and/orless stability of the vehicle andmay lead to an accident.

. When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/trans-mitter being transferred, the lowtire pressure warning light willilluminate steadily after blinkingfor approximately one minute.This indicates the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) is un-able to monitor all four roadwheels. Contact your SUBARUdealer as soon as possible fortire and sensor replacement and/or system resetting.

– CONTINUED –

Temporary spare tire 437

9

Incase

ofemergency

(440,1)


CAUTION

Never use any temporary spare tireother than the original. Using othersizes may result in severe mechan-ical damage to the drivetrain of yourvehicle.

The temporary spare tire is smaller andlighter than a conventional tire and isdesigned for emergency use only. Re-move the temporary spare tire and re-install the conventional tire as soon aspossible because the spare tire is de-signed only for temporary use.

Check the inflation pressure of the tem-porary spare tire periodically to keep thetire ready for use. For the correct tirepressure, refer to “Temporary spare tires”FP517.

When using the temporary spare tire, notethe following.. Drive with caution when the temporaryspare tire is installed. Avoid hard accel-eration and braking, or fast cornering, ascontrol of the vehicle may be lost.. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).. Do not put a tire chain on the temporaryspare tire. Because of the smaller tire size,a tire chain will not fit properly.

. Do not use two or more temporaryspare tires at the same time.. Do not drive over obstacles. This tirehas a smaller diameter, so road clearanceis reduced.

1) Tread wear indicator bar2) Indicator location mark

. When the wear indicator appears onthe tread, replace the tire.. The temporary spare tire must be usedonly on a rear wheel. If a front wheel tiregets punctured, replace the wheel with arear wheel and install the temporary sparetire in place of the removed rear wheel.

9-4. Flat tiresS09AC

If you have a flat tire while driving, neverbrake suddenly; keep driving straightahead while gradually reducing speed.Then slowly pull off the road to a safeplace.

& Changing a flat tireS09AC01

WARNING

. Use only the jack and the jackhandle provided with your vehi-cle. The jack supplied with thevehicle is designed only for chan-ging a tire. Never get under thevehicle while supporting the ve-hicle with this jack.

. Do not jack up the vehicle on anincline or a loose road surface.The jack can come out of thejacking point or sink into theground and this can result inserious injury or death.

. Before jacking up the vehicle, besure that there are no occupantsor cargo on board.

. Do not jack up the vehicle with anobject on or underneath the jack.The jack can be unstable and this

Flat tires438

(441,1)


can result in a severe accident.. Always turn off the engine before

raising the flat tire off the groundusing the jack. Never swing orpush the vehicle supported withthe jack. The jack can come out ofthe jacking point due to a jolt andthis can result in a severe acci-dent.

. All passengers must exit thevehicle before you raise it withthe jack. Raising the vehicle withsomeone inside of it could resultin serious injury or death.

. Do not start the vehicle while it issupported by the jack. Doing socould result in serious injury ordeath.

NOTEContact a SUBARUdealer when jackingup the vehicle using a garage jack.

CAUTION

Do not hit and bend the disc rotorbacking plate when removing andinstalling the tire. A bent backingplate may scrape against the discrotor and cause noise while thevehicle is in motion.

1. Park on a hard, level surface, when-ever possible, then stop the engine.2. Apply the parking brake securely andshift the select lever to the “P” (Park)position.3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher andunload all occupants and luggage from thevehicle.

4. Put wheel blocks at the front and rearof the tire diagonally opposite the flat tire.

5. Take out the jack, jack handle andwheel nut wrench.The tools and spare tire are stored underthe floor of the cargo area. Refer to“Maintenance tools” FP436.

NOTEMake sure that the jack is well lubri-cated before using it.

6. Take out the tool bucket and turn theattaching bolt counterclockwise, then takethe spare tire out.

NOTEIf the spare tire provided in your vehicleis a temporary spare tire, carefully read“Temporary spare tire” FP437 andstrictly follow the instructions.

– CONTINUED –

Flat tires 439

9

Incase

ofemergency

(442,1)


7. If your vehicle has wheel covers, afteryour hands are protected by gloves, graspthe wheel cover spokes and pull towardyou to remove the wheel cover.

8. Loosen the wheel nuts using the wheelnut wrench but do not remove the nuts.

Jack-up points

9. Place the jack under the side sill at thefront or rear jack-up point closest to the flattire.

Turn the jackscrew by hand until the jackhead engages firmly into the jack-up point.

10. Insert the jack handle into the jack-screw, and turn the handle until the tireclears the ground. Do not raise the vehiclehigher than necessary.

Flat tires440

(443,1)


11. Remove the wheel nuts and the flattire.

12. Before putting the spare tire on, cleanthe mounting surface of the wheel and hubwith a cloth.

CAUTION

If the threaded part was damaged,we recommend that you immedi-ately contact your SUBARU dealer.

13. Put on the spare tire. Replace thewheel nuts. Tighten them by hand.

WARNING

Donot use oil or grease on thewheelstuds or nuts when the spare tire isinstalled. This could cause the nutsto become loose and lead to anaccident.

14. Turn the jack handle counterclockwiseto lower the vehicle.

15. Use the wheel nut wrench to securelytighten the wheel nuts to the specifiedtorque, following the tightening order in theillustration.For the wheel nut tightening torque, referto “Tires” FP517. Never use your foot onthe wheel nut wrench or a pipe extensionon the wrench because you may exceedthe specified torque. Have the wheel nuttorque checked at the nearest automotiveservice facility.

– CONTINUED –

Flat tires 441

9

Incase

ofemergency

(444,1)


1) Support holder

16. Store the flat tire in the spare tirecompartment. Install with the supportholder facing upward and secure the flattire by firmly tightening the attaching bolt.

NOTEIf you cannot fix the flat tire firmly, tryturning the support holder upsidedown.17. Store the jack, jack handle and wheelnut wrench in their storage locations.

WARNING

Never place a tire or tire changingtools in the passenger compartmentafter changing wheels. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipmentcould strike occupants and causeinjury. Store the tire and all tools inthe proper place.

& Tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.models)

S09AC02

Low tire pressure warning lightThe tire pressure monitoring system pro-vides the driver with the warning messageindicated by sending a signal from asensor that is installed in each wheel when

tire pressure is severely low.The tire pressure monitoring system willactivate only when the vehicle is driven.Also, this system may not react immedi-ately to a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample, a blow-out caused running overa sharp object).

WARNING

. If the low tire pressure warninglight illuminates while driving,never brake suddenly. Instead,perform the following procedure.(1) Keep driving straight ahead

while gradually reducingspeed.

(2) Slowly pull off the road to asafe place. Otherwise an acci-dent involving serious vehicledamage and serious personalinjury could occur.

(3) Check the pressure for all fourtires and adjust the pressureto the COLD tire pressureshown on the vehicle placardon the door pillar on thedriver’s side.

If this light still illuminates whiledriving after adjusting the tirepressure, a tire may have signifi-cant damage and a fast leak that

Flat tires442

(445,1)


causes the tire to lose air rapidly.If you have a flat tire, replace itwith a spare tire as soon aspossible.

. When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/trans-mitter being transferred, the lowtire pressure warning light willilluminate steadily after blinkingfor approximately one minute.This indicates the TPMS is unableto monitor all four road wheels.Contact your SUBARU dealer assoon as possible for tire andsensor replacement and/or sys-tem resetting.

. When a tire is repaired with liquidsealant, the tire pressure warningvalve and transmitter may notoperate properly. If a liquid sea-lant is used, contact your nearestSUBARU dealer or other qualifiedservice shop as soon as possi-ble. Make sure to replace the tirepressure warning valve andtransmitter when replacing thetire. You may reuse the wheel ifthere is no damage to it and if thesealant residue is properlycleaned off.

If the light illuminates steadilyafter blinking for approximatelyone minute, promptly contact aSUBARU dealer to have the sys-tem inspected.

9-5. Jump startingS09AD

WARNING

. Battery fluid is SULFURIC ACID.Do not let it come in contact withthe eyes, skin, clothing or thevehicle.If battery fluid gets on you, thor-oughly flush the exposed areawith water immediately. Get med-ical help if the fluid has enteredyour eyes.If battery fluid is accidentallyswallowed, immediately drink alarge amount of milk or water,and obtain immediate medicalhelp.Keep everyone including chil-dren away from the battery.

. The gas generated by a batteryexplodes if a flame or spark isbrought near it. Do not smoke orlight a match while jump starting.

. Never attempt jump starting if thedischarged battery is frozen. Itcould cause the battery to burstor explode.

. Whenever working on or around abattery, always wear suitable eye

– CONTINUED –

Jump starting 443

9

Incase

ofemergency

(446,1)


protectors, and remove metalobjects such as rings, bands orother metal jewelry.

. Be sure the jumper cables andclamps on them do not haveloose or missing insulation.Do not jump start unless cablesin suitable condition are avail-able.

. A running engine can be danger-ous. Keep your fingers, hands,clothing, hair and tools awayfrom the cooling fan, belts andany other moving engine parts.Removing rings, watches andties is advisable.

. Jump starting is dangerous if itdone incorrectly. If you are un-sure about the proper procedurefor jump starting, consult a com-petent mechanic.

When your vehicle does not start due to arun down (discharged) battery, the vehiclemay be jump started by connecting yourbattery to another battery (called thebooster battery) with jumper cables.

& How to jump startS09AD01

1. Make sure the booster battery is 12volts and the negative terminal isgrounded.2. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not let the two vehicles touch.3. Turn off all unnecessary lights andaccessories.4. Connect the jumper cables exactly inthe sequence illustrated.

Jump starting444

(447,1)


A) Booster batteryB) Strut mounting nut

(1) Connect one jumper cable to thepositive (+) terminal on the dischargedbattery.(2) Connect the other end of thejumper cable to the positive (+) term-inal of the booster battery.(3) Connect one end of the other cableto the negative (−) terminal of thebooster battery.(4) Connect the other end of the cableto the strut mounting nut of the vehiclewith the discharged battery.

Make sure that the cables are not near anymoving parts and that the cable clamps arenot in contact with any other metal.5. Start the engine of the vehicle with thebooster battery and run it at moderatespeed. Then start the engine of the vehiclethat has the discharged battery.6. When finished, carefully disconnectthe cables in exactly the reverse order.

Jump starting 445

9

Incase

ofemergency

(448,1)


9-6. Engine overheatingS09AE

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap untilthe engine has been shut off and hasfully cooled down. When the engineis hot, the coolant is under pressure.Removing the cap while the engineis still hot could release a spray ofboiling hot coolant, which couldburn you very seriously.

If the engine overheats, safely pull off theroad and stop the vehicle in a safelocation.

& If steam is coming from theengine compartment

S09AE01. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and get everyone awayfrom the vehicle until it cools down.. Contact an authorized SUBARU deal-er.

& If nosteam iscoming from theengine compartment

S09AE021. Keep the engine running at idlingspeed.2. Open the engine hood to ventilate the

engine compartment. Refer to “Enginehood” FP471.Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. Ifthe fan is not turning, immediately turn offthe engine and contact an authorizedSUBARU dealer for repair.3. After the coolant temperature highwarning light that has blinked or illumi-nated in RED turns off, turn off the engine.For details about the warning light, refer to“Coolant temperature low indicator light/Coolant temperature high warning light”FP174.4. After the engine has fully cooled down,check the coolant level in the reserve tank.If the coolant level is below the “LOW”mark, add coolant up to the “FULL” mark.

NOTEFor details about how to check thecoolant level or how to add coolant,refer to “Engine coolant” FP477.5. If there is no coolant in the reservetank, add coolant to the reserve tank. Thenremove the radiator cap and fill the radiatorwith coolant.

If you remove the radiator cap from a hotradiator, first wrap a thick cloth around theradiator cap, then turn the cap counter-clockwise slowly without pressing downuntil it stops. Release the pressure from

the radiator. After the pressure has beenfully released, remove the cap by pressingdown and turning it.

Engine overheating446

(449,1)


9-7. TowingS09AF

If towing is necessary, it is best done byyour SUBARU dealer or a commercialtowing service. Observe the followingprocedures for safety.

WARNING

Never tow AWD models with thefront wheels raised off the groundwhile the rear wheels are on theground, or with the rear wheelsraised off the ground while the frontwheels are on the ground. This willcause the vehicle to spin away dueto the operation or deterioration ofthe center differential.

& Towing hooks and tie-downhooks/holes

S09AF01The towing hooks should be used only inan emergency.

CAUTION

Use only the specified towing hooksand tie-down hooks/holes. Neveruse suspension parts or other partsof the body for towing or tie-downpurposes.

! Front towing hookS09AF0112

1. Take the towing hook, screwdriver andjack handle out of the cargo area.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriverwith vinyl tape or cloth so that it will not

scratch the bumper. Insert the flat-headscrewdriver into the cutout of the cover andpry open the cover.

3. Screw the towing hook into the threadhole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely using– CONTINUED –

Towing 447

9

Incase

ofemergency

(450,1)


the jack handle.

After towing, remove the towing hook fromthe vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hookexcept when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towinghook after towing. Leaving thetowing hook mounted on thevehicle could interfere with prop-er operation of the SRS airbagsystem in a frontal collision.

CAUTION

To prevent deformation to the bum-per and the towing hook, do notapply an excessive load to the tow-ing hook.

! Rear towing hookS09AF0105

1. Take the towing hook and screwdriverout of the tool bucket. Take the jack handleout of the cargo area.

2. Cover the tip of a flat-head screwdriverwith vinyl tape or cloth so that it will notscratch the bumper. Pry off the cover onthe rear bumper using a screwdriver, andyou will find a threaded hole for attachingthe towing hook.

3. Screw the towing hook into the threadhole until its thread can no longer be seen.

4. Tighten the towing hook securely usingthe jack handle.

Towing448

(451,1)


After towing, remove the towing hook fromthe vehicle and stow it in the tool bucket.Fit the towing hook cover on the bumper.

WARNING

. Do not use the towing hookexcept when towing your vehicle.

. Be sure to remove the towinghook after towing. Leaving thetowing hook mounted on thevehicle could interfere with prop-er operation of the fuel pumpshut off function when the vehi-cle is struck from behind.

CAUTION

To prevent deformation to the bum-per and the towing hook, do notapply an excessive load to the tow-ing hook.

! Front tie-down hooksS09AF0106

The front tie-down hooks are locatedbetween each of the front tires and thefront bumper.

! Rear tie-down holesS09AF0107

1) Rear tie-down hole

The rear tie-down holes are located neareach of the jack-up reinforcements.There is a plug in each rear tie-down hole.To use the rear tie-down holes, remove the

– CONTINUED –

Towing 449

9

Incase

ofemergency

(452,1)


plugs. After using the rear tie-down holes,return the plugs to their original places.

WARNING

Use the rear tie-down holes only fordownward anchoring. If they areused to anchor the vehicle in anyother direction, cables may slip outof the holes, possibly causing adangerous situation.

& Using a flat-bed truckS09AF02

This is the best way to transport yourvehicle. Use the following procedures toensure safe transportation.1. Shift the select lever into the “P”position.2. Apply the parking brake firmly.

3. Secure the vehicle onto the carrierproperly with safety chains. Each safetychain should be equally tightened and caremust be taken not to pull the chains sotightly that the suspension bottoms out.

CAUTION

. If your vehicle has a bumperunder guard (optional), be carefulnot to scrape it when placing thevehicle on the carrier and whenremoving the vehicle from thecarrier.

. Transport by flat-bed truck maycause the headlights to becomemisaligned. In such a case, havethe headlight alignment checkedby a SUBARU dealer after trans-porting the vehicle by flat-bedtruck.

& Towing with all wheels on theground

S09AF03

1. Release the parking brake and put thetransmission in the neutral position.2. The ignition switch should be in the“ON” position while the vehicle is beingtowed.3. Take up slack in the towline slowly toprevent damage to the vehicle.

WARNING

. Never turn the ignition switch tothe “LOCK”/“OFF” position whilethe vehicle is being towed be-cause the steering wheel and thedirection of the wheels will belocked.

Towing450

(453,1)


. Remember that the brake boosterand power steering do not func-tion when the engine is not run-ning. Because the engine isturned off, it will take greatereffort to operate the brake pedaland steering wheel.

CAUTION

. If transmission failure occurs,transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

. Sometimedamaged vehicles can-not be towed because of theirdamaged condition. In that case,use a flat-bed truck for transpor-tation.

. The traveling speed must belimited to less than 20 mph (32km/h) and the traveling distanceto less than 31 miles (50 km). Forgreater speeds and distances,transport your vehicle on a flat-bed truck.

. Use a flat-bed truck if there arelong distance downgrades orsteep slopes. However, do notapply the brake pedal for a longtime because the engine brakingwill not work while towing. Doing

so could overheat the brake.. Drive carefully and do not make

an impact on the towing rope bysuddenly starting.

. Use a specific towing rope fortowing. If wire ropes and metalchains are needed to be used fortowing, wrap the contact portionof the bumper with cloth to pro-tect it from damage.

9-8. Access key fob – if ac-cess key fobdoesnot operateproperly

S09AP

CAUTION

Keep metallic objects, magneticsources and signal transmittersaway from the area between theaccess key fob and the push-buttonignition switch. They may interferewith the communication betweenthe access key fob and the push-button ignition switch.

The following functions may be inoperablebecause of strong radio signals in thesurrounding area or a low battery conditionof the access key fob.. Locking/unlocking doors (including therear gate). Switching power status. Starting engine

In such cases, perform the followingprocedure. When the battery of the accesskey fob is discharged, replace it with a newone. Refer to “Replacing battery of accesskey fob” FP508.

– CONTINUED –

Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly 451

9

Incase

ofemergency

(454,1)


& Locking and unlockingS09AP01


While pressing the release button of theaccess key fob, take out the emergencykey.Lock or unlock the driver’s door with theemergency key in the procedure describedin “Locking and unlocking from the out-side” FP135.

NOTEAfter locking or unlocking, be sure toattach the emergency key back to theaccess key fob.

& Switching power statusS09AP02

1. Apply the parking brake.2. Shift the select lever to the “P” (Park)position.3. Depress the brake pedal.

4. Hold the access key fob with thebuttons facing you, and touch the push-button ignition switch with it.When the communication between theaccess key fob and the vehicle is com-pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At thesame time, the status of the push-buttonignition switch changes to either of thefollowing.

. When the keyless access with push-button start system is deactivated:“ACC”. Under other conditions: “ON”

5. When the keyless access with push-button start system is deactivated, pressthe push-button ignition switch with thebrake pedal released. The status of thepush-button ignition switch then changesto “ON”.

NOTEIf the power does not switch eventhough the above procedure was fol-lowed precisely, contact your SUBARUdealer.

& Starting engineS09AP03

1. Apply the parking brake.2. Shift the select lever to the “P” (Park)position.3. Depress the brake pedal.

Access key fob – if access key fob does not operate properly452

(455,1)


4. Hold the access key fob with thebuttons facing you, and touch the push-button ignition switch with it.When the communication between theaccess key fob and the vehicle is com-pleted, a chime (ding) will sound. At thesame time, the push-button ignition switchturns to the “ACC” or “ON” position.5. After the push-button ignition switchturns to the “ACC” or “ON” position, whiledepressing the brake pedal, press thepush-button ignition switch.

NOTEIf the engine does not start even thoughthe above procedure was followedprecisely, contact your SUBARUdealer.

9-9. Rear gate – if the reargate cannot be opened

S09AG

In the event that you cannot open the reargate by operating the rear gate openerbutton, you can open it from inside thecargo area.

1. Remove the access cover at thebottom-center of the rear gate trim usinga flat-head screwdriver wrapped with vinyltape or a cloth.2. Locate the rear gate open lever behindthe rear gate trim.

CAUTION

Never operate the rear gate openlever with fingers because doing somay cause an injury. Always use aflat-head screwdriver or a similartool.

Models without power rear gate

– CONTINUED –

Rear gate – if the rear gate cannot be opened 453

9

Incase

ofemergency

(456,1)


Models with power rear gate

3. To open the rear gate, turn the lever tothe right position.

9-10. Moonroof (if equipped)– if the moonroof does notclose

S09AJ

If the moonroof does not close, werecommend that you have the systemchecked by a SUBARU dealer.

9-11. If your vehicle is in-volved in an accident

S09AR

CAUTION

If your vehicle is involved in anaccident, be sure to inspect theground under the vehicle beforerestarting the engine. If you find thatfuel has leaked on the ground, donot try to restart the engine. The fuelsystem has been damaged and is inneed of repair. Immediately contactthe nearest automotive service facil-ity. We recommend that you consultyour SUBARU dealer.

Your vehicle has a fuel pump shut offsystem. When the vehicle sustains animpact in an accident, etc., the fuel pumpshut off system stops supplying the fuel inorder to minimize fuel leakage. However,depending on the impact conditions at thetime of collision, the fuel pump shut-offsystem may not operate.Perform the following procedures to restartthe engine after the system is activated.

Moonroof – if the moonroof does not close454

(457,1)


Models without “keyless access withpush-button start system”:1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”or “ACC” position.2. Restart the engine.

Models with “keyless access withpush-button start system”:1. Turn the push-button ignition switch tothe “ACC” or “OFF” position.2. Restart the engine.

& Automatic door locking/un-locking operation when in-volved in an accident

S09AR03When the automatic door locking/unlock-ing function is ON, all the doors will belocked automatically while driving. Forfurther details, refer to “Automatic doorlocking/unlocking” FP137.When the vehicle sustains a strong impactwhich may trigger the airbags to deploy,the door locks may be unlocked automa-tically to enable emergency escape. Gen-erally, an impact sustained from a rear endcollision does not trigger the airbags todeploy. However if the impact is strongenough to deploy the airbags, it can alsotrigger the unlocking function.Under such circumstance, the automatic

door unlocking function will be suspendedand the doors will remain unlocked.Confirm the safety of the surroundings firstand carry out the following to retrieve theautomatic door locking/unlocking function.

Models without “keyless access withpush-button start system”:1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”position.2. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON”position.

Models with “keyless access withpush-button start system”:1. Turn the push-button ignition switch tothe “OFF” position.2. Turn the push-button ignition switch tothe “ON” position.

NOTEDepending on the severity of the im-pact, the emergency unlockingmay notfunction.

CAUTION

If the following occur, there may be amalfunction in the system.Have the system inspected by aSUBARU dealer.

. The doors unlock automaticallywhile driving.

. With all doors shut, the doorsunlock when pressing the lockside of the power door lockingswitch.

. The automatic door locking/un-locking function does not oper-ate.

If your vehicle is involved in an accident 455

9

Incase

ofemergency

(458,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(459,1)


S1010-1. Exterior care.................................................. 458

Washing .............................................................458Waxing and polishing .........................................459Cleaning alloy wheels .........................................460Cleaning Tire (Vehicle with White Letter Tires) ....460

10-2. Corrosion protection .................................... 460Most common causes of corrosion .....................460To help prevent corrosion...................................461

10-3. Cleaning the interior .....................................461Seat fabric ......................................................... 461Leather seat materials ........................................ 462Synthetic leather upholstery............................... 462Water repellent seat material (if equipped) .......... 462Seatbelt ............................................................. 462Climate control panel, audio panel, instrumentpanel, console panel, and switches .................. 462

Monitor .............................................................. 463

Appearance care

10

Appearance

care

(460,1)


10-1. Exterior careS10AA

& WashingS10AA01

CAUTION

. When washing the vehicle, thebrakes may get wet. As a result,the brake stopping distance willbe longer. To dry the brakes, drivethe vehicle at a safe speed whilelightly depressing the brake ped-al to heat up the brakes.

. Do not wash the engine compart-ment and area adjacent to it. Ifwater enters the engine air intakeor electrical parts, it will causeengine trouble or a malfunctionof electrical equipment.

. When washing inner fenders, un-derbody, bumpers and protrud-ing objects such as exhaustpipes and exhaust finishers, becareful to prevent injuries fromcontacting sharp ends.

. Do not use any organic solventswhen washing the surface of thebulb assembly cover. However, ifa detergent with organic solventsis used to wash the cover sur-face, completely rinse off thedetergent with water. Otherwise,

the cover surface may be da-maged.

. Since your vehicle is equippedwith a rear wiper, automatic car-wash brushes could becometangled around it, damaging thewiper arm and other compo-nents. Ask the automatic car-wash operator not to let thebrushes touch the wiper arm orto fix the wiper arm on the rearwindow glass with adhesive tapebefore operating the machine.

NOTE. When having your vehicle washed inan automatic car wash, make surebeforehand that the car wash is ofsuitable type.. The rear view camera lens has a hardcoating to help prevent scratches.However, when washing the vehicle orcleaning the camera lens, be careful notto scratch the camera lens. Do not use awashing brush directly on the cameralens. The image quality of the rear viewcamera may deteriorate.The best way to preserve your vehicle’sbeauty is frequent washing. Wash thevehicle at least once a month to avoidcontamination by road grime.

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plentyof lukewarm or cold water. Do not wash thevehicle with hot water and in direct sun-light.

Salt, chemicals, insects, tar, soot, tree sap,and bird droppings should be washed offusing a light detergent, as required. If youuse a light detergent, make certain that it isa neutral detergent. Do not use strongsoap or chemical detergents. All cleaningagents should be promptly flushed fromthe surface and not allowed to dry there.Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty oflukewarmwater. Wipe the remaining wateroff with a chamois or soft cloth. Wearrubber gloves and use a hand brush whenwashing down underbody, inner fendersand suspension to effectively remove mudand dirt off.! Washing the underbody

S10AA0101Chemicals, salts and gravel used fordeicing road surfaces are extremely cor-rosive, accelerating the corrosion of un-derbody components, such as the exhaustsystem, fuel and brake lines, brake cables,floor pan and fenders, and suspension.Thoroughly flush the underbody and insideof the fenders with lukewarm or cold waterat frequent intervals to reduce the harmfuleffects of such agents.

Exterior care458

(461,1)


Mud and sand adhering to the underbodycomponents may accelerate their corro-sion.After driving off-road or onmuddy or sandyroads, wash the mud and sand off theunderbody. Carefully flush the suspensionand axle parts, as they are particularlyprone tomud and sand buildup. Do not usea sharp-edged tool to remove caked mud.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to damage brakehoses, sensor harnesses, andother parts when washing sus-pension components.

. Be careful not to flush the enginebottom for a long time. It maycause damage of some electricalparts.

! Using a warm water washerS10AA0102

. Keep a good distance of 12 in (30 cm)or more between the washer nozzle andthe vehicle.. Do not wash the same area continu-ously.. If a stain will not come out easily, washby hand. Somewarmwater washers are ofthe high temperature, high pressure type,and they can damage or deform the resinparts such as moldings, or cause water to

leak into the vehicle.

& Waxing and polishingS10AA02

Always wash and dry the vehicle beforewaxing and polishing.Use a good quality polish and wax andapply them according to the manufac-turer’s instructions. Wax or polish whenthe painted surface is cool.

Be sure to polish and wax the chrome trim,as well as the painted surfaces. Loss ofwax on a painted surface leads to loss ofthe original luster and also quickens thedeterioration of the surface. It is recom-mended that a coat of wax be applied atleast once a month, or whenever thesurface no longer repels water.

If the appearance of the paint has dimin-ished to the point where the luster or tonecannot be restored, lightly polish the sur-face with a fine-grained compound. Neverpolish just the affected area, but includethe surrounding area as well. Alwayspolish in only one direction. A No. 2000grain compound is recommended. Neveruse a coarse-grained compound. Coarse-grained compounds have a smaller grain-size number and could damage the paint.After polishing with a compound, coat withwax to restore the original luster. Frequentpolishing with a compound or an incorrect

polishing technique will result in removingthe paint layer and exposing the under-coat. When in doubt, it is always best tocontact your SUBARU dealer or an autopaint specialist.

CAUTION

Do not use any agents with organicsolvents on the surface of the bulbassembly cover. However, if a polishor wax with organic solvents isapplied to the cover surface, com-pletely wipe off the polish or wax.Otherwise, the cover surfacemay bedamaged.

NOTE. Be careful not to block the wind-shield washer nozzles with wax whenwaxing the vehicle.. Do not wipe the rear view camerawith alcohol, benzine or paint thinner.Otherwise, discoloration may occur. Toremove contamination, wipe the cam-era with a cloth moistened with dilutedneutral detergent and thenwipe it with asoft, dry cloth.. When waxing the vehicle, be carefulnot to apply the wax to the rear viewcamera. If it comes in contact with thecamera, moisten a clean cloth with

– CONTINUED –

Exterior care 459

10

Appearance

care

(462,1)


diluted neutral detergent to remove thewax.. For Subaru Forester Wildernessmodels, if wax gets onto the hood decalwhen you are waxing your vehicle, thiscould enhance the reflective appear-ance of the hood decal and impair theantireflective function.

& Cleaning alloy wheelsS10AA04

! Vehicles without matte paintedwheels

S10AA0403. Promptly wipe the alloy wheels clean ofany kind of grime or agent. If dirt is left ontoo long, it may be difficult to clean off.. Do not use soap containing grit to cleanthe wheels. Be sure to use a neutralcleaning agent, and later rinse thoroughlywith water. Do not clean the wheels with astiff brush or expose them to a high-speedwashing device.. Clean the vehicle (including the alloywheels) with water as soon as possiblewhen it has been splashed with sea water,exposed to sea breezes, or driven onroads treated with salt or other agents.

! Vehicles with matte painted wheelsS10AA0404

CAUTION

Be sure to observe the followingprecautions as matte paintedwheels can be damaged.. Do not scrub or polish the wheels

using a brush or dry cloth.. Do not use any wheel coatings or

abrasive detergents.

As matte painted wheels require differentcleaning methods than conventional alloywheels, be sure to observe the following.For details, consult your SUBARU dealer.. Remove dirt using water. If the wheelsare excessively dirty, use a sponge or softcloth dampened with a diluted neutraldetergent to remove the dirt.

& Cleaning Tire (Vehicle withWhite Letter Tires)

S10AA05It is recommended to clean the white letterpart on the side of the tire frequentlybecause it easily gets dirty. When clean-ing, use a neutral detergent and wash witha sponge.

10-2. Corrosion protectionS10AB

Your SUBARU has been designed andbuilt to resist corrosion. Special materialsand protective finishes have been used onmost parts of the vehicle to help maintainfine appearance, strength, and reliableoperation.

& Most common causes of cor-rosion

S10AB01The most common causes of corrosionare:. The accumulation of moisture retainingdirt and debris in body panel sections,cavities, and other areas.. Damage to paint and other protectivecoatings caused by gravel and stone chipsor minor accidents.

Corrosion is accelerated on the vehiclewhen:. It is exposed to road salt or dust controlchemicals, or used in coastal areas wherethere is more salt in the air, or in areaswhere there is considerable industrialpollution.. It is driven in areas of high humidity,especially when temperatures range justabove freezing.

Corrosion protection460

(463,1)


. Dampness in certain parts of thevehicle remains for a long time, eventhough other parts of the vehicle may bedry.. High temperatures will cause corrosionto parts of the vehicle which cannot dryquickly due to lack of proper ventilation.

& To help prevent corrosionS10AB02

Wash the vehicle regularly to preventcorrosion of the body and suspensioncomponents. Also, wash the vehiclepromptly after driving on any of thefollowing surfaces.. Roads that have been salted to preventthem from freezing in winter. Mud, sand, or gravel. Coastal roads

After the winter has ended, it is recom-mended that the underbody be given avery thorough washing.

Before the beginning of winter, check thecondition of underbody components, suchas the exhaust system, fuel and brakelines, brake cables, suspension, steeringsystem, floor pan, and fenders. If any ofthem are found to be rusted, they shouldbe given an appropriate rust preventiontreatment or should be replaced. Contactyour SUBARU dealer to perform this kind

of maintenance and treatment if you needassistance.

Repair chips and scratches in the paint assoon as you find them.

Check the interior of the vehicle for waterand dirt accumulation under the floor matsbecause that could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry.Keep your garage dry. Do not park yourvehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated gar-age. In such a garage, corrosion can becaused by dampness. If you wash thevehicle in the garage or put the vehicle intothe garage when wet or covered withsnow, that can cause dampness.

If your vehicle is operated in cold weatherand/or in areas where road salts and othercorrosive materials are used, the doorhinges and locks, rear gate lock, and hoodlatch should be inspected and lubricatedperiodically.

10-3. Cleaning the interiorS10AC

Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climatecontrol panel, audio equipment, instru-ment panel, center console, combinationmeter panel, and switches. (Do not useorganic solvents.)

CAUTION

Do not use sharp instruments orwindow cleaner containing abra-sives to clean the inner surface ofthe rear window. They may damagethe conductors printed on the win-dow.

& Seat fabricS10AC01

Remove loose dirt, dust or debris with avacuum cleaner. If the dirt is caked on thefabric or hard to remove with a vacuumcleaner, use a soft brush then vacuum it.Wipe the fabric surface with a tightly wrungcloth and dry the seat fabric thoroughly. Ifthe fabric is still dirty, wipe using a solutionof mild soap and lukewarm water then drythoroughly.

If the stain does not come out, try acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Use the cleaner on a hidden place and

– CONTINUED –

Cleaning the interior 461

10

Appearance

care

(464,1)


make sure it does not affect the fabricadversely. Use the cleaner according to itsinstructions.

CAUTION

When cleaning the seat, do not usebenzine, paint thinner, or any similarmaterials. Doing so could damagethe surface and cause the color todeteriorate.

& Leather seat materialsS10AC02

The leather used by SUBARU is a highquality natural product which will retain itsdistinctive appearance and feel for manyyears with proper care.Allowing dust or road dirt to build up on thesurface can cause the material to becomebrittle and to wear prematurely. Regularcleaning with a soft, moist, natural fibercloth should be performed monthly, takingcare not to soak the leather or allow waterto penetrate the stitched seams.A mild detergent suitable for cleaningwoolen fabrics may be used to removedifficult dirt spots, rubbing with a soft, drycloth afterwards to restore the luster. Ifyour SUBARU is to be parked for a longtime in bright sunlight, it is recommendedthat the seats and head restraints be

covered, or the windows shaded, to pre-vent fading or shrinkage.Minor surface blemishes or bald patchesmay be treated with a commercial leatherspray lacquer. You will discover that eachleather seat section will develop soft foldsor wrinkles, which is characteristic ofgenuine leather.

& Synthetic leather upholsteryS10AC03

The synthetic leather material used on theSUBARUmay be cleaned using mild soapor detergent and water, after first vacuum-ing or brushing away loose dirt. Allow thesoap to soak in for a few minutes and wipeoff with a clean, damp cloth. Commercialfoam-type cleaners suitable for syntheticleather materials may be used whennecessary.

CAUTION

Strong cleaning agents such assolvents, paint thinners, windowcleaner or fuel must never be usedon leather or synthetic interior ma-terials. Doing so could damage thesurface and cause the color todeteriorate.

& Water repellent seat material(if equipped)

S10AC10The water repellency of the seat fabric willdecrease over time. Do not apply addi-tional water repellent coating.

& SeatbeltS10AC09

For details about how to clean the seatbelt,refer to “Seatbelt maintenance” FP58.

& Climate control panel, audiopanel, instrument panel, con-sole panel, and switches

S10AC04Use a soft, damp cloth to clean the climatecontrol panel, audio equipment, instru-ment panel, center console, combinationmeter panel, and switches.

CAUTION

. Do not use organic solvents suchas paint thinners or fuel, orstrong cleaning agents that con-tain those solvents. Doing socould damage the surface andcause the color to deteriorate.

. Donot use chemical solvents thatcontain silicone on the vehicleaudio system, electrical compo-nents of the air-conditioner orany switches. If silicone adheres

Cleaning the interior462

(465,1)


to these parts, it may causedamage to electrical compo-nents.

& MonitorS10AC05

To clean the audio/navigation/multi-func-tion display monitor, wipe it with a siliconecloth or with a soft cloth. If the monitor isextremely dirty, clean it with a soft clothmoistened with neutral detergent thencarefully wipe off any remaining detergent.

CAUTION

. Do not spray neutral detergentdirectly onto the monitor. Doingso could damage the monitor’scomponents.

. Do not wipe the monitor with ahard cloth. Doing so couldscratch the monitor.

. Do not use cleaning fluid thatcontains thinner, fuel, or anyother volatile substance. Suchcleaning fluid could erase thelettering on the switches at thebottom of the monitor.

Cleaning the interior 463

10

Appearance

care

(466,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(467,1)


S1111-1. Maintenance schedule.................................. 46711-2. Maintenance precautions ............................. 467

Before checking or servicing in the enginecompartment ....................................................468

When checking or servicing in the enginecompartment ....................................................469

When checking or servicing in the enginecompartment while the engine is running..........469

11-3. Maintenance tips........................................... 469Removing and reinstalling clips ..........................469

11-4. Engine hood .................................................. 47111-5. Engine compartment overview .................... 47311-6. Engine oil....................................................... 474

Engine oil consumption ......................................474Locations of the oil level gauge, oil filler capand oil filter ......................................................474

Checking the oil level .........................................474Changing the oil and oil filter..............................475Recommended grade and viscosity.....................476Synthetic oil .......................................................476

11-7. Cooling system ............................................. 476Safety precautions..............................................476Cooling fan, hose and connections .....................477Engine coolant ...................................................477

11-8. Air cleaner element....................................... 478Replacing the air cleaner element .......................479

11-9. Spark plugs ................................................... 480Recommended spark plugs.................................480

11-10. Drive belts ................................................... 480

11-11. Continuously variable transmissionfluid ................................................................480

11-12. Front differential gear oil and reardifferential gear oil ........................................481

Recommended grade and viscosity .................... 48111-13. Brake fluid....................................................481

Checking the fluid level...................................... 481Recommended brake fluid.................................. 482

11-14. Vacuum brake booster (models withthe vacuum brake booster) ..........................482

11-15. Brake pedal ..................................................48211-16. Replacement of brake pad..........................483

Breaking-in of new brake pads ........................... 48311-17. Tires and wheels..........................................483

Types of tires ..................................................... 483Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)(U.S.-spec. models) .......................................... 484

Tire inspection ................................................... 485Tire pressures and wear..................................... 486Wheel balance.................................................... 487Wear indicators.................................................. 488Rotational direction of tires ................................ 489Tire rotation ....................................................... 489Tire replacement ................................................ 490Wheel replacement............................................. 491

11-18. Alloy wheels.................................................49111-19. Windshield washer fluid..............................492

Adding the windshield washer fluid .................... 492Windshield washer fluid ..................................... 492

Maintenance and service

11

Maintenance

andservice

(468,1)


11-20. Replacement of wiper blades..................... 493Windshield wiper blade assembly .......................494Windshield wiper blade rubber............................495Rear window wiper blade assembly ....................496Rear window wiper blade rubber.........................497

11-21. Battery ......................................................... 49811-22. Fuses ........................................................... 49911-23. Installation of accessories ......................... 50111-24. Replacing bulbs .......................................... 501

Headlights ..........................................................502Front turn signal light .........................................502Front side marker lights (if equipped) .................503

Front fog light (if equipped)................................ 503Rear turn signal lights........................................ 503Backup light....................................................... 505Vanity mirror light .............................................. 506Door step light ................................................... 506Cargo area light ................................................. 506Other bulbs........................................................ 507Adjusting headlight aim ..................................... 507

11-25. Replacing key battery .................................508Safety precautions ............................................. 508Replacing battery of access key fob ................... 508Replacing transmitter battery ............................. 509

Maintenance and service

(469,1)


11-1. Maintenance scheduleS11AA

U.S. modelsThe scheduled maintenance items re-quired to be serviced at regular intervalsare shown in the “Warranty and Mainte-nance Booklet”. For details, read theseparate “Warranty and MaintenanceBooklet”.

Canada modelsThe scheduled maintenance items re-quired to be serviced at regular intervalsare shown in the “Warranty and ServiceBooklet”. For details, read the separate“Warranty and Service Booklet”.

Except for U.S. and Canada modelsSome items of your vehicle are required tobe serviced at scheduled intervals. Fordetails about your maintenance schedule,read the separate “Warranty and Main-tenance Booklet”.

NOTEFor models with a multi-function dis-play (color LCD), you can set a remin-der to be displayed when a scheduledmaintenance item is almost due. Fordetails, refer to “Maintenance settings”FP230.

11-2. Maintenance precau-tions

S11AB

When maintenance and service are re-quired, it is recommended that all work bedone by an authorized SUBARU dealer.

If you performmaintenance and service byyourself, you should familiarize yourselfwith the information provided in this sec-tion on general maintenance and servicefor your SUBARU.

Incorrect or incomplete service couldcause improper or unsafe vehicle opera-tion. Any problems caused by impropermaintenance and service performed byyou are not eligible for warranty coverage.

WARNING

. Always select a safe area whenperforming maintenance on yourvehicle.

. Always be very careful to avoidinjury when working on the vehi-cle. Remember that some of thematerials in the vehicle may behazardous if improperly used orhandled, for example, batteryacid.

. Your vehicle should only be ser-viced by persons fully competentto do so. Serious personal injurymay result to persons not experi-enced in servicing vehicles.

. Always use the proper tools andmake certain that they are wellmaintained.

. Never get under the vehicle sup-ported only by a jack. Always usesafety stands to support thevehicle.

. Never keep the engine running ina poorly ventilated area, such asa garage or other closed areas.

. Do not smoke or allow openflames around the fuel or battery.This will cause a fire.

. Because the fuel system is underpressure, replacement of the fuelfilter should be performed onlyby your SUBARU dealer.

. Wear adequate eye protection toguard against getting oil or fluidsin your eyes. If something doesget in your eyes, thoroughlywash them out with clean water.

. Do not tamper with the wiring ofthe SRS airbag system or seat-belt pretensioner system, or at-

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance schedule 467

11

Maintenance

andservice

(470,1)


tempt to take its connectorsapart, as this may activate thesystem or render it inoperative.NEVER use a circuit tester forthis wiring. If your SRS airbag orseatbelt pretensioner needs ser-vice, consult your nearestSUBARU dealer.

. Check the inside of the enginecompartment to see if there areany cloths and tools left. If theyare left inside, they may be acause of malfunction and fire.

NOTESUBARU does not endorse the use ofnon-SUBARU approved flushing sys-tems and strongly advises againstperforming these services on aSUBARU vehicle. Non-SUBARU ap-proved flushing systems use chemi-cals and/or solvents which have notbeen tested or approved by SUBARU.SUBARU warranties do not cover anypart of the vehicle which is damaged byadding or applying chemicals and/orsolvents other than those approved orrecommended by SUBARU.

& Before checking or servicingin the engine compartment

S11AB01

WARNING

. Always stop the engine and applythe parking brake firmly to pre-vent the vehicle from moving.

. Always let the engine cool down.Engine parts become very hotwhen the engine is running andremain hot for some time after theengine has stopped.

. Do not spill engine oil, enginecoolant, brake fluid or any otherfluid on hot engine components.This may cause a fire.

. When the ignition switch is in the“ON” position, the cooling fanmay operate suddenly evenwhenthe engine is stopped. If yourbody or clothes come into con-tact with a rotating fan, that couldresult in serious injury. To avoidrisk of injury, perform the follow-ing precautions.– Models with push-button start

system:Always turn the push-buttonignition switch to the “OFF”position and confirm that the

operation indicator on theswitch is turned off. Then takethe access key fob out fromthe vehicle.

– Models without push-buttonstart system:Always remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

. Before performing any servicingon a vehicle equipped with aremote engine start system (adealer option), temporarily placethe remote engine start system inservice mode to prevent it fromunexpectedly starting the engine.

Maintenance precautions468

(471,1)


& When checking or servicingin the engine compartment

S11AB03

CAUTION

. Do not touch the engine coverwhile checking the componentsin the engine compartment.Doing so may cause your handto slip off the cover and result inan unexpected injury.

. Do not touch the oil filter until theengine has cooled down comple-tely. Doing somay result in a burnor other injury. Note that the oilfilter becomes very hot when theengine is running and remainshot for some time after the enginehas stopped.

& When checking or servicingin the engine compartmentwhile the engine is running

S11AB02

WARNING

A running engine can be dangerous.Keep your fingers, hands, clothing,hair and tools away from the coolingfan, drive belt and any other movingengine parts. Removing rings,watches and ties is advisable.

11-3. Maintenance tipsS11BI

Some clips and fender linings must beremoved before replacing the air cleanerelements or specific bulbs.

& Removing and reinstallingclips

S11BI01

! Removing clipsS11BI0101

There are several types of clips used foryour vehicle.

! Type A clipsS11BI010101

1. Turn the clips counterclockwise usinga flat-head screwdriver until the centerportion of the clip is raised.2. Remove the clips with a flat-headscrewdriver using leverage.

– CONTINUED –

Maintenance tips 469

11

Maintenance

andservice

(472,1)


3. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

! Type B clipsS11BI010102

1. Pull out the center portion of the clipusing a flat-head screwdriver as shown inthe illustration.2. Pull the protruded center portion toremove the entire body of the clip.

! Type C clipsS11BI010103

1. Turn the clip counterclockwise using aPhillips screwdriver until the center portionof the clip is raised.2. Remove the entire clip by pulling it up.

! Reinstalling clipsS11BI0102

Type A clips

Type B clips

Maintenance tips470

(473,1)


Type C clipsInsert the clip without the center portionfirst and then push the center portion of theclip into the hole.

11-4. Engine hoodS11AC

CAUTION

. Be extremely careful not to catchfingers or other objects whenclosing the engine hood.

. Do not push the hood forcibly toclose it. It could deform themetal.

. Be extremely careful opening theengine hood when the wind isstrong. The engine hood couldclose suddenly, possibly causinginjuries from slamming.

. Do not install accessories otherthan genuine SUBARU parts tothe engine hood. If the enginehood becomes too heavy, thestay may not be able to supportholding it open.

. Check that the end of the hoodstay is inserted into the slot. If it isnot inserted properly, the hoodmay drop and cause injury.

To open the hood:1. If the wiper blades are lifted off thewindshield, return them to their originalposition.

2. Pull the hood release knob under theinstrument panel.

– CONTINUED –

Engine hood 471

11

Maintenance

andservice

(474,1)


3. Release the secondary hood releasebymoving the lever between the front grilleand the hood toward the left.

1) Grip

4. Lift up the hood, release the hood propfrom its retainer and put the end of the

hood prop into the slot in the hood. Holdthe grip to handle the hood prop.

To close the hood:1. Lift the hood slightly and remove thehood prop from the slot in the hood andreturn the prop to its retainer.2. Lower the hood to a height of approxi-mately 7.8 to 11.8 in (20 to 30 cm) above itsclosed position and then let it drop.3. After closing the hood, be sure thehood is securely locked.

If this does not close the hood, release itfrom a slightly higher position.

WARNING

Always check that the hood isproperly locked before you startdriving. If it is not, it might fly openwhile the vehicle is moving andblock your view, which may causean accident and serious bodily in-jury.

Engine hood472

(475,1)


11-5. Engine compartment overviewS11AD

1) Brake fluid reservoir (page 481)2) Fuse box (page 499)3) Battery (page 498)4) Windshield washer tank (page 492)5) Engine oil filler cap (page 474)6) Engine coolant reservoir (page 477)7) Radiator cap (page 477)8) Engine oil filter (page 475)9) Engine oil level gauge (page 474)10) Air cleaner case (page 478)

Engine compartment overview 473

11

Maintenance

andservice

(476,1)


11-6. Engine oilS11AE

CAUTION

. If the level gauge cannot bepulled out easily, twist the levelgauge right and left, then gentlypull it out. Otherwise, you may beinjured accidentally strainingyourself.

. Use only engine oil with therecommended grade and vis-cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oilwhen adding it. If oil touches theexhaust pipe, it may cause a badsmell, smoke, and/or a fire. Ifengine oil gets on the exhaustpipe, be sure to wipe it off.

& Engine oil consumptionS11AE07

Some engine oil will be consumed whiledriving. The rate of consumption can beaffected by such factors as transmissiontype, driving style, terrain and tempera-ture. Under the following conditions, oilconsumption can be increased and mayrequire refilling between maintenance in-tervals.

. When the engine is new and within thebreak-in period.. When the engine oil is of lower quality.. When the incorrect oil viscosity is used.. When engine braking is employed(repeatedly).. When the engine is operated at highengine speeds (for extended periods oftime).. When the engine is operated underheavy loads (for extended periods of time).. When towing a trailer. When the engine idles for extendedperiods of time.. When the vehicle is operated in stop-and-go and/or heavy traffic situations.. When the vehicle is used under severethermal conditions.. When the vehicle accelerates anddecelerates frequently.

Under these or similar conditions, youshould check your oil at least every 2ndfuel fill-up and change your engine oil morefrequently. Different drivers in the samecar may experience different results. Ifyour oil consumption rate is greater thanexpected, contact your authorizedSUBARU dealer who may perform a testunder controlled conditions.

& Locations of the oil levelgauge, oil filler cap and oilfilter

S11AE06

1) Oil level gauge2) Oil filler cap3) Oil filter

& Checking the oil levelS11AE01

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface andturn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position. If you check the oil leveljust after turning the ignition switch to the“LOCK”/“OFF” position, wait for at least 5minutes for the oil to drain back into the oilpan before checking the level.

Engine oil474

(477,1)


CAUTION

If the level gauge cannot be pulledout easily, twist the level gauge rightand left, then gently pull it out.Otherwise, you may be injured acci-dentally straining yourself.

2. Pull out the level gauge, wipe it clean,and insert it again.3. Be sure the level gauge is correctlyinserted until it stops.

1) Full level2) Low level3) Approximately 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp

qt) from low level to full level

4. Pull out the oil level gauge again.5. Check the oil levels on both sides of thelevel gauge. The engine oil level must be

judged by the lowest of the two levels. Ifthe oil level is below the low level mark,add oil so that the full level is reached.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to touch the engineoil filter when removing the oilfiller cap. Doing somay result in aburn, a pinched finger, or maycause some other injury.

. Use only engine oil with therecommended grade and vis-cosity.

. Be careful not to spill engine oilwhen adding it. If oil touches theexhaust pipe, it may cause a badsmell, smoke, and/or a fire. Ifengine oil gets on the exhaustpipe, be sure to wipe it off.

To add engine oil, remove the engine oilfiller cap and slowly pour engine oilthrough the filler neck. After pouring oilinto the engine, you must use the levelgauge to confirm that the oil level iscorrect.

NOTE. To prevent overfilling the engine oil,do not add any additional oil above theupper level when the engine is cold.

. After adding or changing the engineoil, warm up the engine and stop it on alevel surface, then start the engine aftera lapse of 1 minute or more. Confirmthat the warning light has turned offafter the engine has started. Refer to“Engine low oil level warning light”FP175.

& Changing the oil and oil filterS11AE02

Change the oil and oil filter according tothe maintenance schedule in the “War-ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.The engine oil and oil filter must bechanged more frequently than listed inthe maintenance schedule when drivingon dusty roads, when short trips arefrequently made, or when driving in ex-tremely cold weather.

NOTE. Changing the engine oil and oil filtershould be performed by a well-trainedexpert. Contact your SUBARU dealerfor changing the engine oil and oil filter.Fully trainedmechanics are on standbyat a SUBARU dealer to utilize thespecial tools, spare parts and recom-mended oil for this work, and also, usedoils are properly disposed of.. If performing oil replacement your-self, observe the local regulations and

– CONTINUED –

Engine oil 475

11

Maintenance

andservice

(478,1)


dispose of waste oil properly.

& Recommended grade andviscosity

S11AE03

CAUTION

Use only engine oil with the recom-mended grade and viscosity.

Refer to “Engine oil” FP513.

NOTEEngine oil viscosity (thickness) affectsfuel economy. Oils of lower viscosityprovide better fuel economy. However,in hot weather, oil of higher viscosity isrequired to properly lubricate the en-gine.

& Synthetic oilS11AE05

You should use synthetic engine oil thatmeets the same requirements given forconventional engine oil. When using syn-thetic oil, you must use oil of the sameclassification, viscosity and grade shownin this Owner’s Manual. Refer to “Engineoil” FP513. Also, you must follow the oiland filter changing intervals shown in the“Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

NOTESynthetic oil of the grade and viscositynoted in chapter 12 is the recom-mended engine oil for optimum engineperformance. Conventional oil may beused if synthetic oil is unavailable.

11-7. Cooling systemS11AF

& Safety precautionsS11AF04

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap untilthe engine has been shut off and hascooled down completely. Since thecoolant is under pressure, you maysuffer serious burns from a spray ofboiling hot coolant when the cap isremoved.

CAUTION

. Vehicles are filled at the factorywith SUBARU SUPER COOLANTthat does not require the firstchange for 11 years/137,500miles (11 years/220,000 km). Thiscoolant should not be mixed withany other brand or type of cool-ant during this period. Mixingwith a different coolant will re-duce the life of the coolant. Whennecessary to add the coolant forany reason, use only SUBARUSUPER COOLANT.If the SUBARU SUPERCOOLANTis diluted with another brand or

Cooling system476

(479,1)


type, the maintenance interval isshortened to that of the mixingcoolant.

. Do not splash the engine coolantover painted parts. The alcoholcontained in the engine coolantmay damage the paint surface.

& Cooling fan, hose and con-nections

S11AF03Your vehicle employs an electric coolingfan which is thermostatically controlled tooperate when the engine coolant reachesa specific temperature.

If the radiator cooling fan does not operateeven when the coolant temperature highwarning light blinks or illuminates in RED,the cooling fan circuit may be defective.Refer to “Coolant temperature low indica-tor light/Coolant temperature high warninglight” FP174.

Check the fuse and replace it if necessary.Refer to “Fuses” FP499. If the fuse is notblown, have the cooling system checkedby your SUBARU dealer.

If the frequent addition of coolant isnecessary between vehicle service visits,it is recommended that you have yourvehicle inspected by an authorized

SUBARU dealer to check for leaks, da-mage, or looseness.

& Engine coolantS11AF02

! Checking the coolant levelS11AF0201

WARNING

Never remove the radiator cap untilthe engine has been shut off and hascooled down completely. Since thecoolant is under pressure, you maysuffer serious burns from a spray ofboiling hot coolant when the cap isremoved.

1) “FULL” level mark2) “LOW” level mark

Check the coolant level at each fuel stop.1. Check the coolant level on the outsideof the reservoir while the engine is cool.2. If the level is close to or lower than the“LOW” level mark, add coolant up to the“FULL” level mark. If the reserve tank isempty, remove the radiator cap and refillcoolant up to just below the filler neck asshown in the following illustration.

1) Fill up to this level.

– CONTINUED –

Cooling system 477

11

Maintenance

andservice

(480,1)


3. After refilling the reserve tank and theradiator, reinstall the cap and check thatthe rubber gaskets inside the radiator capare in the proper position.

CAUTION

. Be careful not to spill enginecoolant when adding it. If coolanttouches the exhaust pipe, it maycause a bad smell, smoke, and/ora fire. If engine coolant gets onthe exhaust pipe, be sure to wipeit off.

. Do not splash the engine coolantover painted parts. The alcoholcontained in the engine coolantmay damage the paint surface.

! Changing the coolantS11AF0202

It may be difficult to change the coolant.Have the coolant changed by yourSUBARU dealer if necessary.

The coolant should be changed accordingto the maintenance schedule in the “War-ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

11-8. Air cleaner elementS11AG

WARNING

Do not operate the engine with theair cleaner element removed. The aircleaner element not only filters in-take air but also stops flames if theengine backfires. If the air cleanerelement is not installed when theengine backfires, you could beburned.

CAUTION

When replacing the air cleaner ele-ment, use a genuine SUBARU aircleaner element. If it is not used, itwill cause a negative effect to theengine.

The air cleaner element functions as a filterscreen. When the element is perforated orremoved, engine wear will be excessiveand engine life shortened.

It is not necessary to clean or wash the aircleaner element.

Air cleaner element478

(481,1)


& Replacing the air cleaner ele-ment

S11AG01Replace the air cleaner element accordingto the maintenance schedule in the “War-ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Underextremely dusty conditions, replace itmore frequently. It is recommended thatyou always use genuine SUBARU parts.

1. Unsnap the two clips holding the aircleaner case (rear).2. Open the air cleaner case and pull thecover rearward while lifting it up.

3. Remove the air cleaner element.4. Clean the inside of the air cleaner case(both front and rear) with a damp cloth andinstall a new air cleaner element.

5. To install the air cleaner case (rear),insert the three projections on the air

cleaner case (rear) into the slits on the aircleaner case (front).6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

NOTEInstall the air cleaner element so thatthe surface with “UPR” printed on itfaces upward.

Air cleaner element 479

11

Maintenance

andservice

(482,1)


11-9. Spark plugsS11AH

It may be difficult to replace the sparkplugs. It is recommended that you have thespark plugs replaced by your SUBARUdealer.

The spark plugs should be replacedaccording to the maintenance schedulein the “Warranty and Maintenance Book-let”.

CAUTION

Make sure the cables are replaced inthe correct order.

& Recommended spark plugsS11AH01

For the recommended spark plugs, refer to“Electrical system” FP516.

11-10. Drive beltsS11AI

It is unnecessary to check the deflection ofthe drive belt periodically because yourengine is equipped with an automatic belttension adjuster. However, replacement ofthe belt should be done according to themaintenance schedule in the “Warrantyand Maintenance Booklet”. Consult yourSUBARU dealer for replacement.If the drive belt is loose, cracked or worn,contact your SUBARU dealer.

11-11. Continuously variabletransmission fluid

S11AY

It is not necessary to check the transmis-sion fluid level. Check that there are nocracks, damage or leakage. However, thefluid inspection should be performed ac-cording to the maintenance schedule inthe “Warranty and Maintenance Booklet”.Consult your SUBARU dealer for details.

Spark plugs480

(483,1)


11-12. Front differential gearoil and rear differential gearoil

S11BL

It is not necessary to check the gear oillevel. Check that there are no cracks,damage or leakage. However, the oilinspection should be performed accordingto the maintenance schedule in the “War-ranty and Maintenance Booklet”. Consultyour SUBARU dealer for details.

& Recommended grade andviscosity

S11BL01Each oil manufacturer has its own baseoils and additives. Never use differentbrands together. For details, refer to “Frontdifferential and rear differential gear oil”FP515.

CAUTION

Using a differential gear oil otherthan the specified oil may cause adecline in vehicle performance.

11-13. Brake fluidS11AO

& Checking the fluid levelS11AO01

WARNING

. Never let brake fluid contact youreyes because brake fluid can beharmful to your eyes. If brakefluid gets in your eyes, immedi-ately flush them thoroughly withclean water. For safety, whenperforming this work, wearingeye protection is advisable.

. Brake fluid absorbs moisturefrom the air. Any absorbedmoist-ure can cause a dangerous lossof braking performance.

. If the vehicle requires frequentrefilling, there may be a leak. Ifyou suspect a problem, have thevehicle checked at your SUBARUdealer.

CAUTION

. When adding brake fluid, be care-ful not to allow any dirt into thereservoir.

. Never splash the brake fluid overpainted surfaces or rubber parts.

Alcohol contained in the brakefluid may damage them.

. Be careful not to spill brake fluidwhen adding it. If brake fluidtouches the exhaust pipe, it maycause a bad smell, smoke, and/ora fire. If brake fluid gets on theexhaust pipe, be sure to wipe itoff.

1) “MAX” level line2) “MIN” level line

Check the fluid level monthly.Check the fluid level on the outside of thereservoir. Be sure to check the fluid levelfor the brake system at the shaded area inthe illustration.

– CONTINUED –

Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil 481

11

Maintenance

andservice

(484,1)


If the fluid level is below “MIN”, add therecommended brake fluid to “MAX”. Useonly brake fluid from a sealed container.

& Recommended brake fluidS11AO02

Refer to “Fluids” FP516.

CAUTION

Never use different brands of brakefluid together. Also, avoid mixingDOT 3 and DOT 4 brake fluids even ifthey are the same brand.

11-14. Vacuum brake booster(models with the vacuumbrake booster)

S11AQ

The brake booster utilizes the vacuumproduced by the enginemanifold to reducethe force required to depress the brakepedal.The vacuum in the brake booster may beinsufficient if the brake pedal is depressedwhen the engine is stopped or after thevehicle has been parked for a long periodof time. It such cases, it is necessary todepress the brake pedal using greaterforce than usual.

11-15. Brake pedalS11AR

Check the brake pedal free play andreserve distance according to the main-tenance schedule in the “Warranty andMaintenance Booklet”.

Vacuum brake booster (models with the vacuum brake booster)482

(485,1)


11-16. Replacement of brakepad

S11AT

The disc brakes have audible wear in-dicators on the brake pads. If the brakepads wear close to their service limit, thewear indicator makes a very audiblescraping noise when the brake pedal isapplied.

If you hear this scraping noise each timeyou apply the brake pedal, have the brakepads serviced by your SUBARU dealer assoon as possible.

CAUTION

If you continue to drive despite thescraping noise from the audiblebrake pad wear indicator, it willresult in the need for costly brakerotor repair or replacement.

& Breaking-in of new brakepads

S11AT01When replacing the brake pad, use onlygenuine SUBARU parts. After replace-ment, the new parts must be broken in.Contact your SUBARU dealer for details.

11-17. Tires and wheelsS11AV

& Types of tiresS11AV01

You should be familiar with the type of tirespresent on your vehicle.! All season tires

S11AV0101All season tires are designed to provide anadequate measure of traction, handlingand braking performance in year-rounddriving including snowy and icy roadconditions. However, all season tires donot offer as much traction performance aswinter (snow) tires in heavy or loose snowor on icy roads.All season tires are identified by “ALLSEASON” and/or “M+S” (Mud & Snow) onthe tire sidewall.! Summer tires

S11AV0102Summer tires are high-speed capabilitytires best suited for highway driving underdry conditions.Summer tires are inadequate for driving onslippery roads such as on snow-covered oricy roads.If you drive your vehicle on snow-coveredor icy roads, we strongly recommend theuse of winter (snow) tires.When installing winter tires, be sure toreplace all four tires.

– CONTINUED –

Replacement of brake pad 483

11

Maintenance

andservice

(486,1)


! Winter (snow) tiresS11AV0103

Winter tires are best suited for driving onsnow-covered and icy roads. However,winter tires do not perform as well assummer tires and all season tires on roadsother than snow-covered and icy roads.

& Tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) (U.S.-spec.models)

S11AV02The tire pressure monitoring system pro-vides the driver with a warningmessage bysending a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel when tire pressureis severely low. The tire pressure monitor-ing system will activate only when thevehicle is driven. Also, this systemmay notreact immediately to a sudden drop in tirepressure (for example, a blow-out causedby running over a sharp object).

If you adjust the tire pressures in a warmgarage and will then drive the vehicle incold outside air, the resulting drop in tirepressures may cause the low tire pressurewarning light to illuminate. To avoid thisproblem when adjusting the tire pressuresin a warm garage, inflate the tires topressures higher than those shown onthe tire inflation pressure label. Specifi-cally, inflate them by an extra 1 psi (6.9kPa, 0.07 kgf/cm2) for every difference of

108F (5.68C) between the temperature inthe garage and the temperature outside.By way of example, the following tableshows the required tire pressures thatcorrespond to various outside tempera-tures when the temperature in the garageis 608F (15.68C).Example:Tire size: 225/60R17 99HStandard tire pressures:Front: 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)Garage temperature: 608F (15.68C)

Outsidetemperature

Adjusted pressure[psi (kPa, kgf/cm2)]Front Rear

308F(−18C) 36 (250, 2.5) 35 (240, 2.4)

108F(−128C) 38 (265, 2.65) 37 (255, 2.55)

−108F(−238C) 41 (280, 2.8) 39 (270, 2.7)

If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates when you drive the vehicle incold outside air after adjusting the tirepressures in a warm garage, re-adjust thetire pressures using the method describedabove. Then, increase the vehicle speedto at least 20 mph (32 km/h) and check tosee that the low tire pressure warning light

turns off a few minutes later. If the low tirepressure warning light does not turn off,the tire pressure monitoring system maynot be functioning normally. In this event,go to a SUBARU dealer to have thesystem inspected as soon as possible.

While the vehicle is driven, friction be-tween tires and the road surface causesthe tires to warm up. After illumination ofthe low tire pressure warning light, anyincrease in the tire pressures caused by anincrease in the outside air temperature orby an increase in the temperature in thetires can cause the low tire pressurewarning light to turn off.

System resetting is necessary when thewheels are changed (for example, a switchto snow tires) and new TPMS valves areinstalled on the newly fitted wheels. Havethis work performed by a SUBARU dealerfollowing wheel replacement.

It may not be possible to install TPMSvalves on certain wheels that are on themarket. Therefore, if you change thewheels (for example, a switch to snowtires), use wheels that have the same partnumber as the standard-equipmentwheels. Without four operational TPMSvalve/sensors on the wheels, the TPMSwill not fully function and the warning lighton the combination meter will illuminate

Tires and wheels484

(487,1)


steadily after blinking for approximately 1minute.

When a tire is replaced, adjustments arenecessary to ensure continued normaloperation of the tire pressure monitoringsystem. Therefore, as with wheel replace-ment, you should have the work performedby a SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning lightdoes not illuminate briefly after theignition switch is turned ON or thelight illuminates steadily after blink-ing for approximately 1 minute, youshould have your tire pressure mon-itoring system checked at aSUBARU dealer as soon as possi-ble.If this light illuminates while driving,never brake suddenly and keepdriving straight ahead while gradu-ally reducing speed. Then slowlypull off the road to a safe place.Otherwise, an accident involvingserious vehicle damage and seriouspersonal injury could occur.If this light still illuminates whiledriving after adjusting the tire pres-sure, a tire may have significantdamage and a fast leak that causes

the tire to lose air rapidly. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tireas soon as possible.When a spare tire is mounted or awheel rim is replaced without theoriginal pressure sensor/transmitterbeing transferred, the low tire pres-sure warning light will illuminatesteadily after blinking for approxi-mately 1 minute. This indicates theTPMS is unable to monitor all fourroad wheels. Contact your SUBARUdealer as soon as possible for tireand sensor replacement and/or sys-tem resetting. If the light illuminatessteadily after blinking for approxi-mately 1 minute, promptly contact aSUBARU dealer to have the systeminspected.

& Tire inspectionS11AV03

Check on a daily basis that the tiresare free from serious damage,nails, and stones. At the same time,check the tires for abnormal wear.Contact your SUBARU dealer im-mediately if you find any problems.NOTE. When the wheels and tiresstrike curbs or are subjected toharsh treatment as when thevehicle is driven on a roughsurface, they can suffer damagethat cannot be seen with thenaked eye. This type of damagedoes not become evident untiltime has passed. Try not to driveover curbs, potholes or on otherrough surfaces. If doing so isunavoidable, keep the vehicle’sspeed down to a walking pace orless, and approach the curbs assquarely as possible. Also, makesure the tires are not pressedagainst the curb when you parkthe vehicle.

– CONTINUED –

Tires and wheels 485

11

Maintenance

andservice

(488,1)


. If you feel unusual vibrationwhile driving or find it difficult tosteer the vehicle in a straight line,one of the tires and/or wheelsmay be damaged. Drive slowly tothe nearest authorized SUBARUdealer and have the vehicle in-spected.

& Tire pressures and wearS11AV04

Maintaining the correct tire pres-sures helps to maximize the tires’service lives and is essential forgood running performance. Checkand, if necessary, adjust the pres-sure of each tire and the spare (ifequipped) at least once a monthand before any long journey.

Tire inflation pressure labelCheck the tire pressures when thetires are cold. Use a pressuregauge to adjust the tire pressuresto the values shown on the tireinflation pressure label. The tireinflation pressure label is locatedon the door pillar on the driver’sside.

Driving even a short distancewarms up the tires and increasesthe tire pressures. Also, the tirepressures are affected by the out-side temperature. It is best to checktire pressure outdoors before driv-ing the vehicle.

When a tire becomes warm, the airinside it expands, causing the tirepressure to increase. Be careful notto mistakenly release air from awarm tire to reduce its pressure.NOTE. The air pressure in a tireincreases by approximately 4.3psi (30 kPa, 0.3 kgf/cm2) when thetire becomes warm.. The tires are considered coldwhen the vehicle has beenparked for at least three hoursor has been driven less than 1mile (1.6 km).

WARNING

Do not let air out of warm tiresto adjust pressure. Doing sowill result in low tire pressure.

Incorrect tire pressures detract fromcontrollability and ride comfort, andthey cause the tires to wear abnor-mally.

Tires and wheels486

(489,1)


1) Correct tire pressure (treadworn evenly)Roadholding is good, andsteering is responsive. Rollingresistance is low, so fuel con-sumption is also lower.

2) Under inflated tire (tread wornon shoulders)Rolling resistance is high, sofuel consumption is also high-er.

3) Over inflated (tread worn in thecenter)Ride comfort is poor. Also, thetire magnifies the effects ofroad-surface bumps and dips,possibly resulting in vehicledamage.

If the tire inflation pressure labelshows tire pressures for the vehiclewhen fully loaded, adjust the tirepressures to the values that matchthe loading conditions.

WARNING

Driving at high speeds withexcessively low tire pressurescan cause the tires to deformseverely and to rapidly heatup. A sharp increase in tem-perature could cause treadseparation and destruction ofthe tires. The resulting loss of

vehicle control could lead toan accident.

& Wheel balanceS11AV05

Each wheel was correctly balancedwhen your vehicle was new, but thewheels will become unbalanced asthe tires become worn during use.Wheel imbalance causes the steer-ing wheel to vibrate slightly atcertain vehicle speeds and detractsfrom the vehicle’s straight-line sta-bility. It can also cause steering andsuspension system problems andabnormal tire wear. If you suspectthat the wheels are not correctlybalanced, have them checked andadjusted by your SUBARU dealer.Also have them adjusted after tirerepairs and after tire rotation.

– CONTINUED –


11

Maintenance

andservice

(490,1)


CAUTION

Loss of correct wheel align-ment causes the tires to wearon one side and reduces thevehicle’s running stability.Contact your SUBARU dealerif you notice abnormal tirewear.

NOTEThe suspension system is de-signed to hold each wheel at acertain alignment (relative to theother wheels and to the road) foroptimum straight-line stabilityand cornering performance.

& Wear indicatorsS11AV06

1) New tread2) Worn tread3) Tread wear indicatorEach tire incorporates a tread wearindicator, which becomes visiblewhen the depth of the tread groovesdecreases to 0.063 in (1.6 mm). Atire must be replaced when thetread wear indicator appears as asolid band across the tread.

WARNING

When a tire’s tread wear indi-cator becomes visible, the tire

is worn beyond the acceptablelimit and must be replacedimmediately. With a tire in thiscondition, driving at highspeeds in wet weather cancause the vehicle to hydro-plane. The resulting loss ofvehicle control can lead to anaccident.

NOTEFor safety, inspect tire treadregularly and replace the tiresbefore their treadwear indicatorsbecome visible.

Tires and wheels488

(491,1)


& Rotational direction of tiresS11AV11

Example of rotational directionmarked on the sidewall1) FrontIf the tires have specific rotationaldirection, refer to the arrow markedon the side wall.The arrow should be pointing for-ward direction when the wheels arefitted.

& Tire rotationS11AV07

Vehicles equipped with 4 non-unidirectional tires1) Front

Vehicles equipped with unidi-rectional tires1) Front

– CONTINUED –


11

Maintenance

andservice

(492,1)


Models with a spare tire of thesame wheel type as the in-stalled tires1) Front

NOTEIn prior to carrying out a tirerotation, check the side wall ofthe tires and confirm the follow-ing.. All 5 tires are the same inbrand and tread pattern.. The rotational directions andsizes match.Tire wear varies from wheel towheel. Move the tires to the posi-

tions shown in the illustration eachtime they are rotated. For the tirerotation schedule, refer to the “War-ranty and Maintenance Booklet”.

Replace any damaged or unevenlyworn tires at the time of rotation.After tire rotation, adjust the tirepressures and make sure the wheelnuts are correctly tightened.

After driving approximately 600miles (1,000 km), check the wheelnuts again and retighten any nutthat has become loose.For handling alloy wheels, refer to “Alloywheels” FP491.

& Tire replacementS11AV08

The wheels and tires are important andintegral parts of your vehicle’s design; theycannot be changed arbitrarily. The tiresfitted as standard equipment are optimallymatched to the characteristics of thevehicle and were selected to give the bestpossible combination of running perfor-mance, ride comfort, and service life. It isessential for every tire to have a size andconstruction matching those shown on thetire inflation pressure label and to have a

speed symbol and load index matchingthose shown on the tire inflation pressurelabel.

Using tires of a non-specified size detractsfrom controllability, ride comfort, brakingperformance, speedometer accuracy andodometer accuracy. It also creates incor-rect body-to-tire clearances and inappro-priately changes the vehicle’s groundclearance.

All four tires must be the same in terms ofmanufacturer, brand (tread pattern), con-struction, and size. You are advised toreplace the tires with new ones that areidentical to those fitted as standard equip-ment.

For safe vehicle operation, SUBARUrecommends replacing all four tires at thesame time.

WARNING

. When replacing or installingtire(s), all four tires must be thesame for following items.(a) Size(b) Speed symbol(c) Load index(d) Circumference(e) Construction

Tires and wheels490

(493,1)


(f) Manufacturer(g) Brand (tread pattern)(h) Degree of wearFor items (a) to (c), you mustobey the specification that isprinted on the tire inflation pres-sure label. The tire inflation pres-sure label is located on the dri-ver’s door pillar.If all the four tires are not thesame for items (a) to (h), seriousmechanical damage could becaused to the drivetrain of thecar, and affect the followings.– Ride– Handling– Braking– Speedometer/Odometer cali-

bration– Clearance between the body

and tiresIt also may be dangerous andlead to loss of vehicle control,and it can lead to an accident.

. Use only radial tires. Do not useradial tires together with beltedbias tires and/or bias-ply tires.Doing so can dangerously re-duce controllability, resulting in

an accident.

& Wheel replacementS11AV09

When replacing wheels due, for example,to damage, make sure the replacementwheels match the specifications of thewheels that are fitted as standard equip-ment. Replacement wheels are availableat your SUBARU dealer.

WARNING

Use only those wheels that arespecified for your vehicle. Wheelsnot meeting specifications couldinterfere with brake caliper opera-tion and may cause the tires to rubagainst the wheel well housing dur-ing turns. The resulting loss ofvehicle control could lead to anaccident.

NOTEWhen any of the wheels are removedand replaced for tire rotation or for anyother reason, always check the tight-ness of the wheel nuts after drivingapproximately 600 miles (1,000 km). Ifany nut is loose, tighten it to thespecified torque.

11-18. Alloy wheelsS11BM

Alloy wheels can be scratched and da-maged easily. Handle them carefully tomaintain their appearance, performance,and safety.. When any of the wheels are removedand replaced for tire rotation or to change aflat tire, always check the tightness of thewheel nuts after driving approximately 600miles (1,000 km). If any nut is loose,tighten it to the specified torque.. Never apply oil to the threaded parts,wheel nuts, or tapered surface of thewheel.. Never let the wheel rub against sharpprotrusions or curbs.. When wheel nuts, balance weights, orthe center cap are replaced, be sure toreplace them with genuine SUBARU partsdesigned for alloy wheels.. When stacking and storing removedtires, place shock-absorbing material be-tween the tires to protect the wheels frombecoming scratched.

Alloy wheels 491

11

Maintenance

andservice

(494,1)


11-19. Windshield washerfluid

S11AX

Type A combination meter

Type B combination meter

When there is only a small amount ofwasher fluid remaining, the windshieldwasher fluid warning light will illuminate.When this occurs, refill the washer fluid.

& Adding the windshieldwasher fluid

S11AX01

CAUTION

Never use engine coolant as washerfluid because it could cause paintdamage.

Remove the washer tank filler cap, thenadd windshield washer fluid.

& Windshield washer fluidS11AX02

Use windshield washer fluid. If windshieldwasher fluid is unavailable, use cleanwater.In areas where water freezes in winter, usean anti-freeze type windshield washerfluid.If you fill the reservoir tank with a fluid witha different concentration from the oneused previously, purge the old fluid fromthe piping between the reservoir tank andwasher nozzles by operating the washerfor a certain period of time. Otherwise, ifthe concentration of the fluid remaining inthe piping is too low for the outsidetemperature, it may freeze and block thenozzles.

CAUTION

. Adjust the washer fluid concen-tration appropriately for the out-side temperature. If the concen-tration is inappropriate, sprayedwasher fluid may freeze on thewindshield and obstruct yourview, and the fluid may freeze inthe reservoir tank.

. State or local regulations onvolatile organic compounds mayrestrict the use of methanol, acommon windshield washer anti-

Windshield washer fluid492

(495,1)


freeze additive. Washer fluidscontaining non-methanol anti-freeze agents should be usedonly if they provide cold weatherprotection without damagingyour vehicle’s paint, wiper bladesor washer system.

11-20. Replacement of wiperblades

S11AZ

Grease, wax, insects, or other material onthe windshield or the wiper blade results injerky wiper operation and streaking on theglass. If you cannot remove the streaksafter operating the windshield washer or ifthe wiper operation is jerky, clean the outersurface of the windshield (or rear window)and the wiper blades using a sponge orsoft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild-abrasive cleaner. After cleaning, rinse thewindshield and wiper blades with cleanwater. The windshield is clean if beads donot form when you rinse the windshieldwith water.

CAUTION

. Do not clean the wiper bladeswith gasoline or a solvent, suchas paint thinner or benzine. Thiswill cause deterioration of thewiper blades.

. While removing the wiper bladesfrom the wiper arms, do notreturn the wiper arms to theoriginal positions. Otherwise,the windshield surface may bescratched.

. When returning the raised wiperarms to the original positions,carefully return the wiper armson the windshield by hand. Youshould not return the wiper armsto the windshield only by thereturn spring. Otherwise, the wi-per armsmaybe deformed and/orthe windshield surface may bescratched.

. When you are going to raise thepassenger-side wiper arm, firstraise the driver-side wiper arm.Otherwise, the passenger-sidewiper assembly and driver-sidewiper assembly will touch eachother, possibly resulting inscratches.

. Return the passenger-side wiperarm to its original position beforereturning the driver-side wiperarm to its original position. Other-wise, the passenger-side wiperassembly and driver-side wiperassembly will touch each other,possibly resulting in scratches.

If you cannot eliminate the streaking evenafter following this method, replace thewiper blades using the following proce-dures.

– CONTINUED –

Replacement of wiper blades 493

11

Maintenance

andservice

(496,1)


& Windshield wiper blade as-sembly

S11AZ011. Raise the wiper arm off the windshield.

CAUTION

Hold the wiper arm when replacingthe wiper blade. Holding the wiperblade, may result in blade deforma-tion.

1) Lock knob

2. Hold the wiper blade connection byhand, push the lock knob to release thelock, and then pull out the wiper bladeassembly.

NOTEDo not use a hard object to push thelock knob. The lock knob may bescratched.

3. When installing the wiper blade as-sembly, align it with the wiper arm connec-tion part and then slide it in the oppositedirection of removal to install. After instal-ling the wiper blade assembly, check thatthe connection part is locked completely.4. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowlylower it in position.

Replacement of wiper blades494

(497,1)


& Windshield wiper blade rubberS11AZ05

Replace the wiper blade rubber according to the following procedure.

1) Slit

1. Pull the wiper blade rubber from theright side in the order of (1), (2) and (3) untilthe slit on the wiper blade can be seenposition.

2. Pull the end of the wiper blade rubberthrough the slit to remove it.

3. Insert a new wiper blade rubber intothe slit. Do not insert the wiper bladerubber into the wrong slit.

– CONTINUED –


11

Maintenance

andservice

(498,1)


4. Insert the wiper blade rubber into theslit, then return to the tip of the position.5. Check that the wiper blade rubber isfixed properly. If wiper blade rubbers arenot attached properly, they may scratchthe windshield.6. Attach the wiper blade.

NOTEIt may be difficult to perform the wiperblade rubber replacement. We recom-mend that you contact your SUBARUdealer for wiper blade rubber replace-ment if necessary.

& Rear window wiper blade as-sembly

S11AZ031. Raise the wiper arm off the rearwindow.

2. Turn the wiper blade assembly coun-terclockwise.

3. Pull the wiper blade assembly towardyou to remove it from the wiper arm.4. Install the wiper blade assembly to thewiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.5. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowlylower it in position.

Replacement of wiper blades496

(499,1)


& Rear window wiper bladerubber

S11AZ04

1. Pull out the end of the blade rubberassembly to unlock it from the plasticsupport.

2. Pull the blade rubber assembly out ofthe plastic support.

1) Metal spines

3. If the new blade rubber is not providedwith two metal spines, remove the metalspines from the old blade rubber and install

them in the new blade rubber.

4. Align the claws of the plastic supportwith the grooves in the blade rubberassembly, then slide the blade rubberassembly into place.

Securely retain both ends of the rubber

– CONTINUED –


11

Maintenance

andservice

(500,1)


with the stoppers on the plastic supportends. If the rubber is not retained properly,the wiper may scratch the rear windowglass.5. Install the wiper blade assembly to thewiper arm. Make sure that it locks in place.6. Hold the wiper arm by hand and slowlylower it in position.

11-21. BatteryS11BA

WARNING

. Before beginning work on or nearany battery, be sure to extinguishall cigarettes, matches, and light-ers. Never expose a battery to anopen flame or electric sparks.Batteries give off a gas which ishighly flammable and explosive.

. For safety, in case an explosiondoes occur, wear eye protectionor shield your eyeswhenworkingnear any battery. Never lean overa battery.

. Do not let battery fluid contacteyes, skin, fabrics, or paint be-cause battery fluid is a corrosiveacid. If battery fluid gets on yourskin or in your eyes, immediatelyflush the area with water thor-oughly. Seek medical help imme-diately if acid has entered theeyes.If battery fluid is accidentallyswallowed, immediately drink alarge amount of milk or water,and seek medical attention im-mediately.

. To lessen the risk of sparks,remove rings, metal watchbands,and other metal jewelry. Neverallow metal tools to contact thepositive battery terminal and any-thing connected to it WHILE youare at the same time in contactwith any other metallic portion ofthe vehicle because a short cir-cuit will result.

. Keep everyone including childrenaway from the battery.

. Charge the battery in a well-ventilated area.

. Battery posts, terminals and re-lated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductiveharm. Batteries also containother chemicals known to theState of California to cause can-cer. Wash hands after handling.

Battery498

(501,1)


1) Cap2) Upper level3) Lower level

It is unnecessary to periodically check thebattery fluid level or periodically refill withdistilled water.However, if the battery fluid level is belowthe lower level, remove the cap. Fill to theupper level with distilled water.

CAUTION

Never use more than 10 A whencharging the battery because it willshorten battery life.

It is unnecessary to periodically check thebattery fluid level or periodically refill withdistilled water.

For “STARLINK Safety and Securitywithout navigation system”:When the vehicle battery is discharged orreplaced, the audio unit needs to be pairedwith a smartphone via bluetooth for somesettings. For details about how to pair,refer to the separate navigation/audioOwner’s Manual.

11-22. FusesS11BB

CAUTION

Never replace a fusewith one havinga higher rating or with material otherthan a fuse because serious damageor a fire could result.

NOTEFuse rating and using circuit are de-scribed on each behind the fuse boxcover.The fuses are designed to melt during anoverload to prevent damage to the wiringharness and electrical equipment. Thefuses are located in two fuse boxes.

– CONTINUED –

Fuses 499

11

Maintenance

andservice

(502,1)


One is located under the instrument panelbehind the fuse box cover on the driver’sseat side. To remove the cover, pull it out.

1) Spare fuses

The other one (main fuse box) is housed inthe engine compartment. Also, the sparefuses are stored in the fuse box cover.

The fuse puller is stored in the main fusebox in the engine compartment.Pinch the upper part of the fuse pullerwhen removing it from the main fuse box.

1) Good2) Blown

If any lights, accessories or other electricalcontrols do not operate, inspect the corre-sponding fuse. If a fuse has blown, replaceit.1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”/“OFF” position and turn off all electricalaccessories.2. Remove the cover.3. Determine which fuse may be blown.Look at the back side of each fuse boxcover.

4. Pull out the fuse with the fuse puller.5. Inspect the fuse. If it has blown,replace it with a spare fuse of the samerating.6. If the same fuse blows again, thisindicates that its system has a problem.Contact your SUBARU dealer for repairs.

Fuses500

(503,1)


11-23. Installation of acces-sories

S11BD

Always consult your SUBARU dealerbefore installing fog lights or any otherelectrical equipment in your vehicle. Suchaccessories may cause the electronicsystem to malfunction if they are incor-rectly installed or if they are not suited forthe vehicle.

11-24. Replacing bulbsS11BE

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs. Werecommend that you have the bulb re-placed by your SUBARU dealer if neces-sary.

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot whileilluminated. Before replacing bulbs,turn off the lights and wait until thebulbs cool down. Otherwise, there isa risk of sustaining a burn.

CAUTION

. Replace any bulb only with a newbulb of the specified wattage.Using a bulb of different wattagecould result in a fire. For thespecified wattage of each bulb,refer to “Bulb chart” FP519.

. Do not touch the glass portion ofthe light bulb with bare hands.When holding the glass portion isunavoidable, hold it using with aclean dry cloth to avoid gettingmoisture and grease on the bulb.If there is any fingerprints orgrease on the bulb surface, wipe

them away with a soft clothmoistened with alcohol. Also, ifthe bulb is scratched or dropped,it may blow out or crack.

NOTEFor models with type B combinationmeter, if SRH is malfunctioning, theSRH OFF indicator appears on thecombination meter when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position. Itindicates that SRH has been deacti-vated. Contact a SUBARU dealer for aninspection.

– CONTINUED –

Installation of accessories 501

11

Maintenance

andservice

(504,1)


& HeadlightsS11BE18

The LED headlight warning light illumi-nates if the LED headlights malfunction.Have your vehicle inspected at a SUBARUdealer as soon as possible.

& Front turn signal lightS11BE55

Right-hand side

1. Use a screwdriver to remove the clipson the air intake duct, then remove theduct.

Left-hand side

2. Use a screwdriver to remove thesecured clip of the washer tank. To makeit easy to access the bulb, turn the neck ofthe washer fluid filler pipe as illustrated.

Replacing bulbs502

(505,1)


3. Disconnect the electrical connectorfrom the bulb and remove the bulb fromthe headlight assembly by turning itcounterclockwise.4. Replace the bulb. At this time, use carenot to touch the bulb surface.5. To install the bulb to the headlightassembly, turn it clockwise until it clicks.6. Reconnect the electrical connector.7. Put the air intake duct with the clips(right-hand side).8. Set the washer fluid filler pipe to theoriginal place and secure it with the clips(left-hand side).

& Front side marker lights (ifequipped)

S11BE48

Left-hand side

Right-hand side

1. Turn the socket counterclockwise andpull it out.2. Pull out the bulb from the socket andreplace the bulb with a new one.

& Front fog light (if equipped)S11BE04

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.Have the bulbs replaced by your SUBARUdealer if necessary.

& Rear turn signal lightsS11BE51

1. Use a screwdriver to remove thesecured clips of the covers.

– CONTINUED –

Replacing bulbs 503

11

Maintenance

andservice

(506,1)


2. Push and move the cover to theforward to unlock the 2 tabs.

3. When unlocked, pull out the covers.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

5. Using a Phillips screwdriver, removethe screws that secure the rear combina-tion light assembly.

6. Slide the rear combination light as-sembly rearward to remove it from thevehicle.

7. Remove the bulb socket from the rearcombination light assembly by turning itcounterclockwise.

Replacing bulbs504

(507,1)


8. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket andreplace it.9. Set the bulb socket into the rearcombination light assembly and turn itclockwise until it locks.10. Reconnect the electrical connector.

11. Put the rear combination light assem-bly into place while aligning the 2 pins withthe holes and secure to the vehicle.

12. Tighten the screws.13. Put the covers back in place.

& Backup lightS11BE36

1. Apply a flat-head screwdriver to thelight cover as shown in the illustration, andpry the light cover off from the rear gatetrim.

– CONTINUED –

Replacing bulbs 505

11

Maintenance

andservice

(508,1)


2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwiseand remove it.

3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket andreplace it.4. Install the bulb socket by turning itclockwise.

5. Route the wire as shown in theillustration.

6. Install the light cover on the rear gate.

& Vanity mirror lightS11BE34

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could causeburns since the bulb may be veryhot. Have the bulb replaced by yourSUBARU dealer.

& Door step lightS11BE10

CAUTION

Replacing the bulb could cause ashort circuit. Have the bulb replacedby your SUBARU dealer.

& Cargo area lightS11BE21

Cargo area light (models without rear gatelight)

1. Remove the lens by prying the edge ofthe lens with a flat-head screwdriver.2. Pull the bulb out of the socket.3. Install a new bulb.4. Put the lens back in place.

Replacing bulbs506

(509,1)


& Other bulbsS11BE29

It may be difficult to replace the bulbs.Have the bulbs replaced by yourSUBARU dealer if necessary.

& Adjusting headlight aimS11BE57

1) Adjustment bolt A2) Adjustment bolt B3) Adjustment direction mark

! Before checking the headlight aim-ing

S11BE57011. Make sure the vehicle has a full tank ofgasoline and the area around the headlightis not deformed.2. Park the vehicle on level ground.3. Sit in the driver’s seat.4. Bounce the vehicle several times.

! Headlight aim adjustmentS11BE5702

1) Adjustment direction mark

1. Turn bolt A clockwise or counterclock-wise to adjust it.Remember the direction of the rotation andnumber of rotations.

2. Turn bolt B the same number of turnsand in the same direction as step 1.

NOTE. If the headlight aim cannot be ad-justed, contact your SUBARU dealer.. To inspect the headlight aim posi-tion, consult a SUBARU dealer.

Replacing bulbs 507

11

Maintenance

andservice

(510,1)


11-25. Replacing key batteryS11BK

The access key fob/transmitter batterymay be discharged under the followingconditions.. The operation of the keyless accessfunction is unstable.. The operating distance of the remotekeyless entry system is unstable.. The transmitter does not operate prop-erly when used within the standard dis-tance.

Replace the battery with a new one.

& Safety precautionsS11BK04

CAUTION

. Do not let dust, oil or water get onor in the access key fob/transmit-ter when replacing the battery.

. Before replacing the battery, re-move any static electricity.

. Be careful not to touch or damagethe printed circuit board in theaccess key fob/transmitter whenreplacing the battery.

. Be careful not to allow children totouch the battery and any re-moved parts; children could

swallow them.. There is a danger of an explosion

if the battery is incorrectly re-placed. Replace only with thesame or equivalent type of thebattery.

. Batteries should not be exposedto excessive heat such as brightsunlight, fire or the like.

NOTE. Replace only with the same orequivalent type of battery recom-mended by the manufacturer.. Dispose of used batteries accordingto local laws.. Mount the battery in the correctorientation to prevent fluid leakage.Be careful not to bend the terminals. Itmay result in a malfunction.. It is recommended that the batterybe replaced by a SUBARU dealer.. Use a new battery.. After replacing the battery, confirmthat the transmitter functions properly.

& Replacing battery of accesskey fob

S11BK01

CAUTION

When removing or reinstalling theaccess key fob cover,make sure thatthe plastic part does not come off orbecome misaligned.

Battery: Button battery CR2032 orequivalent


1. Take out the emergency key.

Replacing key battery508

(511,1)


2. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyltape or a cloth, and insert it in the gap toremove the cover.

3. Take out the battery using a flat-headscrewdriver with vinyl tape or a cloth.

4. Insert a new battery with its positive (+)side facing upward as shown in the figure.

5. Attach the cover to the access key fobby fitting the projections and recessestogether.

& Replacing transmitter batteryS11BK02

Battery: Button battery CR1620 orequivalent

1. Wrap a flat-head screwdriver with vinyltape or a cloth. Open the key head using aflat-head screwdriver.

– CONTINUED –

Replacing key battery 509

11

Maintenance

andservice

(512,1)


2. Remove the transmitter case from thekey head.

3. Open the transmitter case by releasingthe hooks.

1) Negative (−) side facing up

4. Replace the old battery with a newbattery making sure to install the newbattery with the negative (−) side facing up.5. Put together the transmitter case byfitting the hooks on the case.6. Reinstall the transmitter case in thekey head.7. Refit the removed half of the key head.

Replacing key battery510

(513,1)


S1212-1. Specifications ............................................... 512

Dimensions ........................................................512Engine................................................................512Fuel....................................................................513Engine oil ...........................................................513Front differential and rear differential gear oil .....515Fluids .................................................................516Engine coolant ...................................................516Electrical system ................................................516

Tires .................................................................. 517Temporary spare tires ........................................ 517Brake pedal........................................................ 517Brake disc ......................................................... 518Brake pad .......................................................... 518

12-2. Bulb chart ......................................................519Safety precautions ............................................. 519Bulb chart .......................................................... 520

12-3. Vehicle identification.....................................523

Specifications

12

Specifications

(514,1)


12-1. SpecificationsS12AA

These specifications are subject to change without notice.

& DimensionsS12AA01 in (mm)

Item Forester Subaru Forester Wilderness

Overall length 182.7 (4,640)Overall width 71.5 (1,815) 72.2 (1,835)

Overall height 68.1 (1,730)*267.5 (1,715)*3 68.9 (1,750)

Wheel base 105.1 (2,670) 104.9 (2,665)

TreadFront 61.6 (1,565) 61.4 (1,560)Rear 61.8 (1,570) 61.4 (1,560)

Ground clearance*1 8.7 (220) 9.3 (235)

*1: Measured with vehicle empty*2: Models with roof rails*3: Models without roof rails

& EngineS12AA02

Engine model FB25 (2.5 L, DOHC, non-turbo)

Engine type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4-stroke direct injection gasoline engine

Displacement cu-in (cc) 152 (2,498)Bore 6 Stroke in (mm) 3.70 6 3.54 (94.0 6 90.0)

Compression ratio 12.0 : 1Firing order 1 – 3 – 2 – 4

Specifications512

(515,1)


& FuelS12AA08

Fuel requirement Fuel tank capacity

Unleaded gasoline with 87 AKI (90 RON) or higher 16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)

For more details, refer to “Fuel” FP310.

& Engine oilS12AA12

For the checking, adding and replacing procedure or other details, refer to “Engine oil” FP474.

NOTEThe procedure for changing the engine oil and oil filter should be performed by a properly-trained expert. It is recommendedthat you have this service performed by your SUBARU dealer.

! Approved engine oilS12AA1201

Always use the SUBARU approved engine oil. For further details, please contact your SUBARU dealer.If the approved engine oil is unavailable, use the alternative engine oil described on the next page.

– CONTINUED –

Specifications 513

12

Specifications

(516,1)


! Alternative engine oilS12AA1202

If the SUBARU approved oil is unavailable, the following alternative oil can be used.

NOTEEach quantity indicated here is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on thetemperature and other factors.

Oil grade SAE viscosity No. andapplicable temperature Engine oil capacity

API (American Petroleum Insti-tute) classification SN with thewords “RESOURCE CONSER-VING”, SN PLUS with the words“RESOURCE CONSERVING” orSP with the words “RESOURCECONSERVING”

or

ILSAC (International LubricantSpecification Advisory Commit-tee) GF-5 or GF-6A, which canbe identified with the ILSACcertification mark (Starburstmark)

0W-20 synthetic oil is the required oilfor optimum engine performance andprotection. Conventional oil may beused if synthetic oil is unavailable.

*: If 0W-20 synthetic oil is not available,5W-30 conventional oil may be usedif replenishment is needed but shouldbe changed to 0W-20 synthetic oil atthe next oil change.

– Adding the oil from low level tofull level:1.1 US qt (1.0 liter, 0.9 Imp qt)

– Changing the oil and oil filter:4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)

Specifications514

(517,1)


& Front differential and rear differential gear oilS12AA13

Oil Front differential gear oil Rear differential gear oil

Oil grade . SUBARU Extra MT*3. API classification GL-5 (75W-90) API classification GL-5

SAE viscosity No. and applicabletemperature —

. 75W-90*

. 90

*: Recommended

Oil capacity*1 1.4 US qt (1.3 liters, 1.1 Imp qt) 0.8 US qt (0.8 liters, 0.7 Imp qt)Remarks*2 “Front differential gear oil and rear differential gear oil” FP481

*1: The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and otherfactors. After refilling the gearbox with oil, the oil level should be checked.

*2: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.*3: The vehicle is filled at the factory with this oil.

– CONTINUED –

Specifications 515

12

Specifications

(518,1)


& FluidsS12AA10

Fluid Fluid type*1 Fluid capacity*2 Remarks*3

Continuously variabletransmission fluid Consult your SUBARU dealer.

Except for Subaru Forester Wilderness models: 12.7 US qt (12.0liters, 10.6 Imp qt)For Subaru Forester Wilderness models: 12.4 US qt (11.7 liters,10.3 Imp qt)

“Continuously variabletransmission fluid” FP480

Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116, DOT 3or DOT 4 brake fluid — “Brake fluid” FP481

*1: Use one of the indicated types of fluid.*2: The indicated fluid quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and other

factors.*3: For more details about maintenance and service, refer to the indicated section.

& Engine coolantS12AA11

Coolant capacity Coolant type9.0 US qt (8.5 liters, 7.5 Imp qt) SUBARU SUPER COOLANT

The indicated coolant quantity is only a guideline. The necessary quantity for replacement may differ slightly depending on the temperature and otherfactors. For more details about maintenance and service, refer to “Cooling system” FP476.

& Electrical systemS12AA03

Battery type Q-85

Alternator 12 V-150 A

Spark plugs DILKAR7Q8 (NGK)

Specifications516

(519,1)


& TiresS12AA05

Item Forester Subaru Forester Wilderness

Tire size 225/60R17 99H 225/55R18 98H 225/60R17 99TWheel size 17 6 7 J 18 6 7 J 17 6 7 J

PressureFront 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)Rear 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2) 33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2) 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Wheel nut tightening torque 89 lbf·ft (120 N·m, 12 kgf·m)*1

*1: This torque is equivalent to applying approximately 88 to 110 lbf (40 to 50 kgf) at the end of the wheel nut wrench. If you have tightened the wheel nutsby yourself, have the tightening torque checked at the nearest automotive service facility as soon as possible. For the wheel nut tightening procedure,refer to “Changing a flat tire” FP438.

& Temporary spare tiresS12AA15

U.S.-spec. models and Canada-spec. models Other modelsTemporary spare tire size T145/80 D17 185/65 R17

Temporary spare tire inflation pressure(recommended cold tire inflation pressure) 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2) 42 psi (290 kPa, 2.9 kgf/cm2)

& Brake pedalS12AA27 in (mm)

Pedal clearance 2.56 (65)*Pedal free play 0.02 - 0.11 (0.5 - 2.7)

*: Minimum value when pedal is operated with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf)

– CONTINUED –

Specifications 517

12

Specifications

(520,1)


& Brake discS12AA18

If you need information on the usage limit value of brake discs and themethod for measuring them, we recommend that you consult yourSUBARU dealer.

& Brake padS12AA28 in (mm)

Brake pad wear limit 0.06 (1.5)

Specifications518

(521,1)


12-2. Bulb chartS12AC

& Safety precautionsS12AC03

WARNING

Bulbs may become very hot whileilluminated. Before replacing bulbs,turn off the lights and wait until thebulbs cool down. Otherwise, there isa risk of sustaining a burn injury.

CAUTION

Replace any bulb only with a newbulb of the specified wattage. Usinga bulb of different wattage couldresult in a fire.

– CONTINUED –

Bulb chart 519

12

Specifications

(522,1)


& Bulb chartS12AC04

NOTELights indicated by letters are the LED (Light Emitting Diode) type. Consult your SUBARU dealer for replacement.

Bulb chart520

(523,1)


Wattage Bulb No.1) Front turn signal light 12 V-21 W WY21W2) Vanity mirror light 12 V-2 W —3) Cargo area light (models without rear gate light) 12 V-13 W —4) Door step light 12 V-5 W W5W5) Rear turn signal light 12 V-21 W WY21W6) Backup light 12 V-16 W W16W7) Front side marker light (if equipped) 12 V-5 W W5W8) Front fog light (if equipped) 12 V-19 W H16A) Low/High beam headlight — —

Daytime running light — —B) Map light — —C) Dome light — —D) Side turn signal light (if equipped) — —E) High-mounted stop light — —F) Cargo area light (models with rear gate light) — —G) Tail light — —H) Stop light — —

Tail light — —I) Rear side marker light — —J) Rear gate light (if equipped) — —K) License plate light — —L) Front side marker light (if equipped) — —

Wattage Bulb No.

– CONTINUED –

Bulb chart 521

12

Specifications

(524,1)


Wattage Bulb No.M) Front position light/Accessory lamp (if equipped) — —N) Front fog light (if equipped) — —

Bulb chart522

(525,1)


12-3. Vehicle identificationS12AD

1) Vehicle identification number (under thefloor carpet of the right-hand front seat)

2) Emission control label3) Tire inflation pressure label (vehicle

placard)4) Certification label5) Vehicle identification number6) Model number label7) Fuel label8) Air conditioner label

Vehicle identification 523

12

Specifications

(526,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(527,1)


S1313-1. For U.S.A. ...................................................... 52613-2. Tire information ............................................ 526

Tire labeling .......................................................526Recommended tire inflation pressure..................528Glossary of tire terminology ...............................529Tire care – maintenance and safety practices......534Determining compatibility of tire and vehicleload capacities .................................................534

Adverse safety consequences of overloadingon handling and stopping and on tires..............534

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit ...........535

13-3. Vehicle load limit – how to determine .........535Calculating total and load capacities varyingseating configurations...................................... 536

13-4. Uniform tire quality grading standards .......538TREADWEAR ..................................................... 539TRACTION AA, A, B, C ....................................... 539TEMPERATURE A, B, C ...................................... 539

13-5. Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.).................54013-6. How to contact Transport Canada in

order to report a safety concern relatingto the vehicle (Canada).................................540

Consumer information and reporting safety defects

13

Consum

erinform

ationand

reportingsafety

defects

(528,1)


13-1. For U.S.A.S13AA

The following information has beencompiled according to Code ofFederal Regulations “Title 49, Part575”.

13-2. Tire informationS13AB

& Tire labelingS13AB01

Many markings (e.g. Tire size, TireIdentification Number or TIN) areplaced on the sidewall of a tire bytire manufacturers. These markingscan provide you with useful infor-mation on the tire.! Tire size

S13AB0101Your vehicle comes equipped withP-Metric tire size. It is important tounderstand the sizing system inselecting the proper tire for yourvehicles. Here is a brief review ofthe tire sizing system with a break-down of its individual elements.

! P MetricS13AB010101

With the P-Metric system, SectionWidth is measured in millimeters.To convert millimeters into inches,divide by 25.4. The Aspect Ratio(Section Height divided by SectionWidth) helps provide more dimen-sional information about the tiresize.

Example:

(1) P = Certain tire type used onlight duty vehicles such as passen-ger cars(2) Section Width in millimeters(3) Aspect Ratio (= section height7 section width).(4) R = Radial Construction(5) Rim diameter in inches

! Load and Speed RatingDescriptions

S13AB010102

The load and speed rating descrip-tions will appear following the sizedesignation.They provide two important factsabout the tire. First, the numberdesignation is its load index. Sec-ond, the letter designation indicatesthe tire’s speed rating.

For U.S.A.526

(529,1)


Example:

(6) Load Index: A numerical codewhich specifies the maximum loada tire can carry at the speedindicated by its speed symbol, atmaximum inflation pressure.

For example, “90” means 1,323 lbs(600 kg), “89” means 1,278 lbs (580kg).

WARNING

Load indices apply only to thetire, not to the vehicle. Puttinga load rated tire on any vehicledoes not mean the vehicle canbe loaded up to the tire’s ratedload.

(7) Speed Rating: An alphabeticalsystem describing a tire’s capabilityto travel at established and prede-termined speeds.For example, “V” means 149 mph(240 km/h)

WARNING

. Speed ratings apply only tothe tire, not to the vehicle.Putting a speed rated tire onany vehicle does not meanthe vehicle can be operatedat the tire’s rated speed.

. The speed rating is void ifthe tires are worn out, da-maged, repaired, retreaded,or otherwise altered fromtheir original condition. Ift ires are repaired, re-treaded, or otherwise al-tered, they may not be sui-table for original equipmenttire designed loads andspeeds.

! Tire Identification Number(TIN)

S13AB0102Tire Identification Number (TIN) ismarked on the intended outboardsidewall. The TIN is composed offour groups. Here is a brief review ofthe TIN with a breakdown of its

individual elements.

(1) DOT symbol*(2) Manufacturer’s IdentificationMark(3) Tire Size Code(4) Tire Type Code(5) Date of ManufactureThe first two figures identify theweek, starting with “01” to representthe first full week of the calendaryear; the second two figures repre-sent the year. For example, 0101means the 1st week of 2001.*: The DOTsymbol certifies that thetire conforms to applicable Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards.

– CONTINUED –

Tire information 527

13

Consum

erinform

ationand

reportingsafety

defects

(530,1)


! Other markingsS13AB0103

The following makings are alsoplaced on the sidewall.

! Maximumpermissible infla-tion pressure

S13AB010301

The maximum cold inflation pres-sure to which this tire may beinflated. For example, “300 kPa(44 PSI) MAX. PRESS”

! Maximum load ratingS13AB010302

The load rating at the maximumpermissible weight load for this tire.For example, “MAX. LOAD 580 kg(1279 LBS) @ 300 kPa (44 PSI)MAX. PRESS.”

WARNING

Maximum load rating appliesonly to the tire, not to thevehicle. Putting a load ratedtire on any vehicle does notmean the vehicle can beloaded up to the tire’s ratedload.

! Construction typeS13AB010303

Applicable construction of this tire.For example, “TUBELESS STEELBELTED RADIAL”

! ConstructionS13AB010304

The generic name of each cordmaterial used in the plies (bothsidewall and tread area) of this tire.For example, “PLIES: TREAD 2STEEL + 2 POLYESTER SIDE-WALL 2 POLYESTER”

! Uniform Tire Quality Grad-ing (UTQG)

S13AB010305

For details, refer to “Uniform tirequality grading standards” FP538.

& Recommended tire inflationpressure

S13AB02

! Recommended cold tire in-flation pressure

S13AB0201For recommended cold tire inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires,refer to “Tires” FP517.

! Vehicle placardS13AB0202

The vehicle placard is attached tothe driver’s side door pillar.Example:

Tire information528

(531,1)


The vehicle placard shows originaltire size, recommended cold tireinflation pressure on each tire atmaximum loaded vehicle weight,seating capacity and loading infor-mation.! Adverse safety conse-

quences of under-inflationS13AB0203

Driving at high speeds with exces-sively low tire pressures can causethe tires to flex severely and torapidly become hot. A sharp in-crease in temperature could causetread separation, and failure of thetire(s). Possible resulting loss ofvehicle control could lead to anaccident.! Measuring and adjusting air

pressure to achieve properinflation

S13AB0204Check and, if necessary, adjust thepressure of each tire (including thespare) at least once a month andbefore any long journey. Check thetire pressures when the tires arecold. Use a pressure gauge to

adjust the tire pressures to thespecific values. Driving even a shortdistance warms up the tires andincreases the tire pressures. Also,the tire pressures are affected bythe outside temperature. It is best tocheck tire pressure outdoors beforedriving the vehicle. When a tirebecomes warm, the air inside itexpands, causing the tire pressureto increase. Be careful not to mis-takenly release air from a warm tireto reduce its pressure.

& Glossary of tire terminologyS13AB03

. Accessory weightThe combined weight (in excess ofthose standard items which may bereplaced) of automatic transmis-sion, power steering, power brakes,power windows, power seats, radio,and heater, to the extent that theseitems are available as factory-in-stalled equipment (whether in-stalled or not).. BeadThe part of the tire that is made of

steel wires, wrapped or reinforcedby ply cords and that is shaped to fitthe rim.. Bead separationA breakdown of the bond betweencomponents in the bead.. Bias ply tireA pneumatic tire in which the plycords that extend to the beads arelaid at alternate angles substantiallyless than 90 degrees to the center-line of the tread.. CarcassThe tire structure, except tread andsidewall rubber which, when in-flated, bears the load.. ChunkingThe breaking away of pieces of thetread or sidewall.. Cold tire pressureThe pressure in a tire that has beendriven less than 1 mile or has beenstanding for three hours or more.. CordThe strands forming the plies in thetire.

– CONTINUED –


13

Consum

erinform

ationand

reportingsafety

defects

(532,1)


. Cord separationThe parting of cords from adjacentrubber compounds.. CrackingAny parting within the tread, side-wall, or inner liner of the tireextending to cord material.. Curb weightThe weight of a motor vehicle withstandard equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant, and if so equipped, airconditioning and additional weightoptional engine.. Extra load tireA tire designed to operate at higherloads and higher inflation pressurethan the corresponding standardtire.. GrooveThe space between two adjacenttread ribs.. InnerlinerThe layer(s) forming the inside sur-face of a tubeless tire that containsthe inflating medium within the tire.

. Innerliner separationThe parting of the innerliner fromcord material in the carcass.. Intended outboard sidewall

(1) The sidewall that contains awhitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding thatis higher or deeper than thesame molding on the other side-wall of the tire, or(2) The outward facing sidewallof an asymmetrical tire that has aparticular side that must alwaysface outward when mounting ona vehicle.

. Light truck (LT) tireA tire designated by its manufac-turer as primarily intended for useon lightweight trucks or multipur-pose passenger vehicles.. Load ratingThe maximum load that a tire israted to carry for a given inflationpressure.. Maximum inflation pressureThe maximum cold inflation pres-

sure to which a tire may be inflated.. Maximum load ratingThe load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.. Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe sum of:

(a) Curb weight(b) Accessory weight(c) Vehicle capacity weight(d) Production options weight

. Maximum permissible inflationpressureThe maximum cold inflation pres-sure to which a tire may be inflated.. Measuring rimThe rim on which a tire is fitted forphysical dimension requirements.. Normal occupant weight150 lbs (68 kg) times the number ofoccupants specified in the secondcolumn of Table 1 that is appendedto the end of this section.. Occupant distributionDistribution of occupants in a vehi-cle as specified in the third columnof Table 1 that is appended to the

Tire information530

(533,1)


end of this section.. Open spliceAny parting at any junction of tread,sidewall, or innerliner that extendsto cord material.. Outer diameterThe overall diameter of an inflatednew tire.. Overall widthThe linear distance between theexteriors of the sidewalls of aninflated tire, including elevationsdue to labeling, decorations, orprotective bands or ribs.. Passenger car tireA tire intended for use on passen-ger cars, multipurpose passengervehicles, and trucks, that have agross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)of 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg) or less.. PlyA layer of rubber-coated parallelcords.. Ply separationA parting of rubber compoundbetween adjacent plies.

. Pneumatic tireA mechanical device made of rub-ber, chemicals, fabric and steel orother mater ia ls , that , whenmounted on an automotive wheel,provides the traction and containsthe gas or fluid that sustains theload.. Production options weightThe combined weight of thoseinstalled regular production optionsweighing over 5.1 lbs (2.3 kg) inexcess of those standard itemswhich they replace, not previouslyconsidered in curb weight or acces-sory weight, including heavy dutybrakes, ride levelers, roof rack,heavy duty battery, and special trim.. Radial ply tireA pneumatic tire in which the plycords that extend to the beads arelaid at substantially 90 degrees tothe centerline of the tread.. Recommended inflation pres-sureThe cold inflation pressure recom-mended by a vehicle manufacturer.

. Reinforced tireA tire designed to operate at higherloads and at higher inflation pres-sures than the corresponding stan-dard tire.. RimA metal support for a tire or a tireand tube assembly upon which thetire beads are seated.. Rim diameterNominal diameter of the bead seat.. Rim size designationRim diameter and width.. Rim type designationThe industry of manufacturer’s des-ignation for a rim by style or code.. Rim widthNominal distance between rimflanges.. Section widthThe linear distance between theexteriors of the sidewalls of aninflated tire, excluding elevationsdue to labeling, decoration, or pro-tective bands.. SidewallThat portion of a tire between the

– CONTINUED –


13

Consum

erinform

ationand

reportingsafety

defects

(534,1)


tread and bead.. Sidewall separationThe parting of the rubber compoundfrom the cord material in the side-wall.. Snow tireA tire that attains a traction indexequal to or greater than 110, com-pared to the ASTM E-1136-93Standard Reference Test Tire,when using the snow traction testas described in ASTM F-1805-00,Standard Test Method for SingleWheel Driving Traction in a StraightLine on Snow-and Ice-CoveredSurfaces, and that is marked withan Alpine Symbol “ ” on at leastone sidewall.. Test rimThe rim on which a tire is fitted fortesting, and it may be any rim listedas appropriate for use with that tire.. TreadThat portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.. Tread ribA tread section running circumfer-

entially around a tire.. Tread separationPulling away of the tread from thetire carcass.. Treadwear indicators (TWI)The projections within the principalgrooves designed to give a visualindication of the degrees of wear ofthe tread.. Vehicle capacity weightThe rated cargo and luggage loadplus 150 lbs (68 kg) times thevehicle’s designated seating capa-city.. Vehiclemaximum load on the tireLoad on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the maximumloaded vehicle weight and dividingby two.. Vehicle normal load on the tireLoad on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to eachaxle its share of the curb weight,accessory weight, and normal oc-cupant weight (distributed in accor-dance with Table 1 that is appended

to the end of this section) anddividing by 2.. Wheel-holding fixtureThe fixture used to hold the wheeland tire assembly securely duringtesting.

Tire information532

(535,1)


Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load forvarious designated seating capacitiesDesignated seatingcapacity, number of

occupantsVehicle normal load,number of occupants

Occupant distribution in anormally loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front.

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in secondseat.

11 through 15 52 in front, 1 in secondseat, 1 in third seat, 1 infourth seat.

16 through 22 72 in front, 2 in secondseat, 2 in third seat, 1 infourth seat.

– CONTINUED –


13

Consum

erinform

ationand

reportingsafety

defects

(536,1)


& Tire care – maintenance andsafety practices

S13AB04. Check on a daily basis that thetires are free from serious damage,nails, and stones. At the same time,check the tires for abnormal wear.. Inspect the tire tread regularlyand replace the tires before theirtread wear indicators become visi-ble. When a tire’s tread wear in-dicator becomes visible, the tire isworn beyond the acceptable limitand must be replaced immediately.With a tire in this condition, drivingat even low speeds in wet weathercan cause the vehicle to hydro-plane. Possible resulting loss ofvehicle control can lead to anaccident.. To maximize the life of each tireand ensure that the tires wearuniformly, it is best to rotate thetires every 6,000miles (10,000 km).For information about the tire rota-tion order, refer to “Tire rotation”FP489. Replace any damaged orunevenly worn tires at the time of

rotation. After tire rotation, adjustthe tire pressures and make surethe wheel nuts are correctly tigh-tened. For information about thetightening torque and tighteningsequence for the wheel nuts, referto “Flat tires” FP438.

& Determining compatibility oftire and vehicle load capaci-ties

S13AB06The sum of four tires’ maximumload ratings must exceed the max-imum loaded vehicle weight(“GVWR”). In addition, sum of themaximum load ratings of two fronttires and of two rear tires mustexceed each axle’s maximumloaded capacity (“GAWR”). Originalequipment tires are designed tofulfill those conditions.The maximum loaded vehicleweight is referred to Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). And eachaxle’s maximum loaded capacity isreferred to Gross Axle Weight Rat-ing (GAWR). The GVWR and each

axle’s GAWR are shown on thevehicle certification label located atthe bottom of driver’s side doorpillar.The GVWR and front and rearGAWRs are determined by not onlythe maximum load rating of tires butalso loaded capacities of the vehi-cle’s suspension, axles and otherparts of the body.Therefore, this means that thevehicle cannot necessarily beloaded up to the tire’s maximumload rating on the tire sidewall.

& Adverse safety conse-quences of overloading onhandlingandstoppingandontires

S13AB07Overloading could affect vehiclehandling, stopping distance, andvehicle and tire performance in thefollowing ways. This could lead toan accident and possibly result insevere personal injury.. Vehicle stability will deteriorate.. Heavy and/or high-mounted

Tire information534

(537,1)


loads could increase the risk ofrollover.. Stopping distance will increase.. Brakes could overheat and fail.. Suspension, bearings, axles andother body parts could break orexperience accelerated wear thatwill shorten vehicle life.. Tires could fail.. Tread separation could occur.. Tire could separate from its rim.

& Steps for Determining Cor-rect Load Limit

S13AB08

1. Locate the statement “The com-bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’splacard.2. Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.3. Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.4. The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-ple, if the “XXX” amount equals1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150lb passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1,400 − 750 (5 6 150) = 650 lbs.)5. Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.6. If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your ve-hicle.

13-3. Vehicle load limit – howto determine

S13BU

The load capacity of your vehicle isdetermined by weight, not by avail-able cargo space. The load limit ofyour vehicle is shown on the vehicleplacard attached to the driver’s sidedoor pillar. Locate the statement“The combined weight of occupantsand cargo should never exceedXXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.The vehicle placard also showsseating capacity of your vehicle.The total load capacity includes thetotal weight of driver and all pas-sengers and their belongings, anycargo, any optional equipment suchas a trailer hitch, roof rack or bikecarrier, etc., and the tongue load ofa trailer. Therefore cargo capacitycan be calculated by the followingmethod.

Cargo capacity = Load limit − (totalweight of occupants + total weight

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle load limit – how to determine 535

13

Consum

erinform

ationand

reportingsafety

defects

(538,1)


of optional equipment + tongue loadof a trailer (if applicable))

For information about vehicle load-ing, refer to “Loading your vehicle”FP419.

& Calculating total and loadcapacities varying seatingconfigurations

S13BU01Calculate the available load capa-city as shown in the followingexamples:Example 1A

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which is

indicated on the vehicle placardwith the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed 900 lbs or408 kg”.

For example, if the vehicle has oneoccupant weighing 154 lbs (70 kg)plus cargo weighing 662 lbs (300kg).1. Calculate the total weight.

2. Calculate the available load ca-pacity by subtracting the totalweight from the vehicle capacityweight of 900 lbs (408 kg).

3. The result of step 2 shows that a

further 84 lbs (38 kg) of cargo canbe carried.Example 1B

For example, if a person weighing176 lbs (80 kg) now enters the samevehicle (bringing the number ofoccupants to two), the calculationsare as follows.1. Calculate the total weight.

Vehicle load limit – how to determine536

(539,1)


2. Calculate the available load ca-pacity.

3. The total weight now exceedsthe capacity weight by 92 lbs (42kg), so the cargo weight must bereduced by 92 lbs (42 kg) or more.

Example 2A

Vehicle capacity weight of the ve-hicle is 900 lbs (408 kg), which isindicated on the vehicle placardwith the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed 408 kg or900 lbs”.

For example, the vehicle has oneoccupant weighing 165 lbs (75 kg)plus cargo weighing 375 lbs (170kg). In addition, the vehicle is fittedwith a trailer hitch weighing 22 lbs(10 kg), to which is attached a trailerweighing 1,764 lbs (800 kg). 10% ofthe trailer weight is applied to the

trailer tongue (i.e. Tongue load =176 lbs (80 kg)).1. Calculate the total weight.


3. The result of step 2 shows that afurther 162 lbs (73 kg) of cargo canbe carried.

– CONTINUED –

Vehicle load limit – how to determine 537

13

Consum

erinform

ationand

reportingsafety

defects

(540,1)


Example 2B

For example, if a person weighing143 lbs (65 kg) and a child weighing40 lbs (18 kg) now enter the samevehicle (bringing the number ofoccupants to three), and a childrestraint system weighing 11 lbs (5kg) is installed in the vehicle for thechild to use, the calculations are asfollows.1. Calculate the total weight.


3. The total weight now exceedsthe capacity weight by 32 lbs (15kg), so the cargo weight must bereduced by 32 lbs (15 kg) or more.

13-4. Uniform tire qualitygrading standards

S13AC

This information indicates the rela-tive performance of passenger cartires in the area of treadwear,traction, and temperature resis-tance. This is to aid the consumerin making an informed choice in thepurchase of tires.Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewall be-tween tread shoulder andmaximumsection width.For example:TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AATEMPERATURE A

The quality grades apply to newpneumatic tires for use on passen-ger cars. However, they do notapply to deep tread, winter typesnow tires, space-saver or tempor-ary use spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of 12 inchesor less, or to some limited produc-tion tires.

Uniform tire quality grading standards538

(541,1)


All passenger car tires must con-form to Federal Safety Require-ments in addition to these grades.

& TREADWEARS13AC02

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course.For example, a tire graded 150would wear one and one-half (1-1/2) times as well on the govern-ment course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditionsof their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

& TRACTION AA, A, B, CS13AC03

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spe-cified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned tothis tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include accelera-tion, cornering, hydroplaning,or peak traction characteris-tics.

& TEMPERATURE A, B, CS13AC04

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled con-ditions on a specified indoor labora-tory test wheel.Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passengercar tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards No. 109.Grades B and A represent higherlevels of performance on the la-boratory test wheel than the mini-mum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for thistire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately orin combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tirefailure.

Uniform tire quality grading standards 539

13

Consum

erinform

ationand

reportingsafety

defects

(542,1)


13-5. Reporting safety de-fects (U.S.A.)

S13AH

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform the Na-tional Highway Traffic Safety Ad-ministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Subaru of America, Inc.If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investiga-tion, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles,it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA can-not become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer,or Subaru of America, Inc.To contact NHTSA, youmay call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Avenue, SE, West Building,Washington, DC 20590. You can

also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

13-6. How to contact Trans-port Canada in order to reporta safety concern relating tothe vehicle (Canada)

S13CF

Reporting safety defects (U.S.A.)540

(543,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(544,1)


— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —

(545,1)


S14

Index

14

Index

(546,1)


AAbbreviation .............................................................. P3ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) ................................. P342

Warning light ............................................ P177, P342Access key ............................................................ P113

Warning indicator............................................... P184Access key fob ....................................................... P113Accessories .......................................................... P501Accessory power outlet .......................................... P290Air cleaner element ................................................ P478Air conditioner

Automatic climate control .................................... P271Manual climate control........................................ P273

Air filtration system ................................................ P278Airflow mode ......................................................... P273Alarm system ........................................................ P139All season tires...................................................... P483All-Wheel Drive warning light................................... P181Alloy wheel ........................................................... P491

Cleaning ........................................................... P460Antenna................................................................ P282

Roof antenna .................................................... P282Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ................................. P342Arming the system ................................................. P139Armrest .................................................................. P42Ashtray................................................................. P294Assist grip............................................................. P295AT OIL TEMP warning light ..................................... P175Audio

Antenna............................................................ P282Set................................................................... P282

Auto dimmer cancel function.................................... P168Auto on/off headlights ............................................. P236

Sensor.............................................................. P238Auto Start Stop system ........................................... P360

Indicator light ........................................... P192, P360No Activity Detected indicator light ............. P192, P364OFF indicator light.................................... P191, P363Warning light ........................................... P191, P363

Auto Vehicle Hold................................................... P356ON indicator light ............................................... P180Operation indicator light ...................................... P181

Auto Vehicle Hold function....................................... P356Auto-dimming mirror/compass.................................. P249Automatic climate control ........................................ P271Automatic headlight beam leveler ............................. P243

Warning light ..................................................... P191Automatic Locking Retractor/Emergency LockingRetractor (ALR/ELR).............................................. P52

Automatic transmissionFluid ................................................................. P516Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP) ........ P175

BBattery .................................................................. P498

Drainage prevention function ............................... P138Jump starting..................................................... P443Replacement (access key fob)................... P127, P508Replacement (remote engine start transmitter) ...... P328Replacement (remote keyless entry system) P134, P509Replacement (transmitter) ......................... P134, P509Vehicle battery ................................................... P498

Index544

(547,1)


Blind Spot Detection (BSD)..................................... P372Booster cushion....................................................... P71Booster seat............................................................ P71Bottle holder.......................................................... P289Brake

Assist ............................................................... P341Booster.................................................... P340, P482Disc ................................................................. P518Fluid........................................................ P481, P516Pad.................................................................. P518Parking............................................................. P354Pedal ............................................................... P482System ............................................................. P340

Brake system ........................................................ P340Warning light ..................................................... P178

Braking................................................................. P340Tips.................................................................. P340

Breaking-in of new brake pads ................................ P483BSD/RCTA............................................................ P371

Approach indicator light/warning buzzer................ P375OFF indicator light ........................... P193, P377, P378OFF switch ....................................................... P378Warning light ............................................ P193, P377Warning volume................................................. P376

BulbChart................................................................ P519Replacement ..................................................... P501

CCargo area

Cover ............................................................... P297

Light ....................................................... P285, P506Tie-down hooks ................................................. P299

Catalytic converter.................................................. P409Center console....................................................... P289Changing

Coolant ............................................................. P478Flat tire ............................................................. P438Oil and oil filter .................................................. P475

Charge warning light............................................... P175CHECK ENGINE warning light/Malfunction indicatorlight ................................................................... P173

CheckingCoolant level ..................................................... P477Engine oil level .................................................. P474Fluid level (brake fluid)........................................ P481Fluid level (washer fluid) ..................................... P492Oil level (engine oil)............................................ P474

Child restraint systems.............................................. P62Installation of a booster cushion............................ P71Installation of a booster seat................................. P71Installation with ALR/ELR seatbelt......................... P67Lower and tether anchorages ............................... P73Top tether anchorages ......................................... P77

Child safety .............................................................. P5Locks................................................................ P142

ChimeKey reminder ..................................................... P161Light ................................................................. P235Seatbelt .................................................... P52, P169

Cigarette lighter...................................................... P292

Index 545

14

Index

(548,1)


CleaningAlloy wheels...................................................... P460Aluminum wheels............................................... P460Interior.............................................................. P461Ventilation grille ................................................. P277

Climate control system ........................................... P267Automatic ......................................................... P271Gesture control.................................................. P403Manual ............................................................. P273

Clock......................................... P208, P212, P217, P233Combination meter display (color LCD) .................... P194Compass .............................................................. P249Console

Center .............................................................. P289Overhead.......................................................... P288

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)................. P330Fluid........................................................ P480, P516Oil temperature warning light (AT OIL TEMP)........ P175

Control switch light................................................. P235Convenience hook ................................................. P296Coolant........................................................ P477, P516

Temperature high warning light............................ P174Temperature low indicator light ............................ P174

Cooling system...................................................... P476Corrosion protection............................................... P460Cruise control ........................................................ P367

CANCEL button................................................. P368Indicator light................................... P190, P367, P371Main button....................................................... P367RES/SET switch ....................................... P367, P369Set indicator light ............................. P191, P367, P371

Cup holderFront passenger’s .............................................. P289Rear passenger’s ............................................... P289

DDaytime running light system ................................... P242Defogger ............................................................... P259Defrosting.............................................................. P276Deicer ................................................................... P259Depress brake indicator light.................................... P181Differential gear oil

Front ...................................................... P481, P515Rear ....................................................... P481, P515

Dimensions............................................................ P512Disarming the alarm system .................................... P140Disc brake pad wear warning indicators .................... P341Dome light ................................................... P284, P506Door

Locks................................................................ P135Open warning light ............................................. P181Step light........................................................... P506Unlock selection function..................................... P201

Double trip meter.................................................... P165Drive belts ............................................................. P480Driver Monitoring System ........................................ P391

Gesture control .................................................. P403OFF indicator light.............................................. P193Operation indicator light ...................................... P193Temporary stop indicator light .............................. P194Warning light ..................................................... P193

DriverFocus ........................................................... P391

Index546

(549,1)


DrivingAll-Wheel Drive model ........................................ P410Drinking ................................................................ P6Drugs ................................................................... P6Foreign countries ............................................... P410Pets ..................................................................... P8Snowy and icy roads.......................................... P416Tips......................................................... P336, P410Tired or sleepy ...................................................... P7Winter .............................................................. P415

EECO gauge........................................................... P166Electrical system.................................................... P516Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) system...... P343

Warning............................................................ P179Electronic parking brake ......................................... P354

Automatic release function by accelerator pedal .... P355Light................................................................. P179Switch .............................................................. P354Warning............................................................ P359

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) .......................... P52Engine.................................................................. P512

Compartment overview....................................... P473Coolant.................................................... P477, P516Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................... P6, P408Hood ................................................................ P471Hood open warning light ..................................... P181Hood release knob............................................. P471Low oil level warning light ................................... P175Oil........................................................... P474, P513

Overheating....................................................... P446Starting & stopping................................... P316, P319

Event data recorder ................................................... P9Exterior care .......................................................... P458

FFlat tires ................................................................ P438Floor mat............................................................... P294Fluid level

Brake................................................................ P481Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ............. P480

Fog light ................................................................ P243Bulb.................................................................. P503Indicator light ..................................................... P191Switch............................................................... P243

FrontDifferential gear oil ................................... P481, P515Fog light.................................................. P243, P503Fog light indicator light.............................. P191, P243Fog light switch.................................................. P243Passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFFindicators ........................................................ P172

Passenger’s seatbelt warning light ....................... P169Seatbelt pretensioners ......................................... P59Side marker light................................................ P503View Monitor ..................................................... P301

Front seatForward and backward adjustment................. P35, P36Head restraint adjustment .................................... P46Heater ............................................................... P49Manual seat ....................................................... P35

Index 547

14

Index

(550,1)


Memory function .................................................. P37Power seat.......................................................... P36Reclining ..................................................... P35, P36Seat height adjustment......................................... P36

Front turn signal light ............................................. P502Fuel ............................................................ P310, P513

Consumption indicator ............. P198, P202, P211, P217Economy hints................................................... P408Filler lid and cap ................................................. P311Gauge .............................................................. P166Requirements........................................... P310, P513

Fuses ................................................................... P499

GGAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) .......................... P420Gesture control...................................................... P403Glove box ............................................................. P288GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)...................... P420

HHazard warning flasher.................................. P164, P436Head restraint

Front seat ........................................................... P46Rear seat............................................................ P47

Headlight ..................................................... P236, P502Beam leveler ..................................................... P243Bulb replacement............................................... P502Bulb wattage ..................................................... P519Control switch ................................................... P235Flasher ............................................................. P238Indicator light..................................................... P191

Warning light ..................................................... P502Welcome lighting function.................................... P237

Heated Steering Wheel system ................................ P261High Beam Assist

Function............................................................ P239Indicator light ..................................................... P190

High beam indicator light ......................................... P190High/low beam change (dimmer) .............................. P238Hill descent control ....................................... P347, P351

Indicator light ..................................................... P193Hill start assist ....................................................... P365HomeLink®............................................................. P249Hook

Cargo tie-down .................................................. P299Convenient tie-down........................................... P299Shopping bag .................................................... P296Towing and tie-down........................................... P447

Horn ..................................................................... P262Hose and connections............................................. P477

IIcy road surface warning light .................................. P194Ignition switch ........................................................ P160

Light ................................................................. P161Illumination brightness control .................................. P168Immobilizer ............................................................ P129

Indicator light (security indicator light) ......... P129, P188Indicator light

Auto Start Stop .................................................. P192Auto Start Stop No Activity Detected .................... P192Auto Start Stop OFF........................................... P191

Index548

(551,1)


Auto Vehicle Hold ON ........................................ P180Auto Vehicle Hold operation ................................ P181BSD/RCTA OFF .............................. P193, P377, P378Coolant temperature low..................................... P174Cruise control .................................. P190, P367, P371Cruise control set............................. P191, P367, P371Depress brake................................................... P181Driver Monitoring System OFF ............................ P193Driver Monitoring System operation ..................... P193Driver Monitoring System temporary stop ............. P194Electronic parking brake ..................................... P179Front fog light .................................................... P191Front passenger’s frontal airbag ON and OFF....... P172Headlight .......................................................... P191High beam ........................................................ P190High Beam Assist ..................................... P190, P239Hill descent control ............................................ P193Intelligent (I) mode ............................................. P189Malfunction ....................................................... P173RAB OFF.......................................................... P193Security ................................................... P129, P188Select lever/Gear position ................................... P189SI-DRIVE.......................................................... P189Sport (S) mode.................................................. P189Sport Sharp (S#) mode ...................................... P189Steering Responsive Headlight OFF .................... P191Turn signal........................................................ P190Vehicle Dynamics Control OFF............................ P183Vehicle Dynamics Control operation..................... P182X-MODE........................................................... P192

Inside mirror .......................................................... P249Interior lights .......................................................... P284

JJack and jack handle .............................................. P436Jack-up point ......................................................... P438Jump starting ......................................................... P443

KKey....................................................................... P113

Number plate..................................................... P113Positions ........................................................... P160Reminder chime................................................. P161Replacement ..................................................... P129

Keyless access with push-button start system ........... P113Disabling keyless access functions....................... P124Locking and unlocking doors ............................... P118Warning chimes and warning light.............. P127, P184When access key fob does not operateproperly .............................. P127, P164, P321, P451

Keyless entry system .............................................. P131

LLane Change Assist (LCA) ...................................... P372Lap belt pretensioner ................................................ P60Leather seat materials............................................. P462LED headlight warning light ........................... P191, P502LED headlights....................................................... P502Light

Backup ............................................................. P505Cargo area.............................................. P285, P506

Index 549

14

Index

(552,1)


Control switch ................................................... P235Daytime running ....................................... P242, P503Dome ...................................................... P284, P506Door step.......................................................... P506Front fog.................................................. P243, P503Front position ........................................... P236, P243Front side marker .............................................. P503Front turn signal ....................................... P244, P502Ignition switch ................................................... P161Map ................................................................. P284Rear gate ......................................................... P285Rear turn signal ........................................ P244, P503Side turn signal ................................................. P520Vanity mirror............................................. P287, P506

Loading your vehicle .............................................. P419Low fuel warning light............................................. P181Low tire pressure warning light ....................... P176, P352Lower and top tether anchorage (LATCH)................... P73

MMaintenance

Precautions....................................................... P467Schedule .......................................................... P467Seatbelt .............................................................. P58Tips.................................................................. P469Tools ................................................................ P436

Malfunction indicator light (check engine warninglight).................................................................. P173

ManualClimate control .................................................. P273Mode (continuously variable transmission) ............ P333

Rear gate.......................................................... P145Seat .................................................................. P35

Manual mode......................................................... P333Map light ............................................................... P284Maximum load limits ............................................... P426Meters and gauges................................................. P164Mirror defogger ...................................................... P259Mirrors .................................................................. P249Moonroof..................................................... P154, P454

Switch............................................................... P154Multi-function display (black and white) ..................... P202Multi-function display (color LCD) ............................. P208

NNew vehicle break-in driving .................................... P408

OOdometer .............................................................. P165Oil filter ................................................................. P475Oil level

Engine .............................................................. P474Front differential gear ......................................... P481Rear differential gear .......................................... P481Warning light ..................................................... P175

Oil pressure warning light ........................................ P175On-pavement and off-road driving ............................ P412On-road and off-road driving .................................... P412One-touch lane changer .......................................... P245Outside

Mirror defogger .................................................. P259Mirrors .............................................................. P257

Index550

(553,1)


Temperature indicator................................ P207, P211Overhead console.................................................. P288Overheating engine................................................ P446

PParking................................................................. P354

Brake ............................................................... P354Tips.................................................................. P359

Parking your vehicle............................................... P354Passenger seatbelt reminder................................... P169Periodic inspections ............................................... P410Petrol fuel ............................................................. P310PIN code Access ................................................... P121Power

Outlets ............................................................. P290Outside mirrors......................................... P257, P259Rear gate ......................................................... P146Rear gate button................................................ P148Seat ................................................................... P36Steering............................................................ P339Steering warning light......................................... P182Window switches ............................................... P143Windows........................................................... P142

Precautions against vehicle modification............ P61, P108Preparing to drive .................................................. P316Push-button

Ignition switch ................................................... P162Starting and stopping engine............................... P319

RRAB (Reverse Automatic Braking) ........................... P380

OFF indicator light.............................................. P193ON/OFF setting.................................................. P389Warning light ..................................................... P193

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ............................... P373Rear differential

Gear oil................................................... P481, P515Oil temperature warning light ............................... P176

Rear gate .................................................... P145, P453Light ................................................................. P285Manual ............................................................. P145Power ............................................................... P146

Rear Seat Reminder ................................................. P62Rear seatbelt warning light ...................................... P169Rear seats

Armrest.............................................................. P42Folding down...................................................... P42Head restraint adjustment .................................... P47Heater ............................................................... P49Reclining............................................................ P44

Rear view camera .................................................. P305Rear window

Defogger ........................................................... P259Wiper and washer switch .................................... P248Wiper blade rubber............................................. P497Wiper blades ..................................................... P496

RecommendedBrake fluid............................................... P482, P516Continuously variable transmission fluid................ P516Engine oil ................................................ P476, P513Front differential gear oil ........................... P481, P515Rear differential gear oil ............................ P481, P515

Index 551

14

Index

(554,1)


Spark plugs.............................................. P480, P516Refueling ............................................................... P311Remote control mirror switch................................... P257Remote engine start system.................................... P322Remote keyless entry system.................................. P131

Replacing battery...................................... P134, P508Replacement

Access key fob battery .............................. P134, P508Air cleaner element ............................................ P479Brake pad ......................................................... P483Cabin air filter.................................................... P278Key .................................................................. P129Remote engine start transmitter battery ................ P328Remote keyless entry transmitter battery ..... P134, P509Tire .................................................................. P490Wheel............................................................... P491Wiper blades..................................................... P493

Replacing bulbs..................................................... P501Backup light ...................................................... P505Cargo area light................................................. P506Daytime running light ......................................... P503Dome light ........................................................ P506Door step light................................................... P506Front fog light .................................................... P503Front side marker light........................................ P503Front turn signal light ......................................... P502Headlight .......................................................... P502Rear turn signal light .......................................... P503Vanity mirror light............................................... P506

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system ................ P380OFF indicator ........................................... P383, P389

OFF indicator light.............................................. P193ON/OFF setting.................................................. P389Warning indicator ..................................... P383, P390Warning light ..................................................... P193

Reverse Automatic Braking (RAB) system................. P380OFF indicator........................................... P383, P389OFF indicator light.............................................. P193ON/OFF setting.................................................. P389Warning indicator ..................................... P383, P390Warning light ..................................................... P193

Rocking the vehicle ................................................ P418Roof

Antenna ............................................................ P282Rails ................................................................. P421Tent .................................................................. P421

SSafety

Precautions when driving ....................................... P4Symbol ................................................................ P3Warnings.............................................................. P2

SeatFabric ............................................................... P461Front ................................................................. P32Heater ............................................................... P48Height adjustment ............................................... P36Manual .............................................................. P35Memory function ................................................. P37Power ................................................................ P36Rear .................................................................. P41

Seatbelt............................................................. P4, P50

Index552

(555,1)


Fastening............................................................ P52Maintenance ....................................................... P58Pretensioners ...................................................... P59Safety tips........................................................... P50Warning light and chime .............................. P52, P169

SecurityAlarm system .................................................... P139Immobilizer ....................................................... P129Indicator light............................................ P129, P188

Select lever........................................................... P331Position indicator ............................................... P189Shift lock function .............................................. P335

Shopping bag hook ................................................ P296Shoulder pretensioners............................................. P59SI-DRIVE.............................................................. P337

Indicator light..................................................... P189Intelligent (I) mode indicator ....................... P189, P337Sport (S) mode indicator............................ P189, P337Sport Sharp (S#) mode indicator ................ P189, P338Switches........................................................... P338

SI-DRIVE mode..................................................... P337Skid suppression function ....................................... P344Snow tires.................................................... P417, P484Snowy and icy roads.............................................. P416Sounding a panic alarm.......................................... P133Spark plugs.................................................. P480, P516Specifications ........................................................ P512Speedometer......................................................... P164SRS

Curtain airbag ..................................................... P99Frontal airbag...................................................... P87

Knee airbag........................................................ P87Side airbag......................................................... P99

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint Systemairbag) ........................................................... P4, P78System warning light .................................. P87, P172

Starting & stopping engine............................. P316, P319State emission testing (U.S. only)............................. P314Steering lock................................................ P318, P321Steering Responsive Headlight (SRH)....................... P242

OFF indicator light.................................... P191, P242OFF switch........................................................ P242Warning light ..................................................... P191

Steering wheelHeater .............................................................. P261Lock ....................................................... P318, P321Power ............................................................... P339Tilt/telescopic..................................................... P261

Storage compartment.............................................. P288Summer tires ......................................................... P483Sun visors ............................................................. P286

Extension plate .................................................. P286Sunshade .............................................................. P155Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)........................ P78Supplemental Restraint System airbag (SRS) ........ P4, P78Synthetic leather upholstery..................................... P462

TTachometer............................................................ P164Temperature warning light

AT OIL TEMP .................................................... P175Coolant ............................................................. P174

Index 553

14

Index

(556,1)


Rear differential oil ............................................. P176Temporary spare tire ..................................... P437, P517Tether (child restraint system) ............................ P73, P77Tie-down hooks/holes............................................. P447Tilt/telescopic steering wheel................................... P261Tire ............................................................. P483, P517

Chains.............................................................. P418Information........................................................ P526Inspection ......................................................... P485Pressures and wear ........................................... P486Replacement ..................................................... P490Rotation............................................................ P489Size and pressure.............................................. P517Types ............................................................... P483

Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS)................................... P176, P352, P442, P484Warning light ..................................................... P176

Tires and wheels ................................................... P483Tools .................................................................... P436Top tether anchorages....................................... P73, P77Towing.................................................................. P447

All wheels on the ground .................................... P450Flat-bed truck .................................................... P450Hooks............................................................... P447Tie-down hooks ................................................. P447Weight.............................................................. P426

Traction control function ......................................... P344Trailer

Connecting ....................................................... P424Hitch ....................................................... P423, P429Towing.............................................................. P426

Towing tips ........................................................ P431Trip meter.............................................................. P165Turn signal

Indicator lights ................................................... P190Lever ................................................................ P244

UUnder-floor storage compartment ............................. P300USB power supply.................................................. P292

VValet mode ............................................................ P141Vanity mirror .......................................................... P287

Light ....................................................... P287, P506Vehicle

Capacity weight ................................................. P419Identification ...................................................... P523Symbols............................................................... P4

Vehicle Dynamics Control........................................ P344OFF indicator light.............................................. P183OFF switch........................................................ P345Operation indicator light ...................................... P182Warning light ..................................................... P182

Ventilator ............................................................... P266

WWarning and indicator lights..................................... P168Warning chimes

Driver Monitoring System .................................... P398Keyless access with push-button start system ....... P184Seatbelt .................................................... P52, P169

Index554

(557,1)


Warning indicatorAccess key ....................................................... P184Keyless access with push-button start system....... P127RAB ........................................................ P383, P390

Warning lightABS ........................................................ P177, P342All-Wheel Drive.................................................. P181AT OIL TEMP.................................................... P175Auto Start Stop.................................................. P191Automatic headlight beam leveler ........................ P191Brake system .................................................... P178BSD/RCTA........................................................ P193Charge ............................................................. P175CHECK ENGINE ............................................... P173Coolant temperature high ................................... P174Door open......................................................... P181Driver Monitoring System.................................... P193Engine hood open ............................................. P181Engine low oil level ............................................ P175Icy road surface................................................. P194LED headlight ................................................... P191Low fuel............................................................ P181Low tire pressure ............................................... P176Oil pressure ...................................................... P175Power steering .................................................. P182RAB ................................................................. P193Rear differential oil temperature........................... P176Seatbelt ..................................................... P52, P169SRS airbag system ............................................ P172Steering Responsive Headlight............................ P191Vehicle Dynamics Control ................................... P182

Windshield washer fluid ...................................... P175Warranties ................................................................ P1Warranties and maintenance ................................... P426Washing ................................................................ P458Waxing and polishing.............................................. P459Wear indicators ...................................................... P488Welcome lighting function........................................ P237Wheel

Alloy ................................................................. P491Balance ............................................................ P487Nut tightening torque .......................................... P517Replacement ..................................................... P491

Windows ............................................................... P142Windshield

Washer fluid ...................................................... P492Washer fluid warning light ................................... P175Wiper and washer switches................................. P246Wiper blades ..................................................... P494Wiper deicer ...................................................... P259

WinterDriving .............................................................. P415Tires ....................................................... P417, P484

Wiper and washer .................................................. P245Wiper deicer .......................................................... P259

XX-MODE................................................................ P347

Indicator light ..................................................... P192Switch............................................................... P348

Index 555

14

Index

(2,1)

北米Model"A8310BE-A" EDITED: 2021/ 6/ 2

GAS STATION REFERENCES99AA

& FuelS99AA01

Use only unleaded gasolinewith an octane rating of 87AKI (90RON) or higher.

& Fuel octane ratingS99AA02

! RONS99AA0201

This octane rating is the Research Octane Number.! AKI

S99AA0202This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane andMotor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the AntiKnock Index (AKI).

& Limit of ethanol contentS99AA09

No more than 10%

& Fuel tank capacityS99AA03

16.6 US gal (63 liters, 13.9 Imp gal)

& Engine oilS99AA04

Use only the following oils.. API classification SN with the words “RESOURCE CON-SERVING”, SN PLUS with the words “RESOURCE CONSER-VING” or SP with the words “RESOURCE CONSERVING”. or ILSAC GF-5 or GF-6A, which can be identified with theILSAC certification mark (Starburst mark)

For the complete viscosity requirements, refer to “Engine oil”FP513.

& Engine oil capacityS99AA05

4.4 US qt (4.2 liters, 3.7 Imp qt)

The indicated oil quantity is only a guideline and is estimatedbased on a case when the engine oil is changed with an oil filter.After refilling the engine with oil, the oil level should be checkedusing the oil level gauge. For more details about maintenanceand service, refer to “Engine oil” FP474.

& Cold tire pressureS99AA06

Refer to “Tires” FP517.

Documents

Foreword - Subaru Technical Information System